2017 Hyundai SantaFe Sport OM

OWNER'S MANUAL
Operation
Maintenance
Specifications
All information in this Owner's Manual is current at the time of pub-

lication. However, HYUNDAI reserves the right to make changes at
any time so that our policy of continual product improvement may
be carried out.
This manual applies to all of this vehicle and includes descriptions

and explanations of optional as well as standard equipment. As a
result, you may find material in this manual that does not apply to
your specific vehicle.
CAUTION: MODIFICATIONS TO YOUR SAFETY AND VEHICLE DAMAGE
HYUNDAI WARNING
Your HYUNDAI should not be modified in any way. This manual includes information titled as WARN-
Such modifications may adversely affect the per- ING, CAUTION and NOTICE.
formance, safety or durability of your HYUNDAI These titles indicate the following:
and may, in addition, violate conditions of the lim-
ited warranties covering the vehicle. Certain mod-
ifications may also be in violation of regulations WARNING
established by the U.S. Department of This indicates that a condition may result in
Transportation and other federal or state agencies. harm, serious injury or death to you or other
persons if the warning is not heeded. Follow
the advice provided with the warning.
TWO-WAY RADIO OR CELLULAR CAUTION

TELEPHONE INSTALLATION This indicates that a condition may result in
damage to your vehicle or its equipment if
Your vehicle is equipped with electronic fuel injec- the caution is not heeded. Follow the advice
tion and other electronic components. It is possible provided with the caution.
for an improperly installed/adjusted two-way radio
or cellular telephone to adversely affect electronic
systems. For this reason, we recommend that you ✽ NOTICE
carefully follow the radio manufacturer's instruc- This indicates that interesting or helpful infor-
tions or consult your HYUNDAI dealer for precau- mation is being provided.
tionary measures or special instructions if you
choose to install one of these devices.
F2
HYUNDAI VEHICLE OWNER PRIVACY POLICY
Your HYUNDAI vehicle may be equipped with technologies and services that use information collected,
generated, recorded or stored by the vehicle. HYUNDAI has created a Vehicle Owner Privacy Policy to
explain how these technologies and services collect use and share this information.
You may read our Vehicle Owner Privacy Policy on the Hyundaiusa.com website at:
https://www.hyundaiusa.com/owner-privacy-policy.aspx
If you would like to receive a hard copy of our Vehicle Owner Privacy Policy, please contact our Customer
Connect Center at:
Hyundai Motor America/Phoenix

P.O. Box 83835
Phoenix, AZ 85071-3835
800-633-5151
consumeraffairs@hmausa.com
HYUNDAI's Customer Connect Center representatives are available Monday through Friday,
between the hours of 5:00 AM and 7:00 PM PST and Saturday and Sunday between 6:30 AM and 3:00 PM
PST (English).
For Customer Connect Center assistance in Spanish or Korean, representatives are available Monday
through Friday between 6:30 AM and 3:00 PM PST.
F3
FOREWORD
Thank you for choosing HYUNDAI. We are pleased to welcome you to the growing number of discerning people who
drive HYUNDAIs. The advanced engineering and high-quality construction of each HYUNDAI we build is something
of which we're very proud.
Your Owner's Manual will introduce you to the features and operation of your new HYUNDAI. It is suggested that you
read it carefully because the information it contains can contribute greatly to the satisfaction you receive from your new
car.
The manufacturer also recommends that all service and maintenance on your car be performed by an authorized
HYUNDAI dealer. HYUNDAI dealers are prepared to provide high-quality service, maintenance and any other assis-
tance that may be required.
HYUNDAI MOTOR AMERICA
Note : Because future owners will also need the information included in this manual, if you sell this HYUNDAI, please
leave the manual in the vehicle for their use. Thank you.
CAUTION
Severe engine and transaxle damage may result from the use of poor quality fuels and lubricants that do
not meet HYUNDAI specifications.You must always use high quality fuels and lubricants that meet the spec-
ifications listed on Page 8-6 and 8-7 in the Vehicle Specifications and consumer information section of the
Owner's Manual.
Copyright 2016 HYUNDAI Motor America. All rights reserved. No part of this publication may be reproduced, stored
in any retrieval system or transmitted in any form or by any means without the prior written permission of HYUNDAI
Motor America.
F4
Guide to HYUNDAI Genuine Parts In addition, any damage to or fail-
1. What are HYUNDAI Genuine Parts? ure of HYUNDAI Genuine Parts
caused by the installation or failure
HYUNDAI Genuine Parts are the of an imitation, counterfeit or used
same parts used by HYUNDAI salvage part is not covered by any
Motor Company to manufacture HYUNDAI Warranty.
vehicles. They are designed and
tested for the optimum safety, per-
formance, and reliability to our cus- 3. How can you tell if you are pur-
tomers. chasing HYUNDAI Genuine
Parts?
2. Why should you use genuine Look for the HYUNDAI Genuine
parts? Parts Logo on the package (see
below).
HYUNDAI Genuine Parts are engi-
neered and built to meet rigid man- HYUNDAI Genuine Parts for
ufacturing requirements. Damage export are packaged with labels
caused by using imitation, counter- written only in English.
feit or used salvage parts is not HYUNDAI Genuine Parts are only
covered under the HYUNDAI New sold through authorized HYUNDAI A100A03L
Vehicle Limited Warranty or any Dealerships.
other HYUNDAI warranty.
A100A01L A100A02L A100A04L
F5
Introduction
How to use this manual / Fuel requirements / Vehicle break-in process / Vehicle handling instructions / 1
Vehicle data collection and event data recorders
Your vehicle at a glance 2

Exterior overview / Interior overview / Instrument panel overview / Engine compartment
Safety features of your vehicle 3

Seats / Seat belts / Child restraint system / Air bag
Features of your vehicle

Keys / Door locks / Liftgate (Tailgate) / Windows / Hood / Fuel filler lid / Panoramic sunroof / Steering wheel / 4
Mirrors / Instrument cluster / Lighting / Wipers & Washers / Climate control system / Multimedia system / Etc.
table of contents Driving your vehicle
Before driving / Engine start/stop button / Transaxle / All Wheel Drive (AWD) / Brake system / 5
Cruise control system / Active ECO system / Winter driving / Vehicle load limit / Etc.
What to do in an emergency 6
Road warning / Emergency while driving / Emergency starting / Engine overheat / TPMS / Flat tire / Towing / Etc.
Maintenance
Engine compartment / Maintenance service / Engine oil / Engine coolant / Brake fluid / Washer fluid / 7
Parking brake / Air cleaner / Wiper blades / Battery / Tire and wheels / Fuses / Light bulbs / Etc.
Specifications, Consumer information and Reporting safety defects 8

Index I
Introduction
How to use this manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2 1

Fuel requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2
• Gasoline containing alcohol and methanol . . . . . . . . . 1-3
• Other fuels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-3
• Gasoline containing MMT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-4
• Do not use methanol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-4
• Fuel Additives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-4
• Operation in foreign countries. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-5
Vehicle break-in process . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-6
Vehicle handling instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-6
Vehicle data collection and event data recorders . 1-7
Introduction
HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL FUEL REQUIREMENTS

We want to help you get the greatest Symbols used in this manual Your new vehicle is designed to obtain
possible driving experience from your Warnings, Cautions and Notices maximum performance with UNLEAD-
vehicle. Your Owner’s Manual can ED FUEL, as well as minimize exhaust
assist you in many ways. We strongly emissions and spark plug fouling.
recommend that you read the entire WARNING
manual. In order to minimize the A WARNING indicates that a Your new vehicle is designed to use
chance of death or injury, you must condition may result in harm, only unleaded fuel having a pump
read the WARNING and CAUTION serious bodily injury or death if octane number ((R+M)/2) of 87
sections in the manual. Illustrations the warning is ignored. (Research Octane Number 91) or
complement the text in this manual to higher. (Do not use methanol blended
best explain how to use your vehicle. fuels.)
By reading your manual, you will
learn about features, important safety CAUTION
A CAUTION indicates that a con- Never add any fuel system cleaning
information, and driving tips under agents to the fuel tank other than what
various road conditions. The general dition may result in damage to
your vehicle if the caution is has been specified. (Consult an
layout of the manual is provided in
ignored. authorized HYUNDAI dealer for
the Table of Contents. A good place
to start is the index; it has an alpha- details.)
betical listing of all information in your
manual. Sections: This manual has ✽ NOTICE WARNING - Refueling
eight sections plus an index. Each A NOTICE indicates interesting or • Do not "top off" after the noz-
section begins with a brief list of con- helpful information is being provided. zle automatically shuts off
tents so you can tell at a glance if that when refueling. Attempts to
section has the information you want. Safety symbol in illustrations force more fuel into the tank
You will find various WARNINGS, can cause fuel overflow onto
CAUTIONS, and NOTICES in this you and the ground causing a
manual. These WARNINGS were pre- The symbol means to "Avoid" risk of fire.
pared to enhance your personal safe- or "Do not do something".
• Always check that the fuel cap
ty.You should carefully read and follow is installed securely to pre-
ALL procedures and recommenda- vent fuel spillage in the event
tions provided in these WARNINGS, of an accident.
CAUTIONS and NOTICES.
1 2
Introduction
Gasoline containing alcohol or ✽ NOTICE Other fuels

methanol To prevent damage to your vehicle’s Using fuels such as;
Gasohol, a mixture of gasoline and engine and fuel system: - Silicone (Si) contained fuel,
ethanol (also known as grain alco- • Never use gasohol which contains - Ferrocene (Fe) contained fuel, and
hol) are being marketed along with or methanol. - Other metallic additives contained
instead of leaded or unleaded gaso- • Never use gasohol containing fuels,
line. For example, "E15" is a gasohol more than 15% ethanol.
comprised of 15% ethanol and 85% may cause vehicle and engine dam-
• Never use leaded fuel or leaded age or cause plugging, misfiring,
gasoline. gasohol. poor acceleration, engine stalling,
Do not use gasohol containing more • Never use "E85" fuel. catalyst melting, abnormal corrosion,
than 15% ethanol, and do not use Your New Vehicle Limited life cycle reduction, etc.
gasoline or gasohol containing any Warranty does not cover damage to
methanol. Either of these fuels may Also, the Malfunction Indicator Lamp
the fuel system or any performance (MIL) may illuminate.
cause drivability problems and dam- problems caused by the use of
age to the fuel system, engine control "E85" fuel.
system and emission control system. ✽ NOTICE
Discontinue using gasohol of any Damage to the fuel system or per-
kind if drivability problems occur. formance problem caused by the use
"E85" fuel is an alternative fuel com- of these fuels may not be covered by
prised of 85 percent ethanol and 15 your New Vehicle Limited
percent gasoline, and is manufac- Warranty.
tured exclusively for use in Flexible
Fuel Vehicles. "E85" is not compati-
ble with your vehicle. Use of "E85"
may result in poor engine perform-
ance and damage to your vehicle's
engine and fuel system. HYUNDAI
recommends that customers do not
use fuel with an ethanol content
exceeding 15 percent.
1 3
Introduction
Gasoline containing MMT Do not use methanol Fuel Additives

Some gasoline contains harmful Fuels containing methanol (wood HYUNDAI recommends that you use
manganese-based fuel additives alcohol) should not be used in your good quality gasolines treated with
such as MMT vehicle. This type of fuel can reduce detergent additives such as TOP
(Methylcyclopentadienyl Manganese vehicle performance and damage TIER Detergent Gasoline, which
Tricarbonyl). components of the fuel system, help prevent deposit formation in the
HYUNDAI does not recommend the engine control system and emission engine. These gasolines will help the
use of gasoline containing MMT. control system. engine run cleaner and enhance per-
This type of fuel can reduce vehicle formance of the Emission Control
performance and affect your emis- ✽ NOTICE System. For more information on
sion control system. TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline,
Your New Vehicle Limited please go to the website (www.top-
The malfunction indicator lamp on Warranty may not cover damage to
the cluster may come on. tiergas.com)
the fuel system and any perform-
ance problems that are caused by For customers who do not use TOP
the use of fuels containing methanol. Tier Detergent Gasoline regularly,
and have problems starting their
vehicle or the engine does not run
smoothly, additives that you can buy
separately may be added to the
gasoline.
If TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline is
not available, one bottle of additive
added to the fuel tank at every
7,500mile or every engine oil change
is recommended. Additives are avail-
able from your authorized HYUNDAI
dealer along with information on how
to use them. Do not mix other addi-
tives.
1 4
Introduction
Operation in foreign countries

If you are going to drive your vehicle
in another state, be sure to:
• Observe all regulations regarding
registration and insurance.
• Determine that acceptable fuel is
available.
1 5
Introduction
VEHICLE BREAK-IN PROCESS VEHICLE HANDLING

No special break-in period is needed. INSTRUCTIONS
By following a few simple precautions CALIFORNIA PROPO- As with other vehicles of this type,
for the first 600 miles (1,000 km) you SITION 65 WARNING failure to operate this vehicle correct-
may add to the performance, econo- Items contained in motor vehi- ly may result in loss of control, an
my and life of your vehicle. cles or emitted from them are accident or vehicle rollover.
• Do not race the engine. known to the State of California Specific design characteristics (high-
• While driving, keep your engine to cause cancer and birth er ground clearance, track, etc.) give
speed (rpm, or revolutions per defects or reproductive harm. this vehicle a higher center of gravity
minute) between 2,000 rpm and These include: than other types of vehicles. It is not
4,000 rpm. • Gasoline and its vapors designed for cornering at the same
• Do not maintain a single vehicle • Engine exhaust speeds as a conventional 2-wheel
speed for long periods of time, • Used engine oil drive sedans or sports coupe. Avoid
either fast or slow. Varying the sharp turns or abrupt maneuvers.
• Interior passenger compart-
engine speed is needed to proper- Failure to operate this vehicle cor-
ment components and materi-
ly break-in the engine. rectly may result in loss of control, an
als
• Avoid hard stops, except in emer- accident or vehicle rollover. Be sure
• Component parts which are to read the “Reducing the risk of a
gencies, to allow the brakes to seat subject to heat and wear
properly. rollover” driving guidelines, in
In addition, battery posts, termi- section 5 of this manual.
nals and related accessories
contain lead, lead compounds
and other chemicals known to
the State of California to cause
cancer and reproductive harm.
1 6
Introduction
VEHICLE DATA COLLECTION AND EVENT DATA RECORDERS

This vehicle is equipped with an These data can help provide a bet- To read data recorded by an EDR,
event data recorder (EDR). The ter understanding of the circum- special equipment is required, and
main purpose of an EDR is to stances in which crashes and access to the vehicle or the EDR is
record, in certain crash or near injuries occur. NOTE: EDR data are needed. In addition to the vehicle
crash-like situations, such as an recorded by your vehicle only if a manufacturer, other parties, such
air bag deployment or hitting a non-trivial crash situation occurs; as law enforcement, that have the
road obstacle, data that will assist no data are recorded by the EDR special equipment, can read the
in understanding how a vehicle's under normal driving conditions information if they have access to
systems performed. The EDR is and no personal data (e.g., name, the vehicle or the EDR.
designed to record data related to gender, age, and crash location)
vehicle dynamics and safety sys- are recorded. However, other par-
tems for a short period of time, ties, such as law enforcement,
typically 30 seconds or less. The could combine the EDR data with
EDR in this vehicle is designed to the type of personally identifying
record such data as: data routinely acquired during a
• How various systems in your crash investigation.
vehicle were operating;
• Whether or not the driver and
passenger safety belts were
buckled/fastened;
• How far (if at all) the driver was
depressing the accelerator
and/or brake pedal; and,
• How fast the vehicle was travel-
ing.
1 7
Your vehicle at a glance
Exterior overview .I. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2

Exterior overview
Interior overview (I).
II. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-3
2-4
Interior overview (II)
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-4
2-5
Instrument panel overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-5 2-6 2
Engine compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-6 2-7
EXTERIOR OVERVIEW
■ Front view
1. Panoramic sunroof..................................4-50
2. Front windshield wiper blades ................7-39
3. Side view mirrors ....................................4-76
4. Door locks...............................................4-21
5. Headlight ................................................7-73
6. Front fog light........................................4-132
7. Hood .......................................................4-44
8. Tires and wheels ...........................7- 44 / 8-4
❈ The actual shape may differ from the illustration.

OAN017008N
2 2
■ Rear view
1. Antenna ................................................4-182
2. High mounted stop lamp ........................7-79
3. Defroster ...............................................4-145
4. Rear window wiper blade .......................7-40
5. Fuel filler door.........................................4-46
6. Rear combination lamp ..........................7-76
7. Rearview camera..................................4-124
8. Parking assist system...........................4-120
9. Towing hook hole ....................................6-26

ODM016002
2 3
INTERIOR OVERVIEW (I)
1. Inside door handle...............................4-23

2. Driver position memory system...........3-15
3. Side view mirrors control.....................4-76
4. Power window lock button ...................4-42
5. Central door lock switch ......................4-23
6. Power window switch...........................4-39
7. Fuel-filler door opener .........................4-46
8. Instrument panel illumination
control knob.........................................4-80
9. Drive mode button or
Active ECO button....................5-28, 5-100
10. DBC button........................................5-51
11. ESC OFF button................................5-46
12. BSD on/off button ..............................5-89
13. LDWS button .....................................5-96
14. Heated steering wheel button ...........4-58
15. AWD LOCK button ............................5-22
16. Steering wheel...................................4-56
17. Tilt and telescopic steering
control lever .......................................4-57
18. Inner panel fuse ................................7-64
19. Hood release lever ............................4-44
20. Seat .....................................................3-4

OAN017001N
2 4
INTERIOR OVERVIEW (II)
■ Type A
1. Power outlet.......................................4-173
2. Aux, USB and iPod® ..........................4-176
3. Transaxle shift lever .............................5-14
4. Seat warmer or
Air ventilation seat button ..............3-12, 3-13
5. Parking assist system button.............4-120
■ Type B
6. Multi-view camera system
on/off button ......................................4-125
7. Cup holder.........................................4-172
8. AUTO HOLD button.............................5-40
9. EPB switch ..........................................5-34

OAN017002N
2 5
INSTRUMENT PANEL OVERVIEW
1. Lighting control lever ........................4-127

2. Audio remote control buttons ...........4-182
3. Bluetooth hands-free
buttons..............................................4-219
4. Cruise control button ..........................5-67
5. LCD display control buttons ...............4-84
6. Horn ...................................................4-58
7. Driver’s front air bag...........................3-60
8. Wiper and washer control lever........4-137
9. Ignition switch/
Engine start/stop button................5-6, 5-9
10. Audio ..............................................4-182
11. Hazard warning flasher ..................4-126
12. Climate control system .......4-147, 4-157
13. Passenger's front air bag .................3-60
14. Glove box .......................................4-169

ODM016004
2 6
ENGINE COMPARTMENT
■ Gasoline 2.4L GDI
1. Engine coolant reservoir....................7-29

2. Engine oil filler cap ............................7-26
3. Brake fluid reservoir ..........................7-31
4. Air cleaner ........................................7-34
5. Fuse box............................................7-68
6. Negative battery terminal ..................7-41
7. Positive battery terminal ....................7-41
8. Radiator cap ......................................7-30
9. Engine oil dipstick..............................7-26
10. Windshield washer fluid reservoir....7-33
OAN077003N
2 7
■ Gasoline 2.0L TURBO GDI
1. Engine coolant reservoir....................7-29

2. Engine oil filler cap ............................7-26
3. Brake fluid reservoir ..........................7-31
4. Air cleaner ........................................7-34
5. Fuse box............................................7-68
6. Negative battery terminal ..................7-41
7. Positive battery terminal ....................7-41
8. Radiator cap ......................................7-30
9. Engine oil dipstick..............................7-26
10. Windshield washer fluid reservoir....7-33
OAN077004N
2 8
Safety features of your vehicle
Important safety precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2 Air bag - supplemental restraint system . . . . . . . 3-47
• Always Wear Your Seat Belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2 • How does the air bag system operate . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-48
• Restrain All Children . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2 • Air bag warning light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-50
• Air Bag Hazards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2 • SRS components and functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-51
• Driver Distraction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2 • Occupant classification system. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-54
• Control Your Speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3 • Main components of occupant classification system. 3-55
• Keep Your Vehicle in Safe Condition. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3 • Driver's and passenger's front air bag . . . . . . . . . . . 3-60
Seat. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4 • Side air bag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-65 3
• Front seat adjustment - Manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-7 • Curtain air bag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-66
• Front seat adjustment - Power. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-8 • SRS Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-73
• Driver position memory system (for power seat). . . 3-15 • Additional safety precautions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-74
• Rear seat adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-17 • Air bag warning label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-75
Seat belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-26
• Seat belt restraint system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-26
• Pre-tensioner seat belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-31
• Seat belt precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-34
• Care of seat belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-37
Child restraint system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-38
• Using a child restraint system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-40
• Securing a child restraint seat with
"Tether Anchor" system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-43
• Securing a child restraint seat with child seat
lower anchor system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-45
IMPORTANT SAFETY PRECAUTIONS

You will find many safety precautions Restrain All Children Driver Distraction
and recommendations throughout All children under age 13 should ride Driver distraction presents a serious
this section, and throughout this in your vehicle properly restrained in and potentially deadly danger, espe-
manual. The safety precautions in a rear seat, not the front seat. Infants cially for inexperienced drivers.
this section are among the most and small children should be Safety should be the first concern
important. restrained in an appropriate child when behind the wheel and drivers
restraint. Larger children should use need to be aware of the wide array of
Always Wear Your Seat Belt a booster seat with the lap/shoulder potential distractions, such as
belt until they can use the seat belt drowsiness, reaching for objects,
A seat belt is your best protection in
properly without a booster seat. eating, personal grooming, other
all types of accidents. Air bags are
passengers, and using cellular
designed to supplement seat belts,
phones.
not replace them. So even though Air Bag Hazards
your vehicle is equipped with air Drivers can become distracted when
While air bags can save lives, they they take their eyes and attention off
bags, ALWAYS make sure you and can also cause serious or fatal
your passengers wear your seat the road or their hands off the wheel
injuries to occupants who sit too to focus on activities other than driv-
belts, and wear them properly. close to them, or who are not prop- ing. To reduce your risk of distraction
erly restrained. Infants, young chil- or getting into an accident:
dren, and shorter adults are at the
greatest risk of being injured by an
inflating air bag. Follow all instruc-
tions and warnings in this manual.
3 2
• ALWAYS set up your mobile Control Your Speed Keep Your Vehicle in Safe
devices (i.e., MP3 players, phones, Excessive speed is a major factor in Condition
navigation units, etc.) when your crash injuries and deaths. Generally, Having a tire blowout or a mechani-
vehicle is parked or safely stopped. the higher the speed, the greater the cal failure can be extremely haz-
• ONLY use your mobile device risk, but serious injuries can also ardous. To reduce the possibility of
when allowed by laws and when occur at lower speeds. Never drive such problems, check your tire pres-
conditions permit safe use. NEVER faster than is safe for current condi- sures and condition frequently, and
text or email while driving. Most tions, regardless of the maximum perform all regularly scheduled
states have laws prohibiting drivers speed posted. maintenance.
from texting. Some states and
cities also prohibit drivers from
using handheld phones.
• NEVER let the use of a mobile
device distract you from driving.
You have a responsibility to your
passengers and others on the road
to always drive safely, with your
hands on the wheel as well as your
eyes and attention on the road.
3 3
SEATS
Front seat
(1) Forward and backward
(2) Seatback angle
(3) Seat cushion height*
(4) Lumbar support (Driver's seat)*
(5) Seat warmer* /
Manual seat
Air ventilation seat*
(6) Headrest
Rear seat
(7) Forward and backward*
Power seat (8) Seatback angle and folding
(9) Headrest
(10) Armrest
(11) Seat warmer*
* if equipped
OANNSA2001
* The actual feature in the vehicle may differ from the illustration.
3 4
WARNING - Loose WARNING - Driver WARNING - Driver’s seat

objects responsibility for passengers To avoid serious injury or death:
Loose objects in the driver’s Riding in a vehicle with the • Never attempt to adjust the
foot area could interfere with seatback reclined could lead to seat while the vehicle is mov-
the operation of the foot pedals, serious or fatal injury in an acci- ing. This could result in loss
possibly causing an accident. dent. If a seat is reclined during of control, and an accident
Do not place anything under the an accident, the occupant’s causing death, serious injury,
front seats. hips may slide under the lap or property damage.
portion of the seat belt, apply-
• Do not allow anything to inter-
ing great force to the unprotect-
fere with the normal position
ed abdomen. Serious or fatal
WARNING - Uprighting internal injuries could result.
of the seatback. Storing items
seat against a seatback or in any
The driver must advise the pas-
When you return the seatback other way interfering with
senger to keep the seatback in
to its upright position, hold the proper locking of a seatback
an upright position whenever
seatback and return it slowly could result in serious or fatal
the vehicle is in motion.
and be sure there are no other injury in a sudden stop or col-
occupants around the seat. If lision.
the seatback is returned with- • In order to avoid unnecessary
out being held and controlled, WARNING and perhaps severe air bag
the back of the seat could Occupants should never sit on injuries, always sit as far back
spring forward resulting in acci- seat cushions. The passenger's as possible from the steering
dental injury to a person struck hips may slide under the lap wheel while maintaining com-
by the seatback. portion of the seat belt during fortable control of the vehicle.
an accident or a sudden stop. We recommend that your
Serious or fatal internal injuries chest be at least 10 inches
could result because the seat (250 mm) away from the steer-
belt cannot operate normally. ing wheel.
3 5
WARNING - Rear (Continued) WARNING

seatbacks • Luggage and other cargo • Do not adjust the seat while
should be laid flat in the cargo wearing seat belts. Moving the
• The rear seatback must be
area or on the folded rear seat cushion forward may
securely latched. If not, pas-
seatback. If objects are large, cause strong pressure on the
sengers and objects could be
heavy, or must be piled, they abdomen.
thrown forward resulting in
must be secured. Under no
serious injury or death in the • Use extreme caution so that
circumstances should cargo
event of a sudden stop or col- hands or other objects are not
be piled higher than the seat-
lision. caught in the seat mechanisms
backs. Failure to follow these
• No passenger should ride in warnings could result in seri- while the seat is moving.
the cargo area or sit or lie on ous injury or death in the • Do not place a cigarette
folded seatbacks while the event of a sudden stop, colli- lighter on the floor or seat.
vehicle is moving. All passen- sion or rollover. When you operate the seat,
gers must be properly seated gas may exit out of the lighter
in seats and restrained prop- and cause a fire.
erly while riding.
WARNING • Use extreme caution when
• When resetting the seatback picking small objects trapped
to the upright position, make After adjusting the seat, always
check that it is securely locked under the seats or between
sure it is securely latched by the seat and the center con-
pushing it forward and rear- into place by attempting to
move the seat forward or sole. Your hands might be cut
wards. or injured by the sharp edges
reverse without using the lock
• To avoid the possibility of release lever. Sudden or unex- of the seats mechanism.
burns, do not remove the car- pected movement of the dri-
pet in the cargo area. Emission ver's seat could cause you to
control devices beneath this lose control of the vehicle
floor generate high tempera- resulting in an accident.
tures.
(Continued)
3 6
Front seat adjustment - Manual Seatback angle Seat cushion height

(if equipped) (for driver's seat, if equipped)
Forward and rearward
OANNSA2008
To recline the seatback: OANNSA2009
OANNSA2007
1. Lean forward slightly and lift up the To change the height of the seat
To move the seat forward or rearward: seatback recline lever. cushion, push the lever upwards or
1. Pull the seat slide adjustment 2. Carefully lean back on the seat downwards.
lever up and hold it. and adjust the seatback of the • To lower the seat cushion, push the
seat to the position you desire. lever down several times.
2. Slide the seat to the position you
desire. 3. Release the lever and make sure • To raise the seat cushion, pull the
the seatback is locked in place. lever up several times.
3. Release the lever and make sure (The lever MUST return to its orig-
the seat is locked in place. inal position for the seatback to
Adjust the seat before driving, and lock.)
make sure the seat is locked secure-
ly by trying to move forward and rear-
ward without using the lever. If the
seat moves, it is not locked properly.
3 7
Lumbar support (for driver’s seat) Front seat adjustment - Power

(if equipped) CAUTION
The front seat can be adjusted by • The power seat is driven by an
using the control knobs located on electric motor. Stop operating
the outside of the seat cushion. once the adjustment is com-
Before driving, adjust the seat to the pleted. Excessive operation
proper position so as to easily con- may damage the electrical
trol the steering wheel, pedals and equipment.
switches on the instrument panel. • When in operation, the power
seat consumes a large amount
of electrical power. To prevent
WARNING unnecessary battery drain,
The power seat is operable with don’t adjust the power seat
OANNSA2010
the ignition OFF. longer than necessary while
1. Press the front portion of the Therefore, children should never the engine is not running.
switch to increase support or the be left unattended in the vehicle. • Do not operate two or more
rear portion of the switch to power seat control knobs at the
decrease support. same time. Doing so may result
2. Release the switch once it reach- in power seat motor or electri-
es the desired position. cal component malfunction.
3 8
Forward and backward Seatback angle Seat cushion height (if equipped)
OANNSA2011 OANNSA2012 OANNSA2013

1. Push the control switch forward or 1. Push the control switch forward or 1. Pull the front portion of the control
backward to move the seat to the backward to move the seatback to switch up to raise or down to lower
desired position. the desired angle. the front part of the seat cushion.
2. Release the switch once the seat 2. Release the switch once the seat Pull the rear portion of the control
reaches the desired position. reaches the desired position. switch up to raise or down to lower
the rear part of the seat cushion.
2. Release the switch once the seat
reaches the desired position.
3 9
Lumbar support Headrest

(for driver’s seat, if equipped) WARNING - Headrest
adjustment
• For maximum effectiveness in
case of an accident, the head-
rest should be adjusted so the
middle of the headrest is at the
same height as the center of
gravity of an occupant's head.
Generally, the center of gravity
of most people's head is simi-
lar with the height of the top of
their eyes.
OLM039303N
OANNSA2014
Also adjust the headrest as
The driver's and front passenger's close to your head as possible.
The lumbar support can be adjusted seats are equipped with a headrest For this reason, the use of a
by pressing the switch. for the occupant's safety and comfort. cushion that holds the body
1. Press the front portion (1) of the The headrest not only provides com- away from the seatback is not
switch to increase support, or the fort for the driver and front passenger, recommended.
rear portion (2) of the switch, to but also helps to protect the head and • Do not operate the vehicle with
decrease support. neck in the event of a collision. the headrests removed. Severe
2. Release the switch once it reaches injury to an occupant may
the desired position. occur in the event of an acci-
3. Press the upper portion (3) of the dent. Headrests may provide
switch to move the support position protection against severe neck
injuries when properly adjust-
up, or press the lower portion (4) of
ed.
the switch, to move the support
position down. • Do not adjust the headrest
position of the driver's seat
4. Release the switch once it reaches while the vehicle is in motion.
the desired position.
3 10
OANNSA2015 OANNSA2016 OYFH034205

Forward and backward adjustment Adjusting the height up and down
The headrest may be adjusted for- To raise the headrest : CAUTION
ward to 4 different positions by 1. Pull it up to the desired position (1). If you recline the seatback
pulling the headrest forward to the towards the front with the head-
desired detent. To adjust the headrest and seat cushion raised,
rest to the backwards position, press To lower the headrest : the headrest may come in con-
and hold the release button (1), and 1. Push and hold the release button tact with the sunvisor or other
adjust position of the headrest. (2) on the headrest support parts of the vehicle.
Adjust the headrest so that it proper- 2. Lower the headrest to the desired
ly supports the head and neck. position (3).
3 11
Seat warmer (if equipped) With the ignition switch in the ON

position, push either of the switches
■ Type A
to warm the driver's seat or the front
passenger's seat.
During mild weather or under condi-
tions where the operation of the seat
warmer is not needed, keep the
switches in the OFF position.
• Each time you push the button, the
temperature setting of the seat is
changed as follows :
OANNSA2017
Removal/Reinstallation OFF→HIGH( )→MIDDLE( )→LOW( )
OANNSA2018
→
To remove the headrest : ■ Type B
1. Raise it as far as it can go then

• The seat warmer defaults to the
press the release button using a
OFF position whenever the ignition
simple tool (1) while pulling the
switch is turned on.
headrest up (2).
• With the seat warmer switch in the
ON position, the heating system in
To reinstall the headrest : the seat turns off or on automati-
1. Put the headrest poles (3) into the cally depending on the seat tem-
holes. perature.
2. Adjust it to the appropriate height.
OANNSA2019
The seat warmer is provided to warm

the front seats during cold weather.
3 12
Air ventilation seat (if equipped)

WARNING WARNING
The seat warmers can cause a NEVER place anything on the
SERIOUS BURN, even at low seat that insulates against heat
temperatures and especially if when the seat warmer is in
used for long periods of time. operation, such as a blanket or
Passengers must be able to feel seat cushion. This may cause
if the seat is becoming too the seat warmer to overheat,
warm so they can turn it off, if causing a burn or damage to
needed. the seat.
People who cannot detect tem-
perature change or pain to the
skin should use extreme cau- CAUTION OANNSA2020
tion, especially the following To prevent damage to the seat The Air ventilation seat is provided to
types of passengers: warmers and seats: cool the front seats during hot weath-
• Infants, children, elderly or • Never use a solvent such as er by blowing air through small vent
disabled persons, or hospital paint thinner, benzene, alco- holes on the surface of the seats.
outpatients. hol or gasoline to clean the While the engine is running, press
• People with sensitive skin or seats. the cooling portion (blue color) of the
who burn easily. • Do not place heavy or sharp switch to cool the driver's seat or the
• Fatigued individuals. objects on seats equipped front passenger's seat.
• Intoxicated individuals. with seat warmers. When the operation of the seat cool-
• Do not change the seat cover. er is not needed, keep the switches
• People taking medication that in the OFF position.
can cause drowsiness or It may damage the seat
sleepiness. warmer.
3 13
• Each time you press the button, the (Continued) Seatback pocket (if equipped)
airflow will change as follows:
• Never use a solvent such as
OFF→HIGH( )→MIDDLE( )→LOW( ) paint thinner, benzene, alco-
hol or gasoline to clean the
→
seats.
• The Air ventilation seat defaults to • Avoid spilling liquids on the
the OFF position whenever the igni- surface of the front seats and
tion switch is turned on. seatbacks; this may cause the
air vent holes to become
blocked and not work proper-
CAUTION ly.
To prevent damage to the air • Do not place materials such
ventilation seat: as plastic bags or newspapers OCM030052
• Use the air ventilation seat under the seats. They may
ONLY when the climate con- block the air intake causing WARNING - Seatback
trol system is on. Using the the air vents to not work prop- pockets
air ventilation seat for pro- erly.
longed periods of time with Do not put heavy or sharp
• Do not change the seat cov- objects in the seatback pocket.
the climate control system off ers. It may damage the air ven-
could cause the air ventilation An occupant could contact such
tilation seat. objects in a crash. Heavy objects
seat to malfunction.
• If the air vents do not operate, in the front passenger seatback
(Continued) restart the vehicle. If there is could also interfere with the
no change, we recommend occupant sensing system.
that you have your vehicle
inspected by an authorized
HYUNDAI dealer.
3 14
Driver position memory system

WARNING (for power seat, if equipped) WARNING
For proper operation of the Never attempt to operate the
occupant classification system: driver position memory system
• Do not place any items cumu- while the vehicle is moving.
latively weighing over 2.2 lbs This could result in loss of con-
(1 kg) in the seatback pocket trol, and an accident causing
or on the seat. death, serious injury, or proper-
ty damage.
ODM042335
A driver position memory system is

provided to store and recall the driv-
er seat and side view mirror position
with a simple button operation. By
saving the desired position into the
system memory, different drivers can
reposition the driver seat based upon
their driving preference. If the battery
is disconnected, the position memory
will be erased and the driving position
should be restored in the system.
3 15
Storing positions into memory Recalling positions from memory

using the buttons on the door The position in memory will be WARNING
Storing driver’s seat positions recalled when: Use caution when recalling the
1. Shift the shift lever into P while the 1. The shift lever is in P with one of adjustment memory while sit-
engine start/stop button is ON or the condition below: ting in the vehicle. Push the
ignition switch ON. seat position control switch to
- The ignition switch in the ON the desired position immediate-
2. Adjust the driver’s seat and side position or engine running. ly if the seat moves too far in
view mirror to a position that is - The ignition switch in the any direction.
comfortable for the driver. LOCK/OFF or ACC position
3. Press SET button on the control while the driver's door is opened.
panel. The system will beep once. 2. Press the desired memory button
4. Press one of the memory buttons (1 or 2). The system will beep
(1 or 2) within 5 seconds after once, then the driver's seat will
pressing the SET button. The sys- automatically adjust to the stored
tem will beep twice when memory position.
has been successfully stored. Adjusting the control switch for the
driver’s seat while the system is
recalling the stored position will
cause the movement to stop and
move in the direction that the control
switch is moved.
3 16
Easy access function Rear seat adjustment Seatback angle

(if equipped) Forward and backward
The system will move the driver's (if equipped)
seat automatically as follows:
• Without smart key system
- It will move the driver’s seat rear-
ward when the ignition key is
removed.
- It will move the driver’s seat for-
ward when the ignition key is
inserted.
• With smart key system
OANNSA2022
- It will move the driver’s seat rear-
ward when the engine start/stop To recline the seatback:
OANNSA2021
button is changed to the OFF 1. Pull up the seatback recline lever.
position. To move the seat forward or backward: 2. Hold the lever and adjust the seat-
- It will move the driver’s seat for- 1. Pull the seat slide adjustment back of the seat to the position you
ward when the engine start/stop lever up and hold it. desire.
button is changed to the ACC or 3. Release the lever and make sure
START position. 2. Slide the seat to the position you
desire. the seatback is locked in place.
(The lever MUST return to its orig-
You can activate or deactivate this 3. Release the lever and make sure inal position for the seatback to
feature. Refer to "User settings" in the seat is locked in place. lock.)
section 4. Adjust the seat before driving, and
make sure the seat is locked securely
by trying to move forward and back-
ward without using the lever. If the
seat moves, it is not locked properly.
3 17
Headrest (for rear seat)

WARNING - Headrest (Continued)
adjustment • Do not operate the vehicle
with the headrests removed.
Severe injury to an occupant
may occur in the event of an
accident. Headrests may pro-
vide protection against severe
neck injuries when properly
• For maximum effectiveness in adjusted.
case of an accident, the head-
• Do not adjust the headrest
rest should be adjusted so the
height while the vehicle is in
middle of the headrest is at the
motion.
OLM039304N
same height as the center of
gravity of an occupant's head.
The rear seat(s) is equipped with
headrests in all the seating positions Generally, the center of gravi-
for the occupant's safety and com- ty of most people's head is
fort. similar with the height of the
top of their eyes.
The headrest not only provides com-
fort for passengers, but also helps to Also adjust the headrest as
protect the head and neck in the close to your head as possi-
event of a collision. ble. For this reason, the use of
a cushion that holds the body
away from the seatback is not
recommended.
(Continued)
3 18
WARNING
• Make sure the headrest locks
in position after adjusting it to
properly protect the occu-
pants.
• After installing the headrest,
make sure that it is installed
in the right direction.
A headrest installed reversely
could increase whiplash
OANNSA2024 OANNSA2025
injury during rear impact.
Adjusting the height up and down Removal/Reinstallation
To raise the headrest : To remove the headrest :
1. Pull it up to the desired position (1). 1. Raise it as far as it can go then
press the release button (1) while
pulling the headrest up (2).
To lower the headrest :
1. Push and hold the release button
(2) on the headrest support To reinstall the headrest :
2. Lower the headrest to the desired 1. Put the headrest poles (3) into the
position (3). holes while pressing the release
button (1).
2. Adjust it to the appropriate height.
3 19
Armrest Seat warmer (if equipped) • Each time you push the button, the
temperature setting of the seat is
changed as follows :
OFF → HIGH( ) → LOW( )
→
• The seat warmer defaults to the
OFF position whenever the ignition
switch is turned on.
• With the seat warmer switch in the
ON position, the heating system in
the seat turns off or on automati-
OANNSA2028 ODM032026
cally depending on the seat tem-
To use the armrest, pull it forward The seat warmer is provided to warm perature.
from the seatback. the rear seats during cold weather.
With the ignition switch in the ON
position, push either of the switches
to warm rear seats.
During mild weather or under condi-
tions where the operation of the seat
warmer is not needed, keep the
switches in the OFF position.
3 20
WARNING WARNING CAUTION

The seat warmers can cause a NEVER place anything on the To prevent damage to the seat
SERIOUS BURN, even at low seat that insulates against heat warmers and seats:
temperatures and especially if when the seat warmer is in • Never use a solvent such as
used for long periods of time. operation, such as a blanket or paint thinner, benzene, alco-
Passengers must be able to feel seat cushion. This may cause hol or gasoline to clean the
if the seat is becoming too the seat warmer to overheat, seats.
warm so they can turn it off, if causing a burn or damage to • Do not place heavy or sharp
needed. the seat. objects on seats equipped
People who cannot detect tem- with seat warmers.
perature change or pain to the • Do not change the seat cover.
skin should use extreme cau- It may damage the seat
tion, especially the following warmer.
types of passengers:
• Infants, children, elderly or
disabled persons, or hospital
outpatients.
• People with sensitive skin or
who burn easily.
• Fatigued individuals.
• Intoxicated individuals.
• People taking medication that
can cause drowsiness or
sleepiness.
3 21
Folding the rear seat

The rear seatbacks can be folded to
facilitate carrying long items or to
increase the luggage capacity of the
vehicle.
WARNING
• Never allow passengers to sit
on top of the folded down
seatback while the vehicle is
moving. This is not a proper ODM032027 OANNSA2026
seating position and no seat To fold down the rear seatback 4. Pull on the seatback folding lever,
belts are available for use. 1. Insert the rear seat belt buckle in then fold the seat toward the front
This could result in serious the pocket between the rear seat- of the vehicle. When you return the
injury or death in case of an back and cushion, and insert the seatback to its upright position,
accident or sudden stop. rear seat belt webbing in the guide always be sure it has locked into
• Objects carried on the folded to prevent the seat belt from being position by pushing on the top of
down seatback should not damaged. the seatback.
extend higher than the top of 2. Set the front seatback to the
the front seatbacks. Doing upright position and if necessary,
this could allow cargo to slide slide the front seat forward.
forward and cause injury or
damage during sudden stops. 3. Lower the rear headrests to the
lowest position.
3 22
Rear seat folding from the liftgate

(tailgate) area (if equipped) WARNING - Rear seat
folding
Do not attempt to fold the rear
seats if the seat is occupied
with other passengers, pets, or
luggage. Injury or damage to
persons, pets, or luggage may
occur.
OANNSA2027
5. To use the rear seat, lift and pull
the seatback backward by pulling OANNSA2029
on the folding lever.
Pull the seatback firmly until it Pull the rear seat back folding lever out.
clicks into place. The rear seat back will be folded.
Make sure the seatback is locked If you pull the left side lever (1) out, left
in place. side seat back and center seat back
6. Return the rear seat belt to the will be folded.
proper position. If you pull the right side lever (2) out,
right side seat back will be folded.
3 23
To fold down the rear center seat-

back WARNING - Rear center WARNING
seat folding When you return the rear seat-
The rear center seat back does back to its upright position after
not lock in place when folded being folded down:
down. When carrying long Be careful not to damage the
objects with the rear center seat seat belt webbing or buckle. Do
back folded, make sure to not allow the seat belt webbing
secure the object to prevent it or buckle to get caught or
from being thrown about the pinched in the rear seat.
vehicle in a collision. Failure to Ensure that the seatback is com-
do so may cause injury to vehi- pletely locked into its upright
cle occupants. position by pushing on the top
OANNSA2030
of the seatback. Otherwise, in an
accident or sudden stop, the
1. Lower the rear headrests to the ✽ NOTICE seat could fold down and allow
lowest position. If you are not able to pull out the seat cargo to enter the passenger
2. Push the center seatback folding belt from the retractor, firmly pull the compartment, which could
lever up, then fold the seat toward belt out and release it. Then you will result in serious injury or death.
the front of the vehicle. be able to pull the belt out smoothly.
When you return the seatback to its

upright position, always be sure it
has locked into position by pushing
on the top of the seatback.
3 24
WARNING - Uprighting WARNING - Cargo WARNING - Cargo loading

seat Cargo should always be secured Make sure the engine is off, the
When you return the seatback to prevent it from being thrown automatic transaxle is in P
to its upright position, hold the about the vehicle in a collision (Park) and the parking brake is
seatback and return it slowly. If and causing injury to the vehicle securely applied whenever
the seatback is returned with- occupants. Special care of loading or unloading cargo.
out holding it, the back of the objects should be taken when Failure to take these steps may
seat could spring forward placing them in the rear seats, allow the vehicle to move if the
resulting in injury caused by since those may hit the front seat shift lever is inadvertently
being struck by the seatback. occupants in a frontal collision. moved to another position.
CAUTION - Rear seat

belts
When returning the rear seatbacks
to the upright position, remember
to return the rear shoulder belts to
their proper position.
3 25
SEAT BELTS
Seat belt restraint system (Continued) WARNING
• Never wear the shoulder belt Seat belts are designed to bear
WARNING under your arm or behind
• For maximum restraint sys- upon the bony structure of the
your back. An improperly body, and should be worn low
tem protection, the seat belts positioned shoulder belt can
must always be used whenev- across the front of the pelvis,
cause serious injuries in a chest and shoulders, as appli-
er the car is moving. crash. The shoulder belt cable; wearing the lap section
• Seat belts are most effective should be positioned midway of the belt across the abdominal
when seatbacks are in the over your shoulder across area must be avoided.
upright position. your collarbone.
Seat belts should be adjusted
• Children age 12 and younger • Always wear both the shoul- as firmly as possible, consis-
must always be properly der portion and lap portion of tent with comfort, to provide the
restrained in the rear seat. the lap/shoulder belt. protection for which they have
Never allow children to ride in • Avoid wearing twisted seat been designed.
the front passenger seat. If a belts. A twisted belt can't do
child over 12 must be seated A slack belt will greatly reduce
its job as well. In a collision, it the protection afforded to the
in the front seat, he/she must could even cut into you. Be
be properly belted and the occupant.
sure the belt webbing is
seat should be moved as far straight and not twisted. (Continued)
back as possible. • Be careful not to damage the
(Continued) belt webbing or hardware. If
the belt webbing or hardware
is damaged, replace it.
3 26
Seat belt warning (for driver’s seat)

(Continued) WARNING
Care should be taken to avoid • No modifications or additions
contamination of the webbing should be made by the user
with polishes, oils and chemi- which will either prevent the
cals and particularly battery seat belt adjusting devices
acid. Cleaning may safely be from operating to remove
carried out using mild soap and slack, or prevent the seat belt
water. The belt should be assembly from being adjusted
replaced if webbing becomes to remove slack.
frayed, contaminated or dam- • When you fasten the seat belt,
aged. It is essential to replace be careful not to latch the seat
the entire assembly after it has belt in the buckles of another.
been worn in a severe impact It's very dangerous and you 1GQA2083
even if damage to the assembly may not be protected by the The driver's seat belt warning light
is not obvious. Belts should not seat belt properly. and chime will activate to the follow-
be worn with straps twisted.
• Do not unfasten the seat belt ing table when the ignition switch is
Each seat belt assembly must
and do not fasten and unfas- in "ON" position.
only be used by one occupant;
ten the seat belt repeatedly
it is dangerous to put a belt while driving. This could result
around a child being carried on in loss of control, and an acci-
the occupant's lap. dent causing death, serious
injury, or property damage.
• Make sure there is nothing in
the buckle. The seat belt may
not be fastened securely.
3 27
Conditions Warning Pattern Seat belt - Driver's 3-point system The seat belt automatically adjusts to
Vehicle Chime- with emergency locking retractor the proper length only after the lap
Seat Belt Light-Blink belt portion is adjusted manually so
Speed Sound
Unbuckled 6 seconds
that it fits snugly around your hips. If
you lean forward in a slow, easy
Buckled 6 seconds None
motion, the belt will extend and let
Below 3 mph you move around. If there is a sud-
6 seconds None
(5 km/h) den stop or impact, however, the belt
Buckled → 3 mph~ will lock into position. It will also lock
6 seconds
Unbuckled 6 mph if you try to lean forward too quickly.
Above 6 mph 6 sec. on / 24 sec. off If you are not able to pull out the seat
(10 km/h) (11 times) belt from the retractor, firmly pull the
Above 6 mph belt out and release it. Then you will
(10 km/h) 6 seconds *1 be able to pull the belt out smoothly.
B180A01NF-1
Unbuckled ↓ ↓
Below 3 mph Stop * 2
To fasten your seat belt:
(5 km/h)
To fasten your seat belt, pull it out of
*1 Warning pattern repeats 11 times the retractor and insert the metal tab
with an interval of 24 seconds. If (1) into the buckle (2). There will be
the driver's seat belt is buckled, the an audible "click" when the tab locks
light will stop within 6 seconds and into the buckle.
chime will stop immediately.
*2 The light will stop within 6 seconds
and chime will stop immediately.
3 28
Height adjustment (Front) To raise the height adjuster, pull it up

(1). To lower it, push it down (3) while
Front seat
pressing the height adjuster button (2).
Release the button to lock the
anchor into position. Try sliding the
height adjuster to make sure that it
has locked into position.
WARNING
• Verify the shoulder belt
anchor is locked into position B200A02NF
at the appropriate height.
OCM030026 Never position the shoulder
You can adjust the height of the shoul- belt across your neck or face. WARNING
der belt anchor to one of 4 positions Improperly positioned seat You should place the lap belt
for maximum comfort and safety. belts can cause serious portion as low as possible and
The shoulder portion should be injuries in an accident. snugly across your hips, not on
adjusted so that it lies across your • Failure to replace seat belts your waist. If the lap belt is locat-
chest and midway over your shoulder after an accident could leave ed too high on your waist, it may
nearest the door and not your neck. you with damaged seat belts increase the chance of injury in
The height of the adjusting seat belt that will not provide protec- the event of a collision. Both
should not be too near your neck. tion in the event of another arms should not be under or
collision leading to personal over the belt. Rather, one should
To adjust the height of the seat belt injury or death. Replace your be over and the other under, as
anchor, lower or raise the height seat belts after being in an shown in the illustration.
adjuster into an appropriate position. accident as soon as possible. Never wear the seat belt under
the arm nearest the door.
3 29
Seat belts - Front passenger and When the seat belt is fully extended
rear seat 3-point system with from the retractor to allow the instal-
combination locking retractor lation of a child restraint system, the
To fasten your seat belt: seat belt operation changes to allow
the belt to retract, but not to extend
Combination retractor type seat belts (Automatic Locking Retractor Type).
are installed in the rear seat positions Refer to “Using a child restraint sys-
to help accommodate the installation tem” in this section.
of child restraint systems. Although a
combination retractor is also installed To convert from the automatic lock-
in the front passenger seat position, it ing feature to the emergency locking
is strongly recommended that children operation mode, allow the unbuckled
always be seated in the rear seat. seat belt to fully retract. ODM032051
NEVER place any infant restraint sys- When using the rear center seat belt,
tem in the front seat of the vehicle. the buckle with the “CENTER” mark
This type of seat belt combines the must be used.
features of both an emergency lock-
ing retractor seat belt and an auto-
matic locking retractor seat belt. To
fasten your seat belt, pull it out of the
retractor and insert the metal tab into
the buckle. There will be an audible
"click" when the tab locks into the
buckle. When not securing a child
restraint, the seat belt operates in the
same way as the driver's seat belt
(Emergency Locking Retractor Type).
It automatically adjusts to the proper
length only after the lap belt portion of
the seat belt is adjusted manually so
that it fits snugly around your hips.
3 30
Pre-tensioner seat belt (1) Retractor Pretensioner

The purpose of the retractor pre-
tensioner is to make sure that the
shoulder belts fit in tightly against
the occupant's upper body in cer-
tain frontal collisions.
(2) EFD (Emergency Fastening Device)
The purpose of the EFD is to
make sure that the pelvis belts fit
in tightly against the occupant's
lower body in certain frontal colli-
B210A01NF-1/H
sions. (for passenger’s side)
To release the seat belt: OANNSA2023
The seat belt is released by pressing If the system senses excessive ten-
the release button (1) in the locking Your vehicle is equipped with driver's
and front passenger's pre-tensioner sion on the driver or passenger's seat
buckle. When it is released, the belt belt when the pre-tensioner system
should automatically draw back into seat belts (retractor pretensioner and
EFD (Emergency Fastening Device)). activates, the load limiter inside the
the retractor. retractor pre-tensioner will release
The pre-tensioner seat belts can be
If this does not happen, check the activated, where the frontal collision some of the pressure on the affected
belt to be sure it is not twisted, then is severe enough, together with the seat belt.
try again. air bags.
When the vehicle stops suddenly, or
if the occupant tries to lean forward
too quickly, the seat belt retractor will
lock into position. In certain frontal
collisions, the pre-tensioner will acti-
vate and pull the seat belt into tighter
contact against the occupant's body.
3 31
WARNING WARNING
• Do not put anything near the To obtain maximum benefit
buckle. Placing objects near from a pre-tensioner seat belt:
the buckle may increase the 1. The seat belt must be worn
risk of personal injury in the correctly and adjusted to the
event of a collision. proper position. Please read
• For your safety, be sure that and follow all of the important
the belt webbing is not loose information and precautions
or twisted and always sit about your vehicle’s occupant
properly on your seat. safety features – including
ODMESA2024 seat belts and air bags – that
The seat belt pre-tensioner system are provided in this manual.
consists mainly of the following com- 2. Be sure you and your passen-
ponents. Their locations are shown in gers always wear seat belts
the illustration: properly.
1. SRS air bag warning light
2. Retractor pre-tensioner assembly
3. SRS control module
4. Emergency fastening device (EFD)
3 32
✽ NOTICE
CAUTION WARNING
• Both the driver's and front pas-
senger's seat belt pre-tensioner If the pre-tensioner seat belt • Pre-tensioners are designed
system may be activated not only system are not working proper- to operate only one time. After
in certain frontal collision but also ly, this warning light will illumi- activation, pre-tensioner seat
in certain side collision or rollover, nate even if there is no malfunc- belts must be replaced. All
if the vehicle is equipped with a tion of the SRS air bag. If the seat belts, of any type, should
side or curtain air bag. SRS air bag warning light does always be replaced after they
• When the pre-tensioner seat belts not illuminate when the ignition have been worn during a colli-
are activated, a loud noise may be switch is turned ON, or if it sion.
heard and fine dust, which may remains illuminated after illumi- • The pre-tensioner seat belt
appear to be smoke, may be visible nating for approximately 6 sec- assembly mechanisms
in the passenger compartment. onds, or if it illuminates while become hot during activation.
These are normal operating condi- the vehicle is being driven, have Do not touch the pre-tension-
tions and are not hazardous. an authorized HYUNDAI dealer er seat belt assemblies for
• Although it is harmless, the fine inspect the pre-tensioner seat several minutes after they
dust may cause skin irritation and belt and SRS air bag system as have been activated.
should not be breathed for pro- soon as possible.
longed periods. Wash all exposed • Do not attempt to inspect or
skin areas thoroughly after an replace the pre-tensioner seat
accident in which the pre-tension- belts yourself. This must be
er seat belts were activated. done by an authorized
• Because the sensor that activates HYUNDAI dealer.
the SRS air bag is connected with • Do not strike the pre-tension-
the pre-tensioner seat belt, the er seat belt assemblies.
SRS air bag warning light on • Do not attempt to service or
the instrument panel will illumi- repair the pre-tensioner seat
nate for approximately 6 seconds belt system in any manner.
after the ignition switch has been
turned to the ON position, and (Continued)
then it should turn off.
3 33
Seat belt precautions Infant or small child

(Continued)
All 50 states have child restraint laws.
• Improper handling of the pre-
WARNING You should be aware of the specific
tensioner seat belt assem-
requirements in your state. Child
blies, and failure to heed the All occupants of the vehicle and/or infant seats must be properly
warnings not to strike, modify, must wear their seat belts at all placed and installed in the rear seat.
inspect, replace, service or times. Seat belts and child For more information about the use of
repair the pre-tensioner seat restraints reduce the risk of these restraints, refer to “Child
belt assemblies may lead to serious or fatal injuries for all restraint system” in this section.
improper operation or inad- occupants in the event of a col-
vertent activation and serious lision or sudden stop. Without a
injury. seat belt, occupants could be WARNING
• Always wear the seat belts shifted too close to a deploying Every person in your vehicle
when driving or riding in a air bag, strike the interior struc- needs to be properly restrained
motor vehicle. ture or be thrown from the vehi- at all times, including infants
• If the vehicle or pre-tensioner cle. Properly worn seat belts and children. Never hold a child
seat belt must be discarded, greatly reduce these hazards. in your arms or lap when riding
contact an authorized Even with advanced air bags, in a vehicle. The violent forces
HYUNDAI dealer. unbelted occupants can be created during a crash will tear
severely injured by a deploying the child from your arms and
air bag. throw the child against the inte-
Always follow the precautions rior. Always use a child restraint
about seat belts, air bags and appropriate for your child's
occupant seating contained in height and weight.
this manual.
3 34
✽ NOTICE Larger children If the shoulder belt portion slightly

Small children are best protected Children who are too large for child touches the child’s neck or face, try
from injury in an accident when restraint systems should always placing the child closer to the center
properly restrained in the rear seat occupy the rear seat and use the of the vehicle. If the shoulder belt still
by a child restraint system that available lap/shoulder belts. The lap touches their face or neck they need
meets the requirements of the portion should be fastened snug on to be returned to a child restraint sys-
Federal Motor Vehicle Safety the hips and as low as possible. tem.
Standards. Before buying any child Check belt fit periodically. A child's
restraint system, make sure that it squirming could put the belt out of WARNING - Shoulder
has a label certifying that it meets position. Children are afforded the belts on small children
Federal Motor Vehicle Safety most safety in the event of an acci-
dent when they are restrained by a • Never allow a shoulder belt to
Standard 213. The restraint must be be in contact with a child’s
appropriate for your child's height proper restraint system in the rear
seat. If a larger child (over age 12) neck or face while the vehicle
and weight. Check the label on the is in motion.
child restraint for this information. must be seated in the front seat, the
Refer to “Child restraint system” in child should be securely restrained • If seat belts are not properly
this section. by the available lap/shoulder belt and worn and adjusted on chil-
the seat should be placed in the rear- dren, there is a risk of death or
most position. Children age 12 and serious injury.
under should be restrained securely
in the rear seat. NEVER place a child
age 12 and under in the front seat.
NEVER place a rear facing child seat
in the front seat of a vehicle.
3 35
Pregnant women Injured person

The use of a seat belt is recom- A seat belt should be used when an WARNING
mended for pregnant women to injured person is being transported. Riding with a reclined seatback
lessen the chance of injury in an When this is necessary, you should increases your chance of seri-
accident. When a seat belt is used, consult a physician for recommenda- ous or fatal injuries in the event
the lap belt portion should be placed tions. of a collision or sudden stop.
as low and snugly as possible on the The protection of your restraint
hips, not across the abdomen. For system (seat belts and air bags)
specific recommendations, consult a One person per belt is greatly reduced by reclining
physician. Two people (including children) your seat. Seat belts must be
should never attempt to use a single snug against your hips and
seat belt. This could increase the chest to work properly. The
WARNING - Pregnant severity of injuries in case of an acci- more the seatback is reclined,
women dent. the greater the chance that an
Pregnant women must never occupant's hips will slide under
place the lap portion of the the lap belt causing serious
Do not lie down
safety belt over the area of the internal injuries or the occu-
abdomen where the unborn To reduce the chance of injuries in pant's neck could strike the
child is located or above the the event of an accident and to shoulder belt. Drivers and pas-
abdomen where the belt could achieve maximum effectiveness of sengers should always sit well
seriously injure or even cause the restraint system, all passengers back in their seats, properly
the death of the unborn child should be sitting up and the front and belted, and with the seatbacks
during an impact. rear seats should be in an upright upright.
position when the car is moving. A
seat belt cannot provide proper pro-
tection if the person is lying down in
the rear seat or if the seats are in a
reclined position.
3 36
Care of seat belts Periodic inspection When to replace seat belts

Seat belt systems should never be All seat belts should be inspected Entire in-use seat belt assembly or
disassembled or modified. In addi- periodically for wear or damage of assemblies should be replaced if the
tion, care should be taken to assure any kind. Any damaged parts should vehicle has been involved in an acci-
that seat belts and belt hardware are be replaced as soon as possible. dent. This should be done even if no
not damaged by seat hinges, doors damage is visible. Additional ques-
or other abuse. tions concerning seat belt operation
Keep belts clean and dry should be directed to an authorized
Seat belts should be kept clean and HYUNDAI dealer.
WARNING - Pinched dry. If belts become dirty, they can be
seat belt cleaned by using a mild soap solu-
tion and warm water. Bleach, dye,
Make sure that the webbing strong detergents or abrasives
and/or buckle does not get should not be used because they
caught or pinched in the rear may damage and weaken the fabric.
seat when returning the rear
seatback to its upright position.
A caught or pinched webbing/
buckle may become damaged
and could fail during a collision
or sudden stop resulting in seri-
ous injury or death.
3 37
CHILD RESTRAINT SYSTEM

Children riding in the car should sit in Children could be injured or killed in
(Continued)
the rear seat and must always be a crash if their restraints are not
properly restrained to minimize the properly secured. For small children • A seat belt or child restraint
risk of injury in an accident, sudden and babies, a child seat or infant seat system can become very hot
stop or sudden maneuver. According must be used. Before buying a par- if it is left in a closed vehicle
to accident statistics, children are ticular child restraint system, make on a sunny day, even if the
safer when properly restrained in the sure it fits your car seat and seat outside temperature does not
rear seats than in the front seat. belts, and fits your child. Follow all feel hot. Be sure to check the
Larger children not in a child restraint the instructions provided by the man- seat cover and buckles before
should use one of the seat belts pro- ufacturer when installing the child placing a child there.
vided. restraint system. • When the child restraint sys-
You should be aware of the specific tem is not in use, store it in
requirements in your state. Child the luggage area or fasten it
and/or infant safety seats must be
WARNING with a seat belt so that it will
properly placed and installed in the • A child restraint system must not be thrown forward in the
rear seat. You must use a commer- be placed in the rear seat. case of a sudden stop or an
cially available child restraint system Never install a child or infant accident.
that meets the requirements of the seat on the front passenger's • Children may be seriously
Federal Motor Vehicle Safety seat. Should an accident injured or killed by an inflating
Standards (FMVSS). occur and cause the passen- air bag. All children, even
ger-side air bag to deploy, it those too large for child
Child restraint systems are designed could severely injure or kill an
to be secured in vehicle seats by lap restraints, must ride in the
infant or child seated in an rear seat.
belts or the lap belt portion of a infant or child seat. Thus only
lap/shoulder belt, or by a LATCH sys- use a child restraint in the
tem (if equipped). rear seat of your vehicle.
(Continued)
3 38
WARNING (Continued) (Continued)

To reduce the chance of serious • Never put a seat belt over • Never allow a child to stand-
or fatal injuries: yourself and a child. During a up or kneel on the seat or floor
crash, the belt could press of a moving vehicle. During a
• Children of all ages are safer deep into the child causing collision or sudden stop, the
when restrained in the rear serious internal injuries. child can be violently thrown
seat. A child riding in the front against the vehicle’s interior,
passenger seat can be force- • Never leave children unat-
tended in a vehicle – not even resulting in serious injury.
fully struck by an inflating air
for a short time. The car can • Never use an infant carrier or
bag resulting in serious or a child safety seat that
fatal injuries. heat up very quickly, resulting
in serious injuries to children "hooks" over a seatback, it
• Always follow the child inside. Even very young chil- may not provide adequate
restraint system manufactur- dren may inadvertently cause security in an accident.
er’s instructions for installation the vehicle to move, entangle • Seat belts can become very
and use of the child restraint. themselves in the windows, or hot, especially when the car is
• Always make sure the child lock themselves or others parked in direct sunlight.
seat is secured properly in the inside the vehicle. Always check seat belt buck-
car and your child is securely • Never allow two children, or les before fastening them
restrained in the child seat. any two persons, to use the over a child.
• Never hold a child in your same seat belt. • After an accident, have an
arms or lap when riding in a • Children often squirm and authorized HYUNDAI dealer
vehicle. The violent forces cre- reposition themselves improp- check the child restraint sys-
ated during a crash will tear erly. Never let a child ride with tem, seat belt, tether anchor
the child from your arms and the shoulder belt under their and lower anchor.
throw the child against the arm or behind their back. • If there is not enough space to
car’s interior. Always properly position and place the child restraint sys-
(Continued) secure children in the rear seat. tem because of the driver's
(Continued) seat, install the child restraint
system in the rear right seat.
3 39
Using a child restraint system For safety reasons, we recommend

Rearward-facing child restraint system
that the child restraint system be WARNING - Child seat
used in the rear seats. installation
• A child can be seriously
WARNING injured or killed in a collision
if the child restraint is not
Never place a rear-facing child properly anchored to the vehi-
restraint in the front passenger cle and the child is not prop-
seat, because of the danger that erly restrained in the child
an inflating passenger-side air restraint.
bag could impact the rear-fac-
ing child restraint and kill the Before installing the child
CRS09
child. restraint system, read the
Forward-facing child restraint system instructions supplied by the
child restraint system manu-
Since all passenger seat belts move facturer.
freely under normal conditions and
only lock under extreme or emer- • If the seat belt does not oper-
gency conditions (emergency locking ate as described in this sec-
mode), you must manually change tion, have the system checked
these seat belts to the automatic immediately by your author-
locking mode to secure a child ized HYUNDAI dealer.
restraint. • Failure to observe this manu-
OANNSA2032 al's instructions regarding
child restraint systems and
For small children and babies, the use the instructions provided with
of a child seat or infant seat is required. the child restraint system
This child seat or infant seat should be could increase the chance
of appropriate size for the child and and/or severity of injury in an
should be installed in accordance with accident.
the manufacturer's instructions. (Continued)
3 40
Placing a passenger seat belt

(Continued)
into the automatic locking mode
• If the vehicle headrest pre-
vents proper installation of a
child seat, the headrest of the
respective seating position
shall be readjusted or entirely
removed.
OMD030053A
To install a child restraint system on
E2MS103005
the outboard or center rear seats, do
the following:
The automatic locking mode will help 1. Place the child restraint system in
prevent the normal movement of the the seat and route the lap/shoulder
child in the vehicle from causing the belt around or through the restraint,
seat belt to loosen and compromise following the restraint manufactur-
the child restraint system. To secure er’s instructions. Be sure the seat
a child restraint system, use the fol- belt webbing is not twisted.
lowing procedure. 2. Fasten the lap/shoulder belt latch
into the buckle. Listen for the dis-
tinct “click” sound.
Position the release button so that it
is easy to access in case of an emer-
gency.
3 41
OMD030054A OMD030055A OMD030056A

3. Pull the shoulder portion of the 4. Slowly allow the shoulder portion 5. Remove as much slack from the
seat belt all the way out. When the of the seat belt to retract and listen belt as possible by pushing down
shoulder portion of the seat belt is for an audible “clicking” or “ratchet- on the child restraint system while
fully extended, it will shift the ing” sound. This indicates that the feeding the shoulder belt back into
retractor to the “Automatic locking” retractor is in the “automatic lock- the retractor.
(child restraint) mode. ing” mode. If no distinct sound is 6. Push and pull on the child restraint
heard, repeat steps 3 and 4. system to confirm that the seat
belt is holding it firmly in place. If it
is not, release the seat belt and
repeat steps 2 through 6.
7. Double check that the retractor is
in the “Automatic locking” mode by
attempting to pull more of the seat
belt out of the retractor. If you can-
not, the retractor is in the
“Automatic locking” mode.
3 42
To remove the child restraint, press When the seat belt is allowed to Securing a child restraint seat
the release button on the buckle and retract to its fully stowed position, with "Tether Anchor" system
then pull the lap/shoulder belt out of the retractor will automatically
the restraint and allow the seat belt to switch from the "Automatic lock-
retract fully. ing" mode to the emergency lock
mode for normal adult usage.
WARNING - Automatic
locking mode
The lap/shoulder belt automati-
cally returns to the "emergency
lock mode" whenever the belt is
allowed to retract fully.
Therefore, the preceding seven
steps must be followed each OANNSA2031
time a child restraint is
installed. Child restraint hooks are located on
If the retractor is not in the the rear of the seat back.
Automatic Locking mode, the
child restraint can move when This symbol indicates the
your vehicle turns or stops sud- position of the tether
denly. A child can be seriously anchor.
injured or killed if the child
restraint is not properly
anchored to the car, including
setting the retractor to the
Automatic Locking mode.
3 43
WARNING WARNING
• When using the vehicle's A child can be seriously injured
"Tether Anchor" system to or killed in a collision if the
install a child restraint system child restraint is not properly
in the rear seat, all unused anchored to the car and the
vehicle rear seat belt metal child is not properly restrained
latch plates or tabs must be in the child restraint. Always fol-
latched securely in their seat low the child seat manufactur-
belt buckles and the seat belt er’s instructions for installation
webbing must be retracted and use.
OANNSA2033 behind the child restraint to
1. Route the child restraint seat strap prevent the child from reaching
over the seatback. and taking hold of unretracted WARNING - Tether strap
seat belts. Unlatched metal
For vehicles with adjustable head- latch plates or tabs may allow Never mount more than one
rests, route the tether strap under the child to reach the unretract- child restraint to a single tether
the headrest and between the ed seat belts which may result anchor or to a single lower
headrest posts, otherwise route in strangulation and a serious anchorage point. The increased
the tether strap over the top of the injury or death to the child in load caused by multiple seats
seatback. the child restraint. may cause the tethers or
2. Connect the tether strap hook to anchorage points to break,
• Do not place anything around causing serious injury or death.
the appropriate child restraint the lower anchors. Also make
hook holder and tighten to secure sure that the seat belt is not
the child restraint seat. caught in the lower anchors.
3 44
Securing a child restraint seat with Lower Anchor

WARNING - Child restraint child seat lower anchor system Position Indicator
check
Check that the child restraint
system is secure by pushing
and pulling it in different direc-
tions. Incorrectly fitted child
restraints may swing, twist, tip
or separate causing death or
serious injury.
Lower Anchor
ODM032038
WARNING - Child restraint Child restraint symbols are located
anchorage OLM039035
on the left and right rear seat backs
• Child restraint anchorages are to indicate the position of the lower
designed to withstand only Some child seat manufacturers anchors for child restraints.
those loads imposed by cor- make child restraint seats that are
rectly fitted child restraints. labeled as LATCH or LATCH-com- WARNING - Unused rear
Under no circumstances are patible child restraint seats. LATCH seatbelts
they to be used for adult seat stands for "Lower Anchors and
belts or harnesses or for Tethers for Children". These seats Always fasten the seatbelts
attaching other items or include two rigid or webbing mount- behind the child restraint seat
equipment to the vehicle. ed attachments that connect to two when they are not used to
LATCH anchors at specific seating secure the child seat. Failure to
• The tether strap may not work do so may result in child stran-
properly if attached some- positions in your vehicle. This type of
child restraint seat eliminates the gulation.
where other than the correct
tether anchor. need to use seat belts to attach the
child seat in the rear seats.
3 45
Also, test the child restraint seat

WARNING before you place the child in it. Tilt WARNING - LATCH lower
Do not place anything around the seat from side to side. Also try to anchors
the lower anchors. Also make tug the seat forward. Check to see if LATCH lower anchors are only
sure that the seat belt is not the anchors hold the seat in place. to be used with the left and right
caught in the lower anchors. rear outboard seating positions.
CAUTION Never attempt to attach a LATCH
equipped seat in the center
LATCH anchors have been provided Do not allow the rear seat belt seating position. You may dam-
in your vehicle. The LATCH anchors webbing to get scratched or age the anchors or the anchors
are located in the left and right out- pinched by the child-seat latch may fail and break in a collision.
board rear seating positions. Their and LATCH anchor during the
locations are shown in the illustration. installation.
There is no LATCH anchor provided ✽ NOTICE
for the center rear seating position.
The recommended weight for the
The LATCH anchors are located WARNING LATCH system is under 65 lb
between the seatback and the seat If the child restraint is not (30 kg).
cushion of the rear seat left and right anchored properly, the risk of a How to calculate the child restraint
outboard seating positions. child being seriously injured or weight :
Follow the child seat manufacturer’s killed in a collision greatly Child restraint weight =
instructions to properly install child increases. 65 lb (30 kg) - Child weight
restraint seats with LATCH or
LATCH-compatible attachments.
Once you have installed the LATCH
child restraint, assure that the seat is
properly attached to the LATCH and
tether anchors.
3 46
AIR BAG - ADVANCED SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM

(1) Driver’s front air bag
(2) Passenger’s front air bag
(3) Side air bag
(4) Curtain air bag
(5) Driver’s knee air bag
WARNING
Even in vehicles with air bags,
you and your passengers must
always wear the seat belts pro-
vided in order to minimize the
risk and severity of injury in the
event of a collision or rollover.
❈ The actual air bags in the vehicle may differ from the illustration.
OANNSA2035
3 47
How does the air bag system • The front air bags will completely This speed of inflation reduces the
operate inflate and deflate in an instant. risk of serious or life-threatening
It is virtually impossible for you to injuries and is thus a necessary
• Air bags are activated (able to part of air bag design.
inflate if necessary) only when the see the air bags inflate during an
ignition switch is turned to the ON accident. However, air bag inflation can also
or START position. It is much more likely that you will cause injuries which normally can
simply see the deflated air bags include facial abrasions, bruises
• The appropriate air bags inflate and broken bones because the
instantly in the event of serious hanging out of their storage com-
partments after the collision. inflation speed also causes the air
frontal or side collision in order to bags to expand with a great deal of
help protect the occupants from • In addition to inflating in serious force.
serious physical injury. side collisions, side and/or curtain
air bags will inflate if the sensing • There are even circumstances
• There is no single speed at which under which contact with the air
the air bags will inflate. system detects a rollover.
bag can cause fatal injuries, espe-
Generally, air bags are designed to • When a rollover is detected, side cially if the occupant is positioned
inflate by the severity of a collision and/or curtain airbags will remain excessively close to the air bag.
and its direction. These two factors inflated longer to help provide pro-
determine whether the sensors tection from ejection, especially
send out an electronic deployment/ when used in conjunction with the
inflation signal. seat belts.
• Air bag deployment depends on a • In order to help provide protection,
number of factors including vehicle the air bags must inflate rapidly.
speed, angles of impact and the The speed of air bag inflation is a
density and stiffness of the vehi- consequence of the extremely
cles or objects which your vehicle short time in which to inflate the air
hits in the collision. Though, factors bag between the occupant and the
are not limited to those mentioned vehicle structures before the occu-
above. pant impacts those structures.
3 48
Noise and smoke

WARNING When the air bags inflate, they make WARNING - Hot
• To avoid severe personal a loud noise and they leave smoke components
injury or death caused by and powder in the air inside of the Do not touch the air bag storage
deploying air bags in a colli- vehicle. This is normal and is a result area's internal components
sion, the driver should sit as of the ignition of the air bag inflator. immediately after airbag infla-
far back from the steering After the air bag inflates, you may tion. The air bag related parts in
wheel air bag as possible (at feel substantial discomfort in breath- the steering wheel, instrument
least 10 inches (250 mm) ing due to the contact of your chest panel and the roof rails above
away). The front passengers with both the seat belt and the air the front and rear doors are
should always move their bag, as well as from breathing the very hot. Hot components can
seats as far back as possible smoke and powder. Open your result in burn injuries.
and sit back in their seat. doors and/or windows as soon as
• Air bags inflate instantly in possible after impact in order to
the event of collision, and reduce discomfort and prevent
passengers may be injured by prolonged exposure to the smoke
the air bag expansion force if and powder.
they are not in proper posi- Though the smoke and powder are
tion. non-toxic, they may cause irritation
• Air bag inflation may cause to the skin (eyes, nose and throat,
injuries which normally etc). If this is the case, wash and
include facial or bodily abra- rinse with cold water immediately
sions, injuries from broken and consult a doctor if the symptom
glasses or burns by the air persists.
bag inflation gasses.
3 49
Do not install a child restraint on Air bag warning light

the front passenger’s seat WARNING - Air bag
deployment
When children are seated in the
rear outboard seats of a vehicle
equipped with side and/or cur-
tain air bags, install the child
restraint system as far away
from the door side as possible.
Inflation of the side and/or cur-
tain air bags could cause seri-
ous injury or death to an infant
or child.
W7-147
1JBH3051
The purpose of the air bag warning
Never place a rear-facing child light in your instrument panel is to
restraint in the front passenger’s alert you of a potential problem with
seat. If the air bag deploys, it would your airbag system, which includes
impact the rear-facing child restraint, side and/or curtain airbags used for
causing serious or fatal injury. rollover protection.
In addition, do not place front-facing When the ignition switch is turned
child restraints in the front passen- ON, the indicator light should illumi-
ger’s seat either. If the front passen- nate for approximately 6 seconds,
ger air bag inflates, it could cause then go off.
serious or fatal injuries to the child.
3 50
SRS components and functions 10. PASS AIR BAG “OFF” indicator
(Front passenger’s seat only)
,
11. Occupant classification system
(Front passenger’s seat only)
12. Driver’s and front passenger’s
seat belt buckle sensors
13. Emergency fastening device
(EFD)
14. Acceleration type side impact
sensors
15. Driver's knee air bag module W7-147
OAN037080N The SRS air bag warning light " "

The SRSCM continually monitors all on the instrument panel will illumi-
The SRS consists of the following SRS components while the ignition nate for about 6 seconds after the
components: switch is ON to determine if a crash ignition switch is turned to the ON
1. Driver's front air bag module impact is severe enough to require position, after which the SRS air bag
2. Passenger's front air bag module air bag deployment or pre-tensioner warning light " " should go out.
3. Side air bag modules seat belt deployment.
4. Curtain air bag modules
5. Retractor pre-tensioner assemblies
6. Air bag warning light
7. SRS control module (SRSCM)/
Rollover sensor
8. Front impact sensors
9. Pressure type side impact sensors
3 51
Driver’s front air bag (1) Driver’s front air bag (2)
WARNING
If any of the following condi-
tions occurs, this indicates a
malfunction of the SRS. Have an
authorized HYUNDAI dealer
inspect the air bag system as
soon as possible.
• The light does not turn on
briefly when you turn the igni-
tion ON.
OHM039102N OHM039103N
• The light stays on after illumi-
nating for approximately 6 The front air bag modules are located Upon deployment, tear seams mold-
seconds. in the center of the steering wheel, in ed directly into the pad covers will
• The light comes on while the the front passenger's panel above the separate under pressure from the
vehicle is in motion. glove box and in the driver’s side expansion of the air bags. Further
knee bolster. When the SRSCM opening of the covers then allows full
• The light blinks when the igni- detects a sufficiently severe impact to inflation of the air bags.
tion switch is in ON position. the front of the vehicle, it will auto-
matically deploy the front air bags.
3 52
Driver’s front air bag (3) Passenger’s front air bag

(Continued)
• When installing a container of
liquid air freshener inside the
vehicle, do not place it near
the instrument cluster nor on
the instrument panel surface.
It may become a dangerous
projectile and cause injury if
the passenger's air bag
inflates.
OHM039104N B240B05L
A fully inflated air bag, in combina-
tion with a properly worn seat belt, WARNING
slows the driver's or the passenger's
forward motion, reducing the risk of • Do not install or place any
head and chest injury. accessories (drink holder, CD
or discs holder, sticker, etc.)
on the front passenger's
After complete inflation, the air bag panel above the glove box in a
immediately starts deflating, vehicle with a passenger's air
enabling the driver to maintain for- bag. Such objects may
ward visibility and the ability to steer become dangerous projec-
or operate other controls. tiles and cause injury if the
passenger's air bag inflates.
(Continued)
3 53
(Continued) Occupant classification system

WARNING
If the SRS air bag warning light ■ Type A
• If an air bag deploys, there
may be a loud noise followed " " does not illuminate, or
by a fine dust released in the continuously remains on after
vehicle. These conditions are illuminating for about 6 sec-
normal and are not hazardous onds or blinks when the igni-
- the air bags are packed in tion switch is turned to the ON
this fine powder. The dust gen- position, or after the engine is
erated during air bag deploy- started, comes on while driv-
ment may cause skin or eye ing, the SRS is not working
irritation as well as aggravate properly. If this occurs, have ■ Type B
asthma for some persons. your vehicle immediately

Always wash all exposed skin inspected by an authorized
areas thoroughly with cold HYUNDAI dealer.
water and a mild soap after an • Before you replace a fuse or
accident in which the air bags disconnect a battery terminal,
were deployed. turn the ignition switch to the
• The SRS can function only LOCK position and remove
when the ignition switch is in the ignition key for ignition
the ON position. key, and turn the engine ■ Type C
start/stop button to the OFF
(Continued) position for smart key. Never
remove or replace the air bag
related fuse(s) when the igni-
tion switch is in the ON posi-
tion. Failure to heed this warn-
ing will cause the SRS air bag
warning light to illuminate.
OANNSA2003/OANNSA2002/OANNSA2004
3 54
Your vehicle is equipped with an If the front passenger seat is occu- • The OCS may not function proper-
occupant classification system in the pied by a person that the system ly if the passenger takes actions
front passenger's seat. determines to be of adult size, and which can affect the classification
The occupant classification system he/she sits properly (sitting upright system. These include:
is designed to detect the presence of with the seatback in an upright posi- (1) Failing to sit in an upright posi-
a properly-seated front passenger tion, centered on the seat cushion tion.
and determine if the passenger's with their seat belt on, legs comfort-
ably extended and their feet on the (2) Leaning against the door or
front air bag should be enabled (may center console.
inflate) or not. The driver's front air floor), the PASS AIR BAG "OFF"
bag is not affected or controlled by indicator will be turned off and the (3) Sitting towards the sides or the
the occupant classification system. front passenger's air bag will be able front of the seat.
to inflate, if necessary, in frontal (4) Putting legs on the dashboard
crashes. or resting them on other loca-
Main components of occupant You will find the PASS AIR BAG tions which reduce the passen-
classification system "OFF" indicator on the center facia ger weight on the front seat.
• A detection device located within panel. This system detects the condi- (5) Improperly wearing the safety
the front passenger seat cushion. tions 1~4 in the following table and belt.
• Electronic system to determine activates or deactivates the front (6) Reclining the seat back.
whether the front passenger air passenger air bag based on these
bag system should be activated or conditions.
deactivated. Always be sure that you and all vehi-
• An indicator light located on the cle occupants are seated and
instrument panel which illuminates restrained properly (sitting upright
the words PASS AIR BAG "OFF" with the seat in an upright position,
indicating the front passenger air centered on the seat cushion, with
bag system is deactivated. the person's legs comfortably
extended, feet on the floor, and wear-
• The instrument panel air bag indi- ing the safety belt properly) for the
cator light is interconnected with most effective protection by the air
the occupant classification system. bag and the safety belt.
3 55
Condition and operation in the front passenger occupant classification

system WARNING - OCS system
Riding in an improper position
Indicator/Warning light Devices
Condition detected by the adversely affects the occupant
occupant classification system PASS AIR BAG “OFF” SRS Front passenger classification system (OCS) and
indicator light warning light air bag may result in the deactivation of
1. Adult *1 or child age 13 and up*2 Off Off Activated front passenger airbag. It is
important for the driver to
2. Infant or child restraint system instruct the passenger as to the
On Off Deactivated
with 12 months old*3 *4 proper seating instructions as
3. Unoccupied On Off Deactivated contained in this manual.
(Continued)
4. Malfunction in the system Off On Activated
*1) The system judges a person of *4) The PASS AIR BAG "OFF" indi-
adult size as an adult. When a cator may turn on or off when a
smaller adult sits in the front pas- child above 12 months to 12
senger seat, the system may rec- years old (with or without child
ognize him/her as a child restraint system) sits in the front
depending on his/her physique passenger seat. This is a normal
and posture. condition.
*2) Do not allow children to ride in
the front passenger seat. When a
larger child who has outgrown a
child restraint system sits in the
front passenger seat, the system
may recognize him/her as an
adult depending upon his/her
physique or sitting position.
*3) Never install a child restraint sys-
tem on the front passenger seat.
3 56
(Continued)
OVQ036013N 1KMN3663 1KMN3665

- Never put a heavy load, an - Never sit with hips shifted - Never place feet on the dash-
active electronic device or towards the front of the seat. board.
blanket in the front passenger
seat or seatback pocket.
OHG031073A 1KMN3662 1KMN3664

- Never sit on the front passen- - Never excessively recline the - Never lean on the door or cen-
ger seat with anything attached front passenger seatback. ter console.
such as a blanket or cushion. - Never sit on one side of the
front passenger seat.
3 57
Proper position If the PASS AIR BAG "OFF" indicator ✽ NOTICE

is still on, ask the passenger to move The PASS AIR BAG "OFF" indica-
to the rear seat. tor illuminates for about 4 seconds
after the ignition switch is turned to
WARNING - AIR BAG the ON position or after the engine is
"OFF" light started. If the front passenger seat is
occupied, the occupant classification
Do not allow an adult passenger sensor will then classify the front pas-
to ride in the front seat when the senger after several more seconds.
PASS AIR BAG “OFF” indicator
is illuminated, because the air
B990A01O bag will not deploy in the event WARNING
of a crash. The driver must Do not hang onto the front pas-
When an adult is seated in the front instruct the passenger to repo-
passenger seat, if the PASS AIR senger seat. Do not hang any
sition himself in the seat. items, such as a seatback table
BAG “OFF” indicator is on, turn the Failure to properly position
ignition switch to the LOCK or OFF or entertainment system, on the
yourself may lead to airbag front passenger seatback. Do
position and ask the passenger to sit deactivation resulting in airbag
properly (sitting upright with the seat not place feet on the front pas-
non-deployment in a collision. If senger seatback. Do not place
back in an upright position, centered the PASS AIR BAG “OFF” indi-
on the seat cushion with their seat any items under the front pas-
cator remains illuminated after senger seat. Any of these could
belt on, legs comfortably extended the passenger repositions
and their feet on the floor). Restart interfere with proper sensor
themselves properly and the operation.
the engine and have the person vehicle is restarted, it is recom-
remain in that position. This will allow mended the passenger move to
the system to detect the person and the rear seat because the pas-
to enable the passenger air bag. senger's front air bag will not
deploy.
3 58
WARNING (Continued) (Continued)

• Even though your vehicle is • If the PASS AIR BAG "OFF" • Do not use accessory seat
equipped with the occupant indicator is illuminated when covers on the front seats.
classification system, never the front passenger's seat is • Accident statistics show that
install a child restraint system occupied by an adult and children are safer if they are
in the front passenger's seat. he/she sits properly (sitting restrained in the rear, as
A deploying air bag can force- upright with the seatback in opposed to the front seat. It is
fully strike a child resulting in an upright position, centered recommended that child
serious injuries or death. Any on the seat cushion with their restraints be secured in a rear
child age 12 and under should seat belt on, legs comfortably seat, including an infant riding
ride in the rear seat. Children extended and their feet on the in a rear-facing infant seat, a
too large for child restraints floor), have that person sit in child riding in a forward-fac-
should use the available the rear seat. ing child seat and an older
lap/shoulder belts. No matter • Do not modify or replace the child riding in a booster seat.
what type of crash, children of front passenger seat. Don't • Air bags can only be used
all ages are safer when place anything on or attach once – have an authorized
restrained in the rear seat. anything such as a blanket or HYUNDAI dealer replace the
(Continued) seat heater to the front pas- air bag immediately after
senger seat. This can adverse- deployment.
ly affect the occupant classifi-
cation system. (Continued)
• Do not sit on sharp objects
such as tools when occupying
the front passenger seat. This
can adversely affect the occu-
pant classification system.
(Continued)
3 59
(Continued) Driver's and passenger's front

WARNING air bag
• A smaller-stature adult in the If the occupant classification
front passenger’ seat who is ■ Driver’s front air bag
system is not working properly,
not seated correctly (for exam- the SRS air bag warning light
ple: seat excessively reclined, on the instrument panel will illu-
leaning on the door or center minate because the passenger's
console, or hips shifted for- front air bag is connected with
ward in the seat) can cause a the occupant classification sys-
condition where the occupant tem. If there is a malfunction of
classification system senses the occupant classification sys-
less weight than if the occu- tem, the PASS AIR BAG "OFF"
pant were seated properly (sit- indicator will not illuminate and ■ Driver’s knee air bag
ting upright with the seatback the passenger's front air bag
in an upright position, cen- will inflate in frontal impact
tered on the seat cushion with crashes even if there is no occu-
their seat belt on, legs com- pant in the front passenger's
fortably extended and their seat. If the SRS air bag warning
feet on the floor). light does not illuminate when
This condition can result in an the ignition switch is turned to
adult potentially being mis- the ON position, remains illumi-
classified as a child and illu- nated after approximately 6 sec- ■ Passenger’s front air bag
mination of the PASS AIR BAG onds or blinks when the ignition
"OFF" indicator. switch is turned to the ON posi-
tion, or if it illuminates while the
vehicle is being driven, have an
inspect the occupant classifica-
tion system and the SRS air bag
system as soon as possible.
ODM032040/ODM032041/ODM032042
3 60
Your vehicle is equipped with a The seat belt buckle sensors deter- Additionally, your vehicle is equipped
Supplemental Restraint (Air Bag) mine if the driver and front passen- with an occupant classification sys-
System and the lap/shoulder belts at ger's seat belts are fastened. These tem in the front passenger's seat.
both the driver and passenger seat- sensors provide the ability to control The occupant classification system
ing positions. the SRS deployment based on detects the presence of a passenger
The indications of the system's pres- whether or not the seat belts are fas- in the front passenger's seat and will
ence are the letters "SRS AIR BAG" tened, and how severe the impact is. turn off the front passenger's air bag
embossed on the air bag pad cover under certain conditions. For more
in the steering wheel, on the knee detail, see "Occupant classification
The advanced SRS offers the ability system" in this section.
bolster below the steering wheel col- to control the air bag inflation within
umn and the passenger's side front two levels. A first stage level is pro-
panel pad above the glove box. vided for moderate-severity impacts.
The SRS consists of air bags A second stage level is provided for
installed under the pad covers in the more severe impacts.
center of the steering wheel , in the
knee bolster below the steering
wheel column and the passenger's According to the impact severity and
side front panel above the glove box. seat belt usage, the SRSCM (SRS
Control Module) controls the air bag
The purpose of the SRS is to provide inflation. Failure to properly wear
the vehicle's driver and/or the front seat belts can increase the risk or
passenger with additional protection severity of injury in an accident.
than that offered by the seat belt sys-
tem alone in case of a frontal impact
of sufficient severity.
3 61
✽ NOTICE
WARNING • Be sure to read information about WARNING
Do not place any objects under- the SRS on the labels provided on Always use seat belts and child
neath the front seats as they the sun visor. restraints – every trip, every
could interfere with the occu- • Advanced air bags are combined time, everyone! Air bags inflate
pant classification system. with pre-tensioner seat belts to with considerable force and in
help provide enhanced occupant the blink of an eye. Seat belts
protection in frontal crashes. help keep occupants in proper
WARNING Front air bags are not intended to position to obtain maximum
deploy in collisions in which pro- benefit from the air bag. Even
If you are considering modifica- tection can be provided by the pre- with advanced air bags, improp-
tion of your vehicle due to a dis- tensioner seat belt. erly and unbelted occupants
ability, please contact the can be severely injured when
Hyundai Customer Assistance the air bag inflates.
Center at 1-800-633-5151.
Always follow the precautions
about seat belts, air bags and
occupant safety contained in this
manual. To reduce the chance of
serious or fatal injuries and
receive the maximum safety ben-
efit from your restraint system:
• Never place a child in any child
or booster seat in the front seat.
• ABC – Always Buckle Children
in the back seat. It is the safest
place for children of any age
to ride.
(Continued)
3 62
(Continued) (Continued) (Continued)

• Front and side air bags can • No objects should be placed • If the SRS air bag warning
injure occupants improperly over or near the air bag mod- light remains illuminated while
positioned in the front seats. ules on the steering wheel, the vehicle is being driven,
• Move your seat as far back as instrument panel, and the have an authorized HYUNDAI
practical from the front air front passenger's panel above dealer inspect the air bag sys-
bags, while still maintaining the glove box, because any tem as soon as possible.
control of the vehicle. such object could cause harm • Air bags can only be used once
if the vehicle is in a crash – have an authorized HYUNDAI
• You and your passengers severe enough to cause the
should never sit or lean unnec- dealer replace the air bag
air bags to deploy. immediately after deployment.
essarily close to the air bags.
Improperly positioned driver • Never place covers, blankets • The SRS is designed to deploy
and passengers can be severe- or seat warmers on the pas- the front air bags only when
ly injured by inflating air bags. senger seat as these may frontal impact is sufficiently
interfere with the occupant severe and when the impact
• Never lean against the door or classification system.
center console – always sit in angle is toward from the for-
an upright position. • Do not tamper with or discon- ward longitudinal axis of the
nect SRS wiring or other com- vehicle. Additionally, the air
• Do not allow a passenger to ponents of the SRS system. bags will only deploy once.
ride in the front seat when the Doing so could result in injury, Seat belts must be worn at all
PASS AIR BAG "OFF" indica- due to accidental deployment times.
tor is illuminated, because the of the air bags or by rendering
air bag will not deploy in the (Continued)
the SRS inoperative.
event of a moderate or severe
frontal crash. (Continued)
(Continued)
3 63

• Front air bags are not intend- • Children age 12 and under • Sitting improperly or out of
ed to deploy in side-impact, must always be properly position can result in serious
rear-impact or rollover crash- restrained in the rear seat. or fatal injury in a crash. All
es. However, when frontal Never allow children to ride in occupants should sit upright
deployment threshold is sat- the front passenger seat. If a with the seatback in an
isfied at side-impact, front air child over 12 must be seated upright position, centered on
bags may deploy. In addition, in the front seat, he or she the seat cushion with their
front air bags will not deploy must be properly belted and seat belt on, legs comfortably
in frontal crashes below the the seat should be moved as extended and their feet on the
deployment threshold. far back as possible. floor until the vehicle is
• Even though your vehicle is • For maximum safety protec- parked and the ignition key is
equipped with the occupant tion in all types of crashes, all removed.
classification system, do not occupants including the driver • The SRS air bag system must
install a child restraint system should always wear their seat deploy very rapidly to provide
in the front passenger seat belts whether or not an air bag protection in a crash. If an
position. A child restraint sys- is also provided at their seat- occupant is out of position
tem must never be placed in ing position to minimize the because of not wearing a seat
the front seat. The infant or risk of severe injury or death belt, the air bag may forcefully
child could be severely injured in the event of a crash. Do not contact the occupant causing
or killed by an air bag deploy- sit or lean unnecessarily close serious or fatal injuries.
ment in case of an accident. to the air bag while the vehicle
(Continued) is in motion.
(Continued)
3 64
Side air bag The side air bags are designed to

deploy during certain side-impact WARNING
collisions, depending on the crash • The side air bags is supple-
severity, angle, speed and point of mental to the driver's and the
impact. However, when side deploy- passenger's seat belt systems
ment threshold is satisfied at front and is not a substitute for
impact, side air bags may deploy. them. Therefore your seat
The side air bags are not designed to belts must be worn at all times
deploy in all side impact situations or while the vehicle is in motion.
rollover situations. The air bags deploy only in
ODM032043 The side air bags may deploy on the certain side impact conditions
side of the impact. severe enough to cause sig-
The side and/or curtain airbags on nificant injury to the vehicle
both sides of the vehicle may deploy occupants.
if a rollover or possible rollover is • For best protection from the
detected. side air bag system and to
avoid being injured by the
deploying side air bags, both
WARNING front seat occupants should
OHM032071
Do not allow the passengers to sit in an upright position with
lean their heads or bodies onto the seat belt properly fas-
❈ The actual air bags in the vehicle may differ doors, put their arms on the tened. The driver's hands
from the illustration. doors, stretch their arms out of should be placed on the steer-
the window, or place objects ing wheel at the 9:00 and 3:00
Your vehicle is equipped with side air positions. The passenger's
between the doors and passen-
bags in each front seat. The purpose arms and hands should be
gers when they are seated on
of the air bag is to provide the vehi- placed on their laps.
seats equipped with side and/or
cle's driver and/or the front passen-
curtain air bags. (Continued)
ger with additional protection than
that offered by the seat belt alone.
3 65
(Continued) (Continued) Curtain air bag

• Do not use any accessory • If the seat or seat cover is
seat covers. damaged, have the vehicle
• Use of seat covers could checked and repaired by an
reduce or prevent the effec- authorized HYUNDAI dealer
tiveness of the system. because your vehicle is
equipped with side air bags
• Do not install any accessories and an occupant classifica-
on the side or near the side air tion system.
bag.
• Do not place any objects over
the air bag or between the air OANNSA2036
bag and yourself.
• Do not place any objects (an
umbrella, bag, etc.) between
the front door and the front
seat. Such objects may
become dangerous projectiles
and cause injury if the supple-
mental side air bag inflates.
• To prevent unexpected deploy-
ment of the side air bag that OHM032072
may result in personal injury,
avoid impact to the side impact ❈ The actual air bags in the vehicle may differ
from the illustration.
sensor when the ignition
switch is on.
Curtain air bags are located along
(Continued) both sides of the roof rails above the
front and rear doors.
3 66
They are designed to help protect

WARNING (Continued)
occupants in certain side impacts
and to help prevent them from eject- • In order for side and curtain • Do not allow the passengers
ing out of the vehicle as a result of a air bags to provide the best to lean their heads or bodies
rollover, especially when the seat- protection, front seat occu- onto doors, put their arms on
belts are also in use. pants and outboard rear occu- the doors, stretch their arms
pants should sit in an upright out of the window, or place
• The curtain air bags are designed
position with the seat belts objects between the doors
to deploy during certain side
properly fastened. and passengers when they are
impact collisions, depending on the
seated on seats equipped with
crash severity, angle, speed and Importantly, children should side and/or curtain air bags.
point of impact. However, when sit in a proper child restraint
side deployment threshold is satis- system in the rear seat. • Never try to open or repair any
fied at front-impact, curtain air components of the side cur-
• When children are seated in tain air bag system. This
bags may deploy.
the rear outboard seats, they should only be done by an
• The curtain air bags may deploy on must be seated in the proper authorized HYUNDAI dealer.
the side of the impact. child restraint system. Make
• Also, the curtain air bags on both sure to put the child restraint Failure to follow the above
system as far away from the instructions can result in injury
sides of the vehicle will deploy in
certain rollover situations. door side as possible, and or death to the vehicle occu-
secure the child restraint sys- pants in an accident.
• The curtain air bags are not
designed to deploy in all side tem in a locked position.
impact or rollover situations. (Continued)
3 67
Why didn’t my air bag go off in a Air bag collision sensors

collision? (Inflation and non-infla-
tion conditions of the air bag)
There are many types of accidents
in which the air bag would not be
expected to provide additional
protection.
These include rear impacts, sec-
ond or third collisions in multiple
impact accidents, as well as low
speed impacts.
1 2 3 4
OAN037044N/ONC037006N/OAN037046N/OANNSA2038/ODM032048
(1) SRS control module / (3) Pressure type side impact sensor
Rollover sensor (4) Acceleration type side impact
(2) Front impact sensor sensor
3 68
• Problems may arise if the sensor Air bag inflation conditions

WARNING - Air bag installation angles are changed
sensors due to the deformation of the front
• Do not hit or allow any objects bumper, body or C pillars or front
to impact the locations where door where side collision sensors
air bags or sensors are are installed. Have the vehicle
installed. checked and repaired by an
authorized HYUNDAI dealer.
This may cause unexpected
air bag deployment, which • Your vehicle has been designed to
could result in serious per- absorb impact and deploy the air
sonal injury or death. bag(s) in certain collisions.
Installing bumper guards or side
• If the installation location or steppers or replacing a bumper
angle of the sensors is altered with non-genuine parts may 1VQA2084
in any way, the air bags may adversely affect your vehicle’s col- Front air bags
deploy when they should not lision and air bag deployment per-
or they may not deploy when Front air bags are designed to inflate
formance. in a frontal collision depending on
they should, causing severe
injury or death. the intensity, speed or angles of
impact of the front collision.
Therefore, do not try to per-
form maintenance on or
around the air bag sensors.
Have the vehicle checked and
repaired by an authorized
HYUNDAI dealer.
3 69
Side and curtain air bags Side air bags and/or curtain air bags
Side and curtain air bags are may also inflate where rollover sen-
designed to inflate when an impact is sors indicate the possibility of a
detected by side collision sensors rollover occurring (even if none actual-
depending on the strength, speed or ly occurs) or in other situations, inclu-
angles of impact resulting from a iding when the vehicle is tilted while
side impact collision. being towed. Even where side and/or
curtain air bags would not provide
Also, the side and curtain air bags
impact protection in a rollover, howev-
are designed to inflate when a
er, they will deploy to prevent ejection
rollover is detected by the rollover
OVQ036018N of occupants, especially those who
sensor.
are restrained with seat belts.
Although the front air bags (driver’s
If the vehicle chassis is impacted by
front, knee and front passenger’s air
bumps or objects on unimproved
bags) are designed to inflate in frontal
roads, the air bags may deploy. Drive
collisions, they also may inflate in
carefully on unimproved roads or on
other types of collisions if the front
surfaces not designed for vehicle traf-
impact sensors detect a sufficient
fic to prevent unintended air bag
frontal force in another type of impact.
deployment.
Side and curtain air bags are
designed to inflate in certain side
OHM032072 impact collisions. They may inflate in
❈ The actual air bags in the vehicle may dif- other type of collisions where a side
fer from the illustration. force is detected by the sensors.
3 70
Air bag non-inflation conditions
OUN036087 OVQ036018N
1VQA2086 • Air bags are not designed to inflate • Front air bags may not inflate in
in rear collisions, because occu- side impact collisions, because
• In certain low-speed collisions the pants are moved backward by the occupants move to the direction of
air bags may not deploy. The air force of the impact. In this case, the collision, and thus in side
bags are designed not to deploy in inflated air bags would not be able impacts, frontal air bag deployment
such cases because they may not to provide any additional benefit. would not provide additional occu-
provide benefits beyond the pro- pant protection.
tection of the seat belts in such col-
lisions. However, side and curtain air bags
may inflate depending on the inten-
sity, vehicle speed and angles of
impact.
3 71
1VQA2089 1VQA2090 1VQA2091

• In an angled collision, the force of • Just before impact, drivers often • Front air bags may not inflate in
impact may direct the occupants in brake heavily. Such heavy braking rollover accidents where the SRSCM
a direction where the air bags would lowers the front portion of the vehi- indicates that the front air bag
not be able to provide any addition- cle causing it to “ride” under a vehi- deployment would not provide addi-
al benefit, and thus the SRS may cle with a higher ground clearance. tional occupant protection.
not deploy any air bags. Air bags may not inflate in this
"under-ride" situation because
forces that are detected by sensors
may be reduced by such “under-
ride” collisions.
3 72
SRS Care
The SRS is virtually maintenance-
WARNING
free and so there are no parts you can • Modification to SRS compo-
safely service by yourself. If the SRS nents or wiring, including the
air bag warning light " " does not addition of any kind of badges
illuminate, when you turn the ignition to the pad covers or modifica-
on, or continuously remains on, have tions to the body structure,
your vehicle immediately inspected by can adversely affect SRS per-
an authorized HYUNDAI dealer. formance and lead to possible
injury.
• Not only the modification of
Any work on the SRS system, such
1VQA2092 the parts where the SRS sen-
as removing, installing, repairing, or
• Air bags may not inflate if the vehi- sors are but also the modifica-
any work on the steering wheel, the
cle collides with objects such as util- tion of other parts of the vehi-
front passenger's panel, front seats
ity poles or trees. cle may affect the SRS per-
and roof rails must be performed by
formance and lead to possible
an authorized HYUNDAI dealer.
injury.
Improper handling of the SRS system
may result in serious personal injury. • No objects should be placed
over or near the air bag mod-
ules on the steering wheel,
To clean the air bag pad covers, use instrument panel, and the
only a soft, dry cloth or one which has front passenger's panel above
been moistened with plain water. the glove box, because any
Solvents or cleaners could adversely such object could cause harm
affect the air bag covers and proper if the vehicle is in a crash
deployment of the system. severe enough to cause the
air bags to inflate.
(Continued)
3 73
Additional safety precautions • Passengers should not place

(Continued) hard or sharp objects between
• If the air bags inflate, they • Never let passengers ride in the themselves and the air bags.
must be replaced by an cargo area or on top of a folded- Carrying hard or sharp objects on
authorized HYUNDAI dealer. down back seat. All occupants your lap or in your mouth can result
should sit upright, fully back in their in injuries if an air bag inflates.
• Do not tamper with or discon- seats with their seat belts on and
nect SRS wiring, or other their feet on the floor. • Keep occupants away from the air
components of the SRS sys- bag covers. All occupants should sit
tem. Doing so could result in • Passengers should not move upright, fully back in their seats with
injury, due to accidental infla- out of or change seats while the their seat belts on and their feet on
tion of the air bags or by ren- vehicle is moving. A passenger the floor. If occupants are too close
dering the SRS inoperative. who is not wearing a seat belt dur- to the air bag covers, they could be
ing a crash or emergency stop can injured if the air bags inflate.
• If your car was flooded and be thrown against the inside of the
has soaked carpeting or water • Do not attach or place objects
vehicle, against other occupants, on or near the air bag covers.
on the flooring, you shouldn't or out of the vehicle.
try to start the engine; have Any object attached to or placed
the car towed to an authorized • Each seat belt is designed to on the front or side air bag covers
HYUNDAI dealer. restrain one occupant. If more could interfere with the proper
than one person uses the same operation of the air bags.
seat belt, they could be seriously • Do not modify the front seats.
If components of the air bag system injured or killed in a collision. Modification of the front seats could
must be discarded, or if the vehicle • Do not use any accessories on interfere with the operation of the
must be scrapped, certain safety seat belts. Devices claiming to supplemental restraint system sens-
precautions must be observed. An improve occupant comfort or repo- ing components or side air bags.
authorized HYUNDAI dealer knows sition the seat belt can reduce the • Do not place items under the
these precautions and can give you protection provided by the seat belt front seats. Placing items under
the necessary information. Failure to and increase the chance of serious the front seats could interfere with
follow these precautions and proce- injury in a crash. the operation of the supplemental
dures could increase the risk of per- restraint system sensing compo-
sonal injury. nents and wiring harnesses.
3 74
• Never hold an infant or child on Adding equipment to or modi- Air bag warning label
your lap. The infant or child could fying your air bag-equipped ■ Front
be seriously injured or killed in the vehicle
event of a crash. All infants and chil-
dren should be properly restrained If you modify your vehicle by chang-
in appropriate child safety seats or ing your vehicle's frame, bumper sys-
seat belts in the rear seat. tem, front end or side sheet metal or
ride height, this may affect the oper-
ation of your vehicle's air bag sys-
WARNING tem.
• Sitting improperly or out of OANNSA2006
position can cause occupants ■ Side
to be shifted too close to a
deploying air bag, strike the
interior structure or be thrown
from the vehicle resulting in
serious injury or death.
• Always sit upright with the
seatback in an upright posi-
tion, centered on the seat
cushion with your seat belt ODM032057
on, legs comfortably extended
and your feet on the floor. Air bag warning labels, some required
• Be careful not to cause impact by the U.S. National Highway Traffic
to the doors when the ignition Safety Administration (NHTSA), are
is ON.The air bags may inflate. attached to alert the driver and pas-
sengers of potential risks of the air
bag system.
3 75
Folding key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-4 • Smart Liftgate (Smart Tailgate). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-34

• Record your key number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-4 • Emergency liftgate (tailgate) safety release . . . . . . . 4-38
• Key operations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-4 Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-39
• Transmitter precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-6 • Power windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-40
• Battery replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-7 Hood. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-44
• Immobilizer system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-8 • Opening the hood . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-44
Smart key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-10 • Closing the hood . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-45
• Record your key number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-10 Fuel filler door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-46
• Smart key function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-10 • Opening the fuel filler door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-46
• Loss of the smart key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-13 • Closing the fuel filler door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-46
• Smart key precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-14 • Fuel filler door manual release . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-49 4
• Smart key immobilizer system. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-14 Panoramic sunroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-50
• Battery replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-16 • Sunroof open warning. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-51
Theft-alarm system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-17 • Sunshade . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-52
• Armed stage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-17 • Sliding the sunroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-53
• Theft-alarm stage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-19 • Tilting the sunroof. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-53
• Disarmed stage. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-19 • Closing the sunroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-54
Door locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-21 • Resetting the sunroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-55
• Outside the vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-21 Steering wheel. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-56
• Inside the vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-23 • Electric power steering (EPS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-56
• Impact sensing door unlock system. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-25 • Tilt steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-57
• Child-protector rear door lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-25 • Heated steering wheel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-58
Liftgate (tailgate) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-26 • Horn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-58
• Non-powered liftgate (tailgate) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-26
• Power liftgate (Power tailgate). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-28
Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-60 Warning and indicator lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-107
• Inside rearview mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-60 • Warning lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-107
• Side view mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-76 • Indicator Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-115
• Blind spot mirror. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-78 Drive assist system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-120
Instrument cluster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-79 • Rear parking assist system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-120
• Instrument Cluster Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-80 • Rear view camera . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-124
• Gauges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-80 • Multi-view Camera System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-125
• Transaxle Shift Indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-83 Hazard warning flasher. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-126
LCD display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-84 Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-127
• LCD Display Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-84 • Battery saver function. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-127
4 • LCD Modes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-84 • Headlamp delay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-127
• Trip Computer Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-85 • Lighting control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-128
• Turn By Turn (TBT) Mode. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-85 • Smart High Beam . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-133
• SCC/LDWS Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-85 • Adaptive Front Lighting System (AFLS) . . . . . . . . 4-136
• A/V Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-86 Wipers and washers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-137
• Service Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-86 • Windshield wipers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-137
• User Settings Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-87 • Windshield washers. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-139
• Warning Messages. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-93 • Rear window wiper and washer switch . . . . . . . . . 4-140
Trip computer. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-102 Interior light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-141
• Overview. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-102 • Automatic turn off function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-141
• Fuel Economy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-103 • Map lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-141
• Trip A/B . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-104 • Room lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-142
• Digital Speedometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-105 • Luggage room lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-143
• Vanity mirror lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-143
Welcome system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-144 Storage compartments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-169
• Headlamp welcome . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-144 • Center console storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-169
• Interior light. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-144 • Glove box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-169
• Puddle lamp and pocket lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-144 • Multi box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-170
Defroster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-145 • Sunglass holder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-170
• Rear window defroster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-145 • Luggage tray . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-171
• Front wiper deicer. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-146 Interior features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-172
Manual climate control system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-147 • Cup holder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-172
• Heating and air conditioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-148 • Sunvisor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-173
• System operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-153 • Power outlet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-173
• Climate control air filter. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-155 • Clothes hanger . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-175 4
• Checking the amount of air conditioner • Floor mat anchor(s). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-175
refrigerant and compressor lubricant . . . . . . . . . 4-156 • Aux, USB and iPod® port . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-176
• Air Conditioning refrigerant label . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-156 • Luggage net (holder) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-176
Automatic climate control system. . . . . . . . . . . . 4-157 • Cargo security screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-177
• Automatic heating and air conditioning . . . . . . . . . 4-158 • Side curtain . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-179
• Manual heating and air conditioning . . . . . . . . . . . 4-159 Exterior features. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-180
Windshield defrosting and defogging. . . . . . . . . 4-165 • Roof rack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-180
• Manual climate control system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-165 Audio system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-182
• Automatic climate control system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-166 • Antenna . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-182
• Steering wheel audio control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-182
• How vehicle audio works . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-184
FOLDING KEY
Record your key number Key operations
CAUTION
The key code num-
ber is stamped or Do not fold the key without
printed on the key pressing the release button.
code tag attached to This may damage the key.
the key set. Should
you lose your keys,
this number will enable an author- WARNING
ized HYUNDAI dealer to duplicate Use only HYUNDAI original
the keys easily. Remove the key parts for the ignition key in your
code tag and store it in a safe place. vehicle. If an aftermarket key is
Also, record the code number and used, the ignition switch may
keep it in a safe and handy place, but ODM046800 not return to ON after START. If
not in the vehicle. this happens, the starter will
• Used to start the engine. continue to operate causing
• Used to lock and unlock the doors. damage to the starter motor
• Used to lock and unlock the glove and possible fire due to exces-
box. sive current in the wiring.
• To unfold the key, press the release
button then the key will unfold auto-
matically. To fold the key, fold the
key manually while pressing the
release button.
4 4
Door Lock (1) Door Unlock (2)

WARNING - Ignition key 1. Press the unlock button(2).
Leaving children unattended in 2. The driver's door will unlock. The
a vehicle with the ignition key hazard warning lights will blink two
is dangerous even if the key is times.
not in the ignition switch is in
the ACC or ON position. 3. Press the unlock button(2) twice
within 4 seconds and all doors and
Children could accidentally liftgate (tailgate) will unlock. The
place the key in the ignition hazard warning lights will blink two
switch. times.
The ignition key would enable
children to operate power win-
dows or other controls, or even OVF041003
✽ NOTICE
make the vehicle move, which You can activate or deactivate the
1. Close all doors, engine hood and Two Turn Unlock function. Refer to
could result in serious bodily
liftgate (tailgate). "User settings" in this section.
injury or even death. Never
leave the keys in your vehicle 2. Press the lock button(1).
with unsupervised children, 3. All doors and liftgate (tailgate) will
when the engine is running. lock. The hazard warning lights will
blink once.
4. If the lock button is pressed once
more within 4 seconds, the hazard
warning lights will blink and the
horn will sound once.
5. Make sure that doors are locked by
checking the door lock button inside
or pulling the outside door handle.
4 5
Liftgate (Tailgate) unlock (3) Transmitter precautions (Continued)

The liftgate (tailgate) is unlocked if ✽ NOTICE • If the transmitter is in close prox-
the button is pressed for more than 1 imity to your mobile phone, the
second.
The transmitter will not work if any signal could be blocked by your
of following occur: mobile phones normal operational
Also, once the liftgate (tailgate) is signals. This is especially impor-
opened and then closed, the liftgate
• The ignition key is in the ignition
switch. tant when the phone is active such
(tailgate) will be locked automatically. as making and receiving calls, text
• You exceed the operating distance
limit (about 90 feet [30 m]). messaging, and/or sending/receiv-
Panic (4) • The battery in the transmitter is ing emails. Avoid placing the
The horn sounds and hazard warn- weak. transmitter and your mobile
ing lights flash for about 30 seconds • Other vehicles or objects may be phone in the same pants or jacket
if this button is pressed for more than blocking the signal. pocket and always try to maintain
1.5 seconds. To stop the horn and • The weather is extremely cold. an adequate distance between the
lights, press any button except the • The transmitter is close to a radio two devices.
trunk button on the transmitter. transmitter such as a radio substa-
tion or an airport which can inter- CAUTION
fere with normal operation of the
transmitter. Keep the transmitter away from
When the transmitter does not work water or any liquid and fire.
correctly, open and close the door If the inside of the transmitter
with the ignition key. If you have a gets damp (due to drinks or
problem with the transmitter, contact moisture), or is heated, internal
an authorized HYUNDAI dealer. circuit may malfunction.
(Continued)
4 6
Battery replacement For replacement transmitters, see an CAUTION - Transmitter

authorized HYUNDAI dealer for damage
transmitter reprogramming. Do not drop, wet or expose the
• The transmitter is designed to give keyless entry system transmit-
you years of trouble-free use, how- ter to excessive heat or sunlight.
ever it can malfunction if exposed to
moisture or static electricity. If you
are unsure how to use your trans-
mitter or replace the battery, contact
• Using the wrong battery can cause
the transmitter to malfunction. Be
OLM042302
sure to use the correct battery.
• To avoid damaging the transmitter,
The transmitter uses a 3 volt lithium don't drop it, get it wet, or expose it
battery which will normally last for to excessive heat or sunlight.
several years. When replacement is
necessary, use the following proce- • An inappropriately dis-
dure. posed battery can be harm-
ful to the environment and
1. Insert a slim tool into the slot and may cause risk to human
gently pry open the transmitter health. Dispose the battery
center cover. according to your local
2. Replace the battery with a new law(s) or regulation.
battery (CR2032). When replacing
the battery, make sure the battery
position.
3. Install the battery in the reverse
order of removal.
4 7
Immobilizer system To activate the immobilizer sys- ✽ NOTICE

(if equipped) tem: When starting the engine, do not use
Your vehicle is equipped with an Turn the ignition key to the OFF posi- the key with other immobilizer keys
electronic engine immobilizer system tion. The immobilizer system acti- around. Otherwise the engine may
to reduce the risk of unauthorized vates automatically. Without a valid not start or may stop soon after it
vehicle use. ignition key for your vehicle, the starts. Keep each key separate in
Your immobilizer system is com- engine will not start. order to avoid a starting malfunction.
prised of a small transponder in the
ignition key and electronic devices To deactivate the immobilizer CAUTION
inside the vehicle. system: Do not put metal accessories
With the immobilizer system, when- Insert the ignition key into the key near the ignition switch.
ever you insert your ignition key into cylinder and turn it to the ON position. Metal accessories may interrupt
the ignition switch and turn it to ON, the transponder signal and may
it checks to verify if the ignition key is prevent the engine from being
valid. WARNING started.
If the key is determined to be valid, In order to prevent theft of your
the engine will start. vehicle, do not leave spare keys
If the key is determined to be invalid, anywhere in your vehicle. Your ✽ NOTICE
the engine will not start. Immobilizer password is a cus-
tomer unique password and If you need additional keys or lose
should be kept confidential. Do your keys, contact an authorized
not leave this number anywhere HYUNDAI dealer.
in your vehicle.
4 8
This device complies with Part 15

CAUTION of the FCC rules.
The transponder in your ignition Operation is subject to the following
key is an important part of the two conditions:
immobilizer system. It is 1. This device may not cause harm-
designed to give years of trou- ful interference, and
ble-free service, however you
should avoid exposure to mois- 2. This device must accept any inter-
ture, static electricity and rough ference received, including inter-
handling. Immobilizer system ference that may cause undesired
malfunction could occur. operation.
CAUTION
CAUTION Changes or modifications not
Do not change, alter or adjust expressly approved by the party
the immobilizer system because responsible for compliance
it could cause the immobilizer could void the user’s authority
system to malfunction and to operate the equipment. If the
should only be serviced by an keyless entry system is inopera-
authorized HYUNDAI dealer. tive due to changes or modifica-
Malfunctions caused by improp- tions not approved by the party
er alterations, adjustments or responsible for compliance, it
modifications to the immobilizer will not be covered by your man-
system are not covered by your ufacturer’s vehicle warranty.
vehicle manufacturer warranty.
4 9
SMART KEY
Record your key number Smart key function
The key code number
WARNING - Smart key
is stamped or printed Leaving children unattended in
on the key code tag a vehicle with the smart key is
attached to the key dangerous even if the Engine
set. Should you lose Start/Stop Button is in the ACC
your keys, this num- or ON position. Children could
ber will enable an authorized accidentally press the Engine
HYUNDAI dealer to duplicate the Start/Stop Button.
keys easily. The smart key would enable
children to operate power win-
Remove the key code tag and store it
dows or other controls, or even
in a safe place. Also, record the code
make the vehicle move, which
number and keep it in a safe and ODM042002 could result in serious bodily
handy place, but not in the vehicle.
To remove the mechanical key, press injury or even death. Never
and hold the release button(1) and leave the keys in your vehicle
remove the mechanical key (2). with unsupervised children,
when the Engine is running.
To reinstall the mechanical key, put
the key into the hole and push it until
a click sound is heard.
With a smart key, you can lock or
unlock a door (and Liftgate (tailgate))
and start the engine.
Refer to the following for more details.
4 10
Door Lock 3. Press the button of the outside Using the button on the smart key
door handle. 1 Close all doors, engine hood and
4. The hazard warning lights will blink liftgate (tailgate).
and the chime will sound once. 2. Press the lock button(1).
5. Make sure that doors are locked 3. The hazard warning lights will blink
by pulling the outside door handle. and the chime will sound once.
4. Make sure that doors are locked
✽ NOTICE by pulling the outside door handle.
• The button will only operate when
the smart key is within 28~40in.
OVF041004 (0.7~1m) from the outside door
handle.
• Even though you press the outside
door handle button, the doors will
not lock and the chime will sound
for 3 seconds if any of following
occur:
- The smart key is in the vehicle.
- The engine start/stop button is
in ACC or ON position.
- Any door except the liftgate
ODM042006 (tailgate) is open.
Using the door handle button
1. Carry the smart key.
2. Close all doors, engine hood and
liftgate (tailgate).
4 11
Unlocking ✽ NOTICE Using the button on the smart key

Using the door handle button • The button will only operate when 1. Press the unlock button(2) of the
1. Carry the smart key. the smart key is within 28~40in. smart key.
2. Press the button of the driver's (0.7~1m) from the outside door 2. The driver’s door will unlock. The
outside door handle. handle. hazard warning lights will blink and
• When the smart key is recognized the chime will sound two times.
3. The driver’s door will unlock. The in the area of 28~40in. (0.7~1m)
hazard warning lights will blink and 3. Press the unlock button(2) twice
from the front outside door han- within 4 seconds and all doors and
the chime will sound two times. dle, other people can also open the the liftgate (tailgate) will unlock.
4. Press the button twice within 4 doors. The hazard warning lights will
seconds and all doors and the lift- • After unlocking the driver’s door blink and the chime will sound two
gate (tailgate) will unlock and the or all doors, the door(s) will lock times.
hazard warning lights will blink and automatically unless the door is
the chime will sound two times. opened.
✽ NOTICE
❈ If you press the button of the front After pressing the button, the doors
passenger’s outside door handle will lock automatically unless any
while carrying the smart key, all door is opened within 30 seconds.
doors will unlock.
✽ NOTICE
You can activate or deactivate the
Two Turn Unlock function. Refer to
"User settings" in this section.
4 12
Liftgate (Tailgate) unlocking Panic Loss of the smart key

Using the liftgate (tailgate) handle 1. Press the panic button(4) for more A maximum of 2 smart keys can be
button than 1 second. registered to a single vehicle.
1. Carry the smart key. 2. The horn sounds and hazard Care should be taken not to lose
2. Press the liftgate (tailgate) handle warning light flash for about 30 your smart key. You will not be able to
button. seconds. start the engine without the smart
3. When all doors are locked, the key in the vehicle. If you happen to
hazard warning lights will blink two
times. ✽ NOTICE lose your smart key, and don't have
the spare key, you will not be able to
Once the liftgate (tailgate) is To stop the horn and lights, press start the engine. You should get the
opened and then closed, the lift- any button on the smart key. vehicle to your authorized HYUNDAI
gate (tailgate) will lock automati- dealer (tow the vehicle, if necessary)
cally. Start-up in order to protect it from potential
You can start the engine without theft.
✽ NOTICE inserting the key. For detailed infor-
The button will only operate when mation refer to the “Engine start/stop
the smart key is within 28~40in. button” in section 5.
(0.7~1m) from the liftgate (tailgate)
handle.
Using the button on the smart key

1. Press the liftgate (tailgate) unlock
button(3) for more than 1 second.
2. When all doors are locked, the
hazard warning lights will blink two
times.
4 13
Smart key precautions • If the smart key is in close proximi- Smart key immobilizer system
• The smart key will not work if any ty to your cell phone or smart Your vehicle is equipped with an
of the following occur: phone, the signal from the smart electronic engine immobilizer system
key could be blocked by normal to reduce the risk of unauthorized
- The smart key is close to a radio operation of your cell phone or
transmitter such as a radio sta- vehicle use.
smart phone. This is especially
tion or an airport which can inter- important when the phone is active Your immobilizer system is com-
fere with normal operation of the such as making a call, receiving prised of a small transponder in the
smart key. calls, text messaging, and/or send- smart key and electronic devices
- The smart key is near a mobile ing/receiving emails. Avoid placing inside the vehicle.
two way radio system or a cellu- the smart key and your cell phone With the immobilizer system, when-
lar phone. or smart phone in the same pants ever you turn the engine start/stop
- Another vehicle’s smart key is or jacket pocket and maintain ade- button to the ON position by pressing
being operated close to your quate distance between the two the button while carrying the smart
vehicle. devices. key, it verifies if the smart key is valid
or not.
• When the smart key does not work
correctly, open and close the door CAUTION If the key is determined to be valid,
with the mechanical key and contact Keep the smart key away from the engine will start.
an authorized HYUNDAI dealer. water or any liquid and fire. If If the key is determined to be invalid,
the inside of the smart key gets the engine will not start.
damp (due to drinks or mois-
ture), or is heated, internal cir-
cuit may malfunction.
4 14
To deactivate the immobilizer ✽ NOTICE

system: CAUTION
When starting the engine, do not use
Turn the engine start/stop button to the key with other immobilizer keys The transponder in your smart
the ON position by pressing the but- around. Otherwise the engine may key is an important part of the
ton while carrying the smart key. not start or may stop soon after it immobilizer system. It is
starts. Keep each key separate in designed to give years of trou-
order to avoid a starting malfunction. ble-free service, however you
To activate the immobilizer system: should avoid exposure to mois-
Turn the engine start/stop button to ture, static electricity and rough
the OFF position. The immobilizer CAUTION handling. Immobilizer system
system activates automatically. Do not put metal accessories malfunction could occur.
Without a valid smart key for your near the smart key.
vehicle, the engine will not start. The engine may not start
because the metal accessories CAUTION
CAUTION may interrupt the transponder Do not change, alter or adjust
In order to prevent theft of your signal from transmitting normal- the immobilizer system because
vehicle, do not leave spare keys ly. it could cause the immobilizer
anywhere in your vehicle. Your system to malfunction and
Immobilizer password is a cus- ✽ NOTICE should only be serviced by an
tomer unique password and authorized HYUNDAI dealer.
should be kept confidential. Do If you need additional keys or lose
your keys, contact an authorized Malfunctions caused by improp-
not leave this number anywhere er alterations, adjustments or
in your vehicle. HYUNDAI dealer.
modifications to the immobilizer
system are not covered by your
4 15
This device complies with Part 15 Battery replacement • The smart key is designed to give
of the FCC rules. you years of trouble-free use, how-
Operation is subject to the following ever it can malfunction if exposed
two conditions: to moisture or static electricity. If
you are unsure how to use or
1. This device may not cause harm- replace the battery, contact an
ful interference, and authorized HYUNDAI dealer.
2. This device must accept any inter- • Using the wrong battery can cause
ference received, including inter- the smart key to malfunction. Be
ference that may cause undesired sure to use the correct battery.
operation.
• To avoid damaging the smart key,
don't drop it, get it wet, or expose it
WARNING to excessive heat or sunlight.
OHG040009
Changes or modifications not • An inappropriately dis-
expressly approved by the party A smart key battery should last for posed battery can be
responsible for compliance several years, but if the smart key is harmful to the environment
could void the user’s authority not working properly, try replacing and human health. Dispose
to operate the equipment. If the the battery with a new one. If you are the battery according to
keyless entry system is inoper- unsure how to use your smart key or your local law(s) or regula-
ative due to changes or modifi- replace the battery, contact an tion.
cations not expressly approved authorized HYUNDAI dealer.
by the party responsible for 1. Remove the mechanical key.
compliance, it will not be cov- CAUTION - Smart key
2. Pry open the rear cover. damage
ered by your manufacturer’s
vehicle warranty. 3. Replace the battery with a new Do not drop, get wet or expose
battery (CR2032). When replacing the smart key to excessive heat
the battery, make sure the battery or sunlight, or it will be dam-
position. aged.
4. Install the battery in the reverse
order of removal.
4 16
THEFT-ALARM SYSTEM (IF EQUIPPED)

Armed stage • Lock the doors by pressing the lock
button on the smart key.
Using the smart key (if equipped)
After completion of the steps above,
Armed Park the vehicle and stop the engine.
stage the hazard warning lights and chime
Arm the system as described below.
will operate once to indicate that the
1. Turn off the engine. system is armed.
2. Make sure that all doors, the If any door, liftgate (tailgate) or
Disarmed Theft-alarm
engine hood and liftgate (tailgate) engine hood remains open, the haz-
stage stage lid are closed and latched. ard warning lights and chime won't
3. Lock the doors by pressing the operate and the theft-alarm will not
button of the front outside door arm. After you close the liftgate (tail-
handle with the smart key in your gate) and engine hood, the hazard
This system is designed to provide possession. warning lights blink once.
protection from unauthorized entry After completion of the steps above,
into the vehicle. This system is oper- the hazard warning lights and chime
ated in three stages: the first is the will operate once to indicate that the
"Armed" stage, the second is the system is armed.
"Theft-alarm" stage, and the third is
If any door remains open, the doors
the "Disarmed" stage. If triggered,
won't lock and the chime will sound
the system provides an audible
for 3 seconds. Close the door and try
alarm with blinking of the hazard
again to lock the doors.
warning lights.
If the liftgate (tailgate) hatch or the
engine hood remains open, the haz-
ard warning lights and the chime
won't operate, and the theft alarm
will not arm. After you close the lift-
gate (tailgate) and engine hood, the
hazard warning lights blink once.
4 17
Using the transmitter (if equipped) Using the mechanical key Do not arm the system until all
Park the vehicle and stop the engine. Park the vehicle and stop the engine. passengers have left the vehicle. If
Arm the system as described below. Arm the system as described below. the system is armed while a pas-
senger(s) remains in the vehicle,
1. Turn off the engine and remove 1. Turn off the engine and remove the alarm may be activated when
the ignition key from the ignition the key from the ignition switch(if the remaining passenger(s) leave
switch. equipped). the vehicle. If any door (or trunk)
2. Make sure that all doors, the 2. Make sure that all doors, the or engine hood is opened within
engine hood and liftgate (tailgate) engine hood and liftgate (tailgate) 30 seconds after the system
are closed and latched. are closed and latched. enters the armed stage, the sys-
3. Lock the doors by pressing the 3. Lock the doors by inserting the key tem is disarmed to prevent an
lock button on the transmitter. into the key hole on the front out- unnecessary alarm.
After completion of the steps above, side door handle and turning the
the hazard warning lights will blink key toward the rear of the vehicle.
once to indicate that the system is If any door, liftgate (tailgate) or
armed. engine hood remains open, the theft-
If any door, liftgate (tailgate) or alarm will not arm.
engine hood remains open, the haz-
ard warning lights won't operate and ✽ NOTICE
theft-alarm will not arm. After you
close all doors, liftgate (tailgate) and If you lock or unlock the doors by
engine hood, the hazard warning using the mechanical key, the haz-
lights blink once. ard warning light won't operate.
4 18
Theft-alarm stage Disarmed stage Using the transmitter (if equipped)

The alarm will be activated if any of Using the smart key (if equipped) The system will be disarmed when
the following occurs while the system the doors are unlocked by pressing
The system will be disarmed when
is armed. the unlock button on the transmitter.
the doors are unlocked by pressing
• A door is opened without using the the unlock button on the smart key or After unlocking the doors, the hazard
transmitter, smart key or mechanical pressing the lock/unlock button of the warning lights will blink twice to indi-
key. front outside door handle with the cate that the system is disarmed.
• The liftgate (tailgate) is opened smart key in your possession. After unlocking the doors, if any door
without using the transmitter or After unlocking the doors, the hazard is not opened within 30 seconds, the
smart key. warning lights and chime will operate system will be rearmed.
• The engine hood is opened. twice to indicate that the system is
disarmed. Using the mechanical key
The horn will sound and the hazard
warning lights will blink continuously After unlocking the doors, if any door The system will be disarmed when
for approximately 30 seconds. The is not opened within 30 seconds, the the doors are unlocked with the
alarm will repeat once more unless system will be rearmed. mechanical key.
the system is disarmed. To turn off
the system, unlock the doors with the
mechanical key or transmitter or ✽ NOTICE
smart key. If you lock or unlock the doors by
using the mechanical key, the haz-
ard warning light and chime sound
won't operate.
4 19
✽ NOTICE
• Avoid trying to start the engine
while the alarm is activated. The
vehicle starting motor is disabled
during the theft-alarm stage.
• If you lose your keys, contact your
CAUTION
Do not change, alter or adjust
the theft-alarm system because
it could cause the theft-alarm
system to malfunction and
should only be serviced by an
authorized Hyundai dealer.
Malfunctions caused by improp-
er alterations, adjustments or
modifications to the theft-alarm
system are not covered by your
4 20
DOOR LOCKS
Operating door locks from Using the smart key (if equipped)
outside the vehicle
Using the folding key (if equipped)
OVF041004
ODM042006 • Doors can be locked and unlocked

by pressing the lock button(1) and
• Doors can be locked and unlocked unlock button(2) on the smart key.
OVF041003 pressing the button of the outside
door handle with the smart key in Once the doors are unlocked, they
• Doors can be locked and unlocked your possession. may be opened by pulling the door
by pressing the lock button(1) and handle. When closing the door, push
unlock button(2) on the folding key. the door by hand. Make sure that
Once the doors are unlocked, they doors are closed securely.
may be opened by pulling the door For more detailed information, refer
handle. When closing the door, push to “Smart key” in this section.
the door by hand. Make sure that
doors are closed securely.
For more detailed information, refer
to "Folding key" in this section.
4 21
Using the mechanical key in an ✽ NOTICE ✽ NOTICE

emergency situation • In cold and wet climates, door You can activate or deactivate the
■ Type A ■ Type B locks and door mechanisms may Tow Turn Unlock function. Refer to
not work properly due to freezing "User Settings" in this section.
conditions.
Lock Lock • If the door is locked/unlocked WARNING
multiple times in rapid succession
with either the vehicle key or door • If you don't close the door
Unlock Unlock lock switch, the system may stop securely, the door may open
operating temporarily in order to again.
protect the circuit and prevent • Be careful that someone's
damage to system components. body and hands are not
trapped when closing the door.
ONC045612C
If the smart key or folding key does
not operate normally, you can lock or
unlock the doors as follows:
1. Unfold the folding key or remove the
mechanical key from the smart key.
2. Insert the key into the hole of the
outside door handle. Turn the key
toward the front of the vehicle to
unlock and toward the rear of the
vehicle to lock.
4 22
Operating door locks from • If the inner door handle on either Central door lock switch
inside the vehicle front door is pulled when the door
■ Driver’s door
Door lock button lock button is in the locked position,
the door will unlock and open.
• The front door cannot be locked if
the ignition key is in the ignition
switch and the door is open.
• The door cannot be locked if the
smart key is in the vehicle and any
door is open.
ODM042014
If a power door lock ever fails to func- ■ Passenger’s door
tion while you are in the vehicle, try
one or more of the following:
ODM042013 • Operate the door unlock feature
repeatedly (both electronic and
• To unlock a door, push the door
manual) while simultaneously
lock button(1) to the “Unlock” posi-
pulling on the door handle.
tion. The red mark (2) on the button
will be visible. • Operate the other door locks and
handles, front and rear.
• To lock a door, push the door lock
button(1) to the “Lock” position. If • Lower a front window and use the
OANNCO43001
the door is locked properly, the red key to unlock the door from out-
mark (2) on the button will not be side. Operate by depressing the central
visible. door lock switch.
• To open a door, pull the door han- • When pushing down the lock switch
dle (3) outward. (1), all vehicle doors will lock.
4 23
• When pushing down the lock

release switch (2), all vehicle doors WARNING - Doors WARNING - Unlocked
will unlock. • The doors should always be vehicles
• If the key is in the ignition switch fully closed and locked while Leaving your vehicle unlocked
and front door is open, the doors the vehicle is in motion to pre- can invite theft or possible harm
will not lock even though the cen- vent accidental opening of the to you or others from someone
tral door lock switch (1) is pressed. door. Locked doors will also hiding in your vehicle while you
• If the smart key is in the vehicle discourage potential intruders are gone. Always remove the
and any door is open, the doors when the vehicle stops or ignition key, engage the parking
will not lock even though the cen- slows. brake, close all windows and
tral door lock switch (1) is pressed. • Be careful when opening lock all doors when leaving
doors and watch for vehicles, your vehicle unattended.
motorcycles, bicycles or
pedestrians approaching the
vehicle in the path of the door. WARNING - Unattended
Opening a door when some- children
thing is approaching can
cause damage or injury. An enclosed vehicle can become
extremely hot, causing death or
severe injury to unattended chil-
dren or animals who cannot
escape the vehicle. Furthermore,
children might operate features
of the vehicle that could injure
them, or they could encounter
other harm, possibly from some-
one gaining entry to the vehicle.
Never leave children or animals
unattended in your vehicle.
4 24
Impact sensing door unlock Child-protector rear door lock 3. Close the rear door.
system To open the rear door, pull the out-
All doors will be automatically side door handle.
unlocked if an impact or collision is Even though the doors are unlocked,
detected by the impact sensors while the rear door will not open by pulling
the ignition switch is ON. the inner door handle until the rear
However, the doors may not be door child safety lock is unlocked.
unlocked if mechanical problems
occur with the door lock system or
battery. WARNING - Rear door
locks
If children accidentally open the
✽ NOTICE rear doors while the vehicle is
ODMECO2031
You can select some auto door in motion, they could fall out of
lock/unlock features in “User The child safety lock is provided to the vehicle, resulting in severe
Settings” as follows; help prevent children from acciden- injury or death. To prevent chil-
• Speed sensing auto door lock tally opening the rear doors from dren from opening the rear
• Auto door unlock when the igni- inside the vehicle. The rear door doors from the inside, the rear
tion key is removed from the igni- safety locks should be used whenev- door safety locks should be
tion switch or engine is turned off. er children are in the vehicle. used whenever children are in
• Auto door lock/unlock by shifting 1. Open the rear door. the vehicle.
the shift lever out of P(Park) or 2. Insert a key (or screwdriver) into
into P(Park). the hole (1) and turn it to the lock
For more information, refer to ( ) position. When the child safe-
“User Settings” in this section. ty lock is in the lock position, the
rear door will not open even when
the inner door handle is pulled.
4 25
LIFTGATE (TAILGATE)
Non-powered liftgate • Only the liftgate (tailgate) is
(tailgate) unlocked if the liftgate (tailgate) WARNING
unlock button on the transmitter or The liftgate (tailgate) swings
Opening the liftgate (tailgate) smart key is pressed for about 1 upward. Make sure no objects
second, or the liftgate (tailgate) or people are near the rear of
handle button is pressed when the the vehicle when opening the
smart key is detected. liftgate (tailgate).
✽ NOTICE
In cold and wet climates, door lock CAUTION
and door mechanisms may not work Make certain that you close the
properly due to freezing conditions. liftgate (tailgate) before driving
your vehicle. Possible damage
may occur to the liftgate (tail-
ODM044016
gate) lift cylinders and attached
hardware if the liftgate (tailgate)
• The liftgate (tailgate) is locked or is not closed prior to driving.
unlocked when all doors are locked
or unlocked with either the key, the
transmitter, the smart key, or the
central door lock switch.
• If unlocked, the liftgate (tailgate)
can be opened by pressing the
handle switch and pulling the han-
dle up.
4 26
Closing the liftgate (tailgate)

WARNING - Exhaust WARNING - Rear cargo
fumes area
If you drive with the liftgate (tail- Occupants should never ride in
gate) open, you will draw dan- the rear cargo area where no
gerous exhaust fumes into your restraints are available. To avoid
vehicle which can cause seri- injury in the event of an acci-
ous injury or death to vehicle dent or sudden stops, occu-
occupants. If you must drive pants should always be proper-
with the liftgate (tailgate) open, ly restrained.
keep the air vents and all win-
dows open so that additional
outside air comes into the vehi-
ODM042017
cle.
To close the liftgate (tailgate), lower
and push down the liftgate (tailgate)
firmly. Make sure that the liftgate
(tailgate) is securely latched.
4 27
Power liftgate (Power tailgate) (if equipped) ✽ NOTICE

■ Type A When the engine is not running, the
power liftgate (power tailgate) can be
operated regardless of gear position.
However, if ignition switch is ON
position, the power liftgate (power
tailgate) can operate when the auto-
matic shift lever is in P (Park).
WARNING
ONC045605 ODM044504 Never leave children or animals
■ Type B unattended in your vehicle.
Children or animals might oper-
ate the power liftgate (power
tailgate) that could result in
injury to themselves or others,
or damage the vehicle.
WARNING
Make sure there are no people
ONC044081 ODM044505 or objects around the power lift-
(1) Power liftgate (Power tailgate) open/close button gate (power tailgate) before
operating the power liftgate
(2) Power liftgate (Power tailgate) handle switch
(power tailgate). Wait until the
(3) Power liftgate (Power tailgate) inner switch liftgate (tailgate) is opened fully
and stopped before loading or
unloading cargo or passengers
from the vehicle.
4 28
Opening the liftgate (tailgate) ■ Type A

CAUTION
Do not close or open the power
liftgate (power tailgate) manual-
ly. This may cause damage to
the power liftgate (power tail-
gate). If it is necessary to close
or open the power liftgate
(power tailgate) manually when
the battery is discharged or dis-
connected, do not apply exces- ONC045605
■ Type B
sive force.
ONC047116N
The power liftgate (power tailgate)
will open automatically by doing one
of the following:
• Press the liftgate (tailgate) unlock
button on the transmitter or smart
key for approximately one second.
ONC044081
• Press the power liftgate (power
tailgate) open button for approxi-
mately one second.
For emergency stop while operating,

press the power liftgate (power tail-
gate) open button shortly.
4 29
Closing the liftgate (tailgate) For emergency stop while operating,

■ Type A press the power liftgate (power tail-
gate) close button shortly.
ODM044504 ONC045605
■ Type B
• Press the liftgate (tailgate) handle
switch carrying the smart key with
you.
ONC044081
• Press the power liftgate (power
tailgate) close button for approxi-
mately one second when the lift-
gate (tailgate) is opened.
The liftgate (tailgate) will close and
lock automatically.
4 30
Power liftgate (Power tailgate)

non-opening conditions CAUTION
The power liftgate (power tailgate) Operating the Power liftgate
will not open or close automatically, (Power tailgate) more than 5
when the vehicle is moving more times continuously could cause
than 2 mph (3 km/h). damages to the operating
motor. In this case, the system
enters into a thermal protection
WARNING mode. In thermal protection
The chime will sound continu- mode, the Power liftgate (Power
ously if you drive over 2 mph (3 tailgate) can not operate and the
ODM044505 km/h) with the liftgate (tailgate) chime will sound for 3 times by
opened. Stop your vehicle any switch inputs. Leave your
• Press the power liftgate (power Power liftgate (Power tailgate)
tailgate) inner switch for approxi- immediately at a safe place and
check if your liftgate (tailgate) is system for rest about 1 minute
mately one second when the lift- and then operate.
gate (tailgate) is opened. opened.
The liftgate (tailgate) will close and
lock automatically.
4 31
✽ NOTICE Automatic reversal However, if the resistance is weak

• The power liftgate (power tailgate) such as from an object that is thin or
can be operated when the engine is soft, or the liftgate (tailgate) is near
not running. However the power the latched position, the automatic
liftgate (power tailgate) operation stop and reversal may not detect the
consumes large amounts of vehicle resistance.
electric power. To prevent the bat- If the automatic reversal feature
tery from being discharged, do not operates continuously more than
operate it excessively. twice during opening or closing oper-
• To prevent the battery from being ation, the power liftgate (power tail-
discharged, do not leave the power gate) may stop at that position. At
liftgate (power tailgate) in the this time, close the liftgate (tailgate)
open position for a long lime. manually and operate the liftgate
ODM044506 (tailgate) automatically again.
• Do not modify or repair any part
of the power liftgate (power tail- During power opening and closing if
gate) by yourself. This must be the power liftgate (power tailgate) is
done by an authorized HYUNDAI blocked by an object or part of the
dealer. body, the power liftgate (power tail-
• When jacking up the vehicle to gate) will detect the resistance.
change a tire or repair the vehicle, • If the resistance is detected while
do not operate the power liftgate opening the liftgate (tailgate), it will
(power tailgate). This could cause stop and move in the opposite
the power liftgate (power tailgate) direction.
to operate improperly. • If the resistance is detected while
• In cold and wet climates, the closing the liftgate (tailgate), it will
power liftgate (power tailgate) may stop and move in the opposite
not work properly due to freezing direction.
conditions.
4 32
How to reset the power liftgate Power liftgate (Power tailgate)

WARNING (power tailgate) opening height user setting
Never intentionally place any If the battery has been discharged or
object or part of your body in disconnected, or if the related fuse
the path of the power liftgate has been replaced or disconnected,
(power tailgate) to make sure for the power liftgate (power tailgate)
the automatic reversal oper- to operate normally, reset the power
ates. liftgate (power tailgate) as follow:
1. Put the shift lever in P (Park).
2. While pressing the liftgate (tail-
CAUTION gate) inner switch, press the lift-
Do not put heavy items on the gate (tailgate) handle switch for
power liftgate (power tailgate) more than 3 seconds. (the chime
before you operate the power will sound) ODM044505
liftgate (power tailgate). 3. Close the liftgate (tailgate) manu-
Additional weight on liftgate ally. The driver may set the height of a
(tailgate) could cause damages fully opened liftgate (tailgate) by fol-
to the system. lowing the below instruction.
If the power liftgate (power tailgate) 1. Position the liftgate (tailgate) man-
does not work properly after the ually to the height you prefer.
above procedure, have the system
checked by an authorized HYUNDAI 2. Press the liftgate (tailgate) inner
dealer. switch for more than 3 seconds.
3. Close the liftgate (tailgate) manu-
ally after hearing the buzzer
✽ NOTICE sound.
If the power liftgate (power tailgate)
does not operate normally, check
again if the gear position is in right The liftgate (tailgate) will open to the
position. height the driver has set up.
4 33
Smart Liftgate (Smart Tailgate) How to use the Smart Liftgate

WARNING - Exhaust (if equipped) (Smart Tailgate)
fumes The liftgate (tailgate) can be opened
If you drive with the liftgate (tail- with no-touch activation satisfying all
gate) open, you will draw dan- the conditions below.
gerous exhaust fumes into your • After 15 seconds when all doors
vehicle which can cause seri- are closed and locked
ous injury or death to vehicle • Positioned in the detecting area for
occupants. If you must drive more than 3 seconds.
with the liftgate (tailgate) open,
keep the air vents and all win-
dows open so that additional ✽ NOTICE
outside air comes into the vehi- • The Smart Liftgate (Smart
cle. Tailgate) does not operate when:
ODM044507 - The smart key is detected within
On the vehicle equipped with a smart 15 seconds after the doors are
key, the liftgate (tailgate) can be closed and locked, and is contin-
WARNING - Rear cargo uously detected.
area opened with no-touch activation
using the Smart Liftgate (Smart - The smart key is detected within
Occupants should never ride in Tailgate) system. 15 seconds after the doors are
the rear cargo area where no closed and locked, and 60 inches
restraints are available. (1.5 m) from the front door han-
To avoid injury in the event of dles. (for vehicles equipped with
an accident or sudden stops, Welcome Light)
occupants should always be - A door is not locked or closed.
properly restrained. - The smart key is in the vehicle.
4 34
1. Setting ✽ NOTICE
To activate the Smart Liftgate (Smart Do not approach the detecting area
Tailgate), go to User Settings Mode if you do not want the liftgate (tail-
and select Smart Liftgate (Smart gate) to open. If you have uninten-
Tailgate) on the LCD display. tionally entered the detecting area
and the hazard warning lights and
❈ For more details, refer to "LCD dis- chime starts to operate, leave the
play" in this chapter. detecting area with the smart key.
The liftgate (tailgate) will stay
closed.
ODM044508
2. Detect and Alert
If you are positioned in the detecting
area (20~40 inches (50~100 cm)
behind the vehicle) carrying a smart
key, the hazard warning lights will
blink and chime will sound for about
3 seconds to alert you the smart key
has been detected and the liftgate
(tailgate) will open.
4 35
How to deactivate the

WARNING Smart Liftgate (Smart Tailgate)
• Make certain that you close function using the smart key
the liftgate (tailgate) before ■ Smart key
driving your vehicle.
• Make sure there are no people
or objects around the liftgate
(tailgate) before opening or
closing the liftgate (tailgate).
• Make sure objects in the rear
cargo area do not come out
ODM044509
when opening the liftgate (tail-
3. Automatic opening gate) on the slope way. It may
The hazard warning lights will blink cause serious injury.
and chime will sound 2 times and • Make sure to deactivate the OVF041004
then the liftgate (tailgate) will slowly Smart Liftgate (Smart Tailgate)
open. 1. Door lock
function when washing your
vehicle. 2. Door unlock
Otherwise, the liftgate (tail- 3. Liftgate (Tailgate) open
gate) may open inadvertently. 4. Panic
• The key should be kept out of
reach of children. Children If you press any button of the smart
may inadvertently open the key during the Detect and Alert
Smart Liftgate (Smart Tailgate) stage, the Smart Liftgate (Smart
while playing around the rear Tailgate) function will be deactivated.
area of the vehicle.
Make sure to be aware of how to
deactivate the Smart Liftgate (Smart
Tailgate) function for emergency situ-
ations.
4 36
✽ NOTICE Detecting area ✽ NOTICE

• If you press the door unlock but- • The Smart Liftgate (Smart
ton (2), the Smart Liftgate (Smart Tailgate) function will not work if
Tailgate) function will be deacti- 20~40 inches any of the following occurs:
vated temporarily. But, if you do - The smart key is close to a radio
not open any door for 30 seconds, transmitter such as a radio sta-
the Smart Liftgate (Smart tion or an airport which can
Tailgate) function will be activated interfere with normal operation
again. of the transmitter.
• If you press the liftgate (tailgate) - The smart key is near a mobile
open button (3) for more than 1 two way radio system or a cellu-
second, the liftgate (tailgate) lar phone.
opens. - Another vehicle's smart key is
ODM044510K
• If you press the door lock button being operated close to your
(1) or liftgate (tailgate) open but- • The Smart Liftgate (Smart vehicle.
ton (3) when the Smart Liftgate Tailgate) operates with a welcome • The detecting range may decrease
(Smart Tailgate) function is not in alert if the smart key is detected or increase when :
the Detect and Alert stage, the within 20~40 inches (50~100 cm) - One side of the tire is raised to
Smart Liftgate (Smart Tailgate) from the liftgate (tailgate). replace a tire or to inspect the
function will not be deactivated. • The alert stops at once if the smart vehicle.
• In case you have deactivated the key is positioned outside the - The vehicle is slantingly parked
Smart Liftgate (Smart Tailgate) detecting area during the Detect on a slope or unpaved road, etc.
function by pressing the smart key and Alert stage.
button and opened a door, the
Smart Liftgate (Smart Tailgate)
function can be activated again by
closing and locking all doors.
4 37
Emergency liftgate (tailgate)

safety release WARNING
• For emergencies, be fully
aware of the location of the
emergency liftgate (tailgate)
safety release lever in this
vehicle and how to open the
liftgate (tailgate) if you are
accidentally locked in the lug-
gage compartment.
• No one should be allowed to
occupy the luggage compart-
ment of the vehicle at any time.
The luggage compartment is a
ODM042018
very dangerous location in the
Your vehicle is equipped with the event of a crash.
emergency liftgate (tailgate) safety • Use the release lever for
release lever located on the bottom emergencies only. Use
of the liftgate (tailgate). When some- extreme caution, especially
one is inadvertently locked in the lug- while the vehicle is in motion.
gage compartment, the liftgate (tail-
gate) can be opened by doing as fol-
lows:
1. Remove the cover.
2. Push the release lever to the right.
3. Push up the liftgate (tailgate).
4 38
WINDOWS
(1) Driver’s door power window
switch
(2) Front passenger’s door power
window switch
(3) Rear door (left) power window
switch
(4) Rear door (right) power window
switch
(5) Window opening and closing
(6) Automatic power window
up/down
(7) Power window lock switch
✽ NOTICE
In cold and wet climates, power win-
dows may not work properly due to
freezing conditions.
ONC045081
4 39
Power windows ✽ NOTICE Window opening and closing

The ignition switch must be in the ON While driving with the rear windows
position for power windows to operate. down or with the sunroof (if
Each door has a power window equipped) in an open (or partially
switch that controls that door's win- open) position, your vehicle may
dow. The driver has a power window demonstrate a wind buffeting or
lock switch which can block the oper- pulsation noise. This noise is a nor-
ation of passenger windows. The dri- mal occurrence and can be reduced
ver’s door has a master power win- or eliminated by taking the follow-
dow switch that controls all the win- ing actions. If the noise occurs with
dows in the vehicle. The power win- one or both of the rear windows
dows can be operated for approxi- down, partially lower both front
mately 30 seconds after the ignition windows approximately one inch. If
ODM042020
key is removed or turned to the ACC you experience the noise with the
or LOCK position. However, if the sunroof open, slightly reduce the To open or close a window, press
front doors open, the power windows size of the sunroof opening. down or pull up the front portion of
cannot be operated within the 30 the corresponding switch to the first
second period. detent position (5).
4 40
Auto up/down window (front seat) If the power window is not operated
(if equipped) correctly, the automatic power win-
dow system must be reset as follows:
1. Turn the ignition switch to the ON
position.
2. Close windows and continue
pulling up on the power window
switch for at least 1 second after
the window is completely closed.
OUN026013
Automatic reversal
ODM042021 If the upward movement of the win-
Pressing down or pulling up the dow is blocked by an object or part of
power window switch momentarily to the body, the window will detect the
the second detent position (6) com- resistance and will stop upward
pletely lowers or lifts the window movement. The window will then
even when the switch is released. To lower approximately 11.8 in. (30 cm)
stop the window at the desired posi- to allow the object to be cleared.
tion while the window is in operation,
momentarily pull or push the switch
in the direction opposite of the win-
dow’s movement.
4 41
If the window detects the resistance Power window lock button

while the power window switch is WARNING
pulled up continuously, the window Always check for obstructions
will stop upward movement then before raising any window to
lower approximately 1 in. (2.5 cm). If avoid injuries or vehicle damage.
the power window switch is pulled up If an object less than 0.16 in. (4
continuously again within 5 seconds mm) in diameter is caught
after the window is lowered by the between the window glass and
automatic window reversal feature, the upper window channel, the
the automatic window reversal will automatic reverse window may
not operate. not detect the resistance and will
not stop and reverse direction.
✽ NOTICE ODM042022
The automatic reverse feature for The driver can disable the power
the driver’s window is only active window switches on the rear passen-
when the “auto up” feature is used gers’ doors by pressing the power
by fully pulling up the switch. The window lock switch to the lock posi-
automatic reverse feature will not tion(pressed).
operate if the window is raised using
the halfway position on the power When the power window lock switch
window switch. is pressed :
• The driver’s master control can
operate all the power windows.
• The front passenger’s control can
operate the front passenger’s
power window.
• The rear passenger’s control can-
not operate the rear passenger’s
power window.
4 42
CAUTION WARNING - Windows

• To prevent possible damage • NEVER leave the keys in your
to the power window system, vehicle with unsupervised
do not open or close two win- children, when the engine is
dows or more at the same running.
time. This will also ensure the • NEVER leave any child unat-
longevity of the fuse. tended in the vehicle. Even
• Never try to operate the main very young children may inad-
switch on the driver's door vertently cause the vehicle to
and the individual door win- move, entangle themselves in
dow switch in opposing direc- the windows, or otherwise
tions at the same time. If this is injure themselves or others.
done, the window will stop and • Always double check to make
cannot be opened or closed. sure all arms, hands, head
and other obstructions are
safely out of the way before
closing a window.
• Do not allow children to play
with the power windows. Keep
the driver’s door power win-
dow lock switch in the LOCK
position (depressed). Serious
injury can result from uninten-
tional window operation by
the child.
• Do not extend any head or
arms outside through the win-
dow opening while driving.
4 43
HOOD
Opening the hood
WARNING
ODM046024L
2. Go to the front of the vehicle, raise ODMNMC2034
ODM042023
the hood slightly, pull the second-
1. Pull the release lever to unlatch ary latch (1) inside of the hood up When you check the engine
the hood. The hood should pop and lift the hood (2). compartment, please make sure
open slightly. your head is not injured by the
3. Raise the hood. It will raise com- hood safety hook which is
pletely by itself after it has been located inside of the hood.
WARNING raised about halfway.
Open the hood after turning off
the engine on a flat surface,
shifting the shift lever to the
P(Park) position, and setting the
parking brake.
4 44
Closing the hood

1. Before closing the hood, check the
WARNING
following: • Before closing the hood,
ensure that all obstructions
• All filler caps in engine compart-
are removed from the hood
ment must be correctly installed.
opening. Closing the hood
• Gloves, rags or any other com- with an obstruction present in
bustible material must be removed the hood opening may result
from the engine compartment. in property damage or severe
2. Lower the hood halfway and push personal injury.
down to securely lock in place. • Do not leave gloves, rags or
any other combustible materi-
al in the engine compartment.
Doing so may cause a heat-
induced fire.
• Always double check to be
sure that the hood is firmly
latched before driving away. If
it is not latched, the hood
could open while the vehicle
is being driven, causing a
total loss of visibility, which
might result in an accident.
• Do not move the vehicle with
the hood in the raised posi-
tion, as vision is obstructed
and the hood could fall or be
damaged.
4 45
FUEL FILLER DOOR

Opening the fuel filler door Closing the fuel filler door
1. To install the cap, turn it clockwise
until it clicks one time. This indi-
cates that the cap is securely tight-
ened.
2. Close the fuel filler door and push
it in lightly making sure that it is
securely closed.
ODM044026
ODM042025 1. Stop the engine.

2. Pull the fuel filler door opener lever,
The fuel filler door must be opened then the fuel filler door will pop up.
from inside the vehicle by pulling the
fuel filler door opener lever located 3. Pull the fuel filler door (1) out to
on the driver’s door. fully open.
4. To remove the cap, turn the fuel
tank cap (2) counterclockwise.
✽ NOTICE
5. Refuel as needed.
If the fuel filler door will not open
because ice has formed around it,
tap lightly or push on the door to
break the ice and release the door.
Do not pry on the door. If necessary,
spray around the door with an
approved de-icer fluid (do not use
radiator anti-freeze) or move the
vehicle to a warm place and allow
the ice to melt.
4 46
WARNING - Refueling WARNING - Refueling (Continued)

• If pressurized fuel sprays out, dangers • Do not get back into a vehicle
it can cover your clothes or Automotive fuels are flammable once you have begun refuel-
skin and thus subject you to materials. When refueling, please ing since you can generate
the risk of fire and burns. note the following guidelines static electricity by touching,
Always remove the fuel cap carefully. Failure to follow these rubbing or sliding against any
carefully and slowly. If the cap guidelines may result in severe item or fabric (polyester, satin,
is venting fuel or if you hear a personal injury, severe burns or nylon, etc.) capable of produc-
hissing sound, wait until the death by fire or explosion. ing static electricity. Static
condition stops before com- electricity discharge can
• Read and follow all warnings ignite fuel vapors resulting in
pletely removing the cap. posted at the gas station facility. rapid burning. If you must re-
• Do not "top off" after the noz- • Before refueling, note the enter the vehicle, you should
zle automatically shuts off location of the Emergency once again eliminate poten-
when refueling. Gasoline Shut-Off, if available, tially dangerous static elec-
• Always check that the fuel cap at the gas station facility. tricity discharge by touching a
is installed securely to pre- • Before touching the fuel noz- metal part of the vehicle, away
vent fuel spillage in the event zle, you should eliminate from the fuel filler neck, noz-
of an accident. potentially dangerous static zle or other gasoline source.
electricity discharge by touch- (Continued)
ing another metal part of the
vehicle, a safe distance away
from the fuel filler neck, noz-
zle, or other gas source.
(Continued)
4 47
(Continued) (Continued) CAUTION

• When using an approved • When refueling, always shut • Make sure to refuel your vehi-
portable fuel container, be sure the engine off. Sparks pro- cle according to the "Fuel
to place the container on the duced by electrical compo- requirements" suggested in
ground prior to refueling. Static nents related to the engine section 1.
electricity discharge from the can ignite fuel vapors causing
container can ignite fuel vapors a fire. Once refueling is com- • If the fuel filler cap requires
causing a fire. Once refueling plete, check to make sure the replacement, use only a gen-
has begun, contact with the filler cap and filler door are uine HYUNDAI cap or the
vehicle should be maintained securely closed, before start- equivalent specified for your
until the filling is complete. ing the engine. vehicle. An incorrect fuel filler
cap can result in a serious
Use only approved portable • DO NOT use matches or a malfunction of the fuel system
plastic fuel containers designed lighter and DO NOT SMOKE or or emission control system.
to carry and store gasoline. leave a lit cigarette in your
vehicle while at a gas station • Do not spill fuel on the exterior
• Do not use cellular phones surfaces of the vehicle. Any
while refueling. Electric cur- especially during refueling.
Automotive fuel is highly type of fuel spilled on painted
rent and/or electronic interfer- surfaces may damage the paint.
ence from cellular phones can flammable and can, when
potentially ignite fuel vapors ignited, result in fire. • After refueling, make sure the
causing a fire. • If a fire breaks out during refu- fuel cap is installed securely
eling, leave the vicinity of the to prevent fuel spillage in the
(Continued) event of an accident.
vehicle, and immediately con-
tact the manager of the gas
station and then contact the
local fire department or 911.
Follow any safety instructions
they provide.
4 48
Fuel filler door manual release
ODM042027
If the fuel filler door does not open

using the remote fuel filler door
release, you can open it manually.
Unsnap and remove the panel in the
cargo area. Pull the handle outward
slightly.
CAUTION
Do not pull the handle exces-
sively, otherwise the luggage
area trim or release handle may
be damaged.
4 49
PANORAMIC SUNROOF (IF EQUIPPED)

■ Type A The sunroof can be operated for
approximately 30 seconds after the CAUTION - Sunroof
ignition key is removed or turned to control lever
the ACC or LOCK position. However, Do not continue to move the sun-
if the front doors are opened, the roof control lever after the sun-
sunroof cannot be opened even with- roof is fully opened, closed, or
in the 30 seconds period. tilted. Damage to the motor or
system components could occur.
• In cold and wet climates, the sun-
ODM042028
roof may not work properly due to
■ Type B freezing conditions. CAUTION
• After the vehicle is washed or in a Make sure the sunroof is fully
rainstorm, be sure to wipe off any closed when leaving your vehi-
water that is on the sunroof before cle. If the sunroof is opened, rain
operating it. or snow may leak through the
sunroof and wet the interior as
well as cause theft.
ODM045028
If your vehicle is equipped with a
sunroof, you can slide or tilt your
sunroof with the sunroof control lever
located on the overhead console.
4 50
Sunroof open warning The warning chime will sound for a few
(if equipped) seconds and a message "Sunroof CAUTION
Open" will appear on the LCD display. Do not extend any luggage out
Close the sunroof securely when side the sunroof while driving.
leaving your vehicle.
WARNING
• Never adjust the sunroof or
sunshade while driving. This
could result in loss of control
and an accident that may
cause death, serious injury, or
property damage.
ODM046634L
• If you would like to carry items
If the driver removes the ignition key on the roof using a cross bar,
(smart key: turns off the engine) do not operate the sunroof.
when the sunroof is not fully closed. • When carrying cargo on the
roof, do not load heavy items
above the sunroof or glass roof.
• Do not allow children to oper-
ate the sunroof.
4 51
Sunshade To close the sunshade when the

sunroof glass is closed CAUTION
- Press the sunshade close button • Do not pull or push the sun-
(2). shade by hand. It could cause
sunshade failure.
❈ When you press the sunshade
close button (2) with the sunroof • Close the sunroof when driv-
glass opened, the sunshade will ing through dusty roads. Dust
be closed halfway, then sunroof may cause a malfunction of
glass will be closed and then the vehicle system.
sunshade will be fully closed
finally.
ODM042029 To stop the sliding at any point, press

the sunshade control switch momen-
To open the sunshade tarily.
Press the sunshade open button (1).
✽ NOTICE
Wrinkles formed on the sunshade as
material characteristic are normal.
4 52
Sliding the sunroof When the sunshade is opened Tilting the sunroof
If you pull the sunroof control lever
backward, the sunroof glass will slide
all the way open. To stop the sunroof
movement at any point, pull or push
the sunroof control lever momentarily.
✽ NOTICE
Only the front glass of the panora-
ma sunroof opens and closes.
ODM042030 ODM042033
When the sunshade is closed When the sunshade is closed

If you pull the sunroof control lever If you push the sunroof control lever
backward, the sunshade and sunroof upward, the sunshade will slide
glass will slide all the way open. To halfway open then the sunroof glass
stop the sunroof movement at any will tilt.
point, pull or push the sunroof control To stop the sunroof movement at any
lever momentarily. point, pull or push the sunroof control
lever momentarily.
When the sunshade is opened

If you push the sunroof control lever
upward, the sunroof glass will tilt.
To stop the sunroof movement at any
point, pull or push the sunroof control
lever momentarily.
4 53
Closing the sunroof Automatic reversal

To close (or tilt down) the sunroof
WARNING - Sunroof
• Be careful that someone’s
- Pull the sunroof glass control lever head, hands and body are not
downward (or forward). trapped by a closing sunroof.
• Do not extend the face, neck,
❈ When you pull the sunroof glass arms or body outside through
control lever downward (or for- an opened sunroof while driv-
ward) with the sunshade opened, ing.
the glass will be closed (or tilt • Make sure your hands and face
down). are safely out of the way before
closing a sunroof.
To stop the sunroof movement at any OYF049215 • A panoramic sunroof is made of
point, pull or push the sunroof control glass, therefore it may break in
lever momentarily. If an object or part of the body is
detected while the sunroof glass or an accident. If you do not have
sunshade is closing automatically, it your seat belt on, you may con-
will reverse the direction, and then tact the broken glass and get
stop. injured or killed. For all passen-
gers safety, have the seat belts
The auto reverse function does not
on. (ex. seat belt, CRS, etc.)
work if a tiny obstacle is between the
sliding glass or sunshade and the
sunroof sash. You should always
check that all passengers and
objects are away from the sunroof
before closing it.
Do not extend the face, neck, arms
or body outside the sunroof while
driving.
4 54
Resetting the sunroof 5.Push the sunroof control lever for-

CAUTION ward in the direction of close, until
Sunroof needs to be reset if (in the
• Periodically remove any dirt followings) the sunroof operates as follows
that may accumulate on the again:
guide rail. - Battery is discharged or discon-
nected or the related fuse has been
• If you drive with the sunroof replaced or disconnected The sunshade and sunroof glass
opened right after a car wash
- The one-touch sliding function of slide open → The sunroof glass
or rain, water may get inside
the sunroof does not normally oper- slide close → The sunshade close
the vehicle.
ate
Then, release the lever.
1.Turn the ignition switch to the ON
CAUTION - Sunroof motor position.
damage When this is complete, the sunroof
2.Close the sunshade and sunroof system has been reset.
If you try to open the sunroof completely if opened.
when the temperature is below
3.Release the sunroof control lever.
freezing or when the sunroof is ✽ NOTICE
covered with snow or ice, the 4.Push the sunroof control lever for-
ward in the direction of close
If you do not reset the sunroof, it
glass or the motor could be may not work properly.
damaged. (about 10 seconds) until the sun-
roof moves a little. Then, release
the lever.
4 55
STEERING WHEEL
Electric power steering (EPS) ✽ NOTICE
CAUTION
The power steering uses a motor to The following symptoms may occur
assist you in steering the vehicle. If • If the Electric Power Steering during normal vehicle operation:
the engine is off or if the power steer- System does not operate nor- • The EPS warning light does not
ing system becomes inoperative, the mally, the warning light will illuminate.
vehicle may still be steered, but it will illuminate on the instrument • The steering gets heavy immedi-
require increased steering effort. cluster. The steering wheel ately after turning the ignition
may become difficult to con- switch on. This happens as the sys-
The motor driven power steering is trol or operate abnormally.
controlled by a power steering con- tem performs the EPS system
Take your vehicle to an diagnostics. When the diagnostics
trol unit which senses the steering authorized HYUNDAI dealer
wheel torque and vehicle speed to is completed, the steering wheel
and have the vehicle checked will return to its normal condition.
command the motor. as soon as possible. • A click noise may be heard from
The steering becomes heavier as • When you operate the steer- the EPS relay after the ignition
the vehicle’s speed increases and ing wheel in low temperature, switch is turned to the ON or
becomes lighter as the vehicle’s abnormal noise could occur. If LOCK (OFF) position.
speed decreases for optimum steer- temperature rises, the noise • A motor noise may be heard when
ing control. will disappear.This is a normal the vehicle is at a stop or at a low
Should you notice any change in the condition. driving speed.
effort required to steer during normal • When the vehicle is stationary, • If the Electric Power Steering
vehicle operation, have the power if you turn the steering wheel System does not operate normally,
steering checked by an authorized all the way to the left or right the warning light will illuminate on
HYUNDAI dealer. continuously, the steering the instrument cluster. The steer-
wheel becomes heavier from ing wheel may become difficult to
the end. But this is for your control or operate abnormally.
safety, not system malfunc- Take your vehicle to an authorized
tion. As time passes, the HYUNDAI dealer and have the
steering wheel return to its vehicle checked as soon as possible.
normal condition. (Continued)
4 56
(Continued) Tilt steering

• When you operate the steering A tilt steering wheel allows you to
wheel in low temperature, abnor- adjust the steering wheel before you
mal noise could occur. If tempera- drive. You can also raise it to give
ture rises, the noise will disappear. your legs more room when you exit
This is a normal condition. and enter the vehicle (if equipped).
• When the charging system warn-
ing light comes on or the voltage is
low (When the alternator (or bat- The steering wheel should be posi-
tery) does not operate normally or tioned so that it is comfortable for
it malfunctions), the steering wheel you to drive, while permitting you to
may get heavy and become diffi- see the instrument panel warning ODM042036
cult to control operate abnormally. lights and gauges.
To change the steering wheel angle,
pull down the lock release lever (1),
WARNING - Steering adjust the steering wheel to the
desired angle (2) and height (if
• Never adjust the angle and
equipped) (3), then pull up the lock-
height of steering wheel while
release lever to lock the steering
driving. You may lose your
wheel in place. Be sure to adjust the
steering control and cause
steering wheel to the desired posi-
severe personal injury or acci-
tion before driving.
dents.
• After adjusting, push the
steering wheel both up and
down to be certain it is locked
in position.
4 57
Heated steering wheel ✽ NOTICE Horn

(if equipped) The heated steering wheel will turn
off automatically approximately 30
minutes after the heated steering
wheel is turned on.
CAUTION
Do not install any grip to oper-
ate the steering wheel. This
causes damage to the heated
steering wheel system.
ONC047619N
OANNCO43006
To sound the horn, press the area
With the ignition switch in the ON indicated by the horn symbol on your
position, pressing the heated steer- steering wheel (see illustration). The
ing wheel button warms the steering horn will operate only when this area
wheel. The indicator on the button is pressed.
will illuminate and notify you on the Check the horn regularly to be sure it
LCD display. operates properly.
To turn the heated steering wheel off,
press the button once again. The
indicator on the button will turn off
and notify you on the LCD display.
4 58
CAUTION
• Do not strike the horn severe-
ly to operate it, or hit it with
your fist. Do not press on the
horn with a sharp-pointed
object.
• When cleaning the steering
wheel, do not use an organic
solvent such as thinner, ben-
zene, alcohole and gasoline.
Doing so may damage the
steering wheel.
4 59
MIRRORS
Inside rearview mirror Day/night rearview mirror Blue Link® center (if equipped)
Adjust the rearview mirror so that the ■ Type A
center view through the rear window
is seen. Make this adjustment before
you start driving.
Night
WARNING - Rear visibility

Do not place objects in the rear
seat or cargo area which would
interfere with your vision
through the rear window. Day OFS042222N
■ Type B
OMD040031
Make this adjustment before you
WARNING start driving and while the day/night
Do not modify the inside mirror lever is in the day position.
and do not install a wide mirror. Pull the day/night lever toward you to
It could result in injury, during reduce glare from the headlights of
an accident or deployment of the vehicles behind you during night
the air bag. driving.
Remember that you lose some
OYF042250N
rearview clarity in the night position.
For the details, refer to the Blue Link®
Owner’s Guide, navigation manual or
audio manual. The audio manual is in
this section.
4 60
Electric chromic mirror (ECM) Automatic-Dimming Night Vision

with compass and HomeLink® Safety™ (NVS®) Mirror
system (if equipped) The NVS® Mirror in your vehicle is
Your vehicle may be equipped with a the most advanced way to reduce
Gentex Automatic-Dimming Mirror annoying glare in the rearview mirror
with a Z-Nav™ Electronic Compass during any driving situation. For more
Display and an Integrated HomeLink® information regarding NVS® mirrors
Wireless Control System. and other applications, please refer
During nighttime driving, this feature to the Gentex website:
will automatically detect and reduce www.gentex.com
rearview mirror glare while the com-
pass indicates the direction the vehi- OEN046033N
cle is pointed. The HomeLink® (1) Channel 1 button
CAUTION
Universal Transceiver allows you to The NVS® Mirror automatically
(2) Channel 2 button
activate your garage door(s), electric reduces glare during driving con-
gate, home lighting, etc. (3) Status indicator LED ditions based upon light levels
(4) Channel 3 button monitored in front of the vehicle
(5) Rear light sensor and from the rear of the vehicle.
These light sensors are visible
(6) Dimming ON/OFF button through openings in the front and
(7) Compass control button rear of the mirror case. Any object
(8) Compass display that would obstruct either light
sensor will degrade the automat-
ic dimming control feature.
4 61
Automatic-dimming function Z-Nav™ Compass Display Compass function

Your mirror will automatically dim The NVS™ Mirror in your vehicle is The Compass can be turned ON and
upon detecting glare from the vehi- also equipped with a Z-Nav™ OFF and will remember the last state
cles traveling behind you. The auto- Compass that shows the vehicle when the ignition is cycled. To turn
dimming function can be controlled Compass heading in the Display the display feature ON/OFF:
by pushing the ON/OFF Button: Window using the 8 basic cardinal 1. Press and release the button to
headings (N, NE, E, SE, etc.). turn the display feature OFF.
1. Pressing the button turns the auto- 2. Press and release the button
dimming function OFF which is again to turn the display back ON.
indicated by the green Status Additional options can be set with
Indicator LED turning off. press and hold sequences of the
2. Pressing the button again turns button and are detailed below.
the auto-dimming function ON
which is indicated by the green
Status Indicator LED turning on. There is a difference between mag-
netic north and true north. The com-
pass in the mirror can compensate
✽ NOTICE for this difference when it knows the
The mirror defaults to the ON posi- Magnetic Zone in which it is operat-
tion each time the vehicle is started. ing. This is set either by the dealer or
by the user. The operating Zone
Numbers for North America are
shown in the figure on the following
section.
4 62
To adjust the Zone setting:

1. Determine the desired Zone
Number based upon your current
location on the Zone Map.
2. Press and hold the button for
more than 3 but less than 6 sec-
onds, the current Zone Number
will appear on the display.
3. Pressing and holding the button
again will cause the numbers to
increment (Note: they will repeat
…13, 14, 15, 1, 2, …). Releasing
the button when the desired Zone
Number appears on the display
will set the new Zone.
4. Within about 5 seconds the com-
pass will start displaying a com-
pass heading again.
There are some conditions that can

cause changes to the vehicle mag-
nets, such as installing a ski rack or
a CB antenna. Body repair work on
the vehicle can also cause changes
to the vehicle's magnetic field. In
B520C05NF these situations, the compass will
need to be re-calibrated to quickly
correct for these changes. To re-cali-
brate the compass:
4 63
1. Press and hold the button for Retain the original transmitter of the
more than 6 seconds. When the CAUTION RF device you are programming for
compass memory is cleared a "C" Before programming HomeLink® use in other vehicles as well as for
will appear in the display. to a garage door opener or gate future HomeLink® programming. It is
2. To calibrate the compass, drive operator, make sure that people also suggested that upon the sale of
the vehicle in 2 complete circles at and objects are out of the way of the vehicle, the programmed
less than 5 mph (8 km/h). the device to prevent potential HomeLink® buttons be erased for
harm or damage. Do not use security purposes.
HomeLink® with any garage door
Integrated HomeLink® Wireless Control opener that lacks the safety stop
System and reverse features required by
The HomeLink® Wireless Control U.S. federal safety standards
System provides a convenient way to (this includes any garage door
replace up to three hand-held radio- opener model manufactured
frequency (RF) transmitters with a before April 1, 1982). A garage
single built-in device. This innovative door that cannot detect an object
feature will learn the radio frequency - signaling the door to stop and
codes of most current transmitters to reverse - does not meet current
operate devices such as gate opera- U.S. federal safety standards.
tors, garage door openers, entry Using a garage door opener with-
door locks, security systems, even out these features increases the
home lighting. Both standard and risk of serious injury or death.
rolling code-equipped transmitters
can be programmed by following the
outlined procedures. Additional
HomeLink® information can be found
at: www.homelink.com or by calling
1-800-355-3515.
4 64
Programming HomeLink® Standard programming 5. Press and hold the just-trained

HomeLink® button and observe
✽ NOTICE To train most devices, follow these
the red Status Indicator LED. If the
instructions:
• When programming a garage indicator light stays on constantly,
door opener, it is advised to park 1. For first-time programming, press programming is complete and
the vehicle outside of the garage. and hold the two outside buttons, your device should activate when
• It is recommended that a new bat- HomeLink® Channel 1 and Channel the HomeLink® button is pressed
tery be placed in the hand-held 3 Buttons, until the indicator light and released.
transmitter of the device being pro- begins to flash (after 20 seconds).
Release both buttons. Do not hold 6. To program the remaining two
grammed to HomeLink® for quick- HomeLink® buttons, follow steps 2
er training and accurate transmis- the buttons for longer than 30 sec-
onds. through 5.
sion of the radio-frequency signal.
• Some vehicles may require the 2. Position the end of your hand-held
ignition switch to be turned to the transmitter 1-3 inches (2-8 cm)
second (or "accessories") position away from the HomeLink® buttons
for programming and/or opera- while keeping the indicator light in
tion of HomeLink. view.
• In the event that there are still pro- 3. Simultaneously press and hold
gramming difficulties or questions both the HomeLink® and hand-
after following the programming held transmitter button. DO NOT
steps listed below, contact release the buttons until step 4
HomeLink® at: www.homelink.com has been completed.
or 1-800-355-3515.
4. While continuing to hold the but-
tons the red Indicator Status LED
will flash slowly and then rapidly
after HomeLink® successfully
trains to the frequency signal from
the hand-held transmitter. Release
both buttons.
4 65
Rolling code programming To train rolling code devices, follow 3. Return to the vehicle and firmly
Rolling code devices which are these instructions: press, hold for two seconds and
"code-protected" and manufactured 1. At the garage door opener receiver then release the desired
after 1996 may be determined by the (motor-head unit) in the garage, HomeLink® button. Repeat the
following: locate the "learn" or "smart" button. "press/hold/release" sequence a
This can usually be found where the second time to complete the pro-
• Reference the device owner's gramming. (Some devices may
manual for verification. hanging antenna wire is attached to
the motor-head unit. Exact location require you to repeat this
• The handheld transmitter appears and color of the button may vary by sequence a third time to complete
to program the HomeLink® garage door opener brand. If there the programming.)
Universal Transceiver but does not is difficulty locating the training but- 4. Press and hold the just-trained
activate the device. ton, reference the device owner's HomeLink® button and observe
• Press and hold the trained manual or please visit our Web site the red Status Indicator LED. If the
HomeLink button. The device has at www.homelink.com. indicator light stays on constantly,
the rolling code feature if the indi- 2. Firmly press and release the programming is complete and
cator light flashes rapidly and then "learn" or "smart" button (which your device should activate.
turns solid after 2 seconds. activates the "training light"). 5. To program the remaining two
HomeLink® buttons, follow either
steps 1 through 4 above for other
✽ NOTICE Rolling Code devices or steps 2
There are 30 seconds in which to ini- through 5 in Standard Programming
tiate step3. for standard devices.
4 66
Gate operator & Canadian pro- Reprogramming a single Erasing HomeLink® buttons
gramming HomeLink® button Individual buttons cannot be erased.
During programming, your handheld To program a new device to a previ- However, to erase all three pro-
transmitter may automatically stop ously trained HomeLink® button, fol- grammed buttons:
transmitting. Continue to press the low these steps: 1. Press and hold the two outer
Integrated HomeLink® Wireless 1. Press and hold the desired HomeLink® buttons until the indi-
Control System button (note steps 2 HomeLink® button. Do NOT release cator light begins to flash-after 20
through 4 in the Standard until step 4 has been completed. seconds.
Programming portion of this docu-
ment) while you press and re-press 2. When the indicator light begins to 2. Release both buttons. Do not hold
("cycle") your handheld transmitter flash slowly (after 20 seconds), for longer than 30 seconds.
every two seconds until the frequen- position the handheld transmitter 1 The Integrated HomeLink® Wireless
cy signal has been learned. The indi- to 3 inches away from the Control System is now in the training
cator light will flash slowly and then HomeLink® surface. (learn) mode and can be pro-
rapidly after several seconds upon 3. Press and hold the handheld grammed at any time following the
successful training. transmitter button. The HomeLink® appropriate steps in the Programming
indicator light will flash, first slowly sections above.
and then rapidly. FCC ID: NZLZTVHL3
Operating HomeLink®
4. When the indicator light begins to IC: 4112A-ZTVHL3
To operate, simply press and release flash rapidly, release both buttons.
the programmed HomeLink® button.
Activation will now occur for the 5. Press and hold the just-trained
trained device (i.e. garage door HomeLink® button and observe
opener, gate operator, security sys- the red Status Indicator LED. If the
tem, entry door lock, home/office indicator light stays on constantly,
lighting, etc.). For convenience, the programming is complete and
hand-held transmitter of the device your new device should activate.
may also be used at any time.
4 67
This device complies with Part 15 Electric chromic mirror (ECM)

of the FCC Rules. with HomeLink® system, compass
Operation is subject to the following and Blue Link® (if equipped)
two conditions: Your vehicle may be equipped with a
1. This device may not cause harm- Gentex Automatic-Dimming Mirror
ful interference, and with a Z-Nav™ Electronic Compass
2. This device must accept any inter- Display and an Integrated
ference received, including inter- HomeLink® Wireless Control System.
ference that may cause undesired During nighttime driving, this feature
operation. will automatically detect and reduce
rearview mirror glare while the com-
pass indicates the direction the vehi- OYF042250N
WARNING cle is pointed. The HomeLink® (1) Telematics button
The transceiver has been tested Universal Transceiver allows you to
activate your garage door(s), electric (2) Telematics button
and complies with FCC and
Industry Canada rules. Changes gate, home lighting, etc. (3) Telematics button
or modifications not expressly (4) Compass control button &
approved by the party responsi- Dimming ON/OFF button
ble for compliance could void (5) Status indicator LED
the user's authority to operate (6) Channel 1 button
the device.
NVS® is a registered trademark and
Z-Nav™ is a trademark of the Gentex (9) Compass display
Corporation, Zeeland, Michigan. (10) Rear light sensor
HomeLink® is a registered trademark
owned by Johnson Controls,
Incorporated, Milwaukee, Wisconsin.
4 68
Automatic-Dimming Night Vision Automatic-dimming function Z-Nav™ Compass Display

Safety™ (NVS®) Mirror Your mirror will automatically dim The NVS™ Mirror in your vehicle is
The NVS® Mirror in your vehicle is upon detecting glare from the vehi- also equipped with a Z-Nav™
the most advanced way to reduce cles traveling behind you. The auto- Compass that shows the vehicle
annoying glare in the rearview mirror dimming function can be controlled Compass heading in the Display
during any driving situation. For more by the Dimming ON/OFF Button: Window using the 8 basic cardinal
information regarding NVS® mirrors headings (N, NE, E, SE, etc.).
and other applications, please refer 1. Pressing and hold the button for
to the Gentex website: 3 seconds turns the autodimming
www.gentex.com function OFF which is indicated by
the green Status Indicator LED
✽ NOTICE turning off.
The NVS® Mirror automatically 2. Pressing and hold the button for
reduces glare during driving condi- 3 seconds again turns the auto-
tions based upon light levels moni- dimming function ON which is indi-
tored in front of the vehicle and cated by the green Status
from the rear of the vehicle. These Indicator LED turning on.
light sensors are visible through The mirror defaults to the ON posi-
openings in the front and rear of the tion each time the vehicle is started.
mirror case. Any object that
obstructs either light sensor will
degrade the automatic dimming
control feature.
4 69
Compass function
The Compass can be turned ON and
OFF and will remember the last state
when the ignition is cycled. To turn
the display feature ON/OFF:
1. Press and release the button
within 1 second to turn the display
feature OFF.
2. Press and release the button
again within 1 second to turn the
display back ON.
Additional options can be set with
press and hold sequences of the
button and are detailed below.
There is a difference between mag-

netic north and true north. The com-
pass in the mirror can compensate
for this difference when it knows the
Magnetic Zone in which it is operat-
ing. This is set either by the dealer or
by the user. The operating Zone
Numbers for North America are
shown in the figure on the following
section.
B520C05NF
4 70
To adjust the Zone setting: 1. Press and hold the button for Integrated HomeLink® Wireless
1. Determine the desired Zone more than 9 seconds. When the Control System
Number based upon your current compass memory is cleared a "C" The HomeLink® Wireless Control
location on the Zone Map. will appear in the display. System provides a convenient way to
2. Press and hold the button for 6 2. To calibrate the compass, drive replace up to three hand-held radio-
seconds, the current Zone the vehicle in 2 complete circles at frequency (RF) transmitters with a
Number will appear on the display. less than 5 mph (8 km/h). single built-in device. This innovative
feature will learn the radio frequency
3. Pressing and holding the button codes of most current transmitters to
again will cause the numbers to operate devices such as gate opera-
increment (Note: they will repeat tors, garage door openers, entry
…13, 14, 15, 1, 2, …). Releasing door locks, security systems, even
the button when the desired Zone home lighting. Both standard and
Number appears on the display rolling code-equipped transmitters
will set the new Zone. can be programmed by following the
4. Within about 5 seconds the com- outlined procedures. Additional
pass will start displaying a com- HomeLink® information can be found
pass heading again. at: www.homelink.com or by calling
1-800-355-3515.
There are some conditions that can
cause changes to the vehicle mag-
nets, such as installing a ski rack or
a CB antenna. Body repair work on
the vehicle can also cause changes
to the vehicle's magnetic field. In
these situations, the compass will
need to be re-calibrated to quickly
correct for these changes. To re-cali-
brate the compass:
4 71
Retain the original transmitter of the Programming HomeLink®

WARNING RF device you are programming for ✽ NOTICE
Before programming HomeLink® use in other vehicles as well as for
future HomeLink® programming. It is • When programming a garage
to a garage door opener or gate door opener, it is advised to park
operator, make sure that people also suggested that upon the sale of
the vehicle, the programmed the vehicle outside of the garage.
and objects are out of the way of • It is recommended that a new bat-
the device to prevent potential HomeLink® buttons be erased for
security purposes. tery be placed in the hand-held
harm or damage. Do not use transmitter of the device being pro-
HomeLink® with any garage grammed to HomeLink® for quick-
door opener that lacks the safe- er training and accurate transmis-
ty stop and reverse features sion of the radio-frequency signal.
required by U.S. federal safety • Some vehicles may require the
standards (this includes any ignition switch to be turned to the
garage door opener model man- second (or "accessories") position
ufactured before April 1, 1982). for programming and/or opera-
A garage door that cannot tion of HomeLink.
detect an object - signaling the • In the event that there are still pro-
door to stop and reverse - does gramming difficulties or questions
not meet current U.S. federal after following the programming
safety standards. Using a steps listed below, contact
garage door opener without HomeLink® at: www.homelink.com
these features increases the or 1-800-355-3515.
risk of serious injury or death.
4 72
Programming Flashing ✽ NOTICE

Some devices may require you to
Flashing replace this Programming step 3 with
procedures noted in the "Gate
Operator/Canadian Programming"
section. If the HomeLink® indicator
light does not change to a rapidly
blinking light after performing these
steps, contact HomeLink® at
www.homelink.com.
OYF042251N 4. Firmly press, hold for 5 seconds
2. Position the end of your hand-held and release the programmed
OYF042252N
transmitter 1-3 inches (2-8 cm) HomeLink® button up to two sepa-
To train most devices, follow these away from the HomeLink® button rate times to activate the door. If the
instructions: you wish to program while keeping door does not activate, press and
1. For first-time programming, press the indicator light in view. hold the just-trained HomeLink® but-
and hold the two outside buttons ton and observe the indicator light.
3. Simultaneously press and hold
( , ), HomeLink® Channel 1 both the HomeLink® and hand- • If the indicator light stays on con-
and Channel 3, until the indicator held transmitter buttons until the stantly, programming is complete
light begins to flash (after 10 sec- HomeLink® indicator light changes and your device should activate
onds). Release both buttons. Do from a slow to a rapid blinking when the HomeLink® button is
not hold the buttons for longer light. Now you may release both pressed and released.
than 20 seconds. the HomeLink® and hand-held • If the indicator light blinks rapidly
transmitter buttons. for 2 seconds and then turns to a
constant light, continue with
"Programming" steps 5-7 to com-
plete the programming of a rolling
code equipped device (most com-
monly a garage door opener).
4 73
5. At the garage door opener receiv- Gate operator & Canadian Reprogramming a single
er (motor-head unit) in the garage, programming HomeLink® button
locate the "learn" or "smart" but- During programming, your handheld To program a device to HomeLink®
ton. This can usually be found transmitter may automatically stop using a HomeLink® button previously
where the hanging antenna wire is transmitting. Continue to press the trained, follow these steps:
attached to the motor-head unit. Integrated HomeLink® Wireless 1.Press and hold the desired
6. Firmly press and release the Control System button (note steps 2 HomeLink® button. DO NOT
"learn" or "smart" button. (The through 3 in the Programming por- release the button.
name and color of the button vary tion of this document) while you
by manufacturer). There are 30 press and re-press ("cycle") your 2.The indicator light will begin to flash
seconds to initiate step 7. handheld transmitter every two sec- after 20 seconds. Without releasing
onds until the frequency signal has the HomeLink® button, proceed
7. Return to the vehicle and firmly with "Programming" step 2.
press, hold for 2 seconds and been learned. The indicator light will
release the programmed flash slowly and then rapidly after
HomeLink® button. Repeat the several seconds upon successful For questions or comments, contact
"press/hold/release" sequence a training. HomeLink® at www.homelink.com or
second time, and, depending on 1-800-355-3515.
the brand of the garage door Operating HomeLink®
opener (or other rolling code To operate, simply press and release
equipped device), repeat this the programmed HomeLink® button.
sequence a third time to complete Activation will now occur for the
the programming process. trained device (i.e. garage door
opener, gate operator, security sys-
HomeLink® should now activate your tem, entry door lock, home/office
rolling code equipped device. lighting, etc.). For convenience, the
hand-held transmitter of the device
may also be used at any time.
4 74
Erasing HomeLink® buttons FCC ID: NZLTLMHL4 NVS® is a registered trademark and
Individual buttons cannot be erased. IC: 4112A-TLMHL4 Z-Nav™ is a trademark of the
However, to erase all three pro- Gentex Corporation, Zeeland,
grammed buttons: Michigan. HomeLink® is a registered
This device complies with Part 15 trademark owned by Johnson
1. Press and hold the two outer of the FCC Rules. Controls, Incorporated, Milwaukee,
HomeLink® buttons until the indi- Operation is subject to the following Wisconsin.
cator light begins to flash after 10 two conditions:
seconds.
1. This device may not cause harm-
2. Release both buttons. Do not hold ful interference, and
for longer than 20 seconds.
2. This device must accept any inter-
The Integrated HomeLink® Wireless ference received, including inter-
Control System is now in the training ference that may cause undesired
(learn) mode and can be pro- operation.
grammed at any time following the
appropriate steps in the
Programming sections above. CAUTION
The transceiver has been tested
and complies with FCC and
Industry Canada rules. Changes
or modifications not expressly
approved by the party responsi-
ble for compliance could void
the user's authority to operate
the device.
4 75
Side view mirrors Remote control

CAUTION
Be sure to adjust mirror angles
before driving. Do not scrape ice off the mirror
face; this may damage the sur-
Your vehicle is equipped with both face of the glass. If ice should
left-hand and right-hand side view restrict movement of the mirror,
mirrors. The mirrors can be adjusted do not force the mirror for
remotely with the remote switch. The adjustment. To remove ice, use
mirror heads can be folded back to a deicer spray, or a sponge or
prevent damage during an automatic soft cloth with warm water.
car wash or when passing in a nar-
row street.
CAUTION
OANNCO2076
CAUTION - Side view If the mirror is jammed with ice,
mirrors do not adjust the mirror by force. The electric remote control mirror
• The right side view mirrors is Use an approved spray de-icer switch allows you to adjust the posi-
convex. Objects seen in the (not radiator antifreeze) to tion of the left and right side view mir-
mirror are closer than they release the frozen mechanism or rors.
appear. move the vehicle to a warm
place and allow the ice to melt.
• Use your interior rearview mir-
ror or direct observation to
determine the actual distance
of following vehicles when WARNING
changing lanes. Do not adjust or fold the side
view mirrors while the vehicle is
moving. This could result in
loss of control, and an accident
which could cause death, seri-
ous injury or property damage.
4 76
To adjust the position of the mirrors: Reverse parking aid function According to the position of the side
1. Place the ignition switch in the ON (if equipped) view mirrors control switch (1), the
position. side view mirror(s) will operate as fol-
2. Move the lever(1) to R (right) or L lows:
(left) to select the right side mirror Left or Right : When the side view
or the left side mirror. mirrors control switch
3. Press a corresponding point on is in the L (Left) or R
the mirror adjustment control to (Right) position, both
position the selected mirror up, side view mirrors will
down, left or right. move downward.
4. After the adjustment, position the Neutral : When the side view mirrors
lever in the center to prevent inad- control switch is in the neu-
vertent movement. tral (center) position, the
side view mirrors will not
ODM044035N
operate.
CAUTION When you shift the shift lever to the R
• The mirrors stop moving when (Reverse) position, the side view mir- ✽ NOTICE
they reach the maximum ror(s) will move downward to aid
adjusting angles, but the The side view mirrors will automat-
reverse parking. ically revert to their original posi-
motor continues to operate
while the switch is pressed. tions under the following conditions:
Do not press the switch longer • When the ignition switch or engine
than necessary, the motor start/stop button is set to the ACC
may be damaged. or OFF position.
• When the shift lever is moved to
• Do not attempt to adjust the any position except the R
side view mirrors by hand. (Reverse) position.
Doing so may damage the mir-
ror.
4 77
Folding the side view mirrors Blind spot mirror (if equipped)
WARNING
• Always check the road condi-
tion while driving for unex-
pected situations even
though the vehicle is
equipped with a blind spot
mirror.
• The blind spot mirror is a
device made for convenience.
Do not solely rely on the mir-
OFS043249 ror but always pay attention to
ODM072031
traffic around you.
To fold side view mirrors, grasp the
housing of mirror and then fold it
toward the rear of the vehicle. CAUTION
Do not clean the mirror with
harsh abrasives, fuel or other
petroleum based cleaning prod-
ucts.
OFS053068
The Blind Spot Mirror (BSM) is a

supplemental mirror that minimizes
the driver's blind spot zone by
expanding the field of view on the
rear side of the vehicle. The blind
spot mirror is equipped on the dri-
ver's left side view mirror.
4 78
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER
■ Type A
1. Tachometer
2. Speedometer
3. Engine coolant temperature gauge
4. Fuel gauge
5. LCD display
6. Warning and indicator lights (if equipped)
■ Type B 7. Turn signal indicator lights
❈ The actual cluster in the vehicle may

differ from the illustration.
For more details, refer to the "Gauges"
in this chapter.
ONC047117N/ONC047084N
4 79
Instrument Cluster Control ■ Type A ■ Type B Gauges

Adjusting Instrument Cluster Speedometer
Illumination
ODM046621L/ODM046620L
• The brightness has 20 levels : 1
(MIN) ~ 20 (MAX) ODM046057N
ODM042056 • If you hold the illumination control
knob on the right end (+) or left end The speedometer indicates the
The brightness of the instrument (-), the brightness will be changed speed of the vehicle and is calibrated
panel illumination is changed by continuously. in miles per hour (mph) and/or kilo-
moving the illumination control knob • If the brightness reaches to the meters per hour (km/h).
right or left when the ignition switch maximum or minimum level, an
or Engine Start/Stop button is ON, or alarm will sound.
the tail lights are turned on.
4 80
Tachometer Engine Coolant Temperature

Gauge CAUTION
If the gauge pointer moves
beyond the normal range area
toward the “H” position, it indi-
cates overheating that may
damage the engine.
Do not continue driving with an
overheated engine. If your vehi-
cle overheats, refer to “If the
Engine Overheats” in chapter 6.
ODM046733
The tachometer indicates the ODM046734 WARNING
approximate number of engine revo- This gauge indicates the tempera- Never remove the radiator cap
lutions per minute (rpm). ture of the engine coolant when the when the engine is hot. The
Use the tachometer to select the cor- ignition switch or Engine Start/Stop engine coolant is under pressure
rect shift points and to prevent lug- button is ON. and could severely burn. Wait
ging and/or over-revving the engine. until the engine is cool before
adding coolant to the reservoir.
CAUTION
Do not operate the engine with-
in the tachometer's RED ZONE.
This may cause severe engine
damage.
4 81
Fuel Gauge Odometer

WARNING - Fuel Gauge ■ Type A ■ Type B
Running out of fuel can expose
vehicle occupants to danger.
You must stop and obtain addi-
tional fuel as soon as possible
after the warning light comes
on or when the gauge indicator
comes close to the “E (Empty)”
level.
ODM046735 CAUTION OTLE045140/OTLE045141

This gauge indicates the approxi- Avoid driving with a extremely The odometer Indicates the total dis-
mate amount of fuel remaining in the low fuel level. Running out of tance that the vehicle has been driv-
fuel tank. fuel could cause the engine to en and should be used to determine
misfire damaging the catalytic when periodic maintenance should
✽ NOTICE converter. be performed.
• The fuel tank capacity is given in
chapter 8.
• The fuel gauge is supplemented by
a low fuel warning light, which
will illuminate when the fuel tank
is nearly empty.
• On inclines or curves, the fuel
gauge pointer may fluctuate or the
low fuel warning light may come
on earlier than usual due to the
movement of fuel in the tank.
4 82
Outside Temperature Gauge Transaxle Shift Indicator Shift indicator pop-up

■ Type A Automatic Transaxle Shift (if equipped)
■ Type B
Indicator ■ Type A ■ Type B
■ Type A ■ Type B
OTLA045130/OTLA045131
This gauge indicates the current out- OTL045134/ONC046099
side air temperatures by 1°F (1°C). ODM046615/ODM046614
The pop-up displays the current gear
- Temperature range : -40°F ~ 140°F This indicator displays which auto- position selected for 2 seconds
(-40°C ~ 60°C) matic transaxle shift lever is selected. (P/R/N/D).
The outside temperature on the dis-
play may not change immediately
like a general thermometer to pre- • Park : P
vent the driver from being distracted. • Reverse : R
The temperature unit (from °F to °C • Neutral : N
or from °C to °F) can be changed by • Drive : D
using the “User Settings” mode of the • Manual shift mode : 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6
LCD display.
4 83
LCD DISPLAY
LCD Display Control LCD Modes
Modes Symbol Explanation
This mode displays driving information like the tripmeter,
Trip
fuel economy, and so on.
Computer
For more details, refer to "Trip Computer" in this chapter.
Turn By Turn
This mode displays the state of the navigation.
(if equipped)
This mode displays the state of the Advanced Smart
Cruise Control system (SCC) and Lane Departure
SCC/LDWS
Warning System (LDWS). For more details, refer to
(if equipped)
"Advanced Smart Cruise Control system (SCC)" or "Lane
ODM042224
Departure Warning System (LDWS)" in chapter 5.
The LCD display modes can be
changed by using the control buttons A/V
This mode displays the state of the A/V system.
on the steering wheel. (if equipped)
This mode informs of service interval and pressure status
(1) : MODE button for changing of each tire.
modes This mode informs of warning messages related to
(2) : MOVE button for changing Service washer fluid or malfunction of Blind Spot Detection
items system (BSD) and so on.
(3) : SELECT/RESET button for When the any door is not closed securely,
setting or resetting the this symbol is illuminated.
selected item
In this mode, you can change settings of the doors,
User Settings
lamps and so on.
4 84
Trip Computer Mode Turn By Turn (TBT) Mode SCC/LDWS Mode (if equipped)
(if equipped) ■ Type A ■ Type B
OTLA045187/OTLA045188 OTLA045175/OTLA045176
ODM046611/ODM046610
The trip computer mode displays This mode displays the state of the
information related to vehicle driving This mode displays the state of the Advanced Smart Cruise Control sys-
parameters including range, fuel navigation. tem (SCC) or Lane Departure
economy, trip meter information and Warning System (LDWS).
vehicle speed.
For more information, refer to
For more information, refer to "Trip "Advanced Smart Cruise Control
Computer" in this chapter. system (SCC)" or "Lane Departure
Warning System (LDWS)" in chapter
5.
4 85
A/V Mode Service Mode ■ Type A ■ Type B
■ Type A ■ Type B Service Interval

ODM046128N/ODM046166N
ODM046613/ODM046612 Service required

OTLA045181/OTLA045182 If you do not have your vehicle serv-
This mode displays the state of the iced according to the pre-selected
A/V system. Service in service interval, "Service required"
It calculates and displays when you message is displayed for several
need a scheduled maintenance seconds each time you set the igni-
service (mileage or days). tion switch or Engine Start/ Stop
If the remaining mileage or time Button to the ON position (The
reaches 900 mi. (1,500 km) or 30 mileage and time changes to "---").
days, "Service in" message is dis- To reset the service interval to the
played for several seconds each time mileage and days you inputted before:
you set the ignition switch or Engine - Press the SELECT/RESET button
Start/Stop Button to the ON position. for more than 1 second.
4 86
■ Type A ■ Type B Master Warning Mode User Settings Mode

(if equipped)
Description
• This warning light informs the driv-

er the following situations :
- Low washer fluid (if equipped).
- Blind Spot Detection (BSD) mal-
function (if equipped).
- Lane Departure warning system
(LDWS) malfunction (if
ODM046607N/ODM046608N equipped).
Service in OFF - Smart cruise control system
If the service interval is not set, (SCC) malfunction (if equipped). ODM046178L
"Service in OFF" message is dis- - Service reminder and so on.
played on the LCD display. On this mode, you can change set-
The Master Warning Light illumi- ting of the doors, lamps, and so on.
nates when more than one of the
✽ NOTICE above warning situations occur. At
If any of the following conditions this time, the LCD Modes Icon will
occur, the mileage and days may be change from ( ) to ( ).
incorrect. If the warning situation is solved, the
- The battery cable is disconnected. master warning light will be turned
- The fuse switch is turned off. off and the LCD Modes Icon will be
- The battery is discharged. changed back to its previous icon
( ). (ex : refill the washer fluid)
4 87
Driving Assist (if equipped)

Items Explanation
SCC (Smart Cruise Control) Choose the sensitivity of the smart cruise control.
response (if equipped) For more details, refer to "Advanced Smart Cruise Control System" in chapter 5.
AEB (Automatic Emergency To activate or deactivate the AEB system.
Braking) (if equipped) For more details, refer to "Automatic Emergency Braking (AEB)" in chapter 5.
To adjust the initial warning alert time for the Forward Collision Warning / Automatic Emergency
FCW (Forward Collision Braking system. The option settings are Late, Normal, or Early.
Warning, if equipped)
For more information, refer to "Automatic Emergency Braking (AEB)" in chapter 5.
RCTA (Rear Cross Traffic If this item is checked, the rear cross traffic alert function will be activated.
Alert) (if equipped) For more details, refer to "Blind Spot Detection System" in chapter 5.
4 88
Door
Items Explanation
• Disable : The auto door lock operation will be deactivated.
• Enable on Speed : All doors will be automatically locked when the vehicle speed exceeds
Automatically Lock 9.3mph (15km/h).
• Enable on Shift : All doors will be automatically locked if the automatic transaxle shift lever is shifted
from the P (Park) position to the R (Reverse), N (Neutral), or D (Drive) position.
• Disable : The auto door unlock operation will be canceled.

• Vehicle Off : All doors will be automatically unlocked when the ignition key is removed from the
Automatically Unlock ignition switch or the Engine Start/Stop button is set to the OFF position.
• On Shift to P : All doors will be automatically unlocked if the automatic transaxle shift lever is
shifted to the P (Park) position.
• Off : The two press unlock function will be deactivated. Therefore, all doors will unlock if the
door unlock button is pressed.
Two Press Unlock
• On : Only the driver's door will unlock if the door unlock button is pressed. When the door
unlock button is pressed again within 4 seconds, the remaining doors will unlock.
If this item is checked, the horn feedback operation will be activated.
Horn Feedback
(if equipped) After locking the door by pressing the lock button on the remote key, if you press the lock button
again within 4 seconds, the warning sound will operate once to indicate that all doors are locked.
Power Liftgate If this item is checked, the power liftgate (power tailgate) function will be activated.
(Power Tailgate) (if equipped) For more details, refer to "Liftgate (Tailgate)" in this chapter.
If this item is checked, the smart liftgate (smart tailgate) function will be activated.
Smart Liftgate
If the power tailgate function is not activated, you can not activate this function.
(Smart Tailgate) (if equipped)
For more details, refer to "Liftgate (Tailgate)" in this chapter.
4 89
Light
Items Explanation
• Off: The one touch turn signal function will be deactivated.

• 3, 5, 7 Flashes : The lane change signals will blink 3, 5, or 7 times when the turn signal lever is
One Touch Turn Signal
moved slightly.
For more details, refer to "Light" in this chapter.
Head Lamp Delay • If this item is checked, the head lamp delay function will be activated.
Welcome Light
• If this item is checked, the welcome light function will be activated.
(If equipped)
Sound
Items Explanation
Park Assist System Vol.
• Adjust the Park Assist System volume. (Level 1~3)
(if equipped)
BSD (Blind Spot Detection) • If this item is checked, the blind spot detection sound will be activated.
Sound (if equipped) For more details, refer to "Blind Spot Detection System" in chapter 5.
Welcome Sound
• If this item is checked, the welcome sound function will be activated.
(if equipped)
4 90
Convenience
Items Explanation
• None: The seat easy access function will be deactivated.
• Normal/Extended:
- When you turn off the engine, the driver’s seat will automatically move rearward short
Seat Easy Access
(Normal) or long (Extended) for you to enter or exit the vehicle more comfortably.
(if equipped)
- If you change the Engine Start/Stop button from the OFF position to the ACC, ON, or START
position, the driver’s seat will return to the original position.
For more details, refer to "Driver Position Memory System" in chapter 3.
Steering Position If this item is checked, the warning function regarding the steering wheel alignment will be activated.
If this item is checked, LCD display shows a selected wiper/light mode whenever you changed
Wiper/Lights Display
its mode.
Gear Position Pop-up If this item is checked, the gear position will be displayed when you move the shift lever.
Service interval
Items Explanation
This mode, you can activate the service interval function with mileage (km or mi.) and period
(months).
Service Interval • Off : The service interval function will be deactivated.
• On :You can set the service interval (mileage and months).
For more details, refer to "Service Mode" in this chapter.
4 91
Other features
Items Explanation
Fuel Economy Auto Reset If this item is checked, the average fuel economy will reset automatically when refueling.
Fuel Economy Unit Choose the fuel economy unit. (Km/L, L/100 km, MPG)
Temperature Unit Choose the temperature unit. (°C,°F)
Tire Pressure Unit

Choose the tire pressure unit. (psi, kPa, Bar)
(if equipped)
Language
Choose the language.
(if equipped)
4 92
Warning Messages Low Key Battery Press START (POWER) button

Shift to P (for smart key system) (for smart key system) while turn steering
(for smart key system)
■ Type A ■ Type B ■ Type A ■ Type B
ODM046068L/ODM046132L ODM046066L/ODM046133L
ODM046669L/ODM046626L
• This warning message illuminates • This warning message illuminates
if you try to turn off the engine with- if the battery of the smart key is • This warning message illuminates
out the shift lever in P (Park) posi- discharged when the Engine if the steering wheel does not
tion. Start/Stop Button changes to the unlock normally when the Engine
• At this time, the Engine Start/Stop OFF position. Start/Stop Button is pressed.
Button turns to the ACC position (If • It means that you should press the
you press the Engine Start/Stop Engine Start/Stop Button while
Button once more, it will turn to the turning the steering wheel right
ON position). and left.
4 93
Steering wheel unlocked Check steering wheel lock Press brake pedal to start engine
(for smart key system) system (for smart key system) (for smart key system)
■ Type A ■ Type B ■ Type A ■ Type B ■ Type A ■ Type B
ODM046627L/ODM046628L ODM046629L/ODM046630L ODM046067L/ODM046136L
• This warning message illuminates • This warning message illuminates • This warning message illuminates
if the steering wheel does not lock if the steering wheel does not lock if the Engine Start/Stop Button
when the Engine Start/Stop Button normally when the Engine changes to the ACC position twice
changes to the OFF position. Start/Stop Button changes to the by pressing the button repeatedly
OFF position. without depressing the brake pedal.
• It means that you should depress
the brake pedal to start the engine.
4 94
Key not in vehicle Key not detected Press START (POWER) button
(for smart key system) (for smart key system) again (for smart key system)
if the smart key is not in the vehicle if the smart key is not detected if you can not operate the Engine
when you press the Engine when you press the Engine Start/Stop Button when there is a
Start/Stop Button. Start/Stop Button. problem with the Engine Start/Stop
Button system.
• It means that you could start the
engine by pressing the Engine
Start/ Stop Button once more.
• If the warning illuminates each
time you press the Engine
Start/Stop Button, have your vehi-
cle inspected by an authorized
HYUNDAI dealer.
4 95
Press START button with key Check fuse BRAKE SWITCH Shift to P or N to start engine
(for smart key system) (for smart key system) (for smart key system)
if you press the Engine Start/Stop if the brake switch fuse is not func- if you try to start the engine with
Button while the warning message tioning and should be checked. the shift lever not in the P (Park) or
“Key not detected” is illuminating. • It means that you should replace N (Neutral) position.
• At this time, the immobilizer indica- the fuse with a new one. If that is
tor light blinks. not possible, you can start the ✽ NOTICE
engine by pressing the Engine
Start/Stop Button for 10 seconds in You can start the engine with the
the ACC position. shift lever in the N (Neutral) position.
But, for your safety, we recommend
that you start the engine with the
shift lever in the P (Park) position.
4 96
Door, Liftgate (Tailgate), Hood Sunroof Open (if equipped) Align steering wheel (if equipped)
Open ■ Type A ■ Type A
■ Type B
■ Type A
■ Type B
■ Type B
ODM046633L/ODM046634L
• This warning message is dis-
played if you turn off the engine
when the sunroof is opened.
ODM046073/ODM046153 ODM046663L/ODM046664L
• This warning message is displayed • This warning message illuminates

indicating which door, or the lift- if you start the engine when the
gate (tailgate), or the hood is open. steering wheel is turned to more
than 90 degrees to the left or right.
• It means that you should turn the
steering wheel and make the angle
of the steering wheel be less than
30 degrees.
4 97
Low Washer Fluid (if equipped) Low Fuel Engine has overheated

on the service reminder menu if if the fuel tank is nearly empty. when the engine coolant tempera-
the washer fluid level in the reser- - When the low fuel level warning ture is above 248°F (120°C).
voir is nearly empty. light illuminates. • It means that the engine is over-
• It means that you should refill the - When the trip computer displays heating and may become damaged.
washer fluid. "--- mile (or km)" as distance to
empty. If your vehicle is overheated, refer to
"Overheating" in chapter 6.
Add fuel as soon as possible.
4 98
Low Tire Pressure Heated Steering Wheel On/Off Turn on FUSE SWITCH
(if equipped) (if equipped) (if equipped)
OAN067005N ODM046650L ODM046091L/ODM046164L
• This warning message illuminates • This message illuminates if you turn • This warning message illuminates
if the tire pressure is low with the on/off the heated steering wheel if the fuse switch under the steer-
Engine/Start button in the ON posi- feature. ing wheel is OFF.
tion. • It means that you should turn the
For more details, refer to "Heated fuse switch on.
For more details, refer to "Tire Steering Wheel" in this chapter.
Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)" For more details, refer to “Fuses” in
in chapter 6. chapter 7.
4 99
Check AEB system (if equipped) Check SCC System (if equipped) Check BSD System (if equipped)
ODM046661L ODM046662L ODM056071L

if there is a malfunction with the if there is a malfunction with the if there is a malfunction with the
Automatic Emergency Braking advanced smart cruise control sys- Blind Spot Detection (BSD) sys-
(AEB) system, have your vehicle tem, have your vehicle inspected tem. And the BSD system will be
inspected by an authorized by an authorized HYUNDAI dealer. automatically deactivated, have
HYUNDAI dealer. your vehicle inspected by an
For more details, refer to "Advanced
For more details, refer to "Automatic Smart Cruise Control System" in chap-
Emergency Braking (AEB) system" in ter 5. For more details, refer to "Blind Spot
chapter 5. Detection (BSD) System" in chapter 5.
4 100
Check headlight (if equipped) ✽ NOTICE

■ Type A ■ Type B • When replacing the bulb, use the
same wattage bulb.
For more information, refer to
"BULB WATTAGE" in chapter 8.
• If the different wattage bulb is
equipped with the vehicle, this
warning message is not displayed.
ODM046637/ODM046638
• This warning message illuminates if
there is a malfunction with the head-
lamp. In this case, have your vehicle
HYUNDAI dealer.
4 101
TRIP COMPUTER
Overview Trip Modes FUEL ECONOMY
Description • Distance To Empty
The trip computer is a microcomput-
• Average Fuel Economy
er-controlled driver information sys-
tem that displays information related • Instant Fuel Economy
to driving.
✽ NOTICE TRIP A
Some driving information stored in • Tripmeter [A]
the trip computer (for example • Average Vehicle Speed [A]
Average Vehicle Speed) resets if the
battery is disconnected. • Elapsed Time [A]
ONC047617N
To change the trip mode, press the

MOVE button . TRIP B
• Tripmeter [B]
• Average Vehicle Speed [B]
• Elapsed Time [B]
Digital speedometer
4 102
Fuel Economy ✽ NOTICE Average Fuel Economy (2)

■ Type A ■ Type B • If the vehicle is not on level ground • The average fuel economy is calcu-
or the battery power has been lated by the total driving distance
interrupted, the distance to empty and fuel consumption since the last
function may not operate correctly. average fuel economy reset.
• The distance to empty may differ - Fuel economy range: 0.0 ~ 99.9
from the actual driving distance as MPG or L/100km
it is an estimate of the available • The average fuel economy can be
driving distance. reset both manually and automati-
• The trip computer may not register cally.
additional fuel if less than 1.6 gal-
lons (6 liters) of fuel are added to
the vehicle. Manual reset
ONC047133N/ONC047134N
• The fuel economy and distance to To clear the average fuel economy
empty may vary significantly based manually, press the SELECT/RESET
Distance To Empty (1) on driving conditions, driving button on the steering wheel for
• The distance to empty is the esti- habits, and condition of the vehicle. more than 1 second when the aver-
mated distance the vehicle can be age fuel economy is displayed.
driven with the remaining fuel.
- Distance range : 1 ~ 9999 mi or 1
~ 9999 km.
• If the estimated distance is below 1
mi. (1 km), the trip computer will dis-
play "----" as distance to empty.
4 103
Automatic reset Instant Fuel Economy (3) Trip A/B

To make the average fuel economy • This mode displays the instant fuel ■ Type A ■ Type B
be reset automatically whenever economy during the last few sec-
refueling, select the "Auto Reset" onds when the vehicle speed is
mode in User Setting menu of the more than 6.2 MPH (10 km/h).
LCD display (Refer to "LCD - Fuel economy range: 0 ~ 50 MPG
Display"). or 0 ~ 30 L/100km
Under "Auto Reset" mode, the aver-
age fuel economy will be cleared to
zero (--.-) when the vehicle speed
exceeds 1 km/h after refueling more
than 1.6 gallons (6 liters).
ODM046603N_1/ONC047132N
Tripmeter (1)
• The tripmeter is the total driving dis-
tance since the last tripmeter reset.
- Distance range: 1 ~ 9999.9 mi. or
km
• To reset the tripmeter, press the
SELECT/RESET button on the
steering wheel for more than 1
second when the tripmeter is dis-
played.
4 104
Average Vehicle Speed (2) Elapsed Time (3) Digital Speedometer

• The average vehicle speed is cal- • The elapsed time is the total driv- ■ Type A ■ Type A
culated by the total driving dis- ing time since the last elapsed time
tance and driving time since the reset.
last average vehicle speed reset. - Time range (hh:mm): 00:00 ~ 99:59
- Speed range: 0 ~ 999 MPH or km/h • To reset the elapsed time, press
• To reset the average vehicle speed, the SELECT/RESET button on
press the SELECT/RESET button the steering wheel for more than 1
on the steering wheel for more second when the elapsed time is
than 1 second when the average displayed.
vehicle speed is displayed.
✽ NOTICE
✽ NOTICE Even if the vehicle is not in motion,
OTLA045193/OTLA045194
• The average vehicle speed is not the elapsed time keeps going while This message shows the speed of
displayed if the driving distance is the engine is running. the vehicle (in mph.).
less than 0.03 miles (50 meters) or
the driving time is less than 10 sec-
onds since the ignition switch or
Engine Start/Stop button is turned
to ON.
• Even if the vehicle is not in
motion, the average vehicle speed
keeps going while the engine is
running.
4 105
Driving information mode ✽ NOTICE

(if equipped) If "Window Open" or "Sunroof
Open" warning message are dis-
played in the cluster, this display
may not be displayed in the cluster.
OTLE045266
This display shows trip distance (1),

average fuel economy (2) and the
vehicle range that can be driven with
the remaining fuel (3).
This information is displayed for a
few seconds when you turn off the
engine and then goes off automati-
cally. The information provided is cal-
culated according to each trip.
If the estimated distance is below
1 mi. (1km), the distance to empty (3)
will display as "----" and a refuel mes-
sage will appear (4).
4 106
WARNING AND INDICATOR LIGHTS

Warning lights Air bag Warning Light Seat Belt Warning Light
✽ NOTICE - Warning lights

Make sure that all warning lights This warning light illuminates: This warning light informs the driver
are OFF after starting the engine. If • Once you set the ignition switch or that the seat belt is not fastened.
any light is still ON, this indicates a Engine Start/Stop Button to the ON For more details, refer to the “Seat
situation that needs attention. position. Belts” in chapter 3.
- It illuminates for approximately 6
seconds and then goes off.
• When there is a malfunction with
the SRS.
In this case, have your vehicle
HYUNDAI dealer.
4 107
Parking Brake & Brake If the brake fluid level in the reservoir Dual-diagonal braking system
Fluid Warning Light is low: Your vehicle is equipped with dual-
1. Drive carefully to the nearest safe diagonal braking systems. This
This warning light illuminates: location and stop your vehicle. means you still have braking on two
2. With the engine stopped, check wheels even if one of the dual sys-
• Once you set the ignition switch or tems should fail.
Engine Start/Stop Button to the ON the brake fluid level immediately
position. and add fluid as required (For With only one of the dual systems
more details, refer to "Brake Fluid" working, more than normal pedal
- It illuminates for approximately 3 in chapter 7). travel and greater pedal pressure are
seconds required to stop the vehicle.
Then check all brake components
- It remains on if the parking brake for fluid leaks. If any leak on the Also, the vehicle will not stop in as
is applied. brake system is still found, the short a distance with only a portion
• When the parking brake is applied. warning light remains on, or the of the brake system working.
• When the brake fluid level in the brakes do not operate properly, do If the brakes fail while you are driv-
reservoir is low. not drive the vehicle. ing, shift to a lower gear for addition-
- If the warning light illuminates In this case, have your vehicle al engine braking and stop the vehi-
with the parking brake released, it towed to an authorized HYUNDAI cle as soon as it is safe to do so.
indicates the brake fluid level in dealer and inspected.
reservoir is low.
4 108
Anti-lock Brake System Electronic

WARNING - Parking (ABS) Warning Light Brake force
Brake & Brake Fluid Distribution
Warning Light (EBD) System
This warning light illuminates:
Driving the vehicle with a warn- Warning Light
ing light ON is dangerous. If the • Once you set the ignition switch or
Engine Start/Stop Button to the ON These two warning lights illuminate at
Parking Brake & Brake Fluid the same time while driving:
Warning Light illuminates with position.
- It illuminates for approximately 3 • When the ABS and regular brake
the parking brake released, it system may not work normally.
indicates that the brake fluid seconds and then goes off.
level is low. • When there is a malfunction with In this case, have your vehicle
the ABS (The normal braking sys- inspected by an authorized
In this case, have your vehicle HYUNDAI dealer.
inspected by an authorized tem will still be operational without
HYUNDAI dealer. the assistance of the anti-lock
brake system). WARNING - Electronic
In this case, have your vehicle Brake force Distribution
inspected by an authorized (EBD) System Warning Light
HYUNDAI dealer. When both ABS and Parking
Brake & Brake Fluid Warning
Lights are on, the brake system
will not work normally and you
may experience an unexpected
and dangerous situation during
sudden braking.
In this case, avoid high speed
driving and abrupt braking.
Have your vehicle inspected by
an authorized HYUNDAI dealer
as soon as possible.
4 109
✽ NOTICE - Electronic Brake Electronic Parking Brake Electronic Power

force Distribution (EPB) Warning Light EPB Steering (EPS) Warning
(EBD) System (if equipped) Light
Warning Light
When the ABS Warning Light is on This warning light illuminates: This warning light illuminates:
or both ABS and Parking Brake & • Once you set the ignition switch or • Once you set the ignition switch or
Brake Fluid Warning Lights are on, Engine Start/Stop Button to the ON Engine Start/Stop Button to the ON
the speedometer, odometer, or trip- position. position.
meter may not work. Also, the EPS
Warning Light may illuminate and - It illuminates for approximately 3 - It remains on until the engine is
the steering effort may increase or seconds and then goes off. started.
decrease. • When there is a malfunction with • When there is a malfunction with
In this case, have your vehicle inspect- the EPB. the EPS.
ed by an authorized HYUNDAI deal- In this case, have your vehicle In this case, have your vehicle
er as soon as possible. inspected by an authorized inspected by an authorized
HYUNDAI dealer. HYUNDAI dealer.
✽ NOTICE - Electronic Parking

Brake (EPB) Warning Light
The Electronic Parking Brake
(EPB) Warning Light may illumi-
nate when the Electronic Stability
control (ESC) Indicator Light comes
on to indicate that the ESC is not
working properly (This does not
indicate malfunction of the EPB).
4 110
Malfunction Indicator Charging System

Lamp (MIL) CAUTION - Gasoline Warning Light
Engine
If the Malfunction Indicator This warning light illuminates:
Lamp (MIL) illuminates, poten-
This warning light illuminates: • Once you set the ignition switch or
tial catalytic converter damage
• Once you set the ignition switch or is possible which could result in Engine Start/Stop Button to the ON
Engine Start/Stop Button to the ON loss of engine power. position.
position. - It remains on until the engine is
- It remains on until the engine is inspected by an authorized started.
started. HYUNDAI dealer as soon as • When there is a malfunction with
• When there is a malfunction with possible. either the alternator or electrical
the emission control system. charging system.
HYUNDAI dealer.
CAUTION - Malfunction
Indicator
Lamp (MIL)
Driving with the Malfunction
Indicator Lamp (MIL) on may
cause damage to the emission
control systems which could
effect drivability and/or fuel
economy.
4 111
If there is a malfunction with either Engine Oil Pressure

the alternator or electrical charging Warning Light CAUTION - Engine Oil
system: Pressure
1. Drive carefully to the nearest safe Warning Light
This warning light illuminates:
location and stop your vehicle. • If the engine does not stop
• Once you set the ignition switch or immediately after the Engine
2. Turn the engine off and check the Engine Start/Stop Button to the ON
alternator drive belt for looseness Oil Pressure Warning Light is
position. illuminated, severe damage
or breakage.
- It remains on until the engine is could result.
If the belt is adjusted properly, started.
there may be a problem in the • If the warning light stays on
electrical charging system. • When the engine oil pressure is low. while the engine is running, it
indicates that there may be
In this case, have your vehicle serious engine damage or
inspected by an authorized If the engine oil pressure is low:
malfunction. In this case,
HYUNDAI dealer as soon as pos- 1. Drive carefully to the nearest safe
sible. 1. Stop the vehicle as soon as
location and stop your vehicle.
it is safe to do so.
2. Turn the engine off and check the
2. Turn off the engine and
engine oil level (For more details,
check the oil level. If the oil
refer to “Engine Oil” in section 7). If
level is low, fill the engine
the level is low, add oil as required.
oil to the proper level.
If the warning light remains on
3. Start the engine again. If the
after adding oil or if oil is not avail-
warning light stays on after
able, have your vehicle inspected
the engine is started, turn
by an authorized HYUNDAI dealer
the engine off immediately.
In this case, have your vehi-
cle inspected by an author-
ized HYUNDAI dealer.
4 112
Low Fuel Level Warning Low Tire Pressure This warning light remains on after
Light Warning Light blinking for approximately 60 seconds
or repeats blinking and off at the
intervals of approximately 3 seconds:
This warning light illuminates: • When there is a malfunction with
This warning light illuminates: the TPMS.
When the fuel tank is nearly empty. • Once you set the ignition switch or
Engine Start/Stop Button to the ON In this case, have your vehicle
position. inspected by an authorized
If the fuel tank is nearly empty: HYUNDAI dealer as soon as possi-
- It illuminates for approximately 3 ble.
Add fuel as soon as possible. seconds and then goes off.
• When one or more of your tires are
CAUTION - Low Fuel significantly underinflated. For more details, refer to "Tire
Pressure Monitoring System
Level The location of the underinflated (TPMS)" in chapter 6.
Driving with the Low Fuel Level tires are displayed on the LCD dis-
warning light on or with the fuel play. (if equipped)
level below "E" can cause the For more details, refer to “Tire
engine to misfire and damage Pressure Monitoring System
the catalytic converter (if (TPMS)” in chapter 6.
equipped).
4 113
Automatic Emergency All Wheel Drive (AWD)

WARNING Braking (AEB) Warning Warning Light
- Low tire pressure light (if equipped) (if equipped)
• Significantly low tire pressure
makes the vehicle unstable This indicator light illuminates: This warning light illuminates:
and can contribute to loss of
vehicle control and increased • When there is a malfunction with • Once you set the ignition switch or
braking distances. the AEB. Engine Start/Stop Button to the ON
In this case, have your vehicle position.
• Continued driving or low pres-
sure tires will cause the tires to inspected by an authorized - It illuminates for approximately 3
overheat and fail. HYUNDAI dealer. seconds and then goes off.
For more information, refer to • When there is a malfunction with
"Automatic Emergency Braking the AWD system.
WARNING - Safe Stopping (AEB)" in chapter 5. In this case, have your vehicle
• The TPMS cannot alert you to inspected by an authorized
severe and sudden tire damage HYUNDAI dealer.
caused by external factors.
• If you notice any vehicle insta-
bility, immediately take your
foot off the accelerator pedal,
apply the brakes gradually with
light force, and slowly move to
a safe position off the road.
4 114
Adaptive Front Lighting Indicator Lights Electronic Stability

System (AFLS) Warning AFLS Electronic Stability Control (ESC) OFF
Light (if equipped) Control (ESC) Indicator Indicator Light
Light This indicator light illuminates:
This warning light blinks: • Once you set the ignition switch or
This indicator light illuminates:
• When there is a malfunction with Engine Start/Stop Button to the ON
• Once you set the ignition switch or
the AFLS. position.
Engine Start/Stop Button to the ON
position. - It illuminates for approximately 3
If there is a malfunction with the AFLS: seconds and then goes off.
- It illuminates for approximately 3
1. Drive carefully to the nearest safe seconds and then goes off. • When you deactivate the ESC sys-
location and stop your vehicle. tem by pressing the ESC OFF but-
2. Turn the engine off and restart the ton.
the ESC system.
engine. If the warning light
remains on, have your vehicle In this case, have your vehicle
inspected by an authorized inspected by an authorized For more details, refer to “Electronic
HYUNDAI dealer. HYUNDAI dealer. Stability Control (ESC)” in chapter 5.
This indicator light blinks:

While the ESC is operating.
For more details, refer to “Electronic

Stability Control (ESC)” in chapter 5.
4 115
ECO Indicator Light SPORT Mode Indicator Immobilizer Indicator

(if equipped) Light (if equipped) Light (Without Smart Key)
(if equipped)
This indicator light illuminates: This indicator light illuminates This indicator light illuminates:
• When you activate the Active ECO • When you select SPORT mode as • When the vehicle detects the
system by pressing the Active drive mode. immobilizer in your key properly
ECO button. For more details, refer to "Drive while the ignition switch is ON.
Mode Integrated Control System" in - At this time, you can start the
chapter 5. engine.
For more details, refer to "Active
ECO System" in chapter 5. - The indicator light goes off after
starting the engine.
This indicator light blinks:

the immobilizer system.
HYUNDAI dealer.
4 116
Immobilizer Indicator This indicator light illuminates for 2 Turn Signal Indicator
Light (With Smart Key) seconds and goes off: Light
(if equipped) • When the vehicle can not detect
the smart key which is in the vehi-
This indicator light illuminates for up cle while the Engine Start/Stop
Button is ON. This indicator light blinks:
to 30 seconds:
In this case, have your vehicle • When using the turn signals.
• When the vehicle detects the
smart key in the vehicle properly inspected by an authorized
while the Engine Start/Stop Button HYUNDAI dealer. If any of the following occurs, there
is ACC or ON. may be a malfunction with the turn
This indicator light blinks: signal system. In this case, have your
- At this time, you can start the
vehicle inspected by an authorized
engine. • When the battery of the smart key HYUNDAI dealer.
- The indicator light goes off after is weak.
- The indicator light does not blink
starting the engine. - At this time, you can not start the but illuminates.
engine. However, you can start
the engine if you press the Engine - The indicator light blinks more rap-
This indicator light blinks for a few idly.
seconds: Start/Stop Button with the smart
key. (For more details, refer to - The indicator light does not illumi-
• When the smart key is not in the “Starting the Engine” in section 5). nate at all.
vehicle.
- At this time, you can not start the the immobilizer system.
engine.
HYUNDAI dealer.
4 117
High Beam Indicator Light ON Indicator Light AUTO HOLD Indicator

Light Light (if equipped)
AUTO
HOLD
This indicator light illuminates: This indicator light illuminates:
This indicator light illuminates: • When the tail lights or headlights • [White] When you activate the auto
• When the headlights are on and in are on. hold system by pressing the AUTO
the high beam position HOLD button.
• When the turn signal lever is pulled • [Green] When you stop the vehicle
Front Fog Indicator completely by depressing the
into the Flash-to-Pass position. Light (if equipped) brake pedal with the auto hold sys-
tem activated.
Smart High Beam indi- This indicator light illuminates: • [Yellow] When there is a malfunc-
cator (if equipped) tion with the auto hold system.
• When the front fog lights are on.
This warning light illuminates : inspected by an authorized
• When the high-Beam is on with the HYUNDAI dealer.
light switch in the AUTO light posi-
tion. For more details, refer to "Auto Hold"
• If your vehicle detects oncoming or in chapter 5.
preceding vehicles, the Smart High
Beam system will switch the high
beam to low beam automatically.
For more details, refer to "Smart

High Beam" in this chapter.
4 118
All Wheel Drive (AWD) Cruise Indicator Light Downhill Brake Control
LOCK Indicator Light (if equipped) (DBC) Indicator Light
(if equipped)
This indicator light illuminates: This warning light illuminates:
This indicator light illuminates: • When the cruise control system is • Once you set the ignition switch or
• Once you set the ignition switch or enabled. Engine Start/Stop Button to the ON
Engine Start/Stop Button to the ON position.
position. - It illuminates for approximately 3
For more details, refer to “Cruise
- It illuminates for approximately 3 seconds and then goes off.
Control System” in section 5.
seconds and then goes off. • When you activate the DBC sys-
• When you select AWD Lock mode tem by pressing the DBC button.
by pressing the AWD LOCK button. Cruise SET Indicator
Light (if equipped)
- The AWD LOCK mode is to This warning light blinks:
increase the drive power when • When the DBC is operating.
driving on wet pavement, snow
covered roads and/or off-road. This indicator light illuminates:
This warning light illuminates yellow:
• When the cruise control speed is set.
CAUTION - AWD Lock the DBC system.
Mode For more details, refer to “Cruise In this case, have the vehicle
Do not use AWD LOCK mode on Control System” in section 5. inspected by an authorized
dry paved roads or highway, it HYUNDAI dealer.
can cause noise, vibration or
damage of AWD related parts.
For more details, refer to “Downhill
Brake Control (DBC) System” in
chapter 5.
4 119
DRIVE ASSIST SYSTEM

Rear parking assist system Operation of the rear parking
(if equipped) WARNING assist system
The rear parking assist system ■ Type A
is a supplementary function
only. The operation of the rear
parking assist system can be
affected by several factors
(including environmental condi-
tions). It is the responsibility of
the driver to always check the
area behind the vehicle before
and while backing up.
OANNDR2100
Sensors ■ Type B
ODM046232L
The rear parking assist system

assists the driver during backward
movement of the vehicle by chiming
if any object is sensed within a dis-
tance of 47 in. (120 cm) behind the
vehicle. This system is a supplemen-
tal system and it is not intended to
nor does it replace the need for
extreme care and attention by the ONC047131N
driver. The sensing range and
objects detectable by the back sen- Operating condition
sors are limited. Whenever backing- • This system will activate when the
up, pay as much attention to what is indicator on the rear parking assist
behind you as you would in a vehicle OFF button is not illuminated.
without a rear parking assist system.
4 120
If you desire to deactivate the rear Types of warning sound Non-operational conditions of
parking assist system, press the • When an object is 47 in. to 24 in. rear parking assist system
rear parking assist OFF button (120 cm to 61 cm) from the rear The rear parking assist system may
again. (The indicator on the button bumper: Buzzer beeps intermit- not operate properly when:
will illuminate.) To turn the system tently.
on, press the button again. (The 1. Moisture is frozen to the sensor. (It
• When an object is 23 in. to 12 in. will operate normally when the
indicator on the button will go off.)
(60 cm to 31 cm) from the rear moisture has been cleared.)
• This system will activate when bumper: Buzzer beeps more fre-
backing up with the ignition switch 2. The sensor is covered with foreign
quently. matter, such as snow or water, or
ON.
• When an object is within 11.8 in. the sensor cover is blocked. (It will
If the vehicle is moving at a speed (30 cm) of the rear bumper: operate normally when the materi-
over 6mph (10km/h), the system al is removed or the sensor is no
Buzzer sounds continuously.
may not be activated correctly. longer blocked.)
• The sensing distance while the 3. Driving on uneven road surfaces
rear parking assist system is in (unpaved roads, gravel, bumps,
operation is approximately 47 in. gradient).
(120 cm).
4. Objects generating excessive
• When more than two objects are noise (vehicle horns, loud motor-
sensed at the same time, the clos- cycle engines, or truck air brakes)
est objects will be recognized first. are within range of the sensor.
5. Heavy rain or water spray exists.
6. Wireless transmitters or mobile
phones are within range of the
sensor.
7. Trailer towing.
4 121
The detecting range may decrease Rear parking assist system pre- ✽ NOTICE
when: cautions This system can only sense objects
1. The sensor is covered with foreign • The rear parking assist system within the range and location of the
matter such as snow or water. may not sound sequentially sensors; it can not detect objects in
(The sensing range will return to depending on the speed and other areas where sensors are not
normal when removed.) shapes of the objects detected. installed. Also, small or slim objects,
2. Outside air temperature is • The rear parking assist system may such as poles or objects located
extremely hot or cold. malfunction if the vehicle bumper between sensors may not be detected
height or sensor installation has by the sensors.
The following objects may not be rec- been modified or damaged. Any Always visually check behind the
ognized by the sensor: non-factory installed equipment or vehicle when backing up.
accessories may also interfere with Be sure to inform any drivers of the
1. Sharp or slim objects such as vehicle that may be unfamiliar with
ropes, chains or small poles. the sensor performance.
• The sensor may not recognize the system regarding the systems
2. Objects which tend to absorb the capabilities and limitations.
sensor frequency such as clothes, objects less than 15 in. (40 cm)
spongy material or snow. from the sensor, or it may sense an
incorrect distance. Use caution.
3. Undetectable objects smaller than
40 in. (1 m) and narrower than 6 • When the sensor is frozen or cov-
in. (14 cm) in diameter. ered with snow, dirt, or water, the
sensor may be inoperative until
any debris is removed and the sen-
sors are cleaned. Use only a soft
cloth to clean the sensors.
• Do not push, scratch or strike the
sensor. Sensor damage could occur.
4 122
Self-diagnosis (if equipped)

WARNING When you shift the gear to the R
Pay close attention when the (Reverse) position and if one or more
vehicle is driven close to of the below occurs you may have a
objects on the road, particularly malfunction in the rear parking assist
pedestrians, and especially system.
children. Be aware that some • You don't hear an audible warning
objects may not be detected by sound or if the buzzer sounds inter-
the sensors, due to the object’s mittently.
distance, size or material, all of
which can limit the effective- If this occurs, have your vehicle
ness of the sensor. Always per- checked by an authorized HYUNDAI
form a visual inspection to dealer as soon as possible.
make sure the vehicle is clear of
all obstructions before moving WARNING
the vehicle in any direction. Your new vehicle warranty does
not cover any accidents or dam-
age to the vehicle or injuries to
its occupants due to a rear
parking assist system malfunc-
tion. Always drive safely and
cautiously.
4 123
Rear view camera This is a supplemental system that

(if equipped) provides a view of the area behind WARNING
the vehicle through the A/V display • Never rely solely on the Rear
while the vehicle is in the R View Camera when backing-
(Reverse) position. up.
• ALWAYS look around your
WARNING vehicle to make sure there are
The Rear View Camera is not a no objects or obstacles
safety device. It only serves to before moving the vehicle in
assist the driver in identifying any direction to prevent a col-
objects directly behind the mid- lision.
dle of the vehicle. The camera • Always pay close attention
ODM042238
does NOT cover the complete when the vehicle is driven
area behind the vehicle. close to objects, particularly
pedestrians, and especially
children.
✽ NOTICE
Always keep the camera lens clean.
The camera may not work normally
if the lens is covered with dirt or
ONC047118N snow.
The Rear View Camera will activate
when the engine is running and the
shift lever is in the R (Reverse) posi-
tion.
4 124
Multi-view Camera System Operating conditions ✽ NOTICE

(if equipped) - When the Engine Start/Stop button • When vehicle speed is over 12 mph
■ Type A is in the ON position (20km/h), the Multi-view Camera
- When the transaxle is on D, N or R System will turn off. The system
- When vehicle speed is not over 12 will not automatically turn on
mph (20 km/h) driving forward. again, even though vehicle speed
gets below 12 mph (20 km/h).
- When vehicle speed is not over 6 Push the button again, to turn on
mph (10 km/h) driving backward. the system.
• When the vehicle is backing up,
CAUTION the Multi-view Camera System
will turn ON regardless of vehicle
ONC047122N • Multi-view Camera System speed or button status. However, if
■ Type B only serves to assist the driv- vehicle speed is over 6 mph (10
er in parking. ALWAYS look km/h) when driving backward, the
around your vehicle to make system will turn off.
sure there are no objects or • A warning appears on the system
obstacles before moving the when:
vehicle. - The liftgate (tailgate) is opened
• Always keep the camera lens - The driver's door is opened
clean. The camera may not - The passenger's door is opened
work normally if the lens is • If the Multi-view Camera System
ONC047123N covered with foreign material. is not operating normally, the sys-
The Multi-view Camera System can
tem should be checked by an
assist in parking by allowing the driv-
er to see around the vehicle.
For more details, please refer to the
Push the button into the ON position
separate manual that was supplied
to operate the system.
with your vehicle.
To cancel the system, push the but-
ton again.
4 125
HAZARD WARNING FLASHER

■ Type A The hazard warning flasher should
be used whenever you find it neces-
sary to stop the car in a hazardous
location. When you must make such
an emergency stop, always pull off
the road as far as possible.
The hazard warning lights are turned
on by pushing in the hazard switch.
ODM042242 This causes all turn signal lights to
■ Type B blink. The hazard warning lights will
operate even though the key is not in
the ignition switch.
To turn the hazard warning lights off,
push the switch a second time.
ODM042243
■ Type C
ONC047620L
4 126
LIGHTING
Battery saver function Headlamp delay
CAUTION
• The purpose of this feature is to If you turn the ignition switch to the
prevent the battery from being dis- ACC or OFF position with the head- If the driver gets out of the vehi-
charged. The system automatically lights ON, the headlights remain on cle through other doors (other
turns off the parking lights when for about 5 minutes. However, if the than the driver's door), the bat-
the driver removes the ignition key driver’s door is opened and closed, tery saver function does not
(smart key : turns off the engine) the headlights are turned off after 15 operate and the headlamp delay
and opens the driver-side door. seconds. does not turn off automatically.
This will cause the battery to be
• With this feature, the parking lights The headlights can be turned off by discharged. In this case, make
will be turned off automatically if pressing the lock button on the trans- sure to turn off the lamp before
the driver parks on the side of the mitter (or smart key) twice or turning getting out of the vehicle.
road at night. the light switch to the OFF or Auto
If necessary, to keep the lights on position.
when the ignition key is removed However, if you turn the light switch
(smart key : turns off the engine), to the Auto position when it is dark
perform the following: outside, the headlights will not be
1) Open the driver-side door. turned off.
2) Turn the parking lights OFF and
ON again using the light switch You can activate or deactivate this
on the steering column. feature. Refer to “User Settings” in
this section.
4 127
Lighting control ■ Type B Daytime running light (DRL)

■ Type A
(if equipped)
The Daytime Running Lights (DRL)
can make it easier for others to see
the front of your vehicle during the
day, especially after dawn and before
sunset.
The DRL will turn off when:

ODM044601A • Type A
■ Type C
1. The light switch is not in the AUTO
position.
ONC047124N
2. The light switch is in the headlight
To operate the lights, turn the knob at position.
the end of the control lever to one of 3. The parking brake is applied.
the following positions:
4. The engine is turned off.
(1) DRL OFF position
• Type B
(2) AUTO light position
ODMECO2005 1. The light switch is not in DRL posi-
(3) Parking light position tion.
(1) OFF position
(4) Headlight position 2. The light switch is in the headlight
(2) DRL ON position
(3) Parking light position position.
(4) Headlight position 3. The parking brake is applied.
4. The engine is turned off.
4 128
AUTO light position (if equipped) Parking light position ( )

CAUTION
• Never place anything over
sensor (1) located on the
instrument panel. This will
ensure better AUTO light sys-
tem control.
• Don’t clean the sensor using a
window cleaner. The cleaner
may leave a light film which
could interfere with sensor
operation.
ODMECO2012 • If your vehicle has window tint ODMECO2008
or other types of metallic coat-
When the light switch is in the AUTO ing on the front windshield, When the light switch is in the park-
light position, the taillights and head- the AUTO light system may ing light position, the tail, position,
lights will be turned ON or OFF auto- not work properly. license plate lights and the tail light
matically depending on the amount indicator will turn on.
of light outside the vehicle.
Even with the AUTO light feature in

operation, it is recommended to
manually turn ON the lamps when
driving at night or in a fog, or when
you enter dark areas, such as tun-
nels and parking facilities.
4 129
Headlight position ( ) High beam operation

WARNING
Do not use the high beams
when there are other vehicles.
Using high beam could obstruct
the other driver's vision.
ODMECO2010 ODMECO2013
When the light switch is in the head- To turn on the high beam headlamp,
light position, the head, tail, license push the lever away from you.
and instrument panel lights will turn The lever will return to its original
on. position.
The high beam indicator will light
✽ NOTICE when the headlight high beams are
The ignition switch must be in the switched on.
ON position to turn on the head- To prevent the battery from being
lights. discharged, do not leave the lights
on for a prolonged time while the
engine is not running.
4 130
Turn signals and lane change sig- To signal a lane change, move the
nals turn signal lever slightly and hold it in
position (B). The lever will return to
the OFF position when released.
If an indicator stays on and does not
flash or if it flashes abnormally, one
of the turn signal bulbs may be
burned out and will require replace-
ment.
ODMECO2014
To flash the headlights, pull the lever
towards you. It will return to the nor- ODMECO2026
mal (low beam) position when
released. The headlight switch does The ignition switch must be on for the
not need to be on to use this flashing turn signals to function. To turn on
feature. the turn signals, move the lever up or
down (A). Green arrow indicators on
the instrument panel indicate which
turn signal is operating. They will
self-cancel after a turn is completed.
If the indicator continues to flash
after a turn, manually return the lever
to the OFF position.
4 131
One Touch Turn Signal Front fog light (if equipped)

To activate the one-touch lane CAUTION
change function, move the turn sig- When in operation, the fog
nal lever slightly and then release it. lights consume large amounts
The lane change signals will blink 3 of vehicle electrical power. Only
(5 or 7, if equipped) times. use the fog lights when visibility
is poor or unnecessary battery
and generator drain could
You can activate/deactivate the One occur.
Touch Turn Signal function or choose
the number of blinking (3, 5, or 7)
from the User Settings Mode on the
LCD display (if equipped).
ODMECO2015
✽ NOTICE Fog lights are used to provide illumi-

If an indicator flash is abnormally nation close to the road surface
quick or slow, a bulb may be burned when visibility is poor due to fog, rain
out or have a poor electrical connec- or snow, etc.
tion in the circuit. 1. Turn on the park light.
2. Turn the light switch (1) to the front
fog light position.
3. To turn off the front fog light, turn
the light switch to the front fog light
position again or turn off the park
light.
4 132
Smart High Beam (if equipped) Operating condition The high beam switches to low beam
1. Place the light switch in the AUTO in the below conditions.
position. - When the Smart High Beam is off.
2. Turn on the high beam by pushing - When the light switch is not in the
the lever away from you. AUTO position.
The smart high beam ( ) indica- - When a headlamp is detected from
tor will illuminate. approaching vehicle.
3. The Smart High Beam will turn on - When tail lamp is detected from
when vehicle speed is above 28 the front vehicle.
mph (45km/h). - When the ambient light is bright
• If the lever is pushed away when enough that high beams are not
the Smart High Beam is operat- needed.
ONC046106
ing, the Smart High Beam will - When streetlights or other lights
The Smart High Beam is a system turn off and the high beam will are detected.
that automatically adjusts the head- be on continuously. The smart
high beam ( ) indicator will - When vehicle speed is below 22
lamp range (switches between high mph (35km/h).
beam and low beam) according to turn off.
the brightness of other vehicles and • If the lever is pulled towards you
road conditions. when the Smart High Beam is
operating, the Smart High Beam
will turn off.
4. If the light switch is placed to the
headlamp position, the Smart
High Beam will turn off and the
low beam will be on continuously.
4 133
Warning light and message After the message disappears, the

master warning light will illuminate. CAUTION
Take your vehicle to an authorized The system may not operate
HYUNDAI dealer and have the sys- normally in the following condi-
tem checked. tions :
• When lights from an on-com-
ing vehicle is not detected
because of lamp damage, the
light is blocked, etc.
• When the lights of the on-
coming vehicle are covered
ODM046655L/ODM046656L with dust, snow or water.
• When the lights from an on-
coming is not detected
because of smoke, fog, snow,
etc.
• When the front window is cov-
ered with foreign matter such
as ice, dust, fog, or is dam-
aged.
• In poor visibility due to fog,
ODM046748 heavy rain or snow.
• When headlamp aiming is not
When the Smart High Beam Assist properly adjusted.
System is not working properly, the
warning message above will come • When driving on a narrow
on for a few seconds. curved road or rough road.
(Continued)
4 134
(Continued) (Continued)
WARNING
• When driving downhill or • When the on coming vehicle is
• Do not place any accessories,
uphill. tilted from a flat tire is being
stickers or tint on the wind-
• When only part of the on com- towed.
shield.
ing vehicle is visible on a • When the LDWS (Lane
• Have the windshield glass
crossroad or curved road. Departure Warning System)
replaced at an authorized
• When there is a traffic light, warning light illuminates. (if
dealer.
reflecting sign, flashing sign equipped)
• Do not remove or impact relat-
or mirror.
ed parts of the Smart High
• When the road conditions are Beam system.
poor such as being wet or
• Be careful that water doesn’t
covered with snow.
get into the Smart High Beam
• When the on coming vehicle’s unit.
headlamps are off but the fog
• Do not place objects on the
lamps on.
dashboard that reflect light
• When a vehicle suddenly such as mirrors, white paper,
appears from a curve. etc. The system may malfunc-
(Continued) tion if sunlight is reflected.
• At times, the Smart High
Beam system may not work
properly, always check the
road conditions for your safe-
ty. When the system does not
operate normally, manually
change between the high
beam and low beam.
4 135
Adaptive Front Lighting

System (AFLS) (if equipped)
ONC047618N
If the AFLS malfunction indicator
ODM042247
comes on, the AFLS is not working
properly. Drive to the nearest safe
Adaptive front lighting system uses location and restart the engine. If the
the steering angle and vehicle indicator continuously remains on,
speed, to keep your field of vision take your vehicle to an authorized
wide by swiveling and leveling the HYUNDAI dealer and have the sys-
headlamp. tem checked.
Change the switch to the AUTO posi-
tion when the engine is running. The
adaptive front lighting system will
operate when the headlamp is ON.
To turn off the AFLS, change the
switch to other positions. After turn-
ing the AFLS off, headlamp swiveling
no longer occurs, but leveling oper-
ates continuously.
4 136
WIPERS AND WASHERS

A : Wiper speed control Windshield wipers
· MIST – Single wipe Operates as follows when the igni-
· OFF – Off tion switch is turned ON.
· INT – Intermittent wipe MIST : For a single wiping cycle,
· AUTO* – Auto control wipe move the lever to this (MIST)
/AUTO position and release it. The
· LO – Low wiper speed wipers will operate continu-
· HI – High wiper speed ously if the lever is held in this
position.
B : Intermittent wipe time adjust- OFF : Wiper is not in operation
ment
OANNCO43007 INT : Wiper operates intermittently at
C : Wash with brief wipes (front) the same wiping intervals. Use
this mode in a light rain or mist.
D : Rear wiper/washer control To vary the speed setting, turn
the speed control knob.
· HI – High wiper speed
LO : Normal wiper speed
· LO – Low wiper speed
HI : Fast wiper speed
· OFF – Off
E : Wash with brief wipes (rear)
OANNCO43008
4 137
✽ NOTICE Auto control (if equipped)

CAUTION
If there is heavy accumulation of
snow or ice on the windshield, When the ignition switch is ON
defrost the windshield for about 10 and the windshield wiper switch
minutes, or until the snow and/or ice is placed in the AUTO mode, use
is removed before using the wind- caution in the following situa-
shield wipers to ensure proper oper- tions to avoid any injury to the
ation. hands or other parts of the body:
• Do not touch the upper end of
✽ NOTICE the windshield glass facing
the rain sensor.
• When you operate the wipers, if Rain sensor
your vehicle has a problem in any • Do not wipe the upper end of
part of the wiper operation sys- ODMECO4022 the windshield glass with a
tem, the wiper may operate in the damp or wet cloth.
The rain sensor located on the upper
LO mode regardless of the wiper end of the windshield glass senses • Do not put pressure on the
switch position. In this case, have the amount of rainfall and controls windshield glass.
your vehicle checked by an the wiping cycle for the proper inter-
authorized HYUNDAI dealer as val. The more it rains, the faster the
soon as possible. wiper operates.
• When the ignition key is removed,
the wiper blade sometimes may When the rain stops, the wiper stops.
move slightly for reducing the To vary the speed setting, turn the
deterioration of the windshield speed control knob (1).
wipers. If the wiper switch is set in AUTO
mode when the ignition switch is ON,
the wiper will operate once to per-
form a self-check of the system. Set
the wiper to OFF position when the
wiper is not in use.
4 138
Windshield washers The reservoir filler neck is located in

CAUTION the front of the engine compartment
When washing the vehicle, set on the passenger side.
the wiper switch in the OFF
position to stop the auto wiper CAUTION
operation.
To prevent possible damage to
The wiper may operate and be the washer pump, do not oper-
damaged if the switch is set in ate the washer when the fluid
the AUTO mode while washing reservoir is empty.
the vehicle.
Do not remove the sensor cover
located on the upper end of the
passenger side windshield WARNING
OANNCO43009
glass. Damage to system parts Do not use the washer in freez-
could occur and may not be cov- In the OFF position, pull the lever ing temperatures without first
ered by your vehicle warranty. gently toward you to spray washer warming the windshield with
When starting the vehicle in fluid on the windshield and to run the the defrosters; the washer solu-
winter, set the wiper switch in wipers 1-3 cycles. tion could freeze on the wind-
the OFF position. Otherwise, Use this function when the windshield and obscure your vision.
wipers may operate and ice may shield is dirty.
damage the windshield wiper The spray and wiper operation will
blades. Always remove all snow continue until you release the lever.
and ice and defrost the wind- If the washer does not work, check
shield properly prior to operat- the washer fluid level. If the fluid level
ing the windshield wipers. is not sufficient, you will need to add
appropriate non-abrasive windshield
washer fluid to the washer reservoir.
4 139
Rear window wiper and

CAUTION washer switch
• To prevent possible damage
to the wipers or windshield,
do not operate the wipers
when the windshield is dry.
• To prevent damage to the wiper
blades, do not use gasoline,
kerosene, paint thinner, or
other solvents on or near them.
• To prevent damage to the
wiper arms and other compo- OANNCO43011
nents, do not attempt to move Push the lever away from you to
the wipers manually. OANNCO43010
spray rear washer fluid and to run the
rear wipers 1~3 cycles. The spray
The rear window wiper and washer and wiper operation will continue
switch is located at the end of the until you release the lever.
wiper and washer switch lever. Turn
the switch to the desired position to
operate the rear wiper and washer.
HI : High wiper speed
LO : Low wiper speed
OFF : Off
4 140
INTERIOR LIGHT
Map lamp
CAUTION
■ Type A ■ Type C
Do not use the interior lights for
extended periods when the
engine is not running.
It may cause battery discharge.
WARNING
Do not use the interior lights
when driving in the dark.
ODM045258 ODM045259
Accidents could happen ■ Type B ■ Type D
because the view may be
obscured by interior lights.
Automatic turn off function

The interior lights automatically turn
off approximately 20 minutes after
the ignition switch is turned off.
If your vehicle is equipped with the ONC045604 ONC044082
theft alarm system, the interior lights
automatically turn off approximately Press the lens (1) to turn the map lamp on or off
5 seconds after the system is in the • ON (2): The map lamp and room lamp stays on at all times.
armed stage. • OFF/ (3): The lamps are off even if a door is opened.
• ROOM/ (4): The map lamp and room lamp stays on at all times.
4 141
• DOOR / (5): ✽ NOTICE Room lamp

When the lamp is turned on by ■ Type A
- The map lamp and room lamp pressing the lens (1), the lamp does
comes on when doors are not turn off even if the switch is in
unlocked with a transmitter or the OFF position (3).
smart key as long as the doors
are closed. The lamps go out
after approximately 30 seconds.
- The map lamp and room lamp
comes on for approximately 30
seconds when doors are unlocked
with a transmitter or smart key as ODM042260
long as the doors are not opened. ■ Type B
- The map lamp and room lamp will
stay on for approximately 20 min-
utes if a door is opened with the
ignition switch in the ACC or
LOCK/OFF position.
stay on continuously if the door is
opened with the ignition switch in
the ON position.
ODM042341
go out immediately if the ignition Press the button to turn the light on
switch is changed to the ON posi- or off.
tion or all doors are locked.
4 142
Luggage room lamp Vanity mirror lamp (if equipped)

CAUTION
Do not leave the lamp switches
on for an extended period of
time when the vehicle is not run-
ning because the battery may
drain.
OXM049136 OYF049209
• ON : The luggage room lamp stays Pull the sunvisor downward and you
on at all times. can turn the vanity mirror lamp ON or
• DOOR : The luggage room lamp OFF by pushing the button.
comes on when the liftgate • : To turn the lamp ON.
(tailgate) is opened. • O : To turn the lamp OFF.
• OFF : The luggage room lamp is off.
CAUTION
To prevent unnecessary battery
drain, turn off the lamp by push-
ing the O button after using the
lamp.
4 143
WELCOME SYSTEM
Headlamp welcome Interior light Puddle lamp and pocket lamp
When the headlight(light switch in When the interior light switch is in the (if equipped)
the headlight or AUTO position) is on DOOR position and all doors (and When all doors are locked and
and all doors (and liftgate (tailgate)) liftgate (tailgate)) are locked and closed, the puddle lamp and pocket
are locked and closed, the headlight, closed, the room lamp will come on lamp will come on for 15 seconds if
position light and tail light will come for 30 seconds if any of the below is any of the below is performed.
on for 15 seconds if any of the below performed. • Without smart key system
is performed. • Without smart key system - When the door unlock button is
• Without smart key system - When the door unlock button is pressed on the transmitter.
- When the door unlock button is pressed on the transmitter. • With the smart key system
pressed on the transmitter. • With the smart key system - When the door unlock button is
• With the smart key system - When the door unlock button is pressed on the smart key.
- When the door unlock button is pressed on the smart key. - When the button of the outside
pressed on the smart key. - When the button of the outside door handle is pressed.
door handle is pressed. - When the vehicle is approached
At this time, if you press the door lock with the smart key in possession.
button (on the transmitter or smart At this time, if you press the door lock
key), the lights will turn off immedi- button, the lamps will turn off imme-
ately. At this time, if you press the door lock
diately. button, the lamps will turn off imme-
diately.
4 144
DEFROSTER
Rear window defroster To activate the rear window
CAUTION defroster, press the rear window
■ Manual climate control
To prevent damage to the con- defroster button located in the center
ductors bonded to the inside facia switch panel.
surface of the rear window, The indicator on the rear window
never use sharp instruments or defroster button illuminates when the
window cleaners containing defroster is ON.
abrasives to clean the window. If there is heavy accumulation of
snow on the rear window, brush it off
✽ NOTICE before operating the rear defroster.
If you want to defrost and defog the The rear window defroster automati-
ODM042271 cally turns off after approximately 20
front windshield, refer to ■ Automatic climate control
“Windshield defrosting and defog- minutes or when the ignition switch is
ging” in this section. turned off. To turn off the defroster,
press the rear window defroster but-
ton again.
Outside rearview mirror defroster

(if equipped)
If your vehicle is equipped with the
outside rearview mirror defrosters,
ODM042272 they will operate at the same time you
turn on the rear window defroster.
The defroster heats the window to
remove frost, fog and thin ice from
the rear window, while the engine is
running.
4 145
Front wiper deicer (if equipped)

If your vehicle is equipped with the
front wiper deicer, it will be operating
at the same time you operate the
front windshield defroster.
4 146
MANUAL CLIMATE CONTROL SYSTEM (IF EQUIPPED)
1. MAX A/C (Max air conditioning)

button
2. A/C (Air conditioning) button
3. Mode selection buttons
4. Fan speed control knob
5. Rear window defroster button
6. Front windshield defrost button
7. Temperature control switch
8. Air intake control button
ODM042273
4 147
Heating and air conditioning

1. Start the engine.
2. Set the mode to the desired posi-
tion.
To improve the effectiveness of
heating and cooling :
- Heating:
- Cooling:
3. Set the temperature control to the
desired position.
4. Set the air intake control to the
outside (fresh) air or recirculated
air position.
5. Set the fan speed control to the
desired speed.
6. If air conditioning is desired, turn
the air conditioning system on
OAN047005N
❈ Air outlet vents for rear seat (E, F)

• The air flow of the rear outlet vents (F)is controlled by the front climate con-
trol system and delivered through the inside air duct of the floor.
• The air flow of the rear outlet vents (E, F) may be weaker than the instru-
ment panel vents for the long air duct.
• Close the rear outlet vents (F) in cold weather. The air flow of the rear out-
let vents may not be as warm during heating operation. (Use the rear out-
let vents (F) during cooling operation.)
4 148
Mode selection
Face-Level (B, D, F) Floor/Defrost-Level (A, C, D, E)
Air flow is directed toward the upper Most of the air flow is directed to the
body and face. Additionally, each floor and the windshield with a small
outlet can be controlled to direct the amount directed to the side window
air discharged from the outlet. defrosters, and side vents.
Bi-Level (B, D, E, C, F) Defrost-Level (A, D)
ODMECL2002 Air flow is directed towards the face Most of the air flow is directed to the
The mode selection button controls and the floor. windshield with a small amount of air
the direction of the air flow through directed to the side vents.
the ventilation system.
Floor-Level (C, A, D, E)
Most of the air flow is directed to the

floor, with a small amount of the air
being directed to the windshield, side
window defrosters, and side vents.
4 149
MAX A/C-Level (B, D) Temperature control
ODM042279
ODM042277
Instrument panel vents ODM042280
To operate the MAX A/C, turn the fan The outlet vents can be opened or The temperature control switch
speed control knob to the right to closed separately using the thumb- allows you to control the temperature
maximum fan speed, then press the wheel. of the airflow in the vehicle.
MAX A/C button. Air flow is directed Also, you can adjust the direction of To change the temperature:
toward the upper body and face. air delivered from these vents using
the vent control lever as shown. • Press the (red) switch to
In this mode, the air conditioning, the increase temperature.
recirculated air position and max
cool temperature will be selected • Press the (blue) switch to
automatically. decrease temperature.
The temperature status will be dis-
played at the above switch panel as
an indicator.
4 150
Air intake control Recirculated air position ✽ NOTICE

The indicator light on the Prolonged operation of the heater in
button illuminates when the recirculated air position (with-
the recirculated air posi- out air conditioning selected) may
tion is selected. cause fogging of the windshield and
With the recirculated air side windows and the air within the
position selected, air passenger compartment may
from the passenger become stale.
compartment will be In addition, prolonged operation of
drawn through the heat- the air conditioning with the recir-
ing system and heated culated air position selected will
or cooled according to result in excessively dry air in the
the function selected. passenger compartment.
ODM042281
This is used to select outside (fresh)
air position or recirculated air posi- Outside (fresh) air position
tion. With the outside (fresh)
To change the air intake control posi- air position selected, air
tion, push the control button. enters the vehicle from
outside and is heated or
cooled according to the
function selected.
4 151
Fan speed control To turn off the blowers

WARNING
• Continued use of the climate
control system operation in the
recirculated air position with-
out A/C selected may allow
humidity to increase inside the
vehicle which may fog the
glass and obscure visibility.
• Do not sleep in a vehicle with
the air conditioning or heating
system on. This may cause
serious harm or death due to ODM042282 ODM042283
a drop in the oxygen level
and/or body temperature. The ignition switch must be in the ON To turn off the blowers, turn the fan
position for fan operation. speed control knob to the “0” position.
• Continued use of the climate
control system operation in The fan speed control knob allows
the recirculated air position you to control the fan speed of the air
may cause drowsiness or flowing from the ventilation system.
sleepiness and loss of vehicle To change the fan speed, turn the
control. Set the air intake con- knob to the right for higher speed or
trol to the outside (fresh) air left for lower speed.
position as much as possible Setting the fan speed control knob to
while driving. the “0” position turns off the fan.
4 152
Air conditioning System operation Operation Tips

Ventilation • To prevent dust or unpleasant
fumes from entering the vehicle
1. Set the mode to the position. through the ventilation system,
2. Set the air intake control to the temporarily set the air intake con-
outside (fresh) air position. trol to the recirculated air position.
3. Set the temperature control to the Be sure to return the control to the
desired position. fresh air position when the irritation
4. Set the fan speed control to the has passed to keep fresh air in the
desired speed. vehicle. This will help keep the driv-
er alert and comfortable.
• Air for the heating/cooling system
Heating is drawn in through the grilles just
ODM042284
1. Set the mode to the position. ahead of the windshield. Care
Press the A/C button to turn the air 2. Set the air intake control to the should be taken that these are not
conditioning system on (indicator outside (fresh) air position. blocked by leaves, snow, ice or
light will illuminate). Press the button other obstructions.
again to turn the air conditioning sys- 3. Set the temperature control to the
desired position. • To prevent interior fog on the wind-
tem off.
shield, set the air intake control to
the fresh air position and fan speed
desired speed.
to the desired position, turn on the
5. If dehumidified heating is desired, air conditioning system, and adjust
turn the air conditioning system (if the temperature control to desired
equipped) on. temperature.
• If the windshield fogs up, set the
mode to the or position.
4 153
Air conditioning ✽ NOTICE Air conditioning system operation tips

HYUNDAI Air Conditioning Systems • While using the air conditioning • If the vehicle has been parked in
are filled with environmentally friend- system, monitor the engine tem- direct sunlight during hot weather,
ly R-134a refrigerant. perature gauge closely while driv- open the windows for a short time
1. Start the engine. Push the air con- ing up hills or in heavy traffic to let the hot air inside the vehicle
ditioning button. when outside temperatures are escape.
2. Set the mode to the position. high. Air conditioning system • To help reduce moisture inside of
operation may cause engine over- the windows on rainy or humid
3. Set the air intake control to the heating. Continue to use the blow- days, decrease the humidity inside
recirculated air position. However, er fan but turn the air condition- the vehicle by operating the air
prolonged operation of the recircu- ing system off if the engine tem- conditioning system.
lated air position will excessively perature gauge indicates engine
dry the air. In this case, change the • During air conditioning system
overheating. operation, you may occasionally
air position. • Opening the windows in humid notice a slight change in engine
4. Adjust the fan speed control and weather air conditioning operates speed as the air conditioning com-
temperature control to maintain may create water droplets inside pressor cycles. This is a normal
maximum comfort. the vehicle. Since excessive water system operation characteristic.
• When maximum cooling is desired, droplets may cause damage to
electrical equipment, air condi- • During the winter months, use the
set the temperature control to the air conditioning system every
extreme left position then set the tioning should only be used with
the windows closed. month for a few minutes to ensure
fan speed control to the highest maximum system performance.
speed.
• When using the air conditioning
system, you may notice clear water
dripping (or even puddling) on the
ground under the passenger side
of the vehicle. This condensation is
a normal system operation charac-
teristic.
4 154
• Operating the air conditioning sys- Climate control air filter ✽ NOTICE
tem in the recirculated air position • Replace the filter according to the
provides maximum cooling, how- Maintenance Schedule.
ever, continual operation in this Outside air
If the vehicle is being driven in
mode may cause the air inside the severe conditions such as dusty,
vehicle to become stale. Recirculated
air rough roads, more frequent cli-
• During cooling operation, you may mate control air filter inspections
occasionally notice a misty air flow and changes are required.
because of rapid cooling and • When the air flow rate suddenly
humid air intake. This is a normal decreases, the system should be
system operation characteristic. Blower checked at an authorized
• If you operate air conditioner Climate control Heater core HYUNDAI dealer.
Evaporator
excessively, the difference air filter core 1LDA5047
between the temperature of the
outside air and that of the wind- The climate control air filter installed
shield could cause the outer sur- behind the glove box filters the dust
face of the windshield to fog up, or other pollutants that come into the
causing loss of visibility. In this vehicle from the outside through the
case, set the mode selection knob heating and air conditioning system.
or button to the position and If dust or other pollutants accumulate
fan speed control to the lower in the filter over a period of time, the
speed. air flow from the air vents may
decrease, resulting in moisture accu-
mulation on the inside of the wind-
shield even when the outside (fresh)
air position is selected. If this hap-
pens, have the climate control air fil-
ter replaced by an authorized
HYUNDAI dealer.
4 155
Checking the amount of air Air Conditioning refrigerant

conditioner refrigerant and label WARNING
compressor lubricant ■ Example
Because the refriger-
When the amount of refrigerant is ant is at very high
low, the performance of the air con- pressure, the air con-
ditioning is reduced. Overfilling also ditioning system
has a negative influence on the air should only be serv-
conditioning system. iced by trained and certified
technicians. It is important that
Therefore, if abnormal operation is the correct type and amount of
found, have the system inspected by oil and refrigerant is used, oth-
an authorized HYUNDAI dealer. erwise damage to the vehicle
and personal injury may occur.
✽ NOTICE
OHG045533N
It is important that the correct type
and amount of oil and refrigerant is The actual Air Conditioning refriger-
used. Otherwise, damage to the ant label in the vehicle may differ
compressor and abnormal system from the illustration.
operation may occur. Each symbols and specification on
air conditioning refrigerant label
means as below ;
WARNING
For more detailed information, 1. Classification of refrigerant
we recommend that you contact 2. Amount of refrigerant
3. Classification of Compressor lubri-
Improper service may cause cant
serious injury to the person per-
forming the service. Refer to chapter 8 for more detail
location of air conditioning refrigerant
label.
4 156
AUTOMATIC CLIMATE CONTROL SYSTEM (IF EQUIPPED)

■ Type A
1. A/C display
2. AUTO (automatic control) button
3. Blower OFF button
4. Air conditioning button
5. Driver's temperature control button
6. Front fan speed control knob
7. Air intake control button
8. Passenger's temperature control button
■ Type B
9. Mode selection button
10. SYNC button
11. Front windshield defroster button
12. Rear window defroster button
13. Climate control information screen
selection button*
* if equipped
ONC047087N/ONC047088N
4 157
Automatic heating and air con- ✽ NOTICE

ditioning • To turn the automatic operation
off, select any button or knob of
the following:
- Mode selection button
- Front windshield defrost button
(Press the button one more time
to deselect the front windshield
defroster function. The 'AUTO'
sign will illuminate on the infor-
mation display once again.)
ODM042290 - Fan speed control knob
2. Set the driver’s temperature con- The selected function will be con-
trol switch to set the desired tem- trolled manually while other func-
ONC045610C
perature. tions operate automatically.
1. Press the AUTO button. • For your convenience and to
The modes, fan speeds, air intake improve the effectiveness of the
and air-conditioning will be controlled climate control, use the AUTO
automatically according to the tem- button and set the temperature to
perature setting. 73°F (23°C).
4 158
Manual heating and air condi- Mode selection

tioning
The heating and cooling system can
be controlled manually by pressing
buttons or turning knob(s) other than
the AUTO button. In this case, the
system works sequentially according
to the order of buttons or knob(s)
selected.
ODM042336 2. Set the mode to the desired posi-
tion.
✽ NOTICE ODM042288
For improving the effectiveness of
Never place anything over the sen- heating and cooling; The mode selection button controls
sor located on the instrument panel the direction of the air flow through
to ensure better control of the heat- - Heating:
the ventilation system.
ing and cooling system. - Cooling:
The air flow outlet port is converted
3. Set the temperature control to the as follows:
desired position.
4. Set the air intake control to the
outside (fresh) air position.
desired speed. Refer to the illustration in the
6. If air conditioning is desired, turn “Manual climate control system”.
the air conditioning system on.
Press the AUTO button in order to
convert to full automatic control of
the system.
4 159
Face-Level
Air flow is directed toward the upper

body and face. Additionally, each
outlet can be controlled to direct the
air discharged from the outlet.
Bi-Level
Air flow is directed towards the face ODM042289 ODM042279

and the floor. Defrost-Level Instrument panel vents
Most of the air flow is directed to the The outlet vents can be opened or
windshield with a small amount of air closed separately using the thumb-
Floor-Level directed to the side window defrosters. wheel.
Also, you can adjust the direction of
Most of the air flow is directed to the air delivered from these vents using
floor, with a small amount of the air the vent control lever as shown.
being directed to the windshield and
side window defrosters.
Floor & Defrost
Most of the air flow is directed to the

floor and the windshield with a small
amount directed to the side window
defrosters.
4 160
Temperature control Adjusting the driver and passenger

side temperature individually
■ Driver’s side ■ Passenger’s side
• Press the "SYNC" button again to
adjust the driver and passenger
side temperature individually. The
illumination of button turns off.
• Press the driver side temperature
control button to adjust the driver
side temperature.
• Press the passenger side tempera-
ture control button to adjust the
ONC045611C
passenger side temperature.
ODMECL2003
Adjusting the driver and passenger
side temperature equally
The temperature will increase by
pushing the up button. Each push of • Press the "SYNC" button to adjust
the button will cause the temperature the driver and passenger side tem-
to increase by 1°F/0.5°C. perature equally.
The temperature will decrease by The passenger side temperature
pushing the down button. Each push will be set to the same temperature
of the button will cause the tempera- as the driver side temperature.
ture to decrease by 1°F/0.5°C. When • Press the driver side temperature
set to the lowest temperature setting, control button. The driver and pas-
the air conditioning will operate con- senger side temperature will be
tinuously. adjusted equally.
4 161
Temperature conversion Air intake control Recirculated air position

If the battery has been discharged or ■ Type A, B The indicator light on the
disconnected, the temperature mode button illuminates when
display will reset to Fahrenheit. the recirculated air posi-
To change the temperature unit from tion is selected.
°F to °C or °C to °F: With the recirculated air position
- On the instrument cluster, go to selected, air from the passenger
User Settings Mode ➝ Other compartment will be drawn through
Features ➝ Temperature Unit. the heating system and heated or
- Press the AUTO button for 3 sec- cooled according to the function
onds while pressing the OFF but- selected.
ton. (Automatic climate control sys-
tem) OANNMM2003
Outside (fresh) air position
This is used to select the outside ■ Type A With the outside (fresh)
Both the temperature unit on the (fresh) air position or recirculated air air position selected, air
cluster LCD display and climate con- position. enters the vehicle from
trol screen will change. To change the air intake control posi- outside and is heated or
tion, push the control button. ■ Type B cooled according to the
function selected.
4 162
✽ NOTICE Fan speed control

Prolonged operation of the heater in WARNING
the recirculated air position (with- • Continued use of the climate
out air conditioning selected) may control system operation in
cause fogging of the windshield and the recirculated air position
side windows and the air within the may allow humidity to
passenger compartment may increase inside the vehicle
become stale. which may fog the glass and
In addition, prolonged use of the air obscure visibility.
conditioning with the recirculated • Do not sleep in a vehicle with
air position selected will result in the air conditioning or heating
excessively dry air in the passenger system on. This may cause
compartment. serious harm or death due to
ODM042293
a drop in the oxygen level
and/or body temperature. The fan speed can be set to the
• Continued use of the climate desired speed by turning the fan
control system operation in speed control knob.
the recirculated air position The higher the fan speed is, the
may cause drowsiness or more air is delivered.
sleepiness and loss of vehicle To turn off the fan speed, press the
control. Set the air intake con- OFF button.
trol to the outside (fresh) air
position as much as possible
while driving.
4 163
Air conditioning OFF mode Climate information screen selec-

tion (if equipped)
OANNMM2004 ODM042295
Push the A/C button to turn the air Push the OFF button to turn off the ODM042297
conditioning system on (indicator air climate control system. However, Press the climate information screen
light will illuminate). you can still operate the mode and selection button to display climate
Push the button again to turn the air air intake buttons as long as the igni- information on the screen.
conditioning system off. tion switch is in the ON position.
4 164
WINDSHIELD DEFROSTING AND DEFOGGING

• For maximum defrosting, set the Manual climate control system
WARNING - Windshield temperature control to the extreme To defog inside windshield
heating right/hot position and the fan speed
Do not use the or posi- control to the highest speed.
tion during cooling operation in • If warm air to the floor is desired
extremely humid weather. The while defrosting or defogging, set
difference between the temper- the mode to the floor-defrost posi-
ature of the outside air and that tion.
of the windshield could cause • Before driving, clear all snow and
the outer surface of the wind- ice from the windshield, rear win-
shield to fog up, causing loss of dow, outside rear view mirrors, and
visibility. In this case, set the all side windows.
mode selection knob or button
• Clear all snow and ice from the
to the position and fan
hood and air inlet in the cowl grill to ODM042298
speed control knob or button to
improve heater and defroster effi-
a lower speed.
ciency and to reduce the probabili- 1. Select desired temperature.
ty of fogging up the inside of the 2. Select any fan speed except “0”
windshield. position.
3. Select the or position.
✽ NOTICE 4. The outside (fresh) air will be
Be sure to keep the interior surface selected automatically.
of the windshield clean by wiping it If the outside (fresh) air position is
with a clean cloth and glass cleaner. not selected automatically, press the
This will help reduce the tendency of corresponding button manually.
the glass fogging and also improve
visibility.
4 165
To defrost outside windshield Automatic climate control sys- To defrost outside windshield
tem
To defog inside windshield
ODM042299 OANNMM2006
1. Set the temperature to the 1. Set the temperature to the
extreme hot position. OANNMM2005 extreme hot (HI) position.
2. Set the fan speed to the highest 1. Select desired temperature. 2. Set the fan speed to the highest
(extreme right) position. (extreme right) position.
2. Select desired fan speed.
3. Select the position. 3. Press the defrost button ( ).
3. Press the defrost button ( ).
4. The outside (fresh) air will be 4. The outside (fresh) air position will
selected automatically. 4. The outside (fresh) air position will be selected automatically.
be selected automatically.
If the position is selected, lower
If the outside (fresh) air position is fan speed is adjusted to a higher fan
not selected automatically, adjust the speed.
corresponding button manually.
If the position is selected, lower
fan speed is adjusted to a higher fan
speed.
4 166
Auto defogging system This indicator illuminates The auto defogging system is auto-
(if equipped) when the auto defogging matically activated when the condi-
system senses the mois- tions are met. However, if you would
ture of inside the wind- like to cancel the auto defogging sys-
shield and operates. tem, press the front defroster button
If more moisture is in the vehicle, the 4 times within 2 seconds while press-
automated steps operate as follows: ing the AUTO button. The indicator of
the front defroster button will blink 3
If auto defogging does not defog the times to notify you that the system is
window at step 1, outside air position, cancelled. To use the auto defogging
step 2, blowing air toward the wind- system again, follow the procedures
shield occurs. mentioned above.
Step 1 : Outside air position If the battery has been disconnected
Step 2 : Blowing air toward the wind- or discharged, it resets to the auto
ODM042303
shield defogging status.
Auto defogging reduces the probabil- Step 3 : Increasing air flow toward
ity of fogging up the inside of the the windshield
windshield by automatically sensing Step 4 : Operating the air conditioning
the moisture inside the windshield. Step 5 : Maximizing the air conditioning
The auto defogging system operates
when the heater or air conditioning is
on.
4 167
✽ NOTICE
• When the air conditioning is
turned on by Auto defogging sys-
tem, if you try to turn off the air
conditioning, the indicator will
blink 3 times and the air condi-
tioning will not be turned off.
• For efficiency, do not select recir-
culated air position while Auto
defogging system is operating.
CAUTION
Do not remove the sensor cover
located on the upper end of the
driver side windshield glass.
Damage to system parts could
occur and may not be covered
by your vehicle warranty.
4 168
STORAGE COMPARTMENTS
Center console storage Glove box
CAUTION
■ Type A
• To avoid possible theft, do not
leave valuables in the storage
compartments.
• Always keep the storage com-
partment covers closed while
driving. Do not attempt to
place so many items in the
storage compartment that the
storage compartment cover
cannot close securely. ODMECO2033
■ Type B
ODM042304
WARNING - Flammable To open the center console storage,

materials pull up the lever.
Do not store cigarette lighters,
propane cylinders, or other
flammable/explosive materials
in the vehicle. These items may
catch fire and/or explode if the
vehicle is exposed to hot tem-
ODMECO2032
peratures for extended periods.
The glove box can be locked and
unlocked with the mechanical key (1).
To open the glove box, push the but-
ton (2) and the glove box will auto-
matically open (3). Close the glove
box after use.
4 169
Multi box (if equipped) Sunglass holder

WARNING
To reduce the risk of injury in an
accident or sudden stop, always
keep the glove box door closed
while driving.
CAUTION
Do not keep food in the glove
box for a long time.
ODM042307 ODM042308
To open the cover, push the lever (1) To open the sunglass holder, press
and the multi box will open automati- the cover and the holder will slowly
cally. open. Place your sunglasses in the
It can be used for storing small items. compartment door with the lenses
facing out. Push to close.
CAUTION
Do not drive with the multi box
open.
4 170
Luggage tray ■ Front

WARNING ■ Rear
• Do not keep objects except
sunglasses inside the sun-
glass holder. Such objects can
be thrown from the holder in
the event of a sudden stop or
an accident, possibly injuring
the passengers in the vehicle.
• Do not open the sunglass
holder while the vehicle is
moving. The rear view mirror OANNCO43013
of the vehicle can be blocked OANNCO43012 Front
by an open sunglass holder. 1. Grasp the handle on the top of the
• Do not put the glasses You can place a first aid kit, a reflec- cover and lift it.
forcibly into a sunglass holder tor triangle, tools, etc. in the box for
easy access. 2. Push the cover toward the front of
to prevent breakage or defor- the vehicle and fold it.
mation of glasses. It may
cause personal injury if you Rear
try to open it forcibly when the
glasses are jammed in holder. • Grasp the handle on the top of the
cover and lift it.
4 171
INTERIOR FEATURES
Cup holder
WARNING - Hot liquids CAUTION
■ Front
• Do not place uncovered cups When cleaning spilled liquids,
of hot liquid in the cup holder do not dry the cup holder at
while the vehicle is in motion. high temperatures. This may
If the hot liquid spills, you may damage the chrome part of the
burn yourself. Such a burn to cup holder.
the driver could lead to loss of
control of the vehicle.
• To reduce the risk of personal
injury in the event of sudden
OANNCO43014 stop or collision, do not place
■ Rear (if equipped) uncovered or unsecured bot-
tles, glasses, cans, etc., in the
cup holder while the vehicle is
in motion.
WARNING
Keep cans or bottles out of
direct sun light and do not
ODM042316 put/leave them in a hot vehicle.
The container/contents may
Cups or small beverage cans may be explode.
placed in the cup holders.
To use the center cup holder, pull
down the armrest and press the open
button.
4 172
Sunvisor To use the vanity mirror, pull down Power outlet

the visor and slide the mirror cover
■ Front
(3).
Adjust the sunvisor extension (if
equipped) forward or backward (4).
CAUTION
• Always have the switch in the
off position when the vanity
mirror lamp is not in use. If the ODMECO2037
sunvisor is closed without the ■ Center
OYF049145
lamp off, it may discharge the
battery or damage the sunvi-
sor.
• Always use the sunvisor
extension, after swinging the
sunvisor to the side.
ODM042318
■ Rear (if equipped)
HTG2174
Use the sunvisor to shield direct light

through the front or side windows.
To use a sunvisor, pull it downward.
To use a sunvisor for a side window,
pull it downward, unsnap it from the
OANNCO43015
bracket (1) and swing it to the side (2).
4 173
The power outlet is designed to pro-

vide power for mobile telephones or CAUTION WARNING
other devices designed to operate • Use the power outlet only Do not put fingers or foreign
with vehicle electrical systems. The when the engine is running elements (pin, etc.) into a power
devices should draw less than 10 and remove the accessory outlet and do not touch with a
amps with the engine running. plug after use. Using the wet hand. You may get an elec-
accessory plug for prolonged tric shock.
periods of time with the
engine off could cause the
battery to discharge.
• Only use 12V electric acces-
sories which are less than 10A
in electric capacity.
• Adjust the air-conditioner or
heater to the lowest operating
level when using the power
outlet.
• Close the cover when not in
use.
• Some electronic devices can
cause electronic interference
when plugged into a vehicle’s
power outlet. These devices
may cause excessive audio
static and malfunctions in
other electronic systems or
devices used in your vehicle.
4 174
Clothes hanger Floor mat anchor(s)

WARNING
The floor mat must be properly
anchored so that it will not
interfere with the operation of
the accelerator pedal. Any inter-
ference with the accelerator
pedal could cause the accelera-
tor pedal to be unable to return
to the idle position. A pedal that
cannot return to the idle posi-
tion could lead to an accident
which may result in severe per-
ODMECO2038 ODMECO2034 sonal injury or death.
To use the hanger, pull down the When using a floor mat on the front
upper portion of hanger. floor carpet, make sure it attaches to
the floor mat anchor(s) in your vehi-
CAUTION cle. This keeps the floor mat from
sliding forward.
Do not hang heavy clothes,
because it may damage the
hook.
4 175
Aux, USB and iPod® port Luggage net (holder)

WARNING (if equipped)
The following must be observed ■ Type A
when installing ANY floor mat
to the vehicle, so that it will not
interfere with the pedal.
• Ensure that the floor mats are
securely attached to the vehi-
cle’s floor mat anchor(s)
before driving the vehicle.
• Do not use ANY floor mat that
cannot be firmly attached to
the vehicle’s floor mat anchors. ONC046090
OANNCO43017
■ Type B
• Do not stack floor mats on top
of one another (e.g. all-weath- You can use the AUX port to connect
er rubber mat on top of a car- audio devices and the USB port to
peted floor mat). Only a single plug in a USB device or iPod®.
floor mat should be installed
in each position. ✽ NOTICE
IMPORTANT – Your vehicle was When using a portable audio device
manufactured with driver’s side connected to the power outlet, noise
floor mat anchors that are may occur during playback. If this
designed to securely hold the happens, use the power source of the OANNCO43018
floor mat in place. To avoid any portable audio device.
interference with pedal opera- To keep items from shifting in the
tion, HYUNDAI recommends ❈ iPod® is a trademark of Apple Inc. cargo area, you can use the four
that only the HYUNDAI floor mat holders located in the cargo area to
designed for use in your vehicle attach the luggage net. If necessary,
be installed. contact your authorized HYUNDAI
dealer to obtain a luggage net.
4 176
✽ NOTICE Cargo security screen To use the cargo security screen

Vehicles equipped with a luggage (if equipped)
rail system may use the shackles to
hook the luggage net.
CAUTION
To prevent damage to the goods
or the vehicle, care should be
taken when carrying fragile or
bulky objects in the luggage
compartment.
OANNCO43020
OANNCO43019 1. Pull the cargo security screen
WARNING towards the rear of the vehicle by
Use the cargo security screen to
To avoid eye injury, DO NOT the handle (1).
hide items stored in the cargo area.
overstretch the luggage net.
ALWAYS keep your face and 2. Insert the guide pin into the guide
body out of the luggage net’s (2).
recoil path. DO NOT use the
luggage net when the strap has ✽ NOTICE
visible signs of wear or dam- Pull out the cargo security screen
age. with the handle in the center to pre-
vent the guide pin from falling out of
the guide.
4 177
When the cargo security screen is not To remove the cargo security To remove the cargo security
in use: screen screen from the luggage tray
1. Pull the cargo security screen
backward and up to release it from
the guides.
2. The cargo security screen will
automatically slide back in.
✽ NOTICE
The cargo security screen may not
automatically slide back in if the
cargo security screen is not fully OANNCO43021
pulled out. Fully pull it out and then
ODMECO2039
let go.
1. Pull up the screen board.
2. Push in the guide pin.
3. While pushing the guide pin, pull
out the cargo security screen.
OANNCO43022
1. Push in the guide pin.

2. While pushing the lever, pull out
the cargo security screen.
3. Open the luggage tray and keep the
cargo security screen in the tray.
4 178
Side curtain (if equipped)

WARNING
• Do not place objects on the
cargo security screen. Such
objects may be thrown about
inside the vehicle and possi-
bly injure vehicle occupants
during an accident or when
braking.
• Never allow anyone to ride in
the luggage compartment. It
is designed for luggage only.
• Maintain the balance of the ODM042343
vehicle and locate the weight
as forward as possible. To use the side curtain:
1. Lift the curtain by the hook (1).
2. Hang the curtain on both sides of
CAUTION the hook.
Since the cargo security screen
may be damaged or malformed,
do not put luggage on it when it
is used.
4 179
EXTERIOR FEATURES
Roof rack (if equipped) ✽ NOTICE
CAUTION
If the vehicle is equipped with a sun-
roof, be sure not to position cargo • When carrying cargo on the
onto the roof rack in such a way that roof rack, take the necessary
it could interfere with sunroof oper- precautions to make sure the
ation. cargo does not damage the
roof of the vehicle.
• When carrying large objects
on the roof rack, make sure
they do not exceed the overall
roof length or width.
ODM042345
If the vehicle has a roof rack, you can

load cargo on top of your vehicle.
4 180
WARNING (Continued)
• The following specification is • Always drive slowly and turn
the maximum weight that can corners carefully when carry-
be loaded onto the roof rack. ing items on the roof rack.
Distribute the load as evenly Severe wind updrafts, caused
as possible onto the roof rack by passing vehicles or natural
and secure the load firmly. causes, can cause sudden
upward pressure on items
ROOF 100 kg (220 lbs.) loaded on the roof rack. This
RACK EVENLY DISTRIBUTED is especially true when carry-
ing large, flat items such as
wood panels or mattresses.
Loading cargo or luggage in This could cause the items to
excess of the specified weight fall off the roof rack and cause
limit on the roof rack may damage to your vehicle or
damage your vehicle. others around you.
• The vehicle center of gravity • To prevent damage or loss of
will be higher when items are cargo while driving, check fre-
loaded onto the roof rack. quently before or while driv-
Avoid sudden starts, braking, ing to make sure the items on
sharp turns, abrupt maneu- the roof rack are securely fas-
vers or high speeds that may tened.
result in loss of vehicle con-
trol or rollover resulting in an
accident.
(Continued)
4 181
AUDIO SYSTEM
✽ NOTICE Antenna Steering wheel audio control
• If you install an aftermarket HID Roof antenna
headlamp, your vehicle's audio
and electronic device may mal-
function.
• Prevent caustic solutions such as
perfume and cosmetic oil from
contacting the dashboard because
they may cause damage or discol-
oration.
ODM042327
OANNMM2901
The steering wheel incorporates
Your vehicle uses a roof antenna to audio control buttons on the left hand
receive both AM and FM broadcast side of the steering wheel.
signals.
CAUTION
Do not operate audio remote
control buttons simultaneously.
4 182
MODE (1) SEEK/PRESET ( / ) (2) VOLUME (VOL+/-) (3)

Press the button to change audio The SEEK/PRESET button has dif- • Push the lever upward (+) to
source. ferent functions based on the system increase the volume.
mode. • Push the lever downward (-) to
For the following functions the button decrease the volume.
should be pressed for 0.8 second or
more. MUTE (4)
• Press the button to mute the sound.
RADIO mode • Press the button to turn off the
It will function as the AUTO SEEK microphone during a telephone call.
select button.
Detailed information for audio control
CD/USB/iPod® mode buttons are described in the following
It will function as the FF/REW button. pages in this section.
If the SEEK/PRESET button is

pressed for less than 0.8 second, it
will work as follows in each mode.
RADIO mode
It will function as the PRESET STA-
TION buttons.
CD/USB/iPod® mode
It will function as TRACK UP/DOWN
button.
4 183
How vehicle audio works This can be due to factors, such as AM reception
the distance from the radio station,
FM reception closeness of other strong radio sta-
tions or the presence of buildings,
bridges or other large obstructions in
the area.
JBM002
JBM001
AM broadcasts can be received at
greater distances than FM broad-
AM and FM radio signals are broadcasts. This is because AM radio
casted from transmitter towers locat- waves are transmitted at low fre-
ed around your city. They are inter- quencies. These long distance, low
cepted by the radio antenna on your frequency radio waves can follow the
vehicle. This signal is then processed curvature of the earth rather than
by the radio and sent to your vehicle travelling straight. In addition, they
speakers. curve around obstructions resulting
When a strong radio signal has in better signal coverage.
reached your vehicle, the precise
engineering of your audio system
ensures the best possible quality
reproduction. However, in some
cases the signal coming to your vehi-
cle may not be strong and clear.
4 184
FM radio station
JBM003 JBM004 JBM005

FM broadcasts are transmitted at • Fading - As your vehicle moves • Station Swapping - As an FM sig-
high frequencies and do not bend to away from the radio station, the nal weakens, another more power-
follow the earth's surface. Because signal will weaken and sound will ful signal near the same frequency
of this, FM broadcasts generally begin to fade. When this occurs, may begin to play. This is because
begin to fade within short distances we suggest that you select another your radio is designed to lock onto
from the station. Also, FM signals are stronger station. the clearest signal. If this occurs,
easily affected by buildings, moun- • Flutter/Static - Weak FM signals or select another station with a
tains, and obstructions. This can lead large obstructions between the stronger signal.
to undesirable or unpleasant listen- transmitter and your radio can dis- • Multi-Path Cancellation - Radio
ing conditions which might lead you turb the signal causing static or signals being received from sever-
to believe a problem exists with your fluttering noises to occur. Reducing al directions can cause distortion
radio. The following conditions are the treble level may lessen this or fluttering. This can be caused by
normal and do not indicate radio effect until the disturbance clears. a direct and reflected signal from
trouble: the same station, or by signals
from two stations with close fre-
quencies. If this occurs, select
another station until the condition
has passed.
4 185
Using a cellular phone or a two-

way radio WARNING
When a cellular phone is used inside Do not use a cellular phone
the vehicle, noise may be produced while driving. Stop at a safe
from the audio system. This does not location to use a cellular phone.
mean that something is wrong with
the audio equipment. In such a case,
try to operate mobile devices as far
from the audio equipment as possible.
CAUTION
When using a communication
system such as a cellular phone
or a radio set inside the vehicle,
a separate external antenna
must be fitted. When a cellular
phone or a radio set is used
with an internal antenna alone,
it may interfere with the vehi-
cle's electrical system and
adversely affect safe operation
of the vehicle.
4 186
AUDIO (With Touch Screen)
■ Type B
ANB50000EU
4 187
Features of Your Audio (2) RADIO (6) SEEK TRACK

• Changes to FM/AM/SiriusXM mode. • When pressed briefly
• Each time the button is pressed, - Radio mode : Plays previous/
the mode is changed in the order next frequency.
of FM1 ➟ FM2 ➟ AM ➟ XM1 ➟ - Media (CD/USB/iPod®/My Music)
XM2 ➟ XM3. modes : Changes the track,
Song(file).
(3) MEDIA • When pressed and held
• Changes to CD/USB(iPod®)/AUX - Radio mode : Continuously
/My Music/iPod® Audio mode. changes the frequency. Upon
• Each time the button is pressed, release, plays the current fre-
the mode is changed in the order quency.
of CD ➟ USB(iPod®) ➟ AUX ➟ My - Media(CD/USB/iPod®/My Music)
Music ➟ BT(Bluetooth®) Audio. modes : Rewinds or fast forwards
the track or file.
(4) PHONE - During a Handsfree call, controls
(1) EJECT the call volume.
• Changes to Phone mode.
• Ejects the disc. • When a phone is not connected,
the connection screen is displayed.
(5) POWER/VOL knob

• Power : Press to turn power on/off.
• Volume : Turn left/right to control
volume.
4 188
(9) SCAN
• Radio mode : Previews all receiv-
able broadcasts for 5 seconds
each.
• Media (CD/USB/My Music) modes (13) DISC-IN LED
: Previews each song (file) for 10 • LED that indicates whether a disc
seconds each. is inserted.
(10) SETUP
• Changes to Setup mode.
(11) TUNE knob

• Radio mode : Turn to change
broadcast frequencies.
(7) DISP
• Media (CD/USB/iPod®/My Music)
• Turns the monitor display on/off. modes : Turn to search tracks/chan-
nels/files.
(8) CLOCK
• Displays the time/date/day. (12) CAT/FOLDER
• SiriusXM Radio : Category Search.
• MP3 CD/USB mode : Search Folder.
4 189
✽ NOTICE - Using Compact (Continued) (Continued)

Discs • Clean fingerprints and dust off the • Do not use abnormally shaped
• This device has been disc surface (coated side) with a discs (8cm, heart-shaped, octagon-
manufactured to be com- soft cloth. shaped) as such discs could lead to
patible with software • The use of CD-R/CD-RW discs malfunctions.
bearing the following attached with labels may result in • If the disc is straddled on the disc
logo marks. disc slot jams or difficulties in disc slot without removal for 10 sec-
• Do not clean discs with chemical removal. Such discs may also onds, the disc will automatically
solutions, such as record sprays, result in noise while playing. be re-inserted into the disc player.
antistatic sprays, antistatic liq- • Some CD-R/CD-RW discs may • Only genuine audio CDs are sup-
uids, benzene, or thinners. not properly operate depending on ported. Other discs may result in
• After using a disc, put the disc the disc manufacturer, production recognition failure. (e.g. copy CD-
back in its original case to prevent method and the recording method R, CDs with labels)
disc scratches. used. If problems persist, try using
• Hold discs by their edges or within a different CD as continued use
the center hole to prevent damage may result in malfunctions.
to disc surfaces. • The performance of this product
• Do not introduce foreign sub- may differ depending on the CD-
stances into the disc insert/eject RW Drive Software.
slot. Introducing foreign sub- • Copy-protected CDs such as S-
stances could damage the device type CDs may not function in the
interior. device. DATA discs cannot be
• Do not insert two discs simultane- played. (However, such discs may
ously. still operate but will do so abnor-
• When using CD-R/CD-RW discs, mally.)
differences in disc reading and (Continued)
playing times may occur depend-
ing on the disc manufacturer, pro-
duction method and the recording
method used.
(Continued)
4 190
✽ NOTICE - Using the USB (Continued) (Continued)

Devices • Some USB devices may not be sup- • Do not use the USB I/F to charge
• Connect the USB device after ported due to compatibility issues. batteries or USB accessories that
turning on the engine. The USB • Avoid contact between the USB generate heat. Doing so may lead
device may become damaged if it connector and bodily parts or for- to worsened performance or dam-
is already connected when the eign objects. age to the audio system.
ignition is turned on. The USB • Repeated connecting/disconnect- • The audio system may not recog-
device may not operate properly if ing of USB devices within short nize the USB device if separately
the car ignition is turned on or off periods of time may result in prod- purchased USB hubs and exten-
with the USB device connected. uct malfunction. sion cables are being used.
• Be careful for static electricity • A strange noise may occur when Connect the USB device directly
when connecting/disconnecting disconnecting the USB. with the USB port of the vehicle.
USB devices. • Make sure to connect/disconnect • When using mass storage USB
• Encoded MP3 Players will not be external USB devices with the devices with separate logical
recognized when connected as an audio power turned off. drives, only files saved to the root
external device. • The amount of time required to drive can be played.
• When connecting an external USB recognize the USB device may dif- • Files may not properly operate if
device, the vehicle's audio system fer depending on the type, size or application programs are installed
may not recognize the USB file formats stored on the USB. on the USBs.
depending on what firmware is Such differences in time are not • The audio system may not operate
used by USB device or what files indications of malfunctions. normally if MP3 Players, cellular
are on the USB. • The vehicle audio system only sup- phones, digital cameras, or other
• Only products formatted with ports USB devices designed to electronic devices (USB devices
byte/sectors under 64Kbyte will be play music files. not recognized as portable disk
recognized. • USB images and videos are not drives) are connected with the
• This device recognizes USB supported. audio system.
devices formatted in FAT 12/16/32 (Continued) (Continued)
file formats. This device does not
recognize files in NTFS file for-
mat.
(Continued)
4 191
(Continued) (Continued)
• Charging through the USB may • Avoid use of USB
not work for some mobile devices. memory products that
• The device may not support nor- can also be used as key
mal operation when using a typi- chains or mobile phone
cal USB memory device (minia- accessories. Use of such products
ture, keychain, etc.). For best may cause damage to the USB
results, use a typical USB device jack.
that has a metal case. • Connecting an MP3 device or
• The device may not support nor- phone through various channels,
mal operation when using formats such as AUX/BT or Audio/ USB
such as HDD Type, CF, or SD mode may result in pop noises or
Memory. abnormal operation.
• The device will not support files
locked by DRM (Digital Rights
Management.)
• USB memory sticks used by con-
necting an Adaptor (SD Type or
CF Type) may not be properly rec-
ognized.
• The device may not operate prop-
erly when using USB HDDs or
USBs subject to connection fail-
ures caused by vehicle vibrations.
(e.g. i-stick type)
(Continued)
4 192
✽ NOTICE - Using an iPod® (Continued) (Continued)

• iPod® is a registered trademark of • When the EQ features of an exter- • If your iPhone® is connected to
Apple Inc. nal device, such as the iPod®, and both the Bluetooth® Wireless
• In order to use the iPod® with the audio system are both active, Technology and USB, the sound
your vehicle's audio system, you EQ effects could overlap and may not be properly played. In
must use a dedicated iPod® cable. cause sound deterioration and dis- your iPhone®, select the Dock con-
(the cable that is supplied when tortion. Whenever possible, turn nector or Bluetooth® Wireless
purchasing iPod®/iPhone® prod- off the EQ feature within the Technology to change the sound
ucts) external device when it is connect- output (source).
• If the iPod® is connected to the ed to the audio system. • iPod® mode cannot be operated
vehicle while it is playing, a high • Noise may occur when an iPod® or when the iPod® cannot be recog-
pitch sound could occur for AUX device is connected. When nized due to versions that do not
approximately 1-2 seconds imme- such devices are not being used, support communication protocols.
diately after connecting. If possi- disconnect the device for storage. • For fifth generation iPod® Nano
ble, connect the iPod® to the vehi- • When the iPod® or AUX device devices, the iPod® may not be rec-
cle with the iPod® stopped/paused. power is connected to the power ognized when the battery level is
• When the vehicle ignition is set to jack, playing the external device low. Please charge the iPod® for
ACC or ON, connecting the iPod® may result in noise. In such cases, use.
through the iPod® cable will disconnect the power connection • The search/play orders shown
charge the iPod® through the car before use. within the iPod® device may differ
audio system. • Skipping or improper operation from the orders shown within the
• When connecting with the iPod® may occur depending on the char- audio system.
cable, make sure to fully insert the acteristics of your iPod®/iPhone® • If the iPod® malfunctions due to
jack to prevent communication device. an iPod® device defect, reset the
interference. (Continued) iPod® and try again. (To learn
(Continued) more, refer to your iPod® manual)
(Continued)
4 193
(Continued) ✽ NOTICE - Using the (Continued)

• Some iPod® products may not Bluetooth® Wireless • When returning to Bluetooth®
sync with the System depending Technology Audio Wireless Technology Audio mode
on the version. If the Media is Mode after ending a call, the mode may
removed before the Media is rec- ® not automatically restart in some
ognized, then the system may not • Bluetooth Wireless Technology mobile phones.
properly restore the previously Audio Mode can be used only • Receiving an incoming call or
operated mode. (iPad® charging is when a Bluetooth® Wireless making an outgoing call while
not supported.) Technology phone has been con- playing Bluetooth® Wireless
• Use an iPod® cable shorter than 1 nected. Technology Audio may result in
meter in length such as the one • Bluetooth® Wireless Technology audio interference.
originally supplied with a new Audio Mode will not be available
iPod®, longer cables may lead to when connecting mobile phones
the audio system not recognizing that do not support this feature.
the iPod®. • If a Bluetooth® Wireless
Technology Phone is being used to
play music and receives an incom-
ing or outgoing phone call, then
the music will stop.
• Moving the Track up/down while
playing Bluetooth® Wireless
Technology audio mode may
result in pop noises with some
mobile phones.
• Bluetooth® Wireless Technology
streaming audio may not be sup-
ported in some mobile phones.
(Continued)
4 194
NOTICE - Using the Bluetooth® (Continued) (Continued)

Wireless Technology • Bluetooth® Wireless Technology • The phone must be paired to the
Cellular Phone features supported within the audio system to use Bluetooth®
• Bluetooth® Wireless Technology vehicle are as follows. Some fea- Wireless Technology related fea-
Handsfree refers to a device which tures may not be supported tures.
allows the user to conveniently depending on your Bluetooth® • Pairing and connecting a
make phone calls with Bluetooth® Wireless Technology device. Bluetooth® Wireless Technology
Wireless Technology mobile - Answering and placing enabled mobile phone will work
phones through the audio system. Bluetooth® Wireless Technology only when the Bluetooth® Wireless
• Bluetooth® Wireless Technology Handsfree calls Technology option within your
allows devices to be connected in a - Menu operation during call mobile phone has been turned on.
short distance, including hands- (Switch to Private, Switch to call (Methods of turning on the
free devices, stereo headsets, wire- waiting, Outgoing volume) Bluetooth® Wireless Technology
less remote controllers, etc. For - Download Call History enabled feature may differ
more information, visit the - Download Mobile Phone book depending on the mobile phone.)
Bluetooth® Wireless Technology - Phone book/Call History Auto • Do not use a cellular phone or per-
website at www.Bluetooth.com. Download form Bluetooth® Wireless
Before using Bluetooth® Wireless - Bluetooth® Wireless Technology Technology settings (e.g. pairing a
Technology audio features. device auto connection phone) while driving.
• The Bluetooth® word mark and - Bluetooth® Wireless Technology • Even if the phone supports
logos are registered trademarks Audio Bluetooth® Wireless Technology,
owned by Bluetooth® SIG, Inc. • Before using Bluetooth® Wireless the phone will not be found during
and any use of such marks by Technology related features of the device searches if the phone has
Hyundai is under license. Other audio system, refer your phone’s been set to hidden state or the
trademarks and trade names are User’s Manual for phone-side Bluetooth® Wireless Technology
those of their respective owners. A Bluetooth® Wireless Technology has been deactivated. Disable the
Bluetooth® enabled cell phone is operations. hidden state or activate the
required to use Bluetooth® Wireless (Continued) Bluetooth® Wireless Technology
Technology. prior to searching/connecting with
(Continued) the car audio system.
(Continued)
4 195

• You will not be able to use the • While a phone is connected - To turn off the Bluetooth®
hands-free feature when your through Bluetooth® Wireless Wireless Technology feature in
phone (in the car) is outside of the Technology your phone may dis- your car audio system, go to
cellular service area. (e.g. in a tun- charge quicker than usual for [SETUP] > [Phone] and [turn
nel, in an underground area, in a additional Bluetooth® Wireless off] the Bluetooth® Wireless
mountainous area, etc.) Technology-related operations. Technology feature.
• If the cellular phone signal is poor • If Priority is set upon vehicle igni- • Bluetooth® Wireless Technology
or the vehicles interior noise is too tion (IGN/ACC ON), the connection may become intermit-
loud, it may be difficult to hear the Bluetooth® Wireless Technology tently disconnected in some
other person’s voice during a call. phone will be automatically con- mobile phones. Follow these steps
• Do not place the phone near or nected. Even if you are outside, the to try again.
inside metallic objects, otherwise Bluetooth® Wireless Technology 1) Turn the Bluetooth® Wireless
communications with Bluetooth® phone will be automatically con- Technology function within the
Wireless Technology system or cel- nected once you are in the vicinity mobile phone off/on and try
lular service stations can be dis- of the vehicle. If you do not want again.
turbed. to automatically connect your 2) Turn the mobile phone power
• Placing the audio system within an Bluetooth® Wireless Technology Off/On and try again.
electromagnetic environment may phone, try the following. 3) Completely remove the mobile
result in noise interference. 1) Turn off the Bluetooth® Wireless phone battery, reboot, and then
• Some cellular phones or other Technology feature in your try again.
devices may cause interference mobile phone. 4) Reboot the audio system and try
noise or malfunction to the audio 2) Turn off the Bluetooth® Wireless again.
system. In this case, storing the Technology feature in your car 5) Delete all paired devices, pair and
device in a different location may audio system. try again.
resolve the condition. (Continued) • It is possible to pair up to five
(Continued) Bluetooth® Wireless Technology
devices to the car system.
(Continued)
4 196
(Continued) ✽ NOTICE
• Phone contact names should be Bluetooth® Wireless Technology
WARNING
saved in English or they may not Handsfree is a feature that enables • Excessive use or operations
be displayed correctly. drivers to practice safe driving. while driving may lead to neg-
• The Handsfree call volume and Connecting the car audio system ligent driving practices and be
quality may differ depending on with a Bluetooth® Wireless the cause of accidents.
the mobile phone. Technology phone allows the user to • Do not operate the device
• Only one Bluetooth® Wireless conveniently make calls, receive excessively while driving.
Technology device can be connect- calls, and manage the phone book.
ed at a time. • Viewing the screen for pro-
Before using the Bluetooth® Wireless longed periods of time while
• In some mobile phones, starting Technology, carefully read the con-
the ignition while talking through driving is dangerous and may
tents of this user’s manual. lead to accidents.
Bluetooth® Wireless Technology
enabled handsfree call will result
in the call becoming disconnected.
(Switch the call back to your
mobile phone when starting the
ignition.)
• If the mobile phone is not paired
or connected, it is not possible to
enter Phone mode. Once a phone
is paired or connected, the guid-
ance screen will be displayed.
• Bluetooth® Handsfree may not be
supported in some mobile phones.
To learn more about mobile device
compatibility, visit http://www.
hyundai.com/us/en/content/own-
ers/bluetooth.
4 197
✽ NOTICE - Using Voice (Continued)

Recognition • Phone related voice commands can
• When using the voice recognition be used only when a Bluetooth®
feature, only commands listed Wireless Technology device is con-
within the user’s manual are sup- nected.
ported. • When making calls by stating a
• Be aware that during the opera- name, the corresponding contact
tion of the voice recognition sys- must be downloaded and stored
tem, pressing any button other within the audio system.
than the button will terminate • After downloading the Bluetooth®
voice recognition mode. Wireless Technology phone book,
• For optimal voice recognition per- it takes some time to convert the
formance, position your head phone book data into voice infor-
below the microphone above the mation. During this time, voice
driver’s seat and maintain proper recognition may not properly
position when speaking voice com- operate.
mands. • Pronounce the voice commands
• Within the following situations, naturally and clearly as if in a nor-
voice recognition may not function mal conversation.
properly due to external sound.
- When the windows and sunroof
are open
- When the blower AC/heater is
set to high
- When entering and passing
through tunnels
- When driving on rugged and
uneven roads
- During severe rain (heavy rains,
windstorms)
(Continued)
4 198
Radio Mode (1) Mode Display

Displays current operating mode.
Radio Mode Display Controls
(2) Frequency
Displays the current frequency.
(3) Preset
Displays current preset number [1] ~
[6].
(4) Preset Display

Displays preset buttons.
(5) A.Store
Automatically saves frequencies with
superior reception to Preset buttons.
4 199
With the Radio Mode Button A.Store (Auto Store)

Press the [A.Store] button to auto-
matically save receivable frequen-
cies to Preset buttons.
Scan
Press the [SCAN] button to preview
frequencies with superior reception
Selecting Presets/Saving Presets for 5 seconds each.
Pressing the [RADIO] button will Press the [Preset] button to display Press and hold the [SCAN] button to
change the operating mode in the the broadcast information for the fre- preview presets for 5 seconds each.
order of FM1 ➟ FM2 ➟ AM ➟ XM1 ➟ quency saved to each button. Once scan is complete, the previous
XM2 ➟ XM3. Press the [1] ~ [6] buttons to play the frequency will be restored.
If [Mode Pop up] is turned on within desired preset. While Scan is operating, pressing
[SETUP] [Display], then pressing While listening to a frequency you the [SCAN] button will cancel scan-
the [RADIO] button will display the want to save as a preset, press and ing.
Radio Pop-up Mode screen. hold one of the [1] ~ [6] preset but-
Turn the TUNE knob to move the tons to save the current frequency to
focus. Press the knob to select. the selected preset.
Seek
Press the [SEEK TRACK] button to
play the previous/next frequency.
Tune
Turn the TUNE knob to select the
desired frequency.
4 200
SiriusXM® Satellite Radio information • Terrain : Hills, mountains, tall build- For information on extended sub-
ings, bridges, tunnels, freeway scription terms, contact SiriusXM
Satellite Radio channels : overpasses, parking garages, at 1-888-539-7474.
dense tree foliage and thunder-
Enjoy SiriusXM Satellite Radio with a
3-month trial subscription to the
storms can interfere with your
reception.
✽ NOTICE
SiriusXM Select package. You’ll get SiriusXM services require a sub-
over 140 channels, including commer- scription sold separately, or as a
cial-free music, plus all your favorite SiriusXM Satellite Radio service : package, by Sirius XM Radio Inc. If
sports, exclusive talk, entertainment, SiriusXM is a subscription-based you decide to continue service after
and a selection of premium program- satellite radio service that broad- your trial, the subscription plan you
ming. For more information and a casts music, sports, news and enter- choose will automatically renew
complete list of SiriusXM channels, tainment programming to radio thereafter and you will be charged
visit siriusxm.com in the United receivers, which are available for according to your chosen payment
States, siriusxm.ca in Canada, or call installation in motor vehicles or facto- method at then-current rates. Fees
SiriusXM at 1-888-539-7474. ry installed, as well as for the home,
portable and wireless devices, and and taxes apply. To cancel you must
through an Internet connection on a call SiriusXM at 1-866-635-2349.
Satellite Radio reception factors : See SiriusXM Customer Agreement
To receive the satellite signal, your vehi- personal computer.
for complete terms at www.sir-
cle has been equipped with a satellite Vehicles that are equipped with a iusxm.com. SiriusXM U.S. satellite
radio antenna located on the roof of factory installed SiriusXM Satellite
Radio system include: and data services are available only
your vehicle. The vehicle roof provides in the 48 contiguous states, DC and
the best location for an unobstructed, • Hardware and an introductory trial Puerto Rico (with coverage limita-
open view of the sky, a requirement of subscription term, which begins on
a satellite radio system. Like AM/FM, tions). SiriusXM satellite service is
the date of sale or lease of the also available in Canada; see
there are several factors that can affect vehicle.
satellite radio reception performance : www.siriusxm. ca. All fees and pro-
• For a small upgrade fee, access to gramming subject to change. Sirius,
• Antenna obstructions : For optimal SiriusXM music channels, and XM and all related marks and logos
reception performance, keep the other select channels over the
antenna clear of snow and ice build- are trademarks of Sirius XM Radio
Internet using any computer con- Inc.
up and keep luggage and other nected to the Internet (U.S. cus-
material as far away from the anten- tomers only).
na as possible.
4 201
SiriusXM Radio Mode (1) Mode Display With the SiriusXM Satellite Radio
Displays current operating mode. Mode Button
SiriusXM Radio Mode Display Your vehicle is equipped with a 3-
Controls (2) Channel Information month trial subscription to SiriusXM
so you have access to over 140
Displays the category, channel num- channels of music, information, and
ber, channel name, artist and title entertainment programming.
information.
Activation
(3) Preset In order to extend or reactivate your
Displays current playing preset num- Sirius Select subscription, you will
ber [1] ~ [6]. need to contact SiriusXM Customer
Care at 1-800-643-2112. Have your
12-digit RID (Radio Identification
(4) Preset Display Number)/ESN (Electronic Serial
Displays saved presets. Number) ready. To retrieve the
RID/ESN, turn on the radio, press
the [RADIO] button, and tune to
channel zero.
Please note that the vehicle will need
to be turned on, in Sirius mode, and
have an unobstructed view of the sky
in order for the radio to receive the
activation signal.
4 202
Seek
play the previous/next channel.
If the “Category” icon is displayed,
channels are changed within the cur-
rent category.
Tune
Turn the TUNE knob to select the Searching Categories Selecting Presets/Saving Presets
desired channel. Press the [Preset] button to display
Select the category by using the
[CAT/FOLDER] button and press the the broadcast information for the
Scan TUNE knob to select. channel saved to each button.
Press the [SCAN] button to scan all Channels for the selected category Press the [1] ~ [6] buttons to play the
channels with superior reception for are played. desired preset.
10 seconds each. While listening to a channel you want
Once scan is complete, the previous- ✽ Troubleshooting to save as a preset, press and hold
ly played channel will be restored. one of the [1] ~ [6] preset buttons to
1. Antenna Error
During Scan, pressing the [SCAN] If this message is displayed, the save the current channel to the
button again will cancel the scan antenna or antenna cable is broken selected preset.
operation and restore the previously or unplugged. Please consult with
played channel. your Hyundai dealership.
If the “Category” icon is displayed, 2. No Signal
channels are changed within the cur- If this message is displayed, it means
rent category. that the antenna is covered and that
the SiriusXM Satellite Radio signal is
not available. Ensure the antenna is
uncovered and has a clear view of the
sky.
4 203
Media Mode Mode Display on the Status Bar
Media Mode Screen

When a Bluetooth® Wireless
Technology, iPod®, USB, or AUX
device is connected or a CD is
inserted, the corresponding mode
icon will be displayed.
Icon Title
CD
USB(iPod®)
Pressing the [MEDIA] button will AUX
change the operating mode in the
order of CD➟USB(iPod®)➟AUX➟My
Music ➟ BT(Bluetooth®) Audio.
If [Mode Pop up] is turned on within
[SETUP] [Display], then pressing
the [MEDIA] button will display the
Media Pop-up Mode screen.
Turn the TUNE knob to move the
focus. Press the knob to select.
The media mode pop up screen can
be displayed only when there are two
or more media modes turned on.
4 204
MENU : Audio CD (1) Mode (8) Repeat

Displays current operating mode. Turns the Repeat feature on/off.
Audio CD Mode Display Controls
(2) Operation State (9) List
From Repeat/Shuffle/Scan, displays Moves to the list screen.
the current operating function. Turn the TUNE knob left/right to
search for tracks. Once the desired
(3) Track Info track is displayed, press the knob to
select and play.
Displays information about the cur-
rent track.
(4) Play/Pause
Changes the play/pause state.
(5) Play Time

Displays the current play time.
(6) Info
Shows detailed information about
the current track.
(7) Shuffle
Turns the Shuffle feature on/off.
4 205
With the Audio CD Mode Rewinding / Fast-forwarding Tracks

Playing/Pausing CD Tracks While playing, press and hold the
Once an audio CD is inserted, the [SEEK TRACK] button to rewind or
mode will automatically start and fast-forward the current track.
begin playing.
While playing, press the [II] button to Scan
pause and press [] button to play. Press the [SCAN] button to play the
Only genuine audio CDs are sup- first 10 seconds of each file.
ported. Other discs may result in Selecting from the List
recognition failure (e.g. copy CD-R, Turn the TUNE knob left/right to
CDs with labels) search for the desired track. Once
The artist and title information are you find the desired track, press the
displayed on the screen if track infor- TUNE knob to start playing.
mation is included within the audio
CD.
Changing Tracks
move to the previous or next track.
Pressing the [SEEK TRACK ∨] but-
ton after the track has been playing
for 2 seconds will start the current
track from the beginning.
ton before the track has been playing
for 1 second will start the previous
track.
4 206
MENU : MP3 CD (1) Mode (7) Info

Displays current operating mode. Shows detailed information about
MP3 CD Mode Display Controls the current file.
(2) Operation State Press the [Info] button to display
details about the current file.
From Repeat/Shuffle/Scan, displays
the current operating function. When the ‘Folder File’ option is set as
the default display within Display
setup, the album/artist/file informa-
(3) File Index tion are displayed as detailed file
Displays the current file number. information.
When the ‘Album Artist Song’ option
(4) File Info is set as the default display, the fold-
er name/file name are displayed as
Displays information about the cur- detailed file information.
rent file.
The title, artist and album info are
displayed only when such informa-
(5) Play/Pause tion is recorded within the MP3 file
Changes the play/pause state. ID3 tag.
(6) Play Time

4 207
(8) Shuffle (10) Copy With the MP3 CD Mode

Turns the Shuffle feature on/off. Copies the current file into My Music. Playing/Pausing MP3 Files
Each time the button is pressed, the Selecting another feature during Once an MP3 disc is inserted the
feature changes in the order of copying will display a pop-up asking mode will automatically start and
Shuffle Folder ➟ Shuffle All ➟ Off. whether you wish to cancel copying. being playing.While playing, press
• Shuffle Folder : Plays all files within To cancel, select ‘Yes’. the [II] button to pause and press []
the current folder in shuffle order. button to play.
• Shuffle All : Plays all files in shuffle (11) List If there are numerous files and fold-
order. ers within the disc, reading time
Moves to the list screen.
could take more than 10 seconds
Turn the TUNE knob left/right to and the list may not be displayed or
(9) Repeat search for files. Once the desired file song searches may not operate.
Turns the Repeat feature on/off. is displayed, press the knob to select Once loading is complete, try again.
and play.
Each time the button is pressed, the
feature changes in the order of Changing Files
Repeat ➟ Repeat Folder ➟ Off.
• Repeat : Repeats the current file. move to the previous or next file.
• Repeat Folder : Repeats all files Pressing the [SEEK TRACK ∨] but-
within the current Folder. ton after the file has been playing for
2 seconds will start the current file
from the beginning.
ton before the file has been playing
file.
4 208
Selecting from the List Searching Folders

Turn the TUNE knob left/right to Press the [CAT/FOLDER] button to
search for the desired file. select and search folders.
Once you find the desired file, press Once the desired folder is displayed,
the TUNE knob to start playing. press the TUNE knob to select. The
first file within the selected folder will
begin playing.
Rewinding / Fast-forwarding Files
While playing, press and hold the
[SEEK TRACK] button to rewind or
fast-forward the current file.
Scan
Press the [SCAN] button to play the
first 10 seconds of each file.
4 209
MENU : USB (1) Mode (7) Info

Displays current operating mode. Displays detailed information for the
USB Mode Display Controls current file.
(2) Operation State When the ‘Folder File’ option is set as
the default display within Display
From Repeat/Shuffle/Scan, displays setup, the album/artist/file informa-
the current operating function. tion are displayed as detailed file
information.
(3) File Index When the ‘Album Artist Song’ option
Displays the current file number. is set as the default display, the fold-
er name/file name are displayed as
detailed file information.
(4) File Info
The title, artist and album info are
Displays information about the cur- displayed only when such informa-
rent file. tion are recorded within the MP3 file
ID3 tag.
(5) Play/Pause
(6) Play Time

4 210
(8) Shuffle (10) Copy With the USB Mode

Turns the Shuffle feature on/off. Copies the current file into My Music. Playing/Pausing USB Files
Each time the button is pressed, the Selecting another feature during Once a USB is connected, the mode
feature changes in the order of copying will display a pop-up asking will automatically start and begin
Shuffle Folder ➟ Shuffle All ➟ Off. whether you wish to cancel copying. playing a USB file.While playing,
• Shuffle Folder : Plays the files in To cancel, select ‘Yes’. press the [II] button to pause and
the current folder in shuffle order. press [] button to play.
• Shuffle All : Plays all files in shuffle (11) List Loading may require additional time
order. if there are many files and folders
Moves to the list screen.
within the USB and may result in
Turn the TUNE knob left/right to faulty list display or file search.
(9) Repeat search for files. Once the desired file Normal operations will resume once
Turns the Repeat feature on/off. is displayed, press the knob to select loading is complete.
and play.
Each time the button is pressed, the The device may not support normal
feature changes in the order of operation when using a USB memo-
Repeat ➟ Repeat Folder ➟ Off. ry type besides (Metal Cover Type)
• Repeat : Repeats the current file. USB Memory.
• Repeat Folder : Repeats all files
within the current folder.
4 211
Changing Files
move to the previous or next file.
ton after the file has been playing for
2 seconds will start the current file
from the beginning.
ton before the file has been playing
Selecting from the List Searching Folders
file. Turn the TUNE knob left/right to Press the [CAT/FOLDER] button to
search for the desired file. select and search folders.
Once you find the desired file, press Once the desired folder is displayed,
the TUNE knob to start playing. press the TUNE knob to select.
The first file within the selected fold-
Rewinding / Fast-forwarding Files er will begin playing.
While playing, press and hold the
Scan
4 212
MENU : iPod® (1) Mode (7) Shuffle

Displays current operating mode. Turns the Shuffle feature on/off.
Basic Mode Screen Each time the button is pressed, the
(2) Operation State feature changes in the order of
Shuffle Album ➟ Shuffle All ➟ Off.
From Repeat/Shuffle, displays the
current operating function. • Shuffle Album : Shuffle Album
plays album in shuffle order.
• Shuffle All : Plays all songs in shuf-
(3) Song Index fle order.
Displays the current song/total num-
ber of songs.
(8) Repeat
Turns the Repeat feature on/off.
(4) Song Info
• Repeat : Repeats the current song
rent song.
(9) List
(5) Play/Pause Moves to the list screen.
Changes the play/pause state. Turn the TUNE knob left/right to
search for the desired category.
Once you find the desired category,
(6) Play Time press the TUNE knob to select and
Displays the current play time. play.
4 213
With the iPod® Mode Rewinding / Fast-forwarding Songs Category Menu

Playing/Pausing iPod® Songs While playing, press and hold the (1) Displays the play screen.
Once an iPod® is connected, the [SEEK TRACK] button to rewind or (2) Moves to the iPod® root category
mode will automatically start and fast-forward the current song. screen.
begin playing an iPod® song. (3) Moves to the previous category.
While playing, press the [II] button to If the search mode is accessed while
pause and press [] button to play. playing a song, the most recently
iPod®s with unsupported communi- searched category is displayed.
cation protocols may not properly Search steps upon initial connection
operate in the audio system. may differ depending on the type of
iPod® device.
Changing Songs
move to the previous or next song.
Searching Categories
ton after the song has been playing Turn the TUNE knob left/right to
for 2 seconds will start the current search for the desired category.Once
song from the beginning. you find the desired category, press
the TUNE knob to select and play.
ton before the song has been playing There are eight categories that can be
for 1 second will start the previous searched, including Playlists, Artists,
song. Albums, Genres, Songs, Composers,
Audiobooks and Podcasts.
Slight time differences may exist
depending your iPod® product.
4 214
MENU : AUX Connecting an External Device

External audio players (Camcorders,
AUX Mode Display Controls car VCR, etc.) can be played through
a dedicated cable.
If an external device connector is
connected with the AUX terminal,
then AUX mode will automatically
operate. Once the connector is dis-
connected, the previous mode will be
restored.
AUX mode can be used only when
an external audio player (camcorder,
Press the [MEDIA] button Select car VCR, etc.) has been connected.
[AUX] The AUX volume can be controlled
An external device can be connected separately from other audio modes.
to play music. Connecting a connector jack to the
AUX terminal without an external
device will convert the system to
AUX mode, but only output noise.
When an external device is not being
used, also remove the connector
jack.
When the external device power is
connected to the power jack, playing
the external device may output
noise. In such cases, disconnect the
power connection before use.
Fully insert the AUX cable to the AUX
jack upon use.
4 215
MENU : My Music (1) Mode (7) Info

Displays current operating mode. Displays detailed information for the
My Music Mode Display Controls current file.
(2) Operation State The title, artist and album info are
displayed only when such informa-
From Repeat/Shuffle/Scan, displays tion is recorded within the MP3 file
the current operating function. ID3 tag.
(3) File Index (8) Shuffle

Displays the current file/total number Turns the Shuffle feature on/off.
of files.
(9) Repeat
(4) File Info
Turns the Repeat feature on/off.
rent file.
(10) Delete
(5) Play/Pause Deletes the current file.
(11) List
(6) Play Time Moves to the list screen.
Displays the current play time. Turn the TUNE knob left/right to
search for files. Once the desired file
is displayed, press the knob to select
and play.
4 216
With the My Music Mode List Menu

Playing/Pausing My Music Files (1) Moves to the previous screen.
While playing, press the [II] button to (2) Selects all files.
pause and press [] button to play. (3) Deselects all selected files.
If there are no files saved within My (4) Deletes selected files.
Music, the [My Music] button will be
After selecting the files you want to
disabled.
delete, press the [Delete] button to
delete the selected files.
Changing Files Selecting from the List If there is memory available, up to
Press the [SEEK TRACK] button to Turn the TUNE knob left/right to 6,000 files can be saved. Identical
move to the previous or next file. search for the desired file. files cannot be copied more than
Pressing the [SEEK TRACK ∨] but- Once you find the desired file, press 1,000 times.
ton after the file has been playing for the TUNE knob to start playing. To check memory information, go to
2 seconds will start the current file From the List screen, it is possible to [SETUP] [System] [Memory
from the beginning. delete files you previously saved into Information].
Pressing the [SEEK TRACK ∨] but- My Music.
ton before the file has been playing Rewinding / Fast-forwarding Files
file. While playing, press and hold the
Scan
4 217
MENU : Bluetooth® Wireless Changing Files

Technology Audio Press the [SEEK TRACK] button to
move to the previous or next file.
With Bluetooth® Wireless Technology
Audio Mode Setting Connection
If a Bluetooth® Wireless Technology
device has not been connected, press
the [SETUP] button ? [Phone] button
to display the Bluetooth® Wireless
Technology connection screen.
It is possible to use the pair phone,
connect/disconnect and delete fea-
tures from your Bluetooth® Wireless
Technology phone.
Playing/Pausing Bluetooth® Wireless If music is not yet playing from your
Technology Audio mobile device after converting to
Once a Bluetooth® Wireless Technology Bluetooth® Wireless Technology
device is connected, the mode will Audio mode, pressing the play button
automatically start. once may start playing the mode.
Check to see that music is playing
While playing, press the [II] button from the Bluetooth® Wireless
to pause and press [II] button to Technology device after converting
play. to Bluetooth® Wireless Technology
The play/pause feature may operate Audio Mode.
differently depending on the mobile
phone.
4 218
Phone Mode When pressed and held (6) When pressed shortly
- Radio mode, automatically search- - When pressed in the phone
Making a call using the Steering es broadcast frequencies and screen, displays call history
wheel controls channels. screen.
- Media (CD/USB/iPod®/My Music) - When pressed in the dial screen,
modes, rewinds or fast forwards makes a call.
the track or song(file). - When pressed in the incoming
- BT Audio mode may not be sup- call screen, answers the call.
ported in some mobile phones. - When pressed during call wait-
(3) Mutes audio volume. ing, switches to waiting call. (Call
(4) Each time this button is pressed, Waiting)
the mode is changed in the order When pressed and held
of FM1 ➟ FM2 ➟ AM ➟ XM1 ➟ - When pressed in the Bluetooth®
XM2 ➟ XM3 ➟ CD ➟ USB(iPod®) Wireless Technology Handsfree
➟ AUX ➟ My Music ➟ BT Audio. wait mode, redials the last call.
❈ The actual features in the vehicle
If the media is not connected or a - When pressed during a
may differ from the illustration.
disc is not inserted, correspon- Bluetooth® Wireless Technology
(1) Used to control volume. ding modes will be disabled. Handsfree call, switches call
(2) When pressed shortly (5) When pressed shortly back to mobile phone. (Private)
- Radio mode : Searches broad- - Starts voice recognition. - When pressed while calling on
cast frequencies saved to pre- the mobile phone, switches call
- When selecting during a voice
sets. back to Bluetooth® Wireless
prompt, stops the prompt and
- Media (CD/USB/iPod®/My Music converts to voice command wait- Technology Handsfree. (Operates
/BT Audio) modes : Changes the ing state. only when Bluetooth® Wireless
track, file or chapter. Technology Handsfree is con-
When pressed and held nected)
- Ends voice recognition. (7) Ends phone call.
4 219
When No Devices have been

Paired
• Vehicle Name : Name of device as SSP supported device :

shown when searching from your 4. After a few moments, a screen is
Bluetooth® Wireless Technology displayed 6 digits passkey.
device
Check the passkey on your
• Passkey : Passkey used to pair the Bluetooth® Wireless Technology
1. Press the [PHONE] button or the device device and confirm.
[CALL] button on the steering 5. Once pairing is complete, the fol-
wheel controls. The following 3. From your Bluetooth® Wireless lowing screen is displayed.
screen is displayed. Technology device (i.e. Mobile
2. Press the [OK] button to enter the Phone), search and select your
Pair Phone screen. car audio system.
❈SSP : Secure Simple Pairing

Non SSP supported device :
4. After a few moments, a screen is dis-
played where the passkey is
entered.
Enter the passkey “0000” to pair your
device with the car audio system.
4 220
✽ NOTICE Pairing through [PHONE] Setup Paired Phone List

Press the [SETUP] button Select Press the [SETUP] button Select
[Phone] [Phone] Select [Paired Phone List].
• Connected Phone : Device that is
currently connected.
• Paired Phone : Device that is
paired but not connected.
If Bluetooth® Wireless Technology

devices are paired but none are cur-
rently connected, pressing the
[PHONE] button or the [CALL] Pair Phone
button on the steering wheel con- The following steps are the same as
trols the following screen. Press the those described in the section “When
[Pair] button to pair a new device or No Devices have been Paired” on the
press the [Connect] to connect a pre- previous page.
viously paired device. Connecting a Device
From the paired phone list, select the
device you want to connect and
press the [Connect](1) button.
4 221
✽ NOTICE Changing Priority

• When deleting the currently con- It is possible to pair up to five
nected device, the device will auto- Bluetooth® Wireless Technology
matically be disconnected to pro- devices with the car audio system.
ceed with the deleting process. The “Change Priority” feature is used
• If a paired Bluetooth® Wireless to set the connection priority of
Technology device is deleted, the paired phones.
device’s call history and contacts From the paired phone list, select the
data will also be deleted. phone you want to switch to the high-
Disconnecting a Device • To re-use a deleted device, you est priority, then press the [Change
From the paired phone list, select the must pair the device again. priority](4) button from the Menu. The
currently connected device and selected device will be changed to
press the [Disconnect](2) button. the highest priority.
Deleting a Device
From the paired phone list, select the
device you want to delete and press
the [Delete](3) button.
4 222
Phone Menu Screen ✽ NOTICE

• If you press the [Call History] but-
ton but there is no call history
data, a prompt is displayed which
asks to download call history data.
• If you press the [Contacts] button
but there is no contacts data
stored, a prompt is displayed
which asks to download contacts
data. Favorites
• This feature may not be supported • Saved favorite contact : Connects
Phone Menus in some mobile phones. For more call upon selection.
information on download support, • To add favorite : Downloaded con-
With a Bluetooth® Wireless Technology refer to your mobile phone user’s
device connected, press the tacts be saved as favorite.
manual.
[PHONE] button to display the • Delete All : Delete all stored
Phone menu screen. favorite contacts.
• Favorites : Up to 20 frequently
used contacts saved for easy
access.
✽ NOTICE
• Call History : Displays the call his-
• To save Favorite, contacts should
tory list screen.
be downloaded.
• Contact saved in Favorites will
• Contacts : Displays the Contacts not be automatically updated if
list screen. the contact has been updated in
• Dial Number : Displays the dial the phone. To update Favorites,
screen where numbers can be delete the Favorite and create a
dialed to make calls. new Favorite.
• Setup : Displays Phone related set-
tings.
4 223
• Call history may not be saved in

the call history list in some mobile
phones.
• Calls received with hidden caller ID
will not be saved in the call history
list.
• Calling through the call history is
not possible when there is no call
history stored or a Bluetooth®
Call History Wireless Technology phone is not
A list of incoming, outgoing and connected.
missed calls is displayed. • Up to 50 received, dialed and
Press the [Download] button to missed calls are stored in Call
download the call history. History.
• Call History : • Time of received/dialed calls and
- Displays recent calls. (call histo- call time information are not saved.
ry)
- Connects call upon selection. Contacts
• Download : Download Recent Call The list of saved phone book entries
History. is displayed. Press the [Download]
button to download the call history.
• Contacts List :
- Displays downloaded contacts
entries.
- Connects call upon selection.
• Sort by : Find a contact in alpha-
betical order.
• Download : Download contacts entries.
4 224
✽ NOTICE (Continued)
• Up to 1,000 contacts saved in your • It is not possible to begin down-
Bluetooth® Wireless Technology loading a contact list when the
phone can be downloaded into the contact download feature has been
car contacts. Contacts that have turned off within the Bluetooth®
been downloaded to the car cannot Wireless Technology device. In
be edited or deleted on the phone. addition, some devices may
• Mobile phone contacts are man- require device authorization upon
aged separately for each paired attempting to download contacts.
Bluetooth® Wireless Technology If downloading does not normally Calling by Dialing a Number
device (max 5 devices x 1,000 con- occur, check the Bluetooth®
Wireless Technology device set- • Dial Pad : Used to enter phone
tacts each). Previously down- number.
loaded data is maintained even if tings or the screen state.
• The contacts download feature • Call : If a number has been
the Bluetooth® Wireless Technology entered, calls the number. If no
device has been disconnected. may not be supported in some
mobile phones. For more informa- number has been entered, switch-
(However, the contacts and call es to call history screen.
history saved to the phone will be tion of supported Bluetooth®
deleted if a paired phone is delet- devices and function support, • End : Deletes the entered phone
ed.) refer to your phone’s user manual. number.
• It is possible to download contacts • Delete : Deletes entered numbers
during Bluetooth® streaming audio. one digit at a time.
• When downloading contacts, the
icon will be displayed within the
status bar.
(Continued)
4 225
✽ NOTICE
• When an incoming call pop-up is
displayed, most Audio and SETUP
mode features are disabled. Only
the call volume will operate.
• The telephone number may not be
properly displayed in some mobile
phones.
Answering a Call During a Handsfree Call
Answering a call with a Bluetooth® • Caller : Displays the other party’s
Wireless Technology device connect- name if the incoming caller is
ed will display the following screen. saved within your contacts.
• Caller : Displays the other party’s • Incoming Number : Displays the
name when the incoming caller is incoming number.
saved within your contacts. • Call time : Displays the call time.
• Incoming Number : Displays the • End : Ends call.
incoming number.
• Private : Converts to Private mode.
• Accept : Accepts the incoming call.
• Out Vol. : Sets call volume as heard
• Reject : Rejects the incoming call. by the other party.
• Mute : Turns Mic Mute On/Off.
✽ NOTICE
If the mic is muted, the other party
will not be able to hear your voice.
4 226
Voice Recognition Mode ✽ NOTICE Skipping Prompt Messages

Contact List Best Practices While prompt message is being stat-
Using Voice Recognition 1) Do not store single-name entries ed Shortly press the button on
(e.g., “Bob”, “Mom”, “Kim”, the steering remote controller.
etc.). Instead, always use full The prompt message is immediately
names (including first and last ended and the beep tone will sound.
names) for all contacts (e.g., use After the “Beep”, say the voice com-
“Jacob Stevenson” instead of mand.
“Dad”).
2) Do not use abbreviations (i.e., use
“Lieutenant” instead of “Lt.” or Re-starting Voice Recognition
“Sergeant” instead of “Sgt.”). While system waits for a command
3) Do not use acronyms (i.e., use Shortly press the button on the
Starting Voice Recognition “County Finance Department” steering remote controller.
Shortly press the button on the instead of “CFD”). The command wait state is immedi-
steering wheel remote controller. Say 4) Do not use special characters ately ended and the beep tone will
a command. (e.g., “@”, “hyphen -”, “asterisk sound. After the “Beep”, say the
If prompt feedback is in [ON], then *”, “ampersand &”). voice command.
the system will say “Please say a 5) If a name is not recognized from
command after the beep (BEEP)“ the contact list, change it to a
• If prompt feedback is in [ON] more descriptive name (e.g., use
mode, then the system will only “Grandpa Joseph” instead of “Pa
say “(BEEP)” Joe”).
• To change Prompt Feedback
[On]/[Off], go to [SETUP]
[System] [Prompt Feedback]
For proper recognition, say the com-
mand after the voice instruction and
beep tone.
4 227
Illustration on using Voice Recognition More Help

Here are some examples of mode commands.
Starting Voice Recognition You can say a radio type like ‘FM’, ‘AM’, or ‘Satellite’.
Shortly pressing the button : You can also say a media source like ‘USB’, ‘My
Music’, or ‘iPod®’.
Please say a command after Additionally, there are phone commands like
the beep (BEEP) Ding~ ‘Contacts’, ‘Call History’, or ‘Dial Number’.
You can find more detailed commands in the user’s
More Help manual.
Please say a command after the beep.
More Help
Here are some examples of mode commands. Ending Voice Recognition
You can say a radio type like ‘FM’, ‘AM’, or ‘Satellite’. Shortly pressing the button :
You can also say a media source like ‘USB’, ‘My
Music’, or ‘iPod®’. Please say a command after
Additionally, there are phone commands like the beep (BEEP) Ding~
‘Contacts’, ‘Call History’, or ‘Dial Number’.
You can find more detailed commands in the user’s Contacts
manual.
Please say a command after the beep.
Please say the contact name you want to call.
Skipping Voice Recognition

Shortly pressing the button : Cancel
Please say a...
Shortly pressing the button :

(BEEP) More Help
4 228
Voice Command List

Common Commands
These commands can be used in most operations.
(However a few commands may not be available during certain operations)
Command Function Command Function
More Help Provides guidance on commands that can be used Call History Displays the Call History screen.
anywhere in the system. Contacts Displays the Contacts screen. After saying this
Help Provides guidance on commands that can be used command, say the name of a contact saved in the
within the current mode. Contacts to automatically connect the call.
Call<Name> Calls <Name> saved in Contacts. Dial Number Displays the Dial number screen. After saying this
Ex) Call “John Smith” command, you can say the number that you want
Call <Name> Calls <Name> to the number that is saved as to call.
on Mobile “Mobile” in Contacts. Redial Connects the last dialed call number.
Ex) Call “John Smith” on Mobile
Tutorial Provides guidance on how to use voice recognition
Call <Name> Calls <Name> to the number that is saved as and Bluetooth® connections
in Office “Office” in Contacts.
Ex) Call “John Smith” in Office • When listening to the radio, displays the next
radio screen. (FM1➟FM2➟AM➟XM1➟XM2➟
Call <Name> Calls <Name> to the number that is saved as XM3)
at Home “Home” in Contacts
• When listening to a different mode, displays the
Ex) Call “John Smith” at Home most recently played radio screen.
Radio
Call <Name> Calls <Name> to the number that is saved as • When listening to the FM radio, maintains the cur-
on Other “Other” in Contacts rent state.
Ex) Call “John Smith” on Other • When listening to a different mode, displays the
Phone Provides guidance on Phone related commands. most recently played FM screen.
After saying this command, say “Favorites”,“Call FM1(FM One) Displays the FM1 screen.
History”, “Contacts” or ”Dial Number” execute cor-
responding functions. FM2(FM Two) Displays the FM2 screen.
AM Displays the AM screen.
Favorites Displays the Favorite screen.
4 229

FM Preset 1~6 Plays the most recently played broadcast saved in AUX (Auxiliary) Plays the connected external device.
FM Preset 1~6. Bluetooth® Audio Plays the music saved in connected Bluetooth®
AM Preset 1~6 Plays the broadcast saved in AM Preset 1~6. device.
FM 87.5~107.9 Plays the FM broadcast of the corresponding fre- Mute Mutes the sound.
quency.
Cancel (Exit) Ends voice command.
AM 530~1710 Plays the AM broadcast of the corresponding fre-
quency.
XM (Satellite) • When listening to the SiriusXM®, maintains the
current state.
• When listening to a different mode, displays the
most recently played SiriusXM® screen.
XM (Satellite) Displays the selected SiriusXM® screen.
1~3
XM Channel Plays the selected SiriusXM® channel.
0~223
Media Moves to the most recently played media screen.
CD Plays music on the CD.
USB Plays music on the USB device.
iPod® Plays music on the iPod®.
My Music Plays music saved in My Music.
4 230
FM/AM Radio Commands Satellite Radio Commands

Commands available during FM/AM radio operation. Commands that can be used while listening to Satellite
Command Function Radio.
Preset 1~6 Plays the broadcast station saved in Preset 1~6. Command Function
Scan Scans receivable frequencies from the current Channel 0~255 Plays the selected Satellite Radio channel.
broadcast and plays for 10 seconds each. Scan Scans receivable channels from the current
Preset Scan Moves to the next preset from the current present broadcast and plays for 10 seconds each.
and plays for 10 seconds each. Preset 1~6 Plays the broadcast saved in Preset 1~6.
Information Displays the information of the current broad- Information Displays the information of the current broadcast.
cast.(This feature can be used when receiving
RBDS broadcasts.)
4 231
Audio CD Commands MP3 CD/USB Commands

Commands available during Audio CD operation. Commands available during MP3 CD/USB operation.
Random Randomly plays the tracks within the CD. Random Randomly plays the files within the current folder.
Random Off Cancels random play to play tracks in sequential Random Off Cancels random play to play files in sequential
order. order.
Repeat Repeats the current track. Repeat Repeats the current file.
Repeat Off Cancels repeat play to play tracks in sequential Repeat Off Cancels repeat play to play files in sequential
order. order.
Track 1~30 Plays the desired track number. Information Displays the information screen of the current file.
Next Folder Plays the first file in the next folder.
Previous Folder Plays the first file in the previous folder.
4 232
iPod® Commands My Music Commands

Commands available during iPod® operation. Commands available during My Music operation.
Random Randomly plays the songs within the current cate- Random Randomly plays all saved files.
gory. Random Off Cancels random play to play files in sequential
Random Off Cancels random play to play songs in sequential order.
order. Repeat Repeats the current file.
Repeat Repeats the current song. Repeat Off Cancels repeat play to play files in sequential
Repeat Off Cancels repeat play to play songs in sequential order.
order. Delete Deletes the current file. You will bypass an addi-
tional confirmation process.
4 233
Bluetooth® Wireless Technology Audio Commands

Commands available during Bluetooth® Wireless
Technology audio streaming from mobile phone opera-
tion.
Command Function
Play Plays the currently paused song.
Pause Pauses the current song.
4 234
Setup Mode With the Display Button

Press the [SETUP] button Select
[Display].
You can select and control options
related to [Brightness], [Mode Pop
up] and [Media Display].
Mode Pop-up
This feature is used to display the
Mode Pop-up screen when entering
Press the [SETUP] button to display radio and media modes.
the Setup screen. When this feature is turned on,
You can select and control options pressing the [RADIO] or [MEDIA]
related to [Display], [Sound], button will display the Mode Pop-up
[Clock/Calendar], [Phone] and Adjusting the Brightness screen.
[System]. Use the [Left/Right] buttons to adjust
the screen brightness or set the ✽ NOTICE
Brightness on Automatic, Day or The media Mode Pop-up screen can
Night mode. be displayed only when two or more
Press the [Default] button to reset. media modes have been connected.
• Automatic : Adjusts the brightness
automatically.
• Day : Always maintains the bright-
ness on high.
• Night : Always maintains the bright-
ness on low.
4 235
With the Sound Button

[Sound].
related to [Sound Setting], [Speed
Dependent Vol.], [Voice Recognition
Vol.] and [Touch Screen Beep].
Media Display
This feature is used to change the
information displayed within USB
and MP3 CD modes.
• Folder File : Displays file name and
folder name.
• Album Artist Song : Displays album
name/artist name/song.
Sound Setting
Use the [Up/Down/Left/Right] but-
tons to adjust the Fader/Balance set-
tings.
Use the [Left/Right] buttons to adjust
the Bass/Middle/Treble settings.
Press the [Default] button to reset.
4 236
SDVC (Speed Dependent Volume Voice Recognition Volume Touch Screen Beep
Control) Use the [-], [+] buttons adjust the This feature is used to turn the touch
The volume level is controlled auto- Voice Recognition volume. screen beep on/off.
matically according to the vehicle
speed. SDVC can be set by selecting
from On/Off.
4 237
With the Clock/Calendar Button

[Clock/Calendar].
related to [Clock Settings], [Calendar
Settings], [Time Format] and [Clock
Display].
Calendar Settings Time Format

Use the [Up/Down] buttons to set the This feature is used to change the
Day, Month and Year setting. clock format between 12hr or 24hr.
Clock Display
This feature is used to display a clock
on the screen when the audio sys-
tem is turned off.
Clock Settings
Use the [Up/Down] buttons to set the
Hour, Minutes setting and select
AM/PM.
Press and hold the [CLOCK] button
to set the Clock/Calendar screen.
4 238
With the Phone Button

[Phone].
related to [Pair Phone], [Paired
Phone List], [Contacts Download],
[Auto Download], [Outgoing Volume]
and [Bluetooth System Off].
Pairing a New Device Viewing Paired Phone List
Bluetooth® Wireless Technology This feature is used to view mobile
devices can be paired with the audio phones that have been paired with
system. the audio system. Upon selecting a
For more information, refer to the paired phone, the setup menu is dis-
“Pairing through Phone Setup” sec- played.
tion within Bluetooth® Wireless For more information, refer to the
Technology. “Setting Bluetooth® Wireless Technology
Connection” section within Bluetooth®
Wireless Technology.
(1) Moves to the previous screen.
(2) Connect/Disconnect Phone :
Connect/Disconnects currently
selected phone.
(3) Delete : Deletes the currently
selected phone.
(4) Change priority : Sets currently
selected phone to highest connec-
tion priority.
4 239
✽ NOTICE - Before
Downloading
Contacts
• Only contacts within connected
phones can be downloaded. Also
check to see that your mobile
phone supports the download fea-
ture.
• To learn more about whether your
mobile phone supports contacts Downloading Contacts Outgoing Volume
downloads, refer to your mobile As the contacts are downloaded Use the [-], [+] buttons to adjust the
phone user’s manual. from the mobile phone, a download outgoing volume level.
• The contacts for only the connect- progress bar is displayed. While on a call, the volume can be
ed phone can be downloaded. • Upon downloading phone con- changed by using the [SEEK
tacts, the previous corresponding TRACK] button.
data is deleted.
• This feature may not be supported
in some mobile phones.
• Voice Recognition may not operate
while contacts are being down-
loaded.
4 240
With the System Button

[System].
related to [Memory Information],
[Prompt Feedback] and [Language].
Memory Information
This feature displays information
related to system memory.
• Using : Displays capacity currently
in use.
• Capacity : Displays total capacity.
Turning Bluetooth System Off

Once Bluetooth® Wireless Technology
is turned off, Bluetooth® Wireless
Technology related features will not
be supported within the audio sys-
tem.
To turn Bluetooth® Wireless Technology
back on, go to [SETUP] [Phone]
and press “Yes”.
4 241
Prompt Feedback Language

This feature is used to select the This feature is used to change the
desired prompt feedback option from system and voice recognition lan-
ON and OFF. guage.
• ON : When using voice recognition, If the language is changed, the sys-
provides detailed guidance prompts. tem will restart and apply the select-
• OFF : When using voice recogni- ed language.
tion, omits some guidance prompts.
4 242
iPod® is a registered trademark of Sirius, XM and all related marks

Apple Inc. iPod® mobile digital and logos are trademarks of Sirius
device sold separately. The XM Radio Inc. Android™ is a
Bluetooth® word mark and logos trademark of Google, Inc.
are registered trademarks owned BlackBerry is a registered trade-
by Bluetooth® SIG, Inc. and any mark of Research In Motion
use of such marks by Hyundai is Limited (RIM). All other marks,
under license. SiriusXM services channel names and logos are the
require a subscription sold sepa- property of their respective own-
rately, or as a package, by Sirius ers. All rights reserved.
XM Radio Inc. If you decide to con-
tinue service after your trial, the
subscription plan you choose will
automatically renew thereafter
and you will be charged according
to your chosen payment method
at then-current rates. Fees and
taxes apply. To cancel you must
call SiriusXM at 1-866-635-2349.
See SiriusXM Customer Agreement
for complete terms at www.sir-
iusxm.com. SiriusXM U.S. satellite
and data services are available
only in the 48 contiguous states,
DC and Puerto Rico (with cover-
age limitations). SiriusXM satellite
service is also available in
Canada; see www.siriusxm.ca. All
fees and programming subject to
change.
4 243
Declaration of Conformity
FCC
This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device, pursuant to part 15
of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a resi-
dential installation.
This equipment generates, uses and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance
with the instructions,may cause harmful interference to radio communications. However, there is no guarantee that
interference will not occur in a particular installation. If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or tel-
evision reception, which can be determined by turning the equipment off and on, the user is encouraged to try to cor-
rect the interference by one ormore of the following measures :
• Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna.

• Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver.
• Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the receiver is connected.
• Consult the dealer or an experienced radio/TV technician for help.
Caution : Any changes or modifications to this device not explicitly approved by manufacturer could void your author-
ity to operate this equipment.
This device complies with part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions :
(1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference received, includ-
ing interference that may cause undesired operation.
This equipment complies with FCC radiation exposure limits set forth for an uncontrolled environment.
This equipment should be installed and operated with a minmum of 20 cm between the transmitter and your body.
This transmitter must not be connected or oprated in conjunction with any other antenna or transmitter unless author-
ized to do so by the FCC.
4 244
Driving your vehicle
Before driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-3 Lane departure warning system (LDWS) . . . . . . 5-96

Key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-6 Active ECO system. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-100
Engine start/stop button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-9 Economical operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-101
Automatic transaxle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-14 Special driving conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-103
All wheel drive (AWD). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-21 • Hazardous driving conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-103
Drive mode integrated control system . . . . . . . . . 5-28 • Reducing the risk of a rollover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-103
Brake system. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-30 • Rocking the vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-104
• Power brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-30 • Smooth cornering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-105
• Parking brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-32 • Driving at night . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-105
• Electronic parking brake (EPB) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-34 • Driving in the rain. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-106
• Emergency braking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-39 • Driving in flooded areas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-107
• Auto hold . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-40 • Driving off-road. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-107
• Anti-lock brake system (ABS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-43 • Highway driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-107 5
• Electronic stability control (ESC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-46 Winter driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-109
• Vehicle stability management (VSM) . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-50 Trailer Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-114
• Downhill brake control (DBC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-51 Vehicle load limit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-123
• Hill-start assist control (HAC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-53 • Tire and loading information label . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-123
• Good braking practices. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-54 Vehicle weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-128
Automatic emergency braking (AEB) . . . . . . . . . 5-56 • Base curb weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-128
Cruise control system. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-67 • Vehicle curb weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-128
Advanced smart cruise control system. . . . . . . . . 5-72 • Cargo weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-128
Blind spot detection system (BSD) . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-88 • GAW (Gross axle weight) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-128
• BSD (Blind Spot Detection) / • GAWR (Gross axle weight rating) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-128
LCA (Lane Change Assist) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-89 • GVW (Gross vehicle weight) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-128
• RCTA (Rear Cross Traffic Alert). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-92 • GVWR (Gross vehicle weight rating) . . . . . . . . . . . 5-128
WARNING - ENGINE EXHAUST CAN BE DANGEROUS!

Engine exhaust fumes can be extremely dangerous. If, at any time, you smell exhaust fumes inside the vehicle,
open the windows immediately.
• Do not inhale exhaust fumes.
Exhaust fumes contain carbon monoxide, a colorless, odorless gas that can cause unconsciousness and death
by asphyxiation.
• Be sure the exhaust system does not leak.
The exhaust system should be checked whenever the vehicle is raised to change the oil or for any other purpose.
If you hear a change in the sound of the exhaust or if you drive over something that strikes the underneath side
of the vehicle, have the exhaust system checked as soon as possible by an authorized HYUNDAI dealer.
• Do not run the engine in an enclosed area.
Letting the engine idle in your garage, even with the garage door open, is a hazardous practice. Never run the
engine in your garage any longer than it takes to start the engine and back the vehicle out.
• Avoid idling the engine for prolonged periods with people inside the vehicle.
If it is necessary to idle the engine for a prolonged period with people inside the vehicle, be sure to do so only in
an open area with the air intake set at "Fresh" and fan operating at one of the higher speeds so fresh air is drawn
into the interior.
If you must drive with the liftgate (tailgate) open because you are carrying objects that make this necessary:
1. Close all windows.
2. Open side vents.
3. Set the air intake control at "Fresh", the air flow control at "Floor" or "Face" and the fan at one of the higher speeds.
To assure proper operation of the ventilation system, be sure the ventilation air intakes located just in front of the
windshield are kept clear of snow, ice, leaves or other obstructions.
5 2
BEFORE DRIVING
Before entering vehicle Necessary inspections
CALIFORNIA PROPO- • Be sure that all windows, outside Fluid levels, such as engine oil,
SITION 65 WARNING mirror(s), and outside lights are engine coolant, brake fluid, and
Engine exhaust and a wide vari- clean. washer fluid should be checked on a
ety of automobile components • Check the condition of the tires. regular basis, with the exact interval
and parts, including compo- depending on the fluid. Further
nents found in the interior fur- • Check under the vehicle for any details are provided in Section 7,
nishings in a vehicle, contain or sign of leaks. “Maintenance”.
emit chemicals known to the • Be sure there are no obstacles
State of California to cause can- behind you if you intend to back up.
cer and birth defects and repro- WARNING
ductive harm. In addition, cer- Driving while distracted can
tain fluids contained in vehicles result in a loss of vehicle con-
and certain products of compo- trol, that may lead to an accident,
nent wear contain or emit chem- severe personal injury, and
icals known to the State of death. The driver’s primary
California to cause cancer and responsibility is in the safe and
birth defects or other reproduc- legal operation of a vehicle, and
tive harm. use of any handheld devices,
other equipment, or vehicle sys-
tems which take the driver’s
eyes, attention and focus away
from the safe operation of a vehi-
cle or which are not permissible
by law should never be used
during operation of the vehicle.
5 3
Before starting
• Close and lock all doors.
WARNING WARNING - Driving under
All passengers must be proper- the influence of alcohol or
• Position the seat so that all con- drugs
ly belted whenever the vehicle
trols are easily reached.
is moving. Refer to “Seat belts” Drinking and driving is danger-
• Adjust the inside and outside in section 3 for more informa- ous. Drunk driving is the num-
rearview mirrors. tion on their proper use. ber one contributor to the high-
• Be sure that all lights work. way death toll each year. Even a
• Check all gauges. small amount of alcohol will
WARNING affect your reflexes, percep-
• Check the operation of warning
tions and judgement. Driving
lights when the ignition switch is Always check the surrounding while under the influence of
turned to the ON position. areas near your vehicle for peo- drugs is as dangerous or more
• Release the parking brake and ple, especially children, before dangerous than driving drunk.
make sure the brake warning light putting a vehicle into D (Drive)
or R (Reverse). You are much more likely to
goes out.
have a serious accident if you
For safe operation, be sure you are drink or take drugs and drive.
familiar with your vehicle and its
If you are drinking or taking
equipment.
drugs, do not drive. Do not ride
with a driver who has been drink-
ing or taking drugs. Choose a
designated driver or call a cab.
5 4
WARNING
• When you intend to park or
stop the vehicle with the
engine on, be careful not to
depress the accelerator pedal
for a long period of time. It may
overheat the engine or exhaust
system and cause fire.
• When you make a sudden
stop or turn the steering
wheel rapidly, loose objects
may drop on the floor and it
could interfere with the opera-
tion of the foot pedals, possi-
bly causing an accident. Keep
all things in the vehicle safely
stored.
• If you do not focus on driving,
it may cause an accident. Be
careful when operating what
may disturb driving such as
audio or heater. It is the
responsibility of the driver to
always drive safely.
5 5
KEY
Illuminated ignition switch Ignition switch position ACC (Accessory)
(if equipped) LOCK The steering wheel is unlocked and
electrical accessories are operative.
✽ NOTICE
If difficulty is experienced turning
the ignition switch to the ACC posi-
tion, turn the key while turning the
steering wheel right and left to
release the tension.
OUM054001 OYP054029K
Whenever a front door is opened, the The steering wheel locks to protect
ignition switch will be illuminated for against theft. The ignition key can be
your convenience, provided the igni- removed only in the LOCK position.
tion switch is not in the ON position. When turning the ignition switch to
The light will go off immediately the LOCK position, push the key
when the ignition switch is turned on inward at the ACC position and turn
or go off after about 30 seconds the key toward the LOCK position.
when the door is closed.
5 6
ON
WARNING - Ignition key (Continued)
The warning lights can be checked
• Never turn the ignition switch • Never reach for the ignition
before the engine is started. This is
to LOCK or ACC while the vehi- switch, or any other controls
the normal running position after the
cle is moving.This would result through the steering wheel
engine is started.
in loss of directional control while the vehicle is in motion.
Do not leave the ignition switch ON if The presence of your hand or
the engine is not running to prevent and braking function, which
could cause an accident. arm in this area could cause a
battery discharge. loss of vehicle control, an
• The anti-theft steering column accident and serious bodily
START lock is not a substitute for the injury or death.
parking brake. Before leaving
Turn the ignition switch to the START the driver’s seat, always make • Do not place any movable
position to start the engine. The sure the shift lever is engaged objects around the driver’s
engine will crank until you release in P (Park), set the parking seat as they may move while
the key; then it returns to the ON brake fully and shut the engine driving, interfere with the driv-
position. The brake warning light can off. Unexpected and sudden er and lead to an accident.
be checked in this position. vehicle movement may occur if
these precautions are not
taken.
(Continued)
5 7
Starting the engine 4. Do not wait for the engine to warm

up while the vehicle remains sta- CAUTION
tionary. If the engine stalls while you are
WARNING Start driving at moderate engine in motion, do not attempt to
Always wear appropriate shoes speeds. (Steep accelerating and move the shift lever to the P
when operating your vehicle. decelerating should be avoided.) (Park) position. If traffic and
Unsuitable shoes (high heels, road conditions permit, you may
ski boots,etc.) may interfere put the shift lever in the N
with your ability to use the (Neutral) position while the
brake or the accelerator pedal. vehicle is still moving and turn
the ignition switch to the START
1. Make sure the parking brake is position in an attempt to restart
applied. the engine.
2. Place the transaxle shift lever in P
(Park). Depress the brake pedal
fully. CAUTION
You can also start the engine Do not engage the starter for
when the shift lever is in the N more than 10 seconds. If the
(Neutral) position. engine stalls or fails to start, wait
3. Turn the ignition switch to START 5 to 10 seconds before re-engag-
and hold it there until the engine ing the starter. Improper use of
starts (a maximum of 10 sec- the starter may damage it.
onds), then release the key.
It should be started without
depressing the accelerator pedal.
5 8
ENGINE START/STOP BUTTON (IF EQUIPPED)

Illuminated engine start/stop Engine start/stop button posi- ✽ NOTICE
button tion You are able to turn off the engine
OFF (START/RUN) or vehicle power
(ON), only when the vehicle is not in
motion.
White CAUTION
In an emergency situation while
To turn off the engine (START/RUN the vehicle is in motion, you are
position) or vehicle power (ON posi- able to turn the engine off and
tion), press the engine start/stop but- to the ACC position by pressing
ton with the shift lever in the P (Park) the engine start/stop button for
position. When you press the engine more than 2 seconds or 3 times
ODM052006 start/stop button without the shift successively within 3 seconds.
Whenever the front door is opened, lever in the P (Park) position, the If the vehicle is still moving, you
the engine start/stop button will illu- engine start/stop button will not can restart the engine without
minate for your convenience. The change to the OFF position but to the depressing the brake pedal by
light will go off after about 30 sec- ACC position. pressing the engine start/stop
onds when the door is closed. It will button with the shift lever in the
also go off immediately when the N (Neutral) position.
theft-alarm system is armed.
5 9
ACC(Accessory) ON START/RUN
Orange Blue Not illuminated
Press the engine start/stop button Press the engine start/stop button To start the engine, depress the
while it is in the OFF position without while it is in the ACC position without brake pedal and press the engine
depressing the brake pedal. depressing the brake pedal. start/stop button with the shift lever in
the P (Park) or the N (Neutral) posi-
tion. For your safety, start the engine
The electrical accessories are opera- The warning lights can be checked with the shift lever in the P (Park)
tional. before the engine is started. Do not position.
leave the engine start/stop button in
If the engine start/stop button is in the ON position for a long time. The
the ACC position for more than 1 battery may discharge, because the
hour, the button is turned off auto- engine is not running.
matically to prevent battery dis-
charge.
5 10
✽ NOTICE (Continued)
If you press the engine start/stop WARNING
• Never press the engine • Never reach for the engine
button without depressing the brake start/ stop button or any other
pedal, the engine will not start and start/stop button while the
vehicle is in motion. This controls through the steering
the engine start/stop button changes wheel while the vehicle is in
as follow: would result in loss of direc-
motion. The presence of your
OFF ➔ACC ➔ ON ➔ OFF or ACC tional control and braking
hand or arm in the area could
function, which could cause
cause loss of vehicle control,
✽ NOTICE an accident.
an accident and serious bodi-
If you leave the engine start/stop • Before leaving the driver's ly injury or death.
button in the ACC or ON position seat, always make sure the
shift lever is engaged in P • Do not place any movable
for a long time, the battery will dis- objects around the driver's
charge. (Park), set the parking brake
fully and shut the engine off. seat as they may move while
Unexpected and sudden vehi- driving, interfere with the driv-
cle movement may occur if er and lead to an accident.
these precautions are not
taken.
(Continued)
5 11
Starting the engine 5. Do not wait for the engine to warm • Even if the smart key is in the vehi-
up while the vehicle remains sta- cle, if it is far away from you, the
tionary. engine may not start.
WARNING Start driving at moderate engine • When the engine start/stop button
Always wear appropriate shoes speeds. (Steep accelerating and is in the ACC position or above, if
when operating your vehicle. decelerating should be avoided.) any door is opened, the system
Unsuitable shoes (high heels, checks for the smart key. If the
ski boots,etc.) may interfere with smart key is not in the vehicle, the
your ability to use the brake or “ ” indicator and a message
the accelerator pedal. “Key not in vehicle” will appear on
the instrument cluster and LCD dis-
1. Carry the smart key or leave it play. And if all doors are closed, the
inside the vehicle. chime will sound for 5 seconds. The
2. Make sure the parking brake is indicator or warning will turn off
firmly applied. while the vehicle is moving. Always
have the smart key with you.
3. Place the transaxle shift lever in P
(Park). Depress the brake pedal
fully. WARNING
You can also start the engine The engine will start, only when
when the shift lever is in the N the smart key is in the vehicle.
(Neutral) position. Never allow children or any per-
4. Press the engine start/stop button. son who is unfamiliar with the
It should be started without depress- vehicle to press the engine start/
ing the accelerator pedal. stop button or related parts.
5 12
(Continued)
CAUTION • When the stop lamp fuse is blown,
If the engine stalls while the you cannot start the engine nor-
vehicle is in motion, do not mally.
attempt to move the shift lever Replace the fuse with a new one. If
to the P (Park) position. If the it is not possible, you can start the
traffic and road conditions per- engine by pressing the engine
mit, you may put the shift lever start/stop button for 10 seconds
in the N (Neutral) position while while it is in the ACC position. The
the vehicle is still moving and engine can start without depressing
press the engine start/stop but- the brake pedal. But for your safe-
ton in an attempt to restart the ODM052007 ty always depress the brake pedal
engine. before starting the engine.
✽ NOTICE
• If the battery is weak or the smart
key does not work correctly, you CAUTION
can start the engine by pressing Do not press the engine
the engine start/stop button with start/stop button for more than
the smart key. 10 seconds except when the
The side with the lock button stop lamp fuse is blown.
should contact the engine
start/stop button directly.
When you press the engine
start/stop button directly with the
smart key, the smart key should
contact the button at a right angle.
(Continued)
5 13
AUTOMATIC TRANSAXLE
Automatic transaxle operation
The highly efficient automatic
transaxle has 6 forward speeds and
one reverse speed. The individual
speeds are selected automatically,
depending on the position of the shift
lever.
The individual speeds are selected
automatically in Drive, depending on
+ (UP) the position of the accelerator pedal.
✽ NOTICE
- (DOWN) The first few shifts on a new vehicle
may be somewhat abrupt. This is a
normal condition, and the shifting
sequence will adjust after shifts are
cycled a few times by the TCM
(Transaxle Control Module) or
PCM (Powertrain Control Module).
Depress the brake pedal and the lock release button when shifting.
(If the shift lock system is not equipped, it is not necessary to depress the brake pedal.
However, it is recommended to depress the brake pedal to avoid inadvertent movement
of the vehicle.)
Press the lock release button when shifting.
The shift lever can be shifted freely.
ODM052011
5 14
For smooth operation, depress the Transaxle ranges

brake pedal when shifting from N CAUTION The indicator lights in the instrument
(Neutral) to a forward or reverse gear. • To avoid damage to your cluster displays the shift lever posi-
transaxle, do not accelerate tion when the ignition switch is in the
WARNING - Automatic the engine in R (Reverse) or ON position.
transaxle any forward gear position with
the brakes on.
• Always check the surrounding P (Park)
areas near your vehicle for • When stopped on an incline,
do not hold the vehicle sta- Always come to a complete stop
people, especially children, before shifting into P (Park). This
before shifting a vehicle into tionary with engine power.
Use the service brake or the position locks the transaxle and pre-
D (Drive) or R (Reverse). vents the front wheels from rotating.
parking brake.
• Before leaving the driver’s
seat, always make sure the • Do not shift from N (Neutral)
shift lever is in the P (Park) or P (Park) into D (Drive), or R
position; then set the parking (Reverse) when the engine is
brake fully and shut the above idle speed.
engine off. Unexpected and
sudden vehicle movement
can occur if these precautions
are not followed in the order
identified.
5 15
R (Reverse) N (Neutral)
WARNING Use this position to drive the vehicle The wheels and transaxle are not
• Shifting into P (Park) while the backward. engaged. The vehicle will roll freely
vehicle is in motion will cause even on the slightest incline unless
the drive wheels to lock which CAUTION the parking brake or service brakes
will cause you to lose control are applied.
of the vehicle. Always come to a complete stop
before shifting into or out of R
• Do not use the P (Park) posi- (Reverse); you may damage the D (Drive)
tion in place of the parking transaxle if you shift into R This is the normal forward driving
brake. Move the shift lever to (Reverse) while the vehicle is in position. The transaxle will automati-
the P (Park) position and set motion, except as explained in cally shift through a 6-gear sequence,
the parking brake fully. “Rocking the vehicle”, in this providing the best fuel economy and
• Never leave a child unattend- manual. power.
ed in a vehicle.
For extra power when passing anoth-
er vehicle or climbing grades,
CAUTION depress the accelerator fully, at which
The transaxle may be damaged time the transaxle will automatically
if you shift into P (Park) while downshift to the next lower gear.
the vehicle is in motion.
✽ NOTICE
Always come to a complete stop
before shifting into D (Drive).
5 16
In manual shift mode, moving the (Continued)

shift lever backwards and forwards • In manual shift mode, when the
will allow you to make gearshifts rap- engine rpm approaches the red
idly. In contrast to a manual zone, the transaxle will upshift
transaxle, the manual shift mode automatically.
allows gearshifts with the accelerator • To maintain the required levels of
pedal depressed. vehicle performance and safety,
Up (+) : Push the lever forward the system may not execute cer-
once to shift up one gear. tain gearshifts when the shift lever
is operated.
Down (-) : Pull the lever backwards • When accelerating from a stop on
once to shift down one gear. a slippery road, push the shift
ONC057018N
lever forward into the +(up) posi-
Manual shift mode
✽ NOTICE tion. This causes the transaxle to
Whether the vehicle is stationary or shift into 2nd gear which is better
in motion, manual shift mode is • In manual shift mode, the driver
must execute upshifts in accor- for smooth accelerating on a slip-
selected by pushing the shift lever pery road.
from the D (Drive) position into the dance with road conditions, taking
manual gate. To return to D (Drive) care to keep the engine speed
range operation, push the shift lever below the red zone.
back into the main gate. • In manual shift mode, only the 6
forward gears can be selected. To
reverse or park the vehicle, move
the shift lever to the R (Reverse)
or P (Park) position as required.
• In manual shift mode, downshifts
are made automatically when the
vehicle slows down. When the
vehicle stops, 1st gear is automati-
cally selected.
(Continued)
5 17
Shift lock system Ignition key interlock system

For your safety, the automatic (if equipped)
transaxle has a shift lock system The ignition key cannot be removed
which prevents shifting the transaxle unless the shift lever is in the P
from P (Park) or N (Neutral) into R (Park) position. If the ignition switch
(Reverse) unless the brake pedal is is in any other position, the key can-
depressed. not be removed.
To shift the transaxle from P (Park) or
N (Neutral) into R (Reverse):
1. Depress and hold the brake pedal.
2. Start the engine or turn the ignition OANNDR4103
switch to the ON position to R.
Shift-lock override
3. Move the shift lever to R.
If the shift lever cannot be moved
from the P (Park) or N (Neutral) posi-
WARNING tion into R (Reverse) position with
the brake pedal depressed, continue
Always fully depress the brake depressing the brake, then do the fol-
pedal before and while shifting lowing:
out of the P (Park) position into
another position to avoid inad- 1. Carefully remove the cap covering
vertent motion of the vehicle the shift-lock override access hole.
which could injure persons in 2. Insert a screwdriver into the
or around the vehicle. access hole and press down on
the screwdriver.
3. Move the shift lever.
4. Have your vehicle inspected by an
immediately.
5 18
Good driving practices • Always use the parking brake and

• Never move the shift lever from P shift into P (Park) when parking the WARNING
(Park) or N (Neutral) to any other vehicle. Do not depend on placing • Always buckle-up! In a colli-
position with the accelerator pedal the transaxle in P (Park) to keep sion, an unbelted occupant is
depressed. the vehicle from moving. significantly more likely to be
• Exercise extreme caution when seriously injured or killed than
• Never move the shift lever into "P"
driving on a slippery surface. Be a properly belted occupant.
when the vehicle is in motion.
especially careful when braking, • Avoid high speeds when cor-
• Be sure the vehicle is completely accelerating or shifting gears. On a nering or turning.
stopped before you attempt to shift slippery surface, an abrupt change
into R (Reverse) or D (Drive). • Do not make quick steering
in vehicle speed can cause the
wheel movements, such as
• Never take the vehicle out of gear drive wheels to lose traction and
sharp lane changes or fast,
and coast down a hill. This may be the vehicle to go out of control.
sharp turns.
extremely hazardous. Always leave • Optimum vehicle performance and
the vehicle in gear when moving. • The risk of rollover is greatly
economy is obtained by smoothly
increased if you lose control
• Do not "ride" the brakes. This can depressing and releasing the
of your vehicle at highway
cause them to overheat and mal- accelerator pedal.
speeds.
function. Instead, when you are
driving down a long hill, slow down, • Loss of control often occurs if
move the shift lever to manual shift two or more wheels drop off the
mode and shift to a lower gear. roadway and the driver over-
steers to reenter the roadway.
• When using manual shift mode,
slow down before shifting to a • In the event your vehicle
lower gear. leaves the roadway, do not
steer sharply. Instead, slow
down before pulling back into
the travel lanes.
• Never exceed posted speed
limits.
5 19
Moving up a steep grade from a

WARNING standing start
If your vehicle becomes stuck in To move up a steep grade from a
snow, mud, sand, etc., then you standing start, depress the brake
may attempt to rock the vehicle pedal, move the shift lever to D
free by moving it forward and (Drive) and release the parking
backward. Do not attempt this brake. Depress the accelerator grad-
procedure if people or objects ually while releasing the service
are anywhere near the vehicle. brakes.
During the rocking operation
the vehicle may suddenly move
forward or backward as it
becomes unstuck, causing
injury or damage to nearby peo-
ple or objects.
5 20
ALL WHEEL DRIVE (AWD) (IF EQUIPPED)

Engine power can be delivered to the Tight corner brake effect
front and rear wheels for maximum WARNING - Off road
traction. AWD is useful when extra driving CAUTION - AWD
traction is required, such as, when This vehicle is designed prima-
driving on slippery, muddy, wet, or When turning sharply on a
rily for on road use although it paved road at low speed while
snow-covered roads. These vehicles can operate effectively off road.
are not designed for challenging off- in all wheel drive, steering con-
However, it was not designed to trol will be difficult.
road use. Occasional off-road use drive in challenging off-road
such as established unpaved roads conditions. Driving in condi- Tight corner brake effect is a unique
and trails are OK. It is always impor- tions that exceed the vehicle's characteristic of all-wheel drive vehi-
tant when traveling off-highway that intended design or the driver's cles caused by the difference in tire
the driver carefully reduces the experience level may result in rotation at the four wheels.
speed to a level that does not exceed severe injury or death.
the safe operating speed for those Sharp turns at low speeds should be
conditions. In general, off-road con- carried out with caution.
ditions provide less traction and
braking effectiveness than normal
road conditions. The driver must be
especially alert to avoid driving on
slopes which tilt the vehicle to either
side.
These factors must be carefully con-
sidered when driving off-road.
Keeping the vehicle in contact with
the driving surface and under control
in these conditions is always the dri-
ver's responsibility for the safety of
him/herself and his or her passen-
gers.
5 21
ALL Wheel Drive (AWD) transfer mode selection

Transfer mode Selection button Indicator light Description
• When driving in AWD AUTO mode, the vehicle oper-
ates similar to conventional 2WD vehicles under nor-
mal operating conditions. However, if the system deter-
AWD AUTO
mines that there is a need for the AWD mode, the
(AWD LOCK is engine’s driving power is distributed to all four wheels
deactivated) automatically without driver intervention.
(Indicator light is
not illuminated) • When driving on normal roads and pavement, the vehi-
cle moves similar to conventional 2WD vehicles.
• This mode is used for climbing or descending sharp
grades, off-road driving, driving on sandy and muddy
roads, etc., to maximize traction.
• This mode automatically begins to deactivate at
AWD LOCK speeds above 19 mph (30 km/h) and is shifted to AWD
(Indicator light is AUTO mode at speed above 25 mph (40 km/h). If the
illuminated) vehicle decelerates to speeds below 19 mph (30 km/h),
however, the transfer mode is shifted into AWD LOCK
mode again.
✽ NOTICE
• When driving on normal roads, deactivate the AWD LOCK mode by pushing the AWD LOCK button (the indi-
cator light goes off). Driving on normal roads with AWD LOCK mode(especially, when cornering) may cause
mechanical noise or vibration. The noise and vibration will disappear when the AWD LOCK mode is deactivat-
ed. Some parts of the power train may be damaged by prolonged driving with the noise and vibration.
• When the AWD LOCK mode is deactivated, a shock may be felt as the drive power is delivered entirely to the
front wheels. This shock is not a mechanical failure.
5 22
For safe all wheel drive opera-

tion
WARNING - All wheel

driving
When conditions demand the
use of four-wheel drive, all func-
tions of your vehicle are
exposed to extreme stress.
Slow down and be ready for
changes in the composition and HILL1 HILL2
traction of the surface under
your tires. If you have any • When you are driving up or down
doubt about the safety of the hills drive as straight as possible. WARNING - Hills
conditions you are facing, stop Use extreme caution in going up or
Driving across the contour of
and consider the best way to down steep hills, since you may flip
steep hills can be extremely
proceed. Do not exceed the abil- your vehicle over depending on the
dangerous. This danger can
ity of yourself or your vehicle to grade, terrain and water/mud con-
come from slight changes in the
operate safely. ditions.
wheel angle which can destabi-
lize the vehicle or, even if the
• Do not try to drive in deep standing vehicle is maintaining stability
water or mud since such conditions under power, it can lose that
can stall your engine and clog your stability if the vehicle stops its
exhaust pipes. Do not drive down forward motion. Your vehicle
steep hills since it requires extreme may roll over without warning
skill to maintain control of the vehi- and without time for you to cor-
cle. rect a mistake that could cause
5 23
• You must consciously take the • Always hold the steering wheel firm-
effort to learn how to corner in a ly when you are driving off-road.
AWD vehicle. Do not rely on your • Make sure all passengers are
experience in conventional 2WD wearing seat belts.
vehicles in choosing safe cornering
speed in AWD mode. For starters,
you must drive more slowly in WARNING - Wind danger
AWD. If you are driving in heavy wind,
• Drive carefully off-road because the vehicle's higher center of
your vehicle may be damaged by gravity decreases your steering
rocks or roots of trees. Become control capacity and requires
familiar with the off-road conditions ODMEDR2146 you to drive more slowly.
where you are going to drive
before you begin driving. • If you need to drive through water,
WARNING - Steering
wheel stop your vehicle, set your transfer
to the AWD LOCK mode and drive
WARNING - AWD Do not grab the inside of the at less than 5 mph (8 km/h).
Reduce speed when you turn steering wheel when you are
corners. The center of gravity of driving off-road. You may hurt
AWD vehicles is higher than your arm by a sudden steering WARNING - Driving
that of conventional 2WD vehi- maneuver or from steering through water
cles, making them more likely to wheel rebound due to impact Drive slowly. If you are driving
roll over when you turn corners with objects on the ground. You too fast in water, the water can
too fast. could lose control of the steer- get into the engine compartment
ing wheel. and wet the ignition system,
causing your vehicle to sudden-
ly stop. If this happens and your
vehicle is in a tilted position,
your vehicle may roll over.
5 24
✽ NOTICE
• Do not drive through water if the level WARNING - AWD driving CAUTION - Mud or snow
is higher than the bottom of the vehi- • Avoid high cornering speed. If one of the front or rear wheels
cle. • Do not make quick steering begins to spin in mud, snow,
• Check your brake condition once wheel movements, such as etc. the vehicle can sometimes
you are out of mud or water. Press sharp lane changes or fast, be driven out by depressing the
the brake pedal several times as sharp turns. accelerator pedal further; how-
you move slowly until you feel nor- ever avoid running the engine
mal braking forces return. • The risk of rollover is greatly continuously at high rpm
• Shorten your scheduled mainte- increased if you lose control because doing so could dam-
nance interval if you drive in off- of your vehicle at high speed. age the AWD system.
road conditions such as sand, mud • In a collision, an unbelted per-
or water (see “Maintenance under son is significantly more like-
severe usage conditions” in section ly to die compared to a person
7). Always wash your vehicle thor- wearing a seat belt.
oughly after off road use, especially • Loss of control often occurs if
cleaning the bottom of the vehicle. two or more wheels drop off
• Since the driving torque is always the roadway and the driver
applied to the 4 wheels the per- over steers to re-enter the
formance of the AWD vehicle is roadway. In the event your
greatly affected by the condition of vehicle leaves the roadway, do
the tires. Be sure to equip the vehi- not steer sharply. Instead,
cle with four tires of the same size slow down before pulling
and type. back into the travel lanes.
• A full time all wheel drive vehicle
cannot be towed by an ordinary
tow truck. Make sure that the
vehicle is placed on a flat bed
truck for moving.
5 25
Reducing the risk of a rollover

This multi-purpose passenger vehicle
WARNING - Rollover WARNING
is defined as a Sports Utility Vehicle As with other Sports Utility Your vehicle is equipped with
(SUV). SUV’s have higher ground Vehicle (SUV), failure to operate tires designed to provide safe
clearance and a narrower track to this vehicle correctly may result ride and handling capability. Do
make them capable of performing in a in loss of control, an accident or not use a size and type of tire
wide variety of off-road applications. vehicle rollover. and wheel that is different from
Specific design characteristics give • Utility vehicles have a signifi- the one that is originally
them a higher center of gravity than cantly higher rollover rate installed on your vehicle. It can
ordinary vehicles. An advantage of the than other types of vehicles. affect the safety and perform-
higher ground clearance is a better ance of your vehicle, which
• Specific design characteris- could lead to steering failure or
view of the road, which allows you to tics (higher ground clearance,
anticipate problems. They are not rollover and serious injury.
narrower track, etc.) give this When replacing the tires, be
designed for cornering at the same vehicle a higher center of
speeds as conventional passenger sure to equip all four tires with
gravity than ordinary vehicles. the tire and wheel of the same
vehicles, any more than low-slung
sports cars are designed to perform • A SUV is not designed for cor- size, type, tread, brand and
satisfactorily in off-road conditions. nering at the same speeds as load-carrying capacity. If you
Due to this risk, driver and passengers conventional vehicles. nevertheless decide to equip
are strongly recommended to buckle • Avoid sharp turns or abrupt your vehicle with any tire/wheel
their seat belts. In a rollover crash, an maneuvers. combination not recommended
unbelted person is more likely to die • In a rollover crash, an unbelt- by HYUNDAI for off road driv-
than a person wearing a seat belt. ed person is significantly ing, you should not use these
There are steps that a driver can make more likely to die than a per- tires for highway driving.
to reduce the risk of a rollover. If at all son wearing a seat belt. Make
possible, avoid sharp turns or abrupt sure everyone in the vehicle is
maneuvers, do not load your roof rack properly buckled up.
with heavy cargo, and never modify
your vehicle in any way.
5 26
WARNING - Jacked WARNING - Dynamometer

vehicle testing
While a full-time AWD vehicle is Keep away from the front of the
raised on a jack, never start the vehicle while the vehicle is in
engine or cause the tires to gear on the dynamometer. This
rotate. is very dangerous as the vehi-
There is a danger that rotating cle can jump forward and cause
tires touching the ground could Temporary free roller
cause the vehicle to fall off the Roll tester (speedometer) OANNDR2900
jack and to jump forward or
rearward. 1. Check the tire pressures recom-
mended for your vehicle.
2. Place the front wheels on the roll
• Full-time AWD vehicles must be tester for a speedometer test as
tested on a special four wheel shown in the illustration.
chassis dynamometer. 3. Release the parking brake.
4. Place the rear wheels on the tem-
✽ NOTICE porary free roller as shown in the
Never engage the parking brake illustration.
while performing these tests.
• A full-time AWD vehicle should not

be tested on a 2WD roll tester. If a
2WD roll tester must be used, per-
form the following:
5 27
DRIVE MODE INTEGRATED CONTROL SYSTEM (IF EQUIPPED)

✽ NOTICE ECO mode
If there is a problem with the instru- The ECO mode is a opti-
ment cluster, the drive mode will be mizes vehicle perform-
in NORMAL mode and may not ance for fuel efficient driv-
change to ECO mode or SPORT ing.
mode. • When the ECO mode is selected
by pressing the DRIVE MODE but-
ton, the ECO indicator (green
color) will illuminate.
• If the vehicle was in ECO mode
ODM056104
when the engine was shut off, then
DRIVE mode will remain in ECO
The mode changes whenever the mode upon engine restart.
DRIVE MODE button is pressed.
NORMAL ✽ NOTICE
Fuel efficiency depends on the dri-
SPORT ECO ver's driving habit and road condi-
tions.
When NORMAL mode is selected, it
is not displayed on the instrument
cluster.
5 28
When the ECO mode is activated: Limitations of the ECO mode SPORT mode
• The acceleration response may be operation: SPORT mode manages
slightly reduced as the accelerator If the following conditions occur while the driving dynamics by
pedal is depressed moderately. the ECO mode is operating, fuel effi- automatically adjusting the
• The air conditioner performance ciency may decrease even though steering wheel, engine
may be limited. there is no change in the ECO indi- and transaxle system to
cator. optimize performance.
• The shift pattern of the automatic
transaxle may change. • When the coolant temperature is • When the SPORT mode is select-
low: ed by pressing the DRIVE MODE
• The engine noise may get louder.
Fuel efficiency may decrease until button, the SPORT indicator (yel-
engine temperature reaches nor- low color) will illuminate.
The above situations are normal mal. • Restarting of the engine in the
conditions when the ECO mode is SPORT mode resets the DRIVE
• When driving up a hill:
activated to improve fuel efficiency. mode to the NORMAL mode. Thus,
Fuel efficiency may decrease to
gain performance when driving when necessary, reselect the
uphill because engine torque is SPORT mode.
restricted. • When the SPORT mode is activat-
• When using the automatic ed:
transaxle manual shift mode: - The RPM (revolutions per min-
Fuel efficiency may decrease utes) level is maintained over a
according to the shift location. certain length of time, even after
releasing the accelerator pedal.
• When the accelerator pedal is
deeply depressed for a few sec- - When accelerating, up-shifting
onds: timing is delayed.
Fuel efficiency may decrease,
judging that the driver wants to ✽ NOTICE
speed up. In the SPORT mode, the fuel effi-
ciency may decrease.
5 29
BRAKE SYSTEM
Power brakes (Continued)
Your vehicle has power-assisted
WARNING - Brakes
• Do not drive with your foot • Wet brakes may impair the
brakes that adjust automatically vehicle’s ability to safely slow
through normal usage. resting on the brake pedal.
This will create abnormal high down; the vehicle may also
In the event that the power-assisted pull to one side when the
brake temperatures, exces-
brakes lose power because of a brakes are applied. Applying
sive brake lining and pad
stalled engine or some other reason, the brakes lightly will indicate
wear, and increased stopping
you can still stop your vehicle by whether they have been affect-
distances.
applying greater force to the brake ed in this way. Always test your
pedal than you normally would. The • When descending a long or brakes in this fashion after
stopping distance, however, will be steep hill, shift to a lower gear driving through deep water. To
longer. and avoid continuous applica- dry the brakes, apply them
tion of the brakes. Continuous lightly while maintaining a safe
When the engine is not running, the
brake application will cause forward speed until brake per-
reserve brake power is partially
the brakes to overheat and formance returns to normal.
depleted each time the brake pedal
could result in a temporary
is applied. Do not pump the brake • Always, confirm the position
loss of braking performance.
pedal when the power assist has of the brake and accelerator
been interrupted. (Continued) pedal before driving. If you
Pump the brake pedal only when don't check the position of the
necessary to maintain steering con- accelerator and brake pedal
trol on slippery surfaces. before driving, you may
depress the accelerator
instead of the brake pedal. It
may cause a serious accident.
5 30
In the event of brake failure Disc brakes wear indicator

When your brake pads are worn and CAUTION
If service brakes fail to operate while
the vehicle is in motion, you can new pads are required, you will hear • To avoid costly brake repairs,
make an emergency stop with the a high-pitched warning sound from do not continue to drive with
parking brake. The stopping dis- your front brakes or rear brakes (if worn brake pads.
tance, however, will be much greater equipped). You may hear this sound • Always replace the front or
than normal. come and go or it may occur when- rear brake pads as pairs.
ever you depress the brake pedal.
Please remember that some driving
WARNING - Parking conditions or climates may cause a WARNING - Brake wear
brake brake squeal when you first apply (or This brake wear warning sound
Applying the parking brake lightly apply) the brakes. This is nor- means your vehicle needs serv-
while the vehicle is moving at mal and does not indicate a problem ice. If you ignore this audible
normal speeds can cause a with your brakes. warning, you will eventually
sudden loss of control of the lose braking performance,
vehicle. If you must use the which could lead to a serious
parking brake to stop the vehi- accident.
cle, use great caution in apply-
ing the brake.
5 31
Parking brake Releasing the parking brake

CAUTION
Applying the parking brake
• Driving with the parking brake
applied will cause excessive
brake pad and brake rotor wear.
• Do not operate the parking
brake while the vehicle is
moving except in an emer-
gency situation. It could dam-
age the vehicle system and
make endanger driving safety.
OCM050016
OCM050015 To release the parking brake,
depress the parking brake pedal a
To engage the parking brake, first
second time while applying the foot
apply the foot brake and then
brake. The pedal will automatically
depress the parking brake pedal
extend to the fully released position.
down as far as possible.
5 32
If the parking brake does not release

(Continued)
or does not release all the way, have
the system checked by an authorized • All vehicles should always
HYUNDAI dealer. have the parking brake fully
engaged when parking to
avoid inadvertent movement
WARNING of the vehicle which can injure
• To prevent unintentional occupants or pedestrians.
movement when stopped and
leaving the vehicle, do not use
the gearshift lever in place of
the parking brake. Set the W-75
parking brake AND make sure
the gearshift lever is securely Check the brake warning light by
positioned in P (Park) for turning the ignition switch ON (do not
automatic transaxle equipped start the engine). This light will be
vehicles. illuminated when the parking brake is
applied with the ignition switch in the
• Never allow anyone who is START or ON position.
unfamiliar with the vehicle to
touch the parking brake. If the Before driving, be sure the parking
parking brake is released brake is fully released and the brake
unintentionally, serious injury warning light is off.
may occur. If the brake warning light remains on
(Continued) after the parking brake is released
while engine is running, there may be
a malfunction in the brake system.
Immediate attention is necessary.
5 33
If at all possible, cease driving the Electronic parking brake (EPB) ✽ NOTICE
vehicle immediately. If that is not pos- (if equipped) On a steep incline or when pulling a
sible, use extreme caution while trailer if the vehicle does not stand
operating the vehicle and only con- Applying the parking brake
still, do as follows:
tinue to drive the vehicle until you 1. Apply the EPB.
can reach a safe location or repair 2. Pull up the EPB switch for more
shop. than 3 seconds.
CAUTION
Do not operate the parking
brake while the vehicle is mov-
ing except in an emergency sit-
uation. It could damage the
vehicle system and endanger
ODMEDR2113 driving safety.
To apply the EPB (electronic parking
brake):
1.Depress the brake pedal.
2.Pull up the EPB switch.
Make sure the warning light comes
on.
Also, the EPB is applied automatical-
ly if the Auto Hold button is on when
the engine is turned off. However, if
you keep pressing the EPB switch
till the engine is turned off, the EPB
will not be applied.
5 34
Releasing the parking brake To release EPB (electronic parking ✽ NOTICE

brake) automatically: • For your safety, you can engage
• Shift lever in P (Park) the EPB even though the ignition
With the engine running depress switch or engine stop/start button
the brake pedal and shift out of P is in the OFF position, but you
(Park) to R (Rear) or D (Drive). cannot release it.
• Shift lever in N (Neutral) • For your safety, depress the brake
pedal and release the parking
With the engine running depress brake manually with the EPB
the brake pedal and shift out of N switch when you drive downhill or
(Neutral) to R (Rear) or D (Drive). when backing up the vehicle.
ONC057019N
2. Fasten the driver's seat belt.
To release the EPB (electronic parking 3. Close the driver's door, engine
brake), press the EPB switch in the hood and liftgate (tailgate).
following condition: 4. Depress the accelerator pedal
• Have the ignition switch or engine while the shift lever is in R
start/stop button in the ON posi- (Rear), D (Drive) or maunal shift
tion. mode.
• Depress the brake pedal. Make sure the brake warning light
Make sure the brake warning light goes off.
goes off.
5 35
EPB (electronic parking brake) may System warning

CAUTION be automatically applied when:
• If the parking brake warning • The EPB is overheated
light is still on even though • Requested by other systems
the EPB has been released,
have the system checked by
an authorized HYUNDAI deal- ✽ NOTICE
er. If the driver turns the engine off by
• Do not drive your vehicle with mistake while Auto Hold is operat-
the EPB applied. It may cause ing, EPB will be automatically
excessive brake pad and applied. (Vehicles equipped with
brake rotor wear. Auto Hold)
ODM056043L/ODM056044L
• If you try to drive off depressing the
accelerator pedal with the EPB
applied, but doesn't release auto-
matically, a warning will sound and
a message will appear.
If the above situation occurs,

depress the brake pedal and release
EPB by pressing the EPB switch.
5 36
System warning
WARNING CAUTION
• To prevent unintentional • A click sound may be heard
movement when stopped and while operating or releasing
leaving the vehicle, do not use the EPB, but these conditions
the shift lever in place of the are normal and indicate that
parking brake. Set the parking the EPB is functioning proper-
brake and make sure the shift ly.
lever is securely positioned in • When leaving your keys with a
P (Park). parking lot attendant or valet,
• Never allow anyone who is make sure to inform him/her
unfamiliar with the vehicle to how to operate the EPB.
touch the parking brake. If the • The EPB may malfunction if ODM056039L/ODM056040L
parking brake is released you drive with the EPB
unintentionally, serious injury applied. When the conversion from Auto Hold
may occur. to EPB is not working properly a
• When you automatically warning will sound and a message
• All vehicles should always release EPB by depressing will appear.
have the parking brake fully the accelerator pedal, depress
engaged when parking to it slowly.
avoid inadvertent movement CAUTION
of the car which can injure Depress the brake pedal when
occupants or pedestrians. the above message appears for
the Auto Hold and EPB may not
activate.
5 37
■ Type A ■ Type B EPB malfunction indicator The EPB malfunction indicator may
(if equipped) illuminate when the ESC indicator
comes on to indicate that the ESC is
not working properly, but it does not
indicate a malfunction of the EPB.
ODM056041L/ODM056042L
• If the EPB is applied while Auto
Hold is activated because of ESC ODM046749
(Electronic Stability Control) signal,
a warning sound and a message This warning light illuminates if the
will appear. engine start/stop button is changed
to the ON position and goes off in
• If the driver’s door is opened and approximately 3 seconds if the sys-
the seatbelt is not fastened while tem is operation normally.
Auto Hold is opened, a warning will
sound and a message will appear. If the EPB malfunction indicator
remains on, comes on while driving,
or does not come on when the igni-
tion switch or the engine start/stop
button is changed to the ON position,
this indicates that the EPB may have
malfunctioned.
If this occurs, have the system
checked by an authorized HYUNDAI
dealer.
5 38
Emergency braking When the EPB (electronic parking

CAUTION brake) does not release
If there is a problem with the brake
• The EPB warning light may pedal while driving, emergency brak- If the EPB does not release normal-
illuminate if the EPB switch ing is possible by pulling up and ly, contact an authorized HYUNDAI
operates abnormally. Shut the holding the EPB switch. Braking is dealer by loading the vehicle on a
engine off and turn it on again possible only while you are holding flatbed tow truck and have the sys-
after a few minutes. The warn- the EPB switch. tem checked.
ing light will go off and the
EPB switch will operate nor-
mally. However, if the EPB WARNING
warning light is still on, have Do not operate the parking
the system checked by an brake while the vehicle is mov-
authorized HYUNDAI dealer. ing except in an emergency sit-
• If the parking brake warning uation.
light does not illuminate or
blinks even though the EPB
switch was pulled up, the EPB ✽ NOTICE
is not applied. During emergency braking by the
• If the parking brake warning EPB, the parking brake warning
light blinks when the EPB light will illuminate to indicate that
warning light is on, press the the system is operating.
switch, then pull it up. Once
more press it back to its origi- CAUTION
nal position and pull it back
up. If the EPB warning does If you continuously notice a
not go off, have the system noise or burning smell when the
checked by an authorized EPB is used for emergency
HYUNDAI dealer. braking, have the system
checked by an authorized
HYUNDAI dealer.
5 39
AUTO HOLD (if equipped) Set up

White
The Auto Hold helps maintain the
White
vehicle in a standstill even though
the brake pedal is not depressed
after the driver brings the vehicle to a
complete stop by depressing the
brake pedal. Green
ODM052020
ODM052019 2.When you stop the vehicle com-

pletely by depressing the brake
1.With the driver's door, engine hood pedal, the AUTO HOLD indicator
and liftgate (tailgate) closed, fasten changes from white to green.
the driver's seat belt or depress the
brake pedal and then press the 3.The vehicle will remain stationary
Auto Hold button. The white AUTO even if you release the brake
HOLD indicator will come on and pedal.
the system will be in the standby 4.If EPB is applied, Auto Hold will be
position. released.
5 40
Leaving Cancel ✽ NOTICE

If you press the accelerator pedal • The Auto Hold does not operate
with the shift lever in R (Reverse), D Light off when:
(Drive) or manual shift mode, the - The driver's seat belt is unfas-
Auto Hold will be released automati- tened and driver's door is opened
cally and the vehicle will start to - The engine hood is opened when
move. The indicator changes from the gear is in D [Drive]
green to white. - The liftgate (tailgate) is opened
when the gear is in R [Reverse]
WARNING - The shift lever is in P (Park)
- The EPB is applied
When driving off from Auto • For your safety, the Auto Hold
Hold by depressing the acceler- automatically switches to EPB in
ator pedal, always check the ODM052021
such cases:
surrounding area near your To cancel the Auto Hold operation, - The driver's seat belt is unfas-
vehicle. press the Auto Hold switch. The tened and driver's door is opened
Slowly depress the accelerator AUTO HOLD indicator will disappear. - The engine hood is opened when
pedal for a smooth take off. To cancel the Auto Hold operation the gear is in D [Drive]
when the vehicle is at a standstill, - The liftgate (tailgate) is opened
press the Auto Hold switch while when the gear is in R [Reverse]
depressing the brake pedal. - The vehicle is in a standstill for
more than 10 minutes
- The vehicle is standing on a steep
slope
- The vehicle moved several times
(Continued)
5 41
(Continued)
In these cases, the brake warning WARNING CAUTION
light comes on, the AUTO HOLD • Press the accelerator pedal If there is a malfunction with the
indicator changes from green to slowly when you start the driver's door, engine hood or
white, and a warning sounds and a vehicle. liftgate (tailgate) open detection
message will appear to inform you • For your safety, cancel the system, the Auto Hold may not
that EPB has been automatically Auto Hold when you drive work properly.
engaged. Before driving off again, downhill or back up the vehi- Contact an authorized HYUNDAI
press foot brake pedal, check the cle or park the vehicle. dealer.
surrounding area near your vehi-
cle and release parking brake
manually with the EPB switch.
• If the AUTO HOLD indicator
lights up yellow, the Auto Hold is
not working properly. Contact an
• While operating Auto Hold, you
may hear mechanical noise.
However, it is normal operating
noise.
5 42
Anti-lock brake system (ABS) (Continued)

The ABS continuously senses the
speed of the wheels. If the wheels
• Rough, gravel or snow-cov- are going to lock, the ABS system
WARNING ered roads. repeatedly modulates the hydraulic
ABS (or ESC) will not prevent • With tire chains installed. brake pressure to the wheels.
accidents due to improper or • On roads where the road sur- When you apply your brakes under
dangerous driving maneuvers. face is pitted or has different conditions which may lock the
Even though vehicle control is surface height. wheels, you may hear a “tik-tik’’
improved during emergency sound from the brakes, or feel a cor-
braking, always maintain a safe The safety features of an ABS
(or ESC) equipped vehicle responding sensation in the brake
distance between you and pedal. This is normal and it means
objects ahead. Vehicle speeds should not be tested by high
speed driving or cornering. your ABS is active.
should always be reduced dur-
ing extreme road conditions. This could endanger the safe- In order to obtain the maximum ben-
ty of yourself or others. efit from your ABS in an emergency
The braking distance for vehi- situation, do not attempt to modulate
cles equipped with an anti-lock your brake pressure and do not try to
braking system or (Electronic pump your brakes. Press your brake
Stability Control System) may be pedal as hard as possible or as hard
longer than for those without it as the situation warrants and allow
in the following road conditions. the ABS to control the force being
During these conditions the delivered to the brakes.
vehicle should be driven at
reduced speeds:
(Continued)
5 43
✽ NOTICE • Even with the anti-lock brake sys-

A click sound may be heard in the tem, your vehicle still requires suf-
engine compartment when the vehi- ficient stopping distance. Always
cle begins to move after the engine is maintain a safe distance from the
started. These conditions are normal vehicle in front of you.
and indicate that the anti-lock brake • Always slow down when cornering.
system is functioning properly. The anti-lock brake system cannot
prevent accidents resulting from
excessive speeds.
• On loose or uneven road surfaces,
operation of the anti-lock brake
system may result in a longer stop- W-78
ping distance than for vehicles
equipped with a conventional CAUTION
brake system.
• If the ABS warning light is on
and stays on, you may have a
problem with the ABS. In this
case, however, your regular
brakes will work normally.
(Continued)
5 44
(Continued) ✽ NOTICE
CAUTION
• The ABS warning light will When you jump start your vehicle
• When you drive on a road hav- because of a drained battery, the
stay on for approximately 3 ing poor traction, such as an
seconds after the ignition engine may not run as smoothly and
icy road, and operate your the ABS warning light may turn on
switch is ON. During that time, brakes continuously, the ABS
the ABS will go through self- at the same time. This happens
will be active and the ABS because of the low battery voltage. It
diagnosis and the light will go warning light may illuminate.
off if everything is normal. If does not mean your ABS is malfunc-
Pull your vehicle over to a safe tioning.
the light stays on, you may place and stop the engine.
have a problem with your • Do not pump your brakes!
ABS. Contact an authorized • Restart the engine. If the ABS • Have the battery recharged before
HYUNDAI dealer as soon as warning light is off, then your driving the vehicle.
possible. ABS system is normal.
Otherwise, you may have a
problem with the ABS. Contact
an authorized HYUNDAI dealer
5 45
Electronic stability control The Electronic Stability Control

(ESC) WARNING (ESC) system is an electronic sys-
Never drive too fast for the road tem designed to help the driver main-
conditions or too quickly when tain vehicle control under adverse
cornering. Electronic stability conditions. It is not a substitute for
control (ESC) will not prevent safe driving practices. Factors includ-
accidents. Excessive speed in ing speed, road conditions and driv-
turns, abrupt maneuvers and er steering input can all affect
hydroplaning on wet surfaces whether ESC will be effective in pre-
can still result in serious acci- venting a loss of control. It is still your
dents. Only a safe and attentive responsibility to drive and corner at
driver can prevent accidents by reasonable speeds and to leave a
avoiding maneuvers that cause sufficient margin of safety.
the vehicle to lose traction. When you apply your brakes under
ODM052046 Even with ESC installed, always conditions which may lock the
The Electronic Stability Control follow all the normal precautions wheels, you may hear a “tik-tik’’
(ESC) system is designed to stabi- for driving - including driving at sound from the brakes, or feel a cor-
lize the vehicle during cornering safe speeds for the conditions. responding sensation in the brake
maneuvers. ESC checks where you pedal. This is normal and it means
are steering and where the vehicle is your ESC is active.
actually going. ESC applies the
brakes at individual wheels and inter-
venes in the engine management
system to stabilize the vehicle.
5 46
✽ NOTICE ESC operation When operating

A click sound may be heard in the ESC ON condition When the ESC is in opera-
engine compartment when the vehi- • When the ignition is turned tion, the ESC indicator light
cle begins to move after the engine is ON, ESC and ESC OFF blinks.
-
started. These conditions are normal indicator lights illuminate for • When the Electronic
and indicate that the Electronic approximately 3 seconds, Stability Control is operat-
Stability Control System is function- then ESC is turned on. ing properly, you can feel a
ing properly. • Press the ESC OFF but- slight pulsation in the vehi-
ton for at least half a sec- cle. This is only the effect
ond after turning the igni- of brake control and indi-
tion ON to turn ESC off. cates nothing unusual.
(ESC OFF indicator will • When moving out of the
illuminate). To turn the mud or driving on a slip-
ESC on, press the ESC pery road, pressing the
OFF button (ESC OFF accelerator pedal may not
indicator light will go off). cause the engine rpm
• When starting the engine, (revolutions per minute) to
you may hear a slight tick- increase.
ing sound. This is the ESC
performing an automatic
system self-check and does
not indicate a problem.
5 47
ESC operation off • ESC off state 2 Indicator light

ESC OFF state To cancel ESC operation,
press the ESC OFF button ■ ESC indicator light
This car has 2 kinds of ESC
off states. (ESC OFF ) for more than 3
seconds. ESC OFF indicator
If the engine stops when light (ESC OFF ) illuminates
ESC is off, ESC remains off. and ESC OFF warning chime
Upon restarting the engine, will sound. At this state, the ■ ESC OFF indicator light
the ESC will automatically engine control function and
turn on again. brake control function do not
operate. It means the car sta-
• ESC off state 1 bility control function does not
To cancel ESC operation, operate any more.
press the ESC OFF button When ignition switch is turned to ON,
(ESC OFF ) shortly (ESC the indicator light illuminates, then
OFF indicator light (ESC goes off if the ESC system is operat-
OFF ) illuminates). At this ing normally.
state, the engine control The ESC indicator light blinks when-
function does not operate. It ever ESC is operating or illuminates
means the traction control when ESC fails to operate.
function does not operate.
Brake control function only The ESC OFF indicator light comes
operates. on when the ESC is turned off with
the button.
5 48
ESC OFF usage ✽ NOTICE

CAUTION When driving • When operating the vehicle on a
Driving with varying tire or • ESC should be turned on for daily dynamometer, ensure that the
wheel sizes may cause the ESC driving whenever possible. ESC is turned off (ESC OFF light
system to malfunction. When illuminated). If the ESC is left on,
replacing tires, make sure they • To turn ESC off while driving, press
the ESC OFF button while driving it may prevent the vehicle speed
are the same size as your origi- from increasing, and result in false
nal tires. on a flat road surface.
diagnosis.
• Turning the ESC off does not affect
ABS or brake system operation.
WARNING
WARNING Never press the ESC OFF but-
The Electronic Stability Control ton while ESC is operating (ESC
system is only a driving aid; use indicator light blinks).
precautions for safe driving by If ESC is turned off while ESC is
slowing down on curved, operating, the vehicle may slip
snowy, or icy roads. Drive slow- out of control.
ly and don’t attempt to acceler-
ate whenever the ESC indicator
light is blinking, or when the
road surface is slippery.
5 49
Vehicle stability management VSM operation VSM operation off

(VSM) (if equipped) When the VSM is in operation, ESC If you press the ESC OFF button to
This system provides further indicator light ( ) blinks. turn off the ESC, the VSM will also
enhancements to vehicle stability When the vehicle stability manage- cancel and the ESC OFF indicator
and steering responses when a vehi- ment is operating properly, you can light ( ) illuminates.
cle is driving on a slippery road or a feel a slight pulsation in the vehicle To turn on the VSM, press the button
vehicle detected changes in coeffi- and/or abnormal steering responses again. The ESC OFF indicator light
cient of friction between right wheels (EPS). This is only the effect of brake goes out.
and left wheels when braking. and EPS control and indicates noth-
ing unusual.
Malfunction indicator
The VSM does not operate when: The VSM system will automatically
be deactivated if a malfunction has
• Driving on bank road such as gra- been detected somewhere in the
dient or incline Electric Power Steering system or
• Driving rearward the VSM system. If a malfunction is
• ESC OFF indicator light ( ) detected, the ESC indicator light will
remains on the instrument cluster illuminate and remain on. If the ESC
• EPS indicator light remains on the indicator light ( ) or EPS warning
instrument cluster light remains on, take your vehicle to
an authorized HYUNDAI dealer and
have the system checked.
5 50
✽ NOTICE Downhill brake control (DBC)

• The VSM is designed to function WARNING (if equipped)
above approximately 9 mph (15 • The Vehicle Stability
km/h) on curves. Management system is not a
• The VSM is designed to function substitute for safe driving
above approximately 18 mph (30 practices but a supplemen-
km/h) when a vehicle is braking on tary function only. It is the
a split-mu road. The split-mu road responsibility of the driver to
is made of surfaces which have dif- always check the speed and
ferent friction forces. the distance to the vehicle
ahead. Always hold the steer-
ing wheel firmly while driving.
• Your vehicle is designed to
operate according to the dri- ONC056016
ver's input through steering,
acceleration, and braking, The Downhill Brake Control (DBC)
even with the VSM opera- assists the driver when descending a
tional. Always follow all the steep hill without the driver depress-
normal precautions for driving the brake pedal. It slows the vehi-
ing at safe speeds for the con- cle to under approximately 6.3 mph
ditions - including driving in (10 km/h) and lets the driver concen-
inclement weather and on a trate on steering the vehicle.
slippery road. DBC defaults to the OFF position
• Driving with varying tire or whenever the ignition is turned on.
wheel sizes may cause the The DBC can be turned on or off by
VSM system to malfunction. pushing the button.
When replacing tires, make
sure they are the same size as
your original tires.
5 51
Indicator
Mode Description
light
Press the DBC button when the vehicle speed is under
Green light 25 mph (40 km/h). The DBC system will turn ON and enter the standby mode.
Standby
illuminated The system maintains the standby mode when vehicle speed is under approximately
38 mph (60km/h).
In the standby mode, DBC will activate automatically under the following conditions:
Green light
Activated • The incline is over a certain degree.
blink
• The brake pedal or accelerator pedal is not depressed.
The DBC will turn OFF under the following conditions:
Green light
OFF • The DBC button is pressed again.
OFF
• The vehicle speed is over approximately 38 mph (60 km/h).
In the activated mode, the DBC will temporarily deactivate under the following conditions:
Temporarily Green light • The hill is not steep enough.
deactivated illuminated • The brake pedal or accelerator pedal is depressed.
When the above conditions are gone, the DBC will automatically activate again.
WARNING
If the DBC yellow indicator light illuminates, the system has overheated or there is an operational problem.
The DBC will not activate. If the DBC yellow indicator light illuminates even though the DBC system has
cooled, have the system checked by an authorized HYUNDAI dealer.
5 52
✽ NOTICE Hill-start assist control (HAC)

• The DBC does not turn ON in the WARNING (if equipped)
P (Park) position. • Unnecessary or unwanted A vehicle has the tendency to roll
• The DBC may not activate if the DBC activation may result in back on a steep hill when the driver
ESC (or ABS) is activated. an accident. begins to accelerate after a stop. The
• Noise or vibration may occur from • On a very steep hill even Hill-start Assist Control (HAC) pre-
the brakes when the DBC is acti- though the brake pedal or vents the vehicle from rolling back by
vated. accelerator pedal is depressed operating the brakes automatically
• The rear stop light comes on when the DBC may not deactivate. for about 1.5 seconds. The brakes
the DBC is activated. are released when the accelerator
• Always turn OFF the DBC on nor- pedal is depressed or after about 1.5
mal roads. The DBC might acti- seconds.
vate from the standby mode dur-
ing abrupt cornering or driving
over speed bumps. WARNING
The HAC is activated only for
about 1.5 seconds, so always
depress the accelerator pedal to
begin accelerating after a stop.
✽ NOTICE
• The HAC does not operate when
the transaxle shift lever is in the P
(Park) or N (Neutral) position.
• The HAC activates even though
the ESC is off but it does not acti-
vate when the ESC has malfunc-
tioned.
5 53
Good braking practices • Driving through water may get the • If a tire goes flat while you are driv-
brakes wet. They can also get wet ing, apply the brakes gently and
when the vehicle is washed. Wet keep the vehicle pointed straight
WARNING brakes can be dangerous! Your ahead while you slow down. When
• Whenever you leave or park vehicle will not stop as quickly if the you are moving slowly enough for it
your vehicle, always set the brakes are wet. Wet brakes may to be safe to do so, pull off the road
parking brake as far as possi- cause the vehicle to pull to one side. and stop in a safe place.
ble and fully engage the vehi- To dry the brakes, apply the brakes • If your vehicle is equipped with an
cle's transaxle into the P (Park) lightly until the braking action returns automatic transaxle, don't let your
position. If the parking brake is to normal, taking care to keep the vehicle creep forward. To avoid
not fully engaged, the vehicle vehicle under control at all times. If creeping forward, keep your foot
may move inadvertently and the braking action does not return to firmly on the brake pedal when the
injure yourself and others. normal, stop as soon as it is safe to vehicle is stopped.
• All vehicles should always do so and call an authorized • Use caution when parking on a hill.
have the parking brake fully HYUNDAI dealer for assistance. Firmly engage the parking brake
engaged when parking to • Don't coast down hills with the and place the shift lever in P (auto-
avoid inadvertent movement vehicle out of gear. This is extreme- matic transaxle). If your vehicle is
of the vehicle which can injure ly hazardous. Keep the vehicle in facing downhill, turn the front
occupants or pedestrians. gear at all times, use the brakes to wheels into the curb to help keep
slow down, then shift to a lower the vehicle from rolling. If your vehi-
• After being parked, check to be gear so that engine braking will cle is facing uphill, turn the front
sure the parking brake is not help you maintain a safe speed. wheels away from the curb to help
engaged and that the parking • Don't "ride" the brake pedal. keep the vehicle from rolling. If
brake indicator light is out before Resting your foot on the brake there is no curb or if it is required
driving away. pedal while driving can be danger- by other conditions to keep the
ous because it can result in the vehicle from rolling, block the
brakes overheating and losing their wheels.
effectiveness. It also increases the
wear of the brake components.
5 54
• Under some conditions your park-

ing brake can freeze in the
engaged position. This is most like-
ly to happen when there is an
accumulation of snow or ice
around or near the rear brakes or if
the brakes are wet. If there is a risk
that the parking brake may freeze,
apply it only temporarily while you
put the gear selector lever in P
(automatic transaxle) and block the
rear wheels so the vehicle cannot
roll. Then release the parking
brake.
• Do not hold the vehicle on an
incline with the accelerator pedal.
This can cause the transaxle to
overheat. Always use the brake
pedal or parking brake.
5 55
AUTOMATIC EMERGENCY BRAKING (AEB) (IF EQUIPPED)

The AEB system is to reduce or to System setting and activation
avoid accident risk. It recognizes the WARNING System setting
distance from the vehicle ahead or Take the following precautions
the pedestrian through the sensors when using the Automatic
(i.e. radar and camera), and, if nec- Emergency Braking (AEB):
essary, warns the driver of accident
• This system is only a supple-
risk with the warning message or the
mental system and it is not
warning alarms.
intended to, nor does it
replace the need for extreme
care and attention of the driv-
er. The sensing range and
objects detectable by the sen-
sors are limited. Pay attention
to the road conditions at all
ODM056093L
times.
• NEVER drive too fast in accor- The driver can activate the AEB by
dance with the road condi- placing the ignition switch to the ON
tions or while cornering. position and by selecting 'User
• Always drive cautiously to Settings', 'Driving Assist', and 'AEB
prevent unexpected and sud- (Automatic Braking System)'. The
den situations from occur- AEB deactivates, when the driver
ring. AEB does not stop the cancels the system setting.
vehicle completely and does
not avoid collisions.
5 56
The warning light illumi- • Even though, you may feel that the
nates on the LCD display, fast alarming speed is still slow,
when you cancel the AEB when the vehicle in front abruptly
system. The driver can stops.
monitor the AEB ON/OFF status on
the LCD display. When the warning
light remains ON with the AEB acti-
vated, have the system checked by
ODM056094L
The driver can set the alarm speed
to Early, Normal, or Late by placing
the ignition switch to the ON position
and by selecting 'User Settings',
'Driving Assist', 'FCW (Forward
Collision Warning)', and 'Early /
Normal / Late'
• When the 'Early' speed is selected,
the warning alarm promptly
sounds upon getting the AEB sig-
nal. When it is too fast, select the
'Normal' speed.
• The 'Late' speed should be select-
ed only in uncrowded traffic at a
lower driving speed.
5 57
The AEB can be successfully AEB warning message and

activated WARNING system control
When the AEB is selected on the • The driver can either activate The AEB produces warning mes-
LCD display, and when the following or deactivate the AEB by sages and warning alarms in accor-
prerequisites are satisfied. selecting 'User Settings', dance with the collision risk levels.
- The ESC (and TCS) is activated. 'Driving Assist' and enabling/ Also, it controls the brakes in accor-
disabling the feature. dance with the collision risk levels.
- Driving speed exceeds approxi-
mately 6mph (10km/h). (The AEB However, for your safety, oper-
is only activated within a certain ate the AEB after parking the
speed range.) vehicle on a safe location.
- The system detects a pedestrian or • The AEB automatically acti-
a vehicle in front, which may collide vates upon placing the igni-
with your vehicle. (The AEB may tion switch to the ON position.
not be activated or may sound a The driver can deactivate the
warning alarm in accordance with AEB by canceling the system
the driving situation or vehicle con- setting on the LCD display.
dition.) • The AEB automatically deacti-
vates upon canceling the
ESC. When the ESC is can-
celed, the AEB cannot be acti-
vated on the LCD display.
5 58
Forward Warning (1st warning) Collision Warning (2nd warning) Emergency braking
(3rd warning)
ODM056082L ODM056083L
The warning message appears on • This warning message appears on ODM056084L
the LCD display with the warning the LCD display with a warning • This warning message appears on
alarms. chime. the LCD display with a warning
• The AEB system provides addi- alarm.
tional braking power to the brakes • The AEB system provides addi-
to preemptively mitigate impact tional braking power to the brakes
damage in a collision. to preemptively mitigate impact
damage in a collision.
- The brake control is maximized
just before a collision.
5 59
Brake operation
• In an urgent situation, the braking CAUTION WARNING
system enters into the ready status The driver should always exer- The AEB operates in accor-
for prompt reaction against the dri- cise caution to vehicle opera- dance with the risk levels
ver’s depressing the brake pedal. tion, even when there is no detected, such as the distance
• The AEB provides additional brak- warning message or warning from the vehicle/passer-by in
ing power for optimum braking per- alarm. front, the speed of the
formance, when the driver depress- vehicle/passer-by in front, and
es the brake pedal. the driver's vehicle operation.
• The braking control is automatically WARNING
deactivated, when the driver sharply The braking control cannot
depresses the brake pedal, or when completely stop the vehicle nor
the driver abruptly operates the avoid all collisions. The driver
steering wheel. should hold the responsibility
• The braking control is automatically to safely drive and control the
canceled, when risk factors disap- vehicle.
pear.
5 60
Sensor to detect the distance Warning message and warning ✽ NOTICE

from the vehicle in front light • Do not install any accessories,
(front radar) such as a license plate bracket or
bumper sticker near the sensor
area. Do not replace the bumper
by yourself. Doing so may
adversely affect the sensing per-
formance.
• Always keep the sensor/bumper
area clean.
• Use only a soft cloth to wash the
vehicle. Also, do not spray highly
pressurized water on the sensor
installed on the bumper.
ODM056096L
• Be careful not to apply unneces-
OAN057116N sary force on the frontal sensor
When the sensor cover or the sensor
This sensor is designe to help main- lens is obscured by foreign sub- area. When the sensor moves out
tain a certain distance from the vehi- stances, such as snow or rain, the of the correct position due to
cle in front. However, a smudged AEB operation may temporarily stop. external force, the system may not
sensor lens with foreign substances, In this case, a warning message will operate correctly even without the
such as snow and rain, adversely appear to notify the driver. This is not warning light or message. In this
affects the sensing performance. It a malfunction with the AEB. To oper- case, have the vehicle inspected by
may even temporarily cancel the ate the AEB again, remove the for- an authorized HYUNDAI dealer.
AEB. Always keep the sensor lens eign substances. • Use only the genuine HYUNDAI
clean. sensor cover. Do not apply paint
on the sensor cover.
5 61
System malfunction (Continued)

WARNING
• The AEB is only a supplemen- • The AEB operates only for the
tal system for the driver's con- vehicle / pedestrian in front,
venience. The driver still while driving forward. It does
maintains responsibility to not operate for any animals or
control the vehicle. Do not vehicles in the opposite direc-
solely depend on the AEB tion.
system. Rather, maintain a • The AEB can not recognize
safe braking distance, and, if the side-profile of vehicles,
necessary, depress the brake such as in the case of cross-
pedal to lower the driving traffic at an intersection, or a
speed. vehicle pulling out of a drive-
ODM046661L
• The AEB may unnecessarily way.
• When the AEB is not working prop- produce warning messages
erly, the AEB warning light ( ) and warning alarms. Due to
will illuminate and the warning sensor limitations, the AEB
message will appear for a few sec- may not produce warning
onds. After the message disap- messages or the warning
pears, the master warning light alarm at all.
( ) will illuminate. In this occurs, • When there is a malfunction
have the vehicle inspected by an with the AEB, the braking con-
authorized HYUNDAI dealer. trol does not operate upon
• The AEB warning message may detecting a collision risk even
appear along with the illumination with other braking systems
of the ESC warning light. normally operating.
(Continued)
5 62
Limitations of the system - The camera cannot fit the full out-
The AEB monitors driving conditions line of a vehicle in front.
through the radar and the camera - The vehicle in front has cargo
sensor. For any vehicle activity extending beyond the back of the
occurring outside the sensor's range vehicle or has a high ground clear-
and field of view, the AEB may not be ance.
able to react. The driver should exer- - The vehicle in front does not turn
cise caution in the following situa- ON the rear lights, does not have
tions, as the AEB operation may be rear lights, has asymmetric rear
limited: lights, or has rear lights out of
angle.
OUM054040L
Recognizing vehicles - The outside brightness changes
suddenly, such as entering/exiting - Driving on a curve
- The radar or the camera is a tunnel. The AEB performance decreases
obscured by foreign substances.
- Vehicle driving is erratic. while driving on a curve. The AEB
- In heavy rain or snow may not recognize vehicles in front
- The radar/camera sensor recogni-
- There is electromagnetic interfer- tion is limited. that are in the same lane. It may
ence. unnecessarily produce the warning
- The object in front deflects the message and the warning alarm for
radar beam due to extreme angles vehicles in a different lane, or it may
or an extremely irregular surface. not produce the warning message
and the warning alarm at all.
- The vehicle in front has a narrow
body. (i.e. motor cycle and bicycle) While driving on a curve, exercise
caution, and, if necessary, depress
- The system cannot identify objects the brake pedal.
in front due to driving into the at
dusk/dawn, bright reflections, or
darkness.
5 63
OUM054041L ODM055052 OUM054043L

While driving on a curve, the AEB - Driving on a slope - Changing lanes
may recognize a vehicle in front the The AEB performance decreases When vehicle in the next lane over
next lane over. Exercise caution, while driving up or down a slope due merges into your lane, the AEB may
and, if necessary, depress the brake to not recognizing vehicles in front in not recognize it until it has complete-
pedal. the same lane until much closer. It ly crossed into your lane.
Or, depress the accelerator pedal to may unnecessarily produce the When the vehicle in the next lane
maintain the driving speed. Always, warning message and the warning changes lanes suddenly, it is more
monitor surrounding traffic for your alarm, or it may not produce the likely not to be recognized. Always
safety. warning message and the warning exercise caution.
alarm at all.
When the AEB suddenly recognizes
the vehicle in front while passing
over a slope, you may experience
sharp deceleration.
Always keep your eyes forward while
driving up or down a slope, and, if
necessary, depress the brake pedal.
5 64
Recognizing pedestrians
- The pedestrian is not completely
within the range of the camera sen-
sor or the pedestrian is not in a typ-
ical upright walking posture.
- The pedestrian moves very fast.
- The pedestrian suddenly crosses
in front.
- The pedestrian wears clothes that
are difficult to distinguish from the
OUM054046L ODM055053 background.
When a vehicle in front moves out of - Recognizing the vehicle - It is too bright or too dark outside.
the lane to avoid a stopped vehicle When the vehicle in front has cargo - The vehicle drives at night or in the
further ahead, the AEB may not extending beyond the back of the darkness.
detect the stopped vehicle ahead. vehicle or has a high ground clear- - There are items that resemble a
Always exercise caution. ance, the AEB may not detect the person's silhouette.
nearest hazard. - The pedestrian is small.
- The pedestrian is using a mobility
assistance device.
- It is difficult to distinguish the
pedestrian from the surroundings.
- The sensor recognition is limited.
- There is a group of pedestrians.
5 65
✽ NOTICE This device complies with Part

WARNING In some instances, the AEB system 15 of the FCC rules.
• Cancel the AEB in the User may be cancelled when subjected to Operation is subject to the following
Settings on the LCD before electromagnetic interference. two conditions:
towing another vehicle. While
towing, the brake application
ful interference, and
may adversely affect your
vehicle safety. 2. This device must accept any inter-
ference received, including inter-
• Exercise caution when there
ference that may cause undesired
is a vehicle in front that has
operation.
cargo extending beyond the
back of the vehicle or has a
high ground clearance.
• The sensor only detects
standing or walking pedestri-
ans, not carts, bicycles,
motorcycles, luggage bags, or
strollers.
• The AEB is not guaranteed to
work in every possible situa-
tion. Never test the AEB
against a person or an object.
It may cause severe injuries
or death.
5 66
CRUISE CONTROL SYSTEM (IF EQUIPPED)
WARNING (Continued)
• If the cruise control is left on, • Pay particular attention to the
(CRUISE indicator light in the driving conditions whenever
instrument cluster is illumi- using the cruise control sys-
nated), the cruise control can tem.
be switched on accidentally. • Be careful when driving
Keep the cruise control sys- downhill using the cruise con-
tem off (CRUISE indicator trol system, which may
light OFF) when the cruise increase the vehicle speed.
control is not in use, to avoid
ODM052024 inadvertently setting a speed.
1.Cruise indicator • Use the cruise control system
2.Cruise set indicator only when driving on open
highways in good weather.
The cruise control system allows you • Do not use the cruise control
to program the vehicle to maintain a when it may not be safe to
constant speed without depressing keep the vehicle at a constant
the accelerator pedal. speed, for instance, driving in
heavy or varying traffic, or on
This system is designed to function slippery (rainy, icy or snow-
above approximately 25 mph (40 covered) or winding roads or
km/h). over 6% up-hill or down-hill
roads.
(Continued)
5 67
✽ NOTICE Cruise control switch To set cruise control speed:

• During normal cruise control
operation, when the SET switch is
activated or reactivated after
applying the brakes, the cruise
control will energize after approx-
imately 3 seconds. This delay is
normal.
• To activate cruise control, depress
the brake pedal at least once after
turning the ignition switch to the
ON position or starting the engine.
This is to check if the brake switch
ODMEDR2016 ODM052025
which is important part to cancel
cruise control is in normal condi- CRUISE : Turns cruise control sys- 1. Press the CRUISE button on the
tion. tem on or off. steering wheel to turn the system
CANCEL: Cancels cruise control on. The CRUISE indicator light in
operation. the instrument cluster will illumi-
nate.
RES+: Resumes or increases cruise
control speed. 2. Accelerate to the desired speed,
which must be more than 25 mph
SET-: Sets or decreases cruise con- (40 km/h).
trol speed.
5 68
To increase cruise control set To decrease the cruising

speed: speed:
ODM052027
3. Move the toggle switch down (to
SET-), and release it at the desired ODM052026 ODM052027
speed. The SET indicator light in
the instrument cluster will illumi- Follow either of these procedures: Follow either of these procedures:
nate. Release the accelerator • Move the toggle switch up (to • Move the toggle switch down (to
pedal at the same time. The RES+) and hold it. Your vehicle will SET-) and hold it. Your vehicle will
desired speed will automatically accelerate. Release the toggle gradually slow down. Release the
be maintained. switch at the speed you want. toggle switch at the speed you
On a steep grade, the vehicle may • Move the toggle switch up (to want to maintain.
slow down or speed up slightly while RES+) and release it immediately. • Move the toggle switch down (to
going uphill or downhill. The cruising speed will increase by SET-) and release it immediately.
1 mph (1 km/h) each time you The cruising speed will decrease
move the toggle switch up (to by 1 mph (1 km/h) each time you
RES+) in this manner. move the toggle switch down (to
SET-) in this manner.
5 69
To temporarily accelerate with To cancel cruise control, do Each of these actions will cancel
the cruise control on: one of the following: cruise control operation (the SET
indicator light in the instrument clus-
If you want to speed up temporarily
ter will go off), but it will not turn the
when the cruise control is on,
system off. If you wish to resume
depress the accelerator pedal.
cruise control operation, move up the
Increased speed will not interfere
toggle switch (to RES+) located on
with cruise control operation or
your steering wheel. You will return to
change the set speed.
your previously preset speed.
To return to the set speed, take your
foot off the accelerator pedal.
ODM052028
• Depress the brake pedal.

• Shift into N (Neutral) with an auto-
matic transaxle.
• Press the CANCEL switch located
on the steering wheel.
• Decrease the vehicle speed lower
than the memory speed by 9 mph
(15 km/h).
• Decrease the vehicle speed to less
than approximately 25 mph (40
km/h).
5 70
To resume cruising speed at ✽ NOTICE To turn cruise control off, do

more than approximately 25 Always check the road conditions one of the following:
mph (40 km/h): when you move the toggle switch up
(to RES+) to resume the speed.
ODM052025
ODM052026
• Press the CRUISE button (the
If any method other than the CRUISE indicator light in the
CRUISE button was used to cancel instrument cluster will go off).
cruising speed and the system is still • Turn the ignition off.
activated, the most recent set speed
Both of these actions cancel cruise
will automatically resume when you
control operation. If you want to
move the toggle switch up (to RES+).
resume cruise control operation,
It will not resume, however, if the repeat the steps provided in “To set
vehicle speed has dropped below cruise control speed” on the previous
approximately 25 mph (40 km/h). page.
5 71
ADVANCED SMART CRUISE CONTROL SYSTEM (IF EQUIPPED)
WARNING WARNING
For your safety, please read the Take the following precautions:
owner's manual before using • If the Smart Cruise Control is
the Smart Cruise Control sys- left on, (CRUISE indicator
tem. light in the instrument cluster
is illuminated) the Smart
Cruise Control can be activat-
WARNING ed unintentionally. Keep the
The Smart Cruise Control Smart Cruise Control System
System is not a substitute for off (CRUISE indicator light
ONC047126N OFF) when the Smart Cruise
safe driving practices, but a
➀ Cruise Indicator convenience function only. It is Control is not in use, to avoid
➁ Set Speed the responsibility of the driver inadvertently setting a speed.
➂ Vehicle-to-Vehicle Distance to always check the speed and • Use the Smart Cruise Control
distance to the vehicle ahead. System only when traveling
on open highways in good
The Smart Cruise Control System weather.
allows you to program the vehicle to
maintain a set speed so long as it is • Do not use the Smart Cruise
not limited by traffic. When traffic is Control when it may not be
encountered the vehicle will slow safe to keep the vehicle at a
down to maintain a set distance constant speed:
behind traffic without depressing the - When driving in heavy traffic
accelerator or brake pedal. or when traffic conditions
make it difficult to drive at a
constant speed
(Continued)
5 72
To Adjust the Sensitivity of • Normal:

(Continued)
Smart Cruise Control Vehicle speed following the front
- When driving on rainy, icy, or vehicle to maintain the set distance
snow-covered roads is normal
- When driving on hilly or • Fast:
windy roads
Vehicle speed following the front
- When driving in windy areas vehicle to maintain the set distance
- When driving in parking lots is faster than normal speed.
- When driving near crash
barriers
- When driving on a sharp
curve
- When driving with limited
OAN057006N
view (possibly due to bad
weather, such as fog, snow, The sensitivity of vehicle speed
rain or sandstorm) when following the front vehicle to
maintain the set distance can be
adjusted. Go to the User Settings
Mode (Driving Assist) and select
SCC (Smart Cruise Control). You
may select one of the three stages
you prefer.
• Slow:
Vehicle speed following the front
vehicle to maintain the set distance
is slower than normal speed.
5 73
To convert to Cruise Control When the system is canceled using Smart Cruise Control speed
mode the CRUISE button or the CRUISE
button is used after the engine is
To set Smart Cruise Control
turned on, the SCC mode will turn speed
on.
WARNING
When using the Cruise Control
mode, you must manually
adjust the distance to other
vehicles by depressing the
accelerator or brake pedal. The
system does not automatically
ODM056066L/ODM056097L adjust the distance to vehicles
in front of you. ODM052025
The driver may choose to only use
the Cruise Control mode (speed con- 1. Push the CRUISE button on the
trol function) by doing as follows: steering wheel to turn the system
1.Turn the Smart Cruise Control on. The CRUISE indicator will illu-
System on (the cruise indicator minate.
light will be on but the system will 2. Accelerate to the desired speed.
not be activated). The Smart Cruise Control speed
2.Push and hold the Vehicle-to- can be set as follows:
Vehicle Distance button for more • About 20 mph (30 km/h)~110
than 2 seconds. mph (180 km/h): when there is
3.Choose between "Smart Cruise no vehicle in front
Control (SCC) mode" and "Cruise • 0 mph (0 km/h)~110 mph (180
Control (CC) mode". km/h): when there is a vehicle in
front
5 74
To increase Smart Cruise Control To decrease the Smart Cruise

set speed Control set speed
ODM052027
3. Push the toggle switch down

(SET-), and release it at the ODM052026 ODM052027
desired speed.
The Set Speed and Vehicle-to- Follow either of these procedures: Follow either of these procedures:
Vehicle Distance on the LCD dis- • Push the toggle switch up (RES+), • Push the toggle switch down (SET-),
play will illuminate. and hold it. Your vehicle set speed and hold it. Your vehicle set speed
4. Release the accelerator pedal. will increase by 5 mph (10 km/h). will decrease by 5 mph (10 km/h).
The desired speed will automati- Release the toggle switch at the Release the toggle switch at the
cally be maintained. speed you want. speed you want.
If there is a vehicle in front of you, the • Push the toggle switch up (RES+), • Push the toggle switch down (SET-),
speed may decrease to maintain the and release it immediately. The and release it immediately. The
distance to the vehicle ahead. cruising speed will increase by 1 cruising speed will decrease by 1
mph (1 km/h) each time you move mph (1 km/h) each time you move
On a steep grade, the vehicle may the toggle switch up in this manner. the toggle switch down in this man-
slow down or speed up slightly while ner.
going uphill or downhill. • You can set the speed up to 110
mph (180 km/h). • You can set the speed to 20 mph
(30 km/h).
5 75
To temporarily accelerate with the Smart Cruise Control will be tem- The smart cruise control system will
Smart Cruise Control on porarily canceled when: be canceled automatically when :
If you want to speed up temporarily • The driver's door is opened.
when the Smart Cruise Control is on, • The shift lever is shifted to N
depress the accelerator pedal. (Neutral), R (Reverse) or P (Park).
Increased speed will not interfere • The EPB (Electronic Parking
with Smart Cruise Control operation Brake) is applied.
or change the set speed.
• The vehicle speed is over 120 mph
To return to the set speed, take your (190 km/h).
foot off the accelerator.
• The vehicle stops on a steep
If you push the toggle switch down incline.
(SET-) at increased speed, the cruis-
ing speed will be set again. • The ESC, TCS or ABS is operat-
ODM052028
ing.
• The ESC or TCS is turned off.
✽ NOTICE • The brake pedal is depressed. • The AEB is activated.
Be careful when accelerating tem- • CANCEL button located on the
porarily, because the speed is not • The sensor or the cover is dirty or
steering wheel is depressed. blocked with foreign matter.
controlled automatically at this
• The CANCEL button is depressed • When the vehicle is stopped for
time even if there is a vehicle in front
when the vehicle is at a standstill. more than 5 minutes.
of you.
• The vehicle stops and goes repeat-
The Advanced Smart Cruise Control edly for a long period of time.
turns off temporarily when the indica- • The driver starts driving by pushing
tor on the LCD display turns off. the toggle switch up (RES +) or
The CRUISE indicator is illuminated down (SET -), approximately 3
continuously. seconds after the vehicle is
stopped by the Smart Cruise
Control System with no other vehi-
cle ahead.
5 76
• The driver starts driving by pushing To resume Smart Cruise Control

a toggle switch up (RES +) or down set speed
(SET -), after stopping the vehicle
with a vehicle stopped far away in
front.
• The accelerator pedal is continu-
ously depressed for more than one
minute.
Each of these actions will cancel the
Smart Cruise Control operation.
(operation an the Set Speed and ODM056058L
Vehicle-to-Vehicle Distance on the
LCD display will go off.) If the system is cancelled, the warn-
ing chime will sound and a message ODM052026
In a condition where the Smart will appear for a few seconds.
Cruise Control is cancelled automat- If any method other than the
ically, the Smart Cruise Control will You must adjust the vehicle speed by
depressing the accelerator or brake CRUISE toggle switch was used to
not resume even when the RES+ or cancel cruising speed and the sys-
SET- toggle switch is pushed. Also, pedal according to the road condition
ahead and driving condition. tem is still activated, the cruising
the EPB will be applied when the speed will automatically resume
vehicle is stopped. Always check the road conditions.
Do not rely on the warning chime. when you push the toggle switch up
(RES+) or down (SET-).
✽ NOTICE If you push the toggle switch up
If the Smart Cruise Control is can- (RES+), the speed will resume to the
celled by other than the reasons recently set speed. However, if vehi-
mentioned, have the system checked cle speed has dropped below
by an authorized HYUNDAI dealer. approximately 20 mph (30 km/h), it
will resume when there is a vehicle in
front of your vehicle.
5 77
✽ NOTICE To turn Cruise Control off Smart Cruise Control Vehicle-

Always check the road conditions to-Vehicle Distance
when you push the toggle switch up To set Vehicle-to-Vehicle Distance
(RES+) to resume speed.
ODM052025
Push the CRUISE button (the

CRUISE indicator light will go off). ODM056118L
When the Smart Cruise Control

System is ON, you can set and main-
tain the distance from the vehicle
ahead of you without pressing the
accelerator or brake pedal.
5 78
Each time the button is pressed, the When the lane ahead is clear: When there is a vehicle ahead of
vehicle to vehicle distance changes you in your lane:
as follows:
Distance 4 Distance 3 Distance 2
Distance 1
For example, if you drive at 56 mph

(90 km/h), the distance maintain as
follows:
Distance 4 Distance 3
Distance 4 - approximately 172 feet ONC047127N

(52.5 m) The vehicle speed will maintain the
Distance 3 - approximately 130 feet set speed.
(40 m)
Distance 2 - approximately 106 feet
(32.5 m)
Distance 1 - approximately 82 feet
(25 m)
Distance 2 Distance 1
ONC047126N/ONC047130N/
✽ NOTICE ONC047129N/ONC047128N
Distance 4 is always set when the
system is used for the first time after • Your vehicle speed will slow down
starting the engine. or speed up to maintain the select-
ed distance (A vehicle will appear
in front of your vehicle in the LCD
display only when there is an actu-
al vehicle in front of you.).
5 79
• If the vehicle ahead speeds up,

your vehicle will travel at a steady WARNING
cruising speed after accelerating to
the set speed.
ODM056111
ODM056064L
When using the Smart Cruise

Control System: CAUTION
• The warning chime sounds If the vehicle ahead (vehicle
and the Vehicle-to Vehicle
Distance indicator blinks if speed less than 20 mph
the vehicle is unable to main- (30km/h)) moves to the next
tain the selected distance lane, the warning chime will
from the vehicle ahead. sound and a message will
appear. Adjust your vehicle
• If the warning chime sounds,
depress the accelerator or speed for vehicles or objects
brake pedal to actively adjust that can suddenly appear in
the vehicle speed, and the dis- front of you by depressing the
tance to the vehicle ahead. brake pedal.
• Even if the warning chime is Always pay attention to the road
not activated, always pay condition ahead.
attention to the driving condi-
tions to prevent dangerous
situations from occurring.
5 80
In traffic situation • If you push the advanced smart Sensor to detect distance to
cruise control toggle switch (RES+ the vehicle ahead
or SET-) while Auto Hold and
advanced smart cruise control is
operating (The green AUTO HOLD
indicator), Auto Hold will be
released regardless of accelerator
pedal operation and the vehicle will
start to move.
ODM056065L/OAN056065N
ODM056065L
• In traffic, your vehicle will stop if the OAN057116N

vehicle ahead of you stops. Also, if The Smart Cruise Control uses a
the vehicle ahead of you starts sensor to detect distance to the vehi-
moving, your vehicle will start as cle ahead.
well. However, if the vehicle stops
If the sensor is covered with dirt or
for more than 3 seconds, you must
other foreign matter, the vehicle to
depress the accelerator pedal or
vehicle distance control may not
push up the toggle switch (RES+)
operate correctly.
to start driving.
Always keep the area in front of the
sensor clean.
5 81
Sensor warning message SCC (Smart Cruise Control)

malfunction message CAUTION
• Do not install accessories
around the sensor and do not
replace the bumper by your-
self. It may interfere with the
sensor performance.
• Always keep the sensor and
bumper clean.
• To prevent sensor cover dam-
age from occurring, wash the
car with a clean soft cloth.
ODM056095L • Do not paint the sensor cover.
If the sensor or cover is dirty or ODM046662L • Do not damage the sensor or
obscured with foreign material such sensor area by a strong
The message will appear when the impact. If the sensor moves
as snow, this message will appear. vehicle to vehicle distance control
In this case, the system may not slightly off position, the Smart
system is not functioning normally. Cruise Control System will not
function temporarily, but it does not Take your vehicle to an authorized
indicate a malfunction of the Smart operate correctly. If this
HYUNDAI dealer and have the sys- occurs, have the system
Cruise Control System. tem checked. checked by an authorized
Clean the sensor or cover by using a HYUNDAI dealer.
clean soft cloth.
• Use only a genuine HYUNDAI
sensor cover for your vehicle.
5 82
Limitations of the system On curves

The Smart Cruise Control System
may have limits to its ability to detect
distance to the vehicle ahead due to
road and traffic conditions.
OUM054041L
OUM054040L Your vehicle speed can be reduced

due to a vehicle in the adjacent lane.
• The Smart Cruise Control System
may not detect a moving vehicle in Apply the accelerator pedal and
your lane, and then your vehicle select the appropriate set speed.
could accelerate to the original set Check to be sure that the road con-
speed. Also, the vehicle speed will ditions permit safe operation of the
decrease when the vehicle ahead Smart Cruise Control.
is recognized suddenly.
• Select the appropriate set speed
on curves and apply the brakes or
accelerator pedal if necessary.
5 83
On inclines Lane changing Vehicle recognition
ODM055052 OUM054043L OUM054045L

• During uphill or downhill driving, • A vehicle which moves into your Some vehicles in your lane cannot
the Smart Cruise Control System lane from an adjacent lane cannot be recognized by the sensor such
may not detect a moving vehicle in be recognized by the sensor until it as:
your lane, and cause your vehicle is in the sensor's detection range. - Narrow vehicles such as motorcy-
to accelerate to the original set • The sensor may not detect imme- cles or bicycles
speed. Also, the vehicle speed will diately when a vehicle cuts in sud-
rapidly decrease when the vehicle - Vehicles offset to one side
denly. Always pay attention to the
ahead is recognized suddenly. traffic, road and driving conditions. - Slow-moving vehicles or sudden-
• Select the appropriate set speed decelerating vehicles
• If a slower vehicle moves into your
on inclines and apply the brake or lane, your speed may decrease to - Stopped vehicles
accelerator pedal if necessary. maintain the distance to the vehicle - Vehicles with small rear profile such
ahead. as trailers with no loads
• If a faster vehicle which moves into
your lane, your vehicle will acceler-
ate to the set speed.
5 84
A vehicle ahead cannot be recog-

nized correctly by the sensor if any of
following occurs:
- When the vehicle is pointing
upwards due to overloading in the
trunk
- While the steering wheel is operat-
ing
- When driving to one side of the lane
- When driving on narrow lanes or on
curves OUM054044L OUM054046L
Apply the brake or accelerator pedal • Your vehicle may accelerate when • When vehicles are at a standstill
if necessary. a vehicle ahead of you disappears. and the vehicle in front of you
• When you are warned that the changes to the next lane, be care-
vehicle ahead of you is not detect- ful when your vehicle starts to
ed, drive with caution. move because it may not recog-
nize the stopped vehicle in front of
you.
5 85
WARNING
When using the Smart Cruise
Control take the following pre-
cautions:
• If an emergency stop is nec-
essary, you must apply the
brakes. The vehicle cannot be
stopped at every emergency
situation by using the Smart
Cruise Control System.
OUM054047L ODM055053
• Keep a safe distance accord-
• Always look out for pedestrians • Always be cautious for vehicles ing to road conditions and
when your vehicle is maintaining a with higher height or vehicles car- vehicle speed. If the vehicle to
distance with the vehicle ahead. rying loads that sticks out from the vehicle distance is too close
back of the vehicle. during a high-speed driving, a
serious collision may result.
• Always maintain sufficient
braking distance and deceler-
ate your vehicle by applying
the brakes if necessary.
(Continued)
5 86
This device complies with Part 15

(Continued) (Continued) of the FCC rules.
• The Smart Cruise Control • The Smart Cruise Control Operation is subject to the following
System cannot recognize a System may not recognize three conditions:
stopped vehicle, pedestrians complex driving situations so
or an oncoming vehicle. always pay attention to driv- 1. This device may not cause harm-
Always look ahead cautiously ing conditions and control ful interference, and
to prevent unexpected and your vehicle speed. 2. This device must accept any inter-
sudden situations from occur- ference received, including inter-
ring. ference that may cause undesired
• Vehicles moving in front of CAUTION operation.
you with a frequent lane The Smart Cruise Control 3. Changes or modifications not
change may cause a delay in System may not operate tem- expressly approved by the party
the system's reaction or may porarily due to: responsible for compliance could
cause the system to react to a void the user’s authority to operate
vehicle actually in an adjacent • Electrical interference the device.
lane. Always drive cautiously • Modifying the suspension
to prevent unexpected and • Differences of tire abrasion or
sudden situations from occur- tire pressure
ring.
• Installing different type of
• Always be aware of the select- tires
ed speed and vehicle to vehi-
cle distance.
(Continued)
5 87
BLIND SPOT DETECTION SYSTEM (BSD) (IF EQUIPPED)

(1) BSD (Blind Spot Detection)
The blind spot detection range WARNING
varies relative to vehicle speed. • Always check the road condi-
Blind spot area Note that if your vehicle is travel- tion while driving for unex-
ing much faster than the vehicles pected situations even
around you, the warning will not though the Blind Spot
occur. Detection System (BSD) is
(2) LCA (Lane Change Assist) operating.
Closing at high speed
The Lane Change Assist feature • The Blind Spot Detection
will alert you when a vehicle is System (BSD) is a supplemen-
approaching in an adjacent lane tal system to assist you. Do
at a high rate of speed. If the driv- not entirely rely on the sys-
er activates the turn signal when tem. Always pay attention,
the system detects an oncoming while driving, for your safety.
vehicle, the system sounds an • The Blind Spot Detection
audible alert. System (BSD) is not a substi-
(3) RCTA (Rear Cross Traffic Alert) tute for proper and safe driv-
ODM056122L ing. Always drive safely and
The Rear Cross Traffic Alert fea- use caution when changing
The Blind Spot Detection System ture monitors approaching cross
(BSD) uses radar sensors in the rear lanes or backing the vehicle
traffic from the left and right side up. The Blind Spot Detection
bumper to monitor and warn the driv- of the vehicle when your vehicle is
er of an approaching vehicle in the System (BSD) may not detect
moving in reverse. The feature will every object alongside the
driver's blind spot area. operate when the vehicle is mov- vehicle.
The system monitors the rear area of ing in reverse below about 6 mph
the vehicle and provides information (10 km/h). If oncoming cross traf-
to the driver with an audible alert and fic is detected, a warning chime
an indicator on the outside side view will sound.
mirrors.
5 88
BSD (Blind Spot Detection) / To cancel: Warning type

LCA (Lane Change Assist) Press the BSD(LCA) switch again. The system will activate when:
(if equipped) The indicator on the switch will go off. 1. The system is on.
Operating conditions When the system is not used, turn the 2. The vehicle speed is above about
system off by turning off the switch. 20 mph (30 km/h).
3. Vehicles behind are detected.
✽ NOTICE
• If the engine is turned off then on
again, the BSD system returns to
the previous state.
• When the system is turned on, the
warning light will illuminate for 3
seconds on the side view mirror.
ODM056125
To operate:
Press the BSD(LCA) switch with the
ignition switch in the ON position.
The indicator illuminates on the
switch. If vehicle speed exceeds
20 mph (30 km/h) the system will
activate.
5 89
■ Left side ■ Left side - The second stage alarm may be

deactivated.
• To activate the alarm:
Go to the User Settings Mode →
Sound and select "BSD" on the
LCD display.
■ Right side ■ Right side
• To deactivate the alarm:
Go to the User Settings Mode →
Sound and deselect "BSD" on the
LCD display.
ODM056130 ONC055010
First stage alert Second stage alert ✽ NOTICE
If a vehicle is detected within the The second stage alarm will activate The alarm function helps alert the
boundary of the system, a warning when: driver. Deactivate this function only
light will illuminate on the side view 1. The first stage alert is on. when it is necessary
mirror.
2. The turn signal light is on to change
If the detected vehicle is not in warn- a lane.
ing range, the warning will turn off
according to driving conditions. When the second stage alert is acti-
vated, a warning light will blink on the
side view mirror and an alarm will
sound.
If you turn off the turn signal light, the
second stage alert will be deactivated.
5 90
Detecting sensor Warning message When the message is displayed due

to a foreign substance, remove the
foreign substance on the rear
bumper. After the foreign substance
is removed, if you drive for approxi-
mately 10 minutes, the system will
work normally.
If the system does not operate nor-
mally after removing the substance
or is not in a situation mentioned
above, take your vehicle to an
authorized HYUNDAI dealer and
ODM056117L ODM056069L
have the system checked.
The sensors are located inside the • This warning message may appear
rear bumper. when :
Always keep the rear bumper clean - There are foreign substances on
for proper operation of the system. the rear bumper.
- A trailer or carrier is installed.
- Driving in rural areas with little
traffic or open terrains such as
wide expanse of desert.
- There is heavy snow or rain.
The light on the switch and the system
will turn off automatically.
5 91
■ Type A ■ Type B RCTA (Rear Cross Traffic Alert) ✽ NOTICE

When your vehicle starts to move The RCTA (Rear Cross Traffic
backwards after parking, the sensor Alert) detecting range is about 1 ft ~
detects any approaching vehicles 65 ft (0.5 m ~ 20 m). A vehicle will be
from the left and right sides and detected if the vehicle speed is 2.5
warns the driver. mph ~ 22 mph (4 km/h ~ 36 km/h)
within the detecting range. However,
the detecting range may change
Operating conditions under different conditions. Always
To operate: pay attention to the surroundings.
Go to the User Settings mode
ODM056070L/ODM056071L (Driving Assist) and select Rear
If there is a problem with the BSD Cross Traffic Alert on the LCD display
system, a warning message will (For more details, refer to "LCD
appear and the light on the switch Display" in chapter 4.). The system
will turn off. The system will turn off will turn on and standby to activate.
automatically. You have your vehicle The system will activate when vehicle
inspected by an authorized speed is below 7 mph (10 km/h) with
HYUNDAI dealer. the shift lever in R (Reverse).
5 92
Warning type ✽ NOTICE

■ Left ■ Right • If the detected vehicle is out of the WARNING
sensing range of your vehicle, • The warning light on the side
move the vehicle away from the view mirror will illuminate
detected object slowly; the warn- whenever a vehicle is detect-
ing will be cancelled. ed at the rear side by the sys-
• The system may not operate prop- tem.
erly due to other factors or cir- To avoid accidents, do not
cumstances. Always pay attention focus only on the warning
to your surrounding. light and neglect to see the
• If your vehicle's left or right side surrounding of the vehicle.
bumper is blinded by barrier or • Drive safely even though the
vehicles, the system sensing ability vehicle is equipped with a
ODM056075L/ODM056073L
may be reduced. Blind Spot Detection System
If the vehicle detected by the sensors
(BSD) and Rear Cross Traffic
approaches your vehicle, the warn-
Alert (RCTA). Do not solely
ing chime will sound, the warning
rely on the system but check
light on the side view mirror will blink
your surrounding before
and a message will appear on the
changing lanes or backing the
LCD display.
vehicle up.
The system may not alert the
driver in some conditions so
always check the surround-
ings while driving.
(Continued)
5 93
Non-operating condition DRIVER'S ATTENTION

(Continued)
Side view mirror may not alert the The driver must be cautious in the
• The Blind Spot Detection
driver when: below situations, because the system
System (BSD) and Rear Cross
Traffic Alert (RCTA) are not a - The side view mirror housing is may not detect other vehicles or
substitute for proper and safe damaged or covered with debris. objects in certain circumstances.
driving practices. Always - The window is covered with debris.
drive safely and use caution - The vehicle drives on a curved
- The windows are severely tinted. road or through a tollgate.
when changing lanes or back-
ing the vehicles up. The Blind - The sensor is polluted with rain,
Spot Detection System (BSD) snow, mud, etc.
may not detect every object - The rear bumper, in which the sen-
alongside the vehicle. sor is located, is covered or blocked
with a foreign matter such as a
sticker, a bumper guard, a bicycle
✽ NOTICE stand, etc.
- The rear bumper is damaged, or
• The system may not properly the sensor is out of the original
operate, when the bumper is default position.
replaced, or when a repair work is - The vehicle height gets lower or
done near the sensor. higher due to heavy loading in a
• The sensing range differs accord- trunk, abnormal tire pressure, etc.
ing to the roads width. When the - The vehicle drives in a bad weath-
road is narrow, the system may er such as heavy rain or snow.
detect other vehicles in the next (Continued)
lane.
• The system may turn off due to
strong electromagnetic waves.
5 94
(Continued) (Continued) This device complies with Part

- There is a fixed object near the - When the sensors are blocked by 15 of the FCC rules.
vehicle, such as a guardrail. other vehicles, walls or parking-lot Operation is subject to the following
- A big vehicle is near such as a bus pillars. two conditions:
or truck. - When the detected vehicle also
- A motorcycle or bicycle is near. moves back, as your vehicle drives 1. This device may not cause harm-
- A flat trailer is near. back. ful interference, and
- If the vehicle has started at the - If there are small things like shop- 2. This device must accept any inter-
same time as the vehicle next to ping cart and baby carriage. ference received, including inter-
you and has accelerated. - If there is low height vehicle like ference that may cause undesired
- When the other vehicle passes at a sport vehicle. operation.
very fast speed. - When other vehicles are close to
- While changing lanes. your vehicle.
- While going down or up a steep - When the vehicle in the next lane
road where the height of the lane is moves two lanes away from you
different. OR when the vehicle two lanes
- When the other vehicle approaches away moves to the next lane from
very close. you.
- When a trailer or carrier is
installed.
- When the temperature of the rear
bumper is high.
(Continued)
5 95
LANE DEPARTURE WARNING SYSTEM (LDWS) (IF EQUIPPED)
WARNING (Continued)
• The LDWS does not make the • Do not let water or any kind of
vehicle change lanes. It is the liquid come in contact with
driver's responsibility to the LDWS sensor.
always check the road condi- • Do not remove any LDWS
tions. parts and do not expose the
• Do not turn the steering wheel sensor to a strong impact.
suddenly when the LDWS • Do not put objects that reflect
warns you that your vehicle is light on the dash board.
ODM056029
leaving the lane. • Always monitor road condi-
• If the sensor cannot detect the tions, because you may not
lane or if the vehicle speed hear the warning chime due to
does not exceed 35 mph (60 audio volume level and or
km/h), the LDWS won't warn external conditions.
you even though vehicle
leaves the lane.
• If your vehicle has window tint
or other types of coating or an
accessory on the front wind-
ODM052048 shield, the LDWS may not
This system detects the lane with a work properly.
sensor at the front windshield and (Continued)
warns you when your vehicle leaves
the lane.
5 96
■ When the sensor detects the lane line ■ Left lane departure warning
ODM056092L ODM056079L
■ When the sensor doesn’t detect the lane line ■ Right lane departure warning
ODM046747
To operate the LDWS, press the but-
ton with the engine start/stop button
in the ON position. The indicator illu-
minates on the cluster. To cancel the
LDWS, press the button again.
The color of symbol will change

depend on the condition of LDWS.
ODM056078L ODM056077L
- White color : Indicates the sensor
does not detect the If your vehicle leaves the lane when 1. Visual warning
lane line. the LDWS is operating and vehicle If you leave the lane, the side of lane
speed exceeds 35 mph (60 km/h), you leave blinks yellow on the LCD
- Green color : Indicates the sensor the warning operates as follows:
detects the lane line. display with 0.8 seconds of interval.
2. Auditory warning
If you leave the lane, the warning
sound operates with 0.8 seconds of
interval.
5 97
Warning indicator The LDWS does not operate The LDWS may not warn you
when: even if the vehicle leaves the
• The driver uses the turn signal to lane, or may warn you even if
change lane. the vehicle does not leave the
lane when;
When the hazard warning lights
are enabled, the LDWS operates • The lane is not visible to the sys-
normally. tem due to snow, rain, stain, a pud-
• Operating the wiper switch with HI dle or other environmental factors.
mode due to heavy rain. • The brightness of the outside envi-
• Driving on the lane line. ronment changes suddenly such
as entering or exiting a tunnel.
• Not turning on the headlights even
ODM046750L ✽ NOTICE at night or in at tunnel, or ambient
If the LDWS FAIL warning indicator To change lane, operate the turn sig- light is weak.
(yellow) comes on, the LDWS is not nal switch then change the lane. • The system cannot distinguish the
working properly. If this occurs, have color of the lane from the road.
the system checked by an authorized • Driving on a steep grade or a
HYUNDAI dealer. curve.
• A street light, sunlight or oncoming
vehicle light reflects water on the
road.
• The lens or windshield is stained
with foreign matter.
• The sensor cannot detect the lane
because of fog, heavy rain or
heavy snow.
5 98
• The housing of the inside rear view This device complies with Part
mirror temperature is high due to a 15 of the FCC rules.
direct sunlight. Operation is subject to the following
• The lane is very wide or narrow. two conditions:
• The lane line is damaged or indis- 1. This device may not cause harm-
tinct. ful interference, and
• A shadow is cast on the lane line 2. This device must accept any inter-
by a median strip. ference received, including inter-
• There is a mark similar to a lane ference that may cause undesired
line. operation.
• There is a boundary structure.
• The distance from vehicle ahead is
very short or the vehicle ahead
covers the lane line.
• The vehicle shakes heavily due to
rough roads.
• The lane number increases or
decreases or the lane lines cross.
• Objects on the dashboard interfere
with system operations.
• Driving with the sun in front of the
vehicle.
• Driving in areas under construc-
tion.
• The lane line consist of more than
two lines either side (left/right).
5 99
ACTIVE ECO SYSTEM (IF EQUIPPED)

Active ECO operation • When the Active ECO button is Limitation of Active ECO oper-
pressed the ECO indicator (green) ation:
will illuminate to show that the
If the following conditions occur while
Active ECO is operating.
Active ECO is operating, the system
• When the Active ECO is activated, operation is limited even though there
it will remain on until the Active is no change in the ECO indicator.
ECO button is pressed again.
• When the coolant temperature is
Active ECO does not turn off when
low: The system will be limited until
the engine is restarted. To turn off
engine performance becomes nor-
Active ECO, press the Active ECO
mal.
button again.
• When driving up a hill: The system
• If Active ECO is turned off, the sys-
will be limited to gain power when
tem will return to normal mode.
ONC057020L driving uphill because the engine
Active ECO helps improve fuel effi- torque is restricted.
ciency by controlling certain engine When Active ECO is activated : • When using sports mode: The sys-
and transaxle system operating • The engine noise may get louder. tem will be limited according to the
parameters. Fuel efficiency depends shift location.
• The vehicle speed may slightly be
on the driver's driving habit and road • When the accelerator pedal is
reduced.
condition. deeply depressed for a few sec-
• The air conditioner performance onds: The system will be limited,
may be affected. judging that the driver wants to
speed up.
5 100
ECONOMICAL OPERATION
Your vehicle's fuel economy depends • Don't "ride" the brake pedal. This • Keep your vehicle in good condi-
mainly on your style of driving, where can increase fuel consumption and tion. For better fuel economy and
you drive and when you drive. also increase wear on these com- reduced maintenance costs, main-
Each of these factors affects how ponents. In addition, driving with tain your vehicle in accordance
many miles (kilometers) you can get your foot resting on the brake pedal with the maintenance schedule in
from a gallon (liter) of fuel. To oper- may cause the brakes to overheat, Section 7. If you drive your vehicle
ate your vehicle as economically as which reduces their effectiveness in severe conditions, more frequent
possible, use the following driving and may lead to more serious con- maintenance is required (see
suggestions to help save money in sequences. Section 7 for details).
both fuel and repairs: • Take care of your tires. Keep them • Keep your vehicle clean. For maxi-
• Drive smoothly. Accelerate at a inflated to the recommended pres- mum service, your vehicle should
moderate rate. Don't make "jack- sure. Incorrect inflation, either too be kept clean and free of corrosive
rabbit" starts or full-throttle shifts much or too little, results in unnec- materials. It is especially important
and maintain a steady cruising essary tire wear. Check the tire that mud, dirt, ice, etc. not be
speed. Don't race between stop- pressures at least once a month. allowed to accumulate on the
lights. Try to adjust your speed to • Be sure that the wheels are underside of the vehicle. This extra
the traffic so you don't have to aligned correctly. Improper align- weight can result in increased fuel
change speeds unnecessarily. ment can result from hitting curbs consumption and also contribute to
Avoid heavy traffic whenever possi- or driving too fast over irregular corrosion.
ble. Always maintain a safe dis- surfaces. Poor alignment causes • Travel lightly. Don't carry unneces-
tance from other vehicles so you faster tire wear and may also result sary weight in your vehicle. Weight
can avoid unnecessary braking. in other problems as well as reduces fuel economy.
This also reduces brake wear. greater fuel consumption. • Don't let the engine idle longer
• Drive at a moderate speed. The than necessary. If you are waiting
faster you drive, the more fuel your (and not in traffic), turn off your
vehicle uses. Driving at a moderate engine and restart only when
speed, especially on the highway, you're ready to go.
is one of the most effective ways to
reduce fuel consumption.
5 101
• Remember, your vehicle does not Keeping a vehicle in good operating

require extended warm-up. After condition is important both for econ-
the engine has started, allow the omy and safety. Therefore, have an
engine to run for 10 to 20 seconds authorized HYUNDAI dealer perform
prior to placing the vehicle in gear. scheduled inspections and mainte-
In very cold weather, however, give nance.
your engine a slightly longer warm-
up period.
WARNING - Engine off
• Don't "lug" or "over-rev" the engine. during
Lugging is driving too slowly in too motion
high a gear resulting engine buck-
ing. If this happens, shift to a lower Never turn the engine off to
gear. Over-revving is racing the coast down hills or anytime the
engine beyond its safe limit. This vehicle is in motion. The power
can be avoided by shifting at the steering and power brakes will
recommended speeds. not function properly without the
engine running. Instead, keep
• Use your air conditioning sparingly. the engine on and downshift to
The air conditioning system is an appropriate gear for engine
operated by engine power so your braking effect. In addition, turn-
fuel economy is reduced when you ing off the ignition while driving
use it. could engage the steering wheel
• Open windows at high speeds can lock resulting in loss of vehicle
reduce fuel economy. steering which could cause
• Fuel economy is less in crosswinds serious injury or death.
and headwinds. To help offset
some of this loss, slow down when
driving in these conditions.
5 102
SPECIAL DRIVING CONDITIONS

Hazardous driving conditions • If stalled in snow, mud, or sand, use Reducing the risk of a rollover
When hazardous driving conditions second gear. Accelerate slowly to This multi-purpose passenger vehicle
are encountered such as water, avoid spinning the drive wheels. is defined as a Sports Utility Vehicle
snow, ice, mud, sand, or similar haz- • Use sand, rock salt, tire chains, or (SUV). SUV’s have higher ground
ards, follow these suggestions: other non-slip material under the clearance and a narrower track to
• Drive cautiously and allow extra drive wheels to provide traction make them capable of performing in a
distance for braking. when stalled in ice, snow, or mud. wide variety of off-road applications.
Specific design characteristics give
• Avoid sudden braking or steering. them a higher center of gravity than
• When braking with non-ABS WARNING - Downshifting ordinary vehicles. An advantage of the
brakes pump the brake pedal with Downshifting with an automatic higher ground clearance is a better
a light up-and-down motion until transaxle, while driving on slip- view of the road, which allows you to
the vehicle is stopped. pery surfaces can cause an anticipate problems. They are not
accident. The sudden change in designed for cornering at the same
tire speed could cause the tires speeds as conventional passenger
WARNING - ABS to skid. Be careful when down- vehicles, any more than low-slung
Do not pump the brake pedal on shifting on slippery surfaces. sports vehicles are designed to per-
a vehicle equipped with ABS. form satisfactorily in off-road condi-
tions. Due to this risk, driver and pas-
sengers are strongly recommended to
buckle their seat belts. In a rollover
crash, an unbelted person is more like-
ly to die than a person wearing a seat
belt. There are steps that a driver can
make to reduce the risk of a rollover.
If at all possible, avoid sharp turns or
abrupt maneuvers, do not load your
roof rack with heavy cargo, and
never modify your vehicle in any way.
5 103
Rocking the vehicle

WARNING - Rollover WARNING If it is necessary to rock the vehicle to
As with other Sports Utility Your vehicle is equipped with free it from snow, sand, or mud, first
Vehicle (SUV), failure to operate tires designed to provide safe turn the steering wheel right and left
this vehicle correctly may result ride and handling capability. Do to clear the area around your front
in loss of control, an accident or not use a size and type of tire wheels. Then, shift back and forth
vehicle rollover. and wheel that is different from between R (Reverse) and any for-
• Utility vehicles have a signifi- the one that was originally ward gear in vehicles equipped with
cantly higher rollover rate installed on your vehicle. It can an automatic transaxle. Do not race
than other types of vehicles. affect the safety and perform- the engine, and spin the wheels as lit-
ance of your vehicle, which tle as possible. If you are still stuck
• Specific design characteris- could lead to steering failure or
tics (higher ground clearance, after a few tries, have the vehicle
rollover and serious injury. pulled out by a tow vehicle to avoid
narrower track, etc.) give this When replacing the tires, be
vehicle a higher center of engine overheating and possible
sure to equip all four tires with damage to the transaxle.
gravity than ordinary vehicles. the tire and wheel of the same
• A SUV is not designed for cor- size, type, tread, brand and
nering at the same speeds as load-carrying capacity. If you CAUTION
conventional vehicles. nevertheless decide to equip Prolonged rocking may cause
• Avoid sharp turns or abrupt your vehicle with any tire/wheel engine over-heating, transaxle
maneuvers. combination not recommended damage or failure, and tire dam-
• In a rollover crash, an unbelt- by HYUNDAI for off road driv- age.
ed person is significantly ing, you should not use these
more likely to die than a per- tires for highway driving.
son wearing a seat belt. Make
sure everyone in the vehicle is
properly buckled up.
5 104
Smooth cornering Driving at night

WARNING - Spinning tires
Do not spin the wheels, espe-
cially at speeds more than 35
mph (56 km/h). Spinning the
wheels at high speeds when the
vehicle is stationary could
cause a tire to overheat which
could result in tire damage that
may injure bystanders.
✽ NOTICE
The ESC system should be turned OUN056051 OCM053010
OFF prior to rocking the vehicle. Avoid braking or gear changing in Because night driving presents more
corners, especially when roads are hazards than driving in the daylight,
WARNING wet. Ideally, corners should always here are some important tips to
be taken under gentle acceleration. If remember:
If your vehicle becomes stuck in you follow these suggestions, tire
snow, mud, sand, etc., then you • Slow down and keep more distance
wear will be held to a minimum. between you and other vehicles, as
may attempt to rock the vehicle
free by moving it forward and it may be more difficult to see at
backward. Do not attempt this night, especially in areas where
procedure if people or objects there may not be any street lights.
are anywhere near the vehicle. • Adjust your mirrors to reduce the
During the rocking operation the glare from other driver's headlights.
vehicle may suddenly move for-
ward or backward as it becomes
unstuck, causing injury or dam-
age to nearby people or objects.
5 105
• Keep your headlights clean and Driving in the rain • If your tires are not in good condi-
properly aimed on vehicles not tion, making a quick stop on wet
equipped with the automatic head- pavement can cause a skid and
light aiming feature. Dirty or improp- possibly lead to an accident. Be
erly aimed headlights will make it sure your tires are in good shape.
much more difficult to see at night. • Turn on your headlights to make it
• Avoid staring directly at the head- easier for others to see you.
lights of oncoming vehicles. You • Driving too fast through large pud-
could be temporarily blinded, and it dles can affect your brakes. If you
will take several seconds for your must go through puddles, try to
eyes to readjust to the darkness. drive through them slowly.
• If you believe you may have gotten
1VQA3003 your brakes wet, apply them lightly
while driving until normal braking
Rain and wet roads can make driving operation returns.
dangerous, especially if you’re not
prepared for the slick pavement.
Here are a few things to consider
when driving in the rain:
• A heavy rainfall will make it harder
to see and will increase the dis-
tance needed to stop your vehicle,
so slow down.
• Keep your windshield wiping
equipment in good shape. Replace
your windshield wiper blades when
they show signs of streaking or
missing areas on the windshield.
5 106
Driving in flooded areas Highway driving

Avoid driving through flooded areas Tires: WARNING
unless you are sure the water is no • Underinflated or overinflated
higher than the bottom of the wheel tires can cause poor handling,
hub. Drive through any water slowly. loss of vehicle control, and
Allow adequate stopping distance sudden tire failure leading to
because brake performance may be accidents, injuries, and even
affected. death. Always check the tires
for proper inflation before
After driving through water, dry the
driving. For proper tire pres-
brakes by gently applying them sev-
sures, refer to section 8,
eral times while the vehicle is moving
“Tires and wheels”.
slowly.
• Driving on tires with no or
insufficient tread is danger-
Driving off-road 1VQA1004
ous. Worn-out tires can result
Drive carefully off-road because your Adjust the tire inflation pressures to in loss of vehicle control, col-
vehicle may be damaged by rocks or specification. Low tire inflation pres- lisions, injury, and even death.
roots of trees. Become familiar with sures will result in overheating and Worn-out tires should be
the off-road conditions where you possible failure of the tires. replaced as soon as possible
are going to drive before you begin and should never be used for
Avoid using worn or damaged tires driving. Always check the tire
driving. which may result in reduced traction tread before driving your vehi-
or tire failure. cle. For further information
and tread limits, refer to sec-
✽ NOTICE tion 7, “Tires and wheels”.
Never exceed the maximum tire
inflation pressure shown on the tires.
5 107
Fuel, engine coolant and engine

oil:
High speed travel consumes more
fuel than urban motoring. Do not for-
get to check both engine coolant and
engine oil.
Drive belt:
A loose or damaged drive belt may
result in overheating of the engine.
5 108
WINTER DRIVING
Snowy or Icy conditions Snow tires
To drive your vehicle in deep snow, it If you mount snow tires on your vehi-
may be necessary to use snow tires cle, make sure they are radial tires of
or to install tire chains on your tires. the same size and load range as the
If snow tires are needed, it is neces- original tires. Mount snow tires on all
sary to select tires equivalent in size four wheels to balance your vehicle’s
and type of the original equipment handling in all weather conditions.
tires. Failure to do so may adversely Keep in mind that the traction provid-
affect the safety and handling of your ed by snow tires on dry roads may
vehicle. Furthermore, speeding, not be as high as your vehicle's orig-
rapid acceleration, sudden brake inal equipment tires. You should drive
1VQA3005 applications, and sharp turns are cautiously even when the roads are
Severe weather conditions in the potentially very hazardous practices. clear. Check with the tire dealer for
winter result in greater wear and During deceleration, use engine maximum speed recommendations.
other problems. To minimize the braking to the fullest extent. Sudden
problems of winter driving, you brake applications on snowy or icy WARNING - Snow tire size
should follow these suggestions: roads may cause skids to occur. You Snow tires should be equivalent
need to keep sufficient distance in size and type to the vehicle's
between the vehicle in operation in standard tires. Otherwise, the
front and your vehicle. Also, apply safety and handling of your vehi-
the brake gently. It should be noted cle may be adversely affected.
that installing tire chains on the tire
will provide a greater driving force,
but will not prevent side skids. Do not install studded tires without
first checking local, state and munic-
✽ NOTICE ipal regulations for possible restric-
tions against their use.
Tire chains are not legal in all states.
Check the state laws before fitting
tire chains.
5 109
Tire chains When using tire chains, attach them

to the drive wheels as follows. CAUTION
2WD : Front wheels • Make sure the snow chains are
AWD : All four wheels the correct size and type for
your tires. Incorrect snow
If a full set of chains is not chains can cause damage to
available for an AWD vehicle, the vehicle body and suspen-
chains may be installed on sion and may not be covered
the front wheels only. by your vehicle manufacturer
warranty. Also, the snow chain
connecting hooks may be dam-
aged from contacting vehicle
components causing the snow
1VQA3007 chains to come loose from the
Since the sidewalls of radial tires are tire. Make sure the snow chains
thinner, they can be damaged by are SAE class “S” certified.
mounting some types of snow chains • Always check chain installa-
on them. Therefore, the use of snow tion for proper mounting after
tires is recommended instead of driving approximately 0.3 to
snow chains. Do not mount tire 0.6 miles (0.5 to 1 km) to
chains on vehicles equipped with ensure safe mounting.
aluminum wheels; snow chains may Retighten or remount the
cause damage to the wheels. If snow chains if they are loose.
chains must be used, use wire-type
chains with a thickness of less than
0.59 in (15 mm). Damage to your
vehicle caused by improper snow
chain use is not covered by your
vehicle manufacturers warranty.
5 110
Chain installation Use high quality ethylene gly-

When installing chains, follow the WARNING - Tire chains col coolant
manufacturer's instructions and • The use of chains may Your vehicle is delivered with high
mount them as tightly as you can. adversely affect vehicle han- quality ethylene glycol coolant in the
Drive slowly with chains installed. If dling. cooling system. It is the only type of
you hear the chains contacting the • Do not exceed 20 mph (30 coolant that should be used because
body or chassis, stop and tighten km/h) or the chain manufac- it helps prevent corrosion in the cool-
them. If they still make contact, slow turer’s recommended speed ing system, lubricates the water
down until it stops. Remove the limit, whichever is lower. pump and prevents freezing. Be sure
chains as soon as you begin driving to replace or replenish your coolant
on cleared roads. • Drive carefully and avoid
bumps, holes, sharp turns, and in accordance with the maintenance
other road hazards, which may schedule in section 7. Before winter,
WARNING - Mounting cause the vehicle to bounce. have your coolant tested to assure
chains that its freezing point is sufficient for
• Avoid sharp turns or locked- the temperatures anticipated during
When mounting snow chains, wheel braking. the winter.
park the vehicle on level ground
away from traffic. Turn on the
vehicle Hazard Warning flashers CAUTION
and place a triangular emer- • Chains that are the wrong size
gency warning device behind or improperly installed can
the vehicle if available. Always damage your vehicle's brake
place the vehicle in P (Park), lines, suspension, body and
apply the parking brake and wheels.
turn off the engine before
installing snow chains. • Stop driving and retighten the
chains any time you hear them
hitting the vehicle.
5 111
Check battery and cables Check spark plugs and igni- Use approved window washer
Winter puts additional burdens on tion system anti-freeze in system
the battery system. Visually inspect Inspect your spark plugs as To keep the water in the window
the battery and cables as described described in section 7 and replace washer system from freezing, add an
in section 7. The level of charge in them if necessary. Also check all approved window washer anti-freeze
your battery can be checked by an ignition wiring and components to be solution in accordance with instruc-
authorized HYUNDAI dealer or a sure they are not cracked, worn or tions on the container. Window wash-
service station. damaged in any way. er anti-freeze is available from an
authorized HYUNDAI dealer and
most auto parts outlets. Do not use
Change to "winter weight" oil To keep locks from freezing engine coolant or other types of anti-
if necessary To keep the locks from freezing, freeze as these may damage the
In some climates it is recommended squirt an approved de-icer fluid or paint finish.
that a lower viscosity "winter weight" glycerine into the key opening. If a
oil be used during cold weather. See lock is covered with ice, squirt it with
section 8 for recommendations. If an approved de-icing fluid to remove
you aren't sure what weight oil you the ice. If the lock is frozen internally,
should use, consult an authorized you may be able to thaw it out by
HYUNDAI dealer. using a heated key. Handle the heat-
ed key with care to avoid injury.
5 112
Don't let your parking brake Don't let ice and snow accu- Don't place foreign objects or
freeze mulate underneath materials in the engine com-
Under some conditions your parking Under some conditions, snow and partment
brake can freeze in the engaged ice can build up under the fenders Placement of foreign objects or
position. This is most likely to happen and interfere with the steering. When materials which prevent cooling of
when there is an accumulation of driving in severe winter conditions the engine, in the engine compart-
snow or ice around or near the rear where this may happen, you should ment, may cause a failure or com-
brakes or if the brakes are wet. If periodically check underneath the bustion. The manufacturer is not
there is a risk the parking brake may vehicle to be sure the movement of responsible for the damage caused
freeze, apply it only temporarily while the front wheels and the steering by such placement.
you put the shift lever in P (automat- components is not obstructed.
ic transaxle) and block the rear
wheels so the vehicle cannot roll.
Then release the parking brake. Carry emergency equipment
Depending on the severity of the
weather, you should carry appropri-
ate emergency equipment. Some of
the items you may want to carry
include tire chains, tow straps or
chains, flashlight, emergency flares,
sand, a shovel, jumper cables, a win-
dow scraper, gloves, ground cloth,
coveralls, a blanket, etc.
5 113
TRAILER TOWING
If you are considering towing with Remember that trailering is different
your vehicle, you should first check WARNING - Weight limits than just driving your vehicle by itself.
with your state’s Department of Before towing, make sure the Trailering means changes in han-
Motor Vehicles to determine their total trailer weight, GCW (gross dling, durability, and fuel economy.
legal requirements. combination weight), GVW Successful, safe trailering requires
Since laws vary the requirements for (gross vehicle weight), GAW correct equipment, and it has to be
towing trailers, cars, or other types of (gross axle weight) and trailer used properly.
vehicles or apparatus may differ. Ask tongue load are all within the
an authorized HYUNDAI dealer for limits. This section contains many time-test-
further details before towing. ed, important trailering tips and safe-
ty rules. Many of these are important
WARNING - Towing a CAUTION for your safety and that of your pas-
trailer Pulling a trailer improperly can sengers. Please read this section
damage your vehicle and result carefully before you pull a trailer.
If you don't use the correct
equipment and/or drive improp- in costly repairs not covered by
erly, you can lose control when your warranty. To pull a trailer Load-pulling components such as
you pull a trailer. For example, if correctly, follow the advice in the engine, transaxle, wheel assem-
the trailer is too heavy, the this section. blies, and tires are forced to work
brakes may not work well - or harder against the load of the added
even at all. You and your pas- weight. The engine is required to
Your vehicle can tow a trailer. To operate at relatively higher speeds
sengers could be seriously or
identify what the vehicle trailering and under greater loads. This addi-
fatally injured. Pull a trailer only
capacity is for your vehicle, you tional burden generates extra heat.
if you have followed all the
should read the information in The trailer also considerably adds
steps in this section.
“Weight of the trailer” that appears wind resistance, increasing the
later in this section. pulling requirements.
5 114
Hitches Safety chains Trailer brakes

It's important to have the correct You should always attach chains If your trailer is equipped with a brak-
hitch equipment. Crosswinds, large between your vehicle and your trail- ing system, make sure it conforms to
trucks going by, and rough roads are er. Cross the safety chains under the federal and/or local regulations and
a few reasons why you’ll need the tongue of the trailer so that the that it is properly installed and oper-
right hitch. Here are some rules to tongue will not drop to the road if it ating correctly.
follow: becomes separated from the hitch. If your trailer weight exceeds the
• Do you have to make any holes in Instructions about safety chains may maximum allowed weight without
the body of your vehicle when you be provided by the hitch manufactur- trailer brakes, then the trailer will also
install a trailer hitch? If you do, then er or by the trailer manufacturer. require its own brakes as well. Be
be sure to seal the holes later Follow the manufacturer’s recom- sure to read and follow the instruc-
when you remove the hitch. mendation for attaching safety tions for the trailer brakes so you’ll be
If you don’t seal them, deadly car- chains. Always leave just enough able to install, adjust and maintain
bon monoxide (CO) from your slack so you can turn with your trail- them properly.
exhaust can get into your vehicle, er. And, never allow safety chains to • Don’t tap into or modify your vehi-
as well as dirt and water. drag on the ground. cle's brake system.
• The bumpers on your vehicle are
not intended for hitches. Do not WARNING - Trailer brakes
attach rental hitches or other
bumper-type hitches to them. Use Do not use a trailer with its own
only a frame-mounted hitch that brakes unless you are absolute-
does not attach to the bumper. ly certain that you have proper-
ly set up the brake system. This
• HYUNDAI trailer hitch accessory is is not a task for amateurs. Use
available at an authorized an experienced, competent
HYUNDAI dealer. trailer shop for this work.
5 115
Driving with a trailer Following distance Backing up

Towing a trailer requires a certain Stay at least twice as far behind the Hold the bottom of the steering wheel
amount of experience. Before setting vehicle ahead as you would when with one hand. Then, to move the trail-
out for the open road, you must get to driving your vehicle without a trailer. er to the left, just move your hand to
know your trailer. Acquaint yourself This can help you avoid situations the left. To move the trailer to the right,
with the feel of handling and braking that require heavy braking and sud- move your hand to the right. Always
with the added weight of the trailer. den turns. back up slowly and, if possible, have
And always keep in mind that the someone guide you.
vehicle you are driving is now a good Passing
deal longer and not nearly so respon- Making turns
sive as your vehicle is by itself. You’ll need more passing distance
up ahead when you’re towing a trail- When you’re turning with a trailer,
Before you start, check the trailer er. And, because of the increased make wider turns than normal. Do
hitch and platform, safety chains, vehicle length, you’ll need to go this so your trailer won’t strike soft
electrical connector(s), lights, tires much farther beyond the passed shoulders, curbs, road signs, trees,
and mirror adjustment. If the trailer vehicle before you can return to your or other objects near the edge of the
has electric brakes, start your vehicle lane. Due to the added load to the road. Avoid jerky or sudden maneu-
and trailer moving and then apply the engine when going uphill the vehicle vers. Signal well in advance before
trailer brake controller by hand to be may also take longer to pass than it turning or lane changes.
sure the brakes are working. This lets would on flat ground.
you check your electrical connection
at the same time.
During your trip, check occasionally
to be sure that the load is secure,
and that the lights and any trailer
brakes are still working.
5 116
Turn signals when towing a trailer Driving on grades

When you tow a trailer, your vehicle WARNING Reduce speed and shift to a lower
has to have a different turn signal Failure to use an approved trail- gear before you start down a long or
flasher and extra wiring. The green er wiring harness could result steep downgrade. If you don’t shift
arrows on your instrument panel will in damage to the vehicle electri- down, you might have to use your
flash whenever you signal a turn or cal system and/or personal brakes so much that they would get
lane change. Properly connected, injury. hot and no longer operate efficiently.
the trailer lights will also flash to alert On a long uphill grade, shift down
other drivers you’re about to turn, and reduce your speed to around 45
change lanes, or stop. mph (70 km/h) to reduce the possi-
When towing a trailer, the green bility of engine and transaxle over-
arrows on your instrument panel will heating.
flash for turns even if the bulbs on the Operating your vehicle in D (Drive)
trailer are burned out. Thus, you may when towing a trailer will minimize
think drivers behind you are seeing heat build up and extend the life of
your signals when, in fact, they are your transaxle.
not. It’s important to check occasion-
ally to be sure the trailer bulbs are still
working. You must also check the
lights every time you disconnect and
then reconnect the wires.
Do not connect a trailer lighting sys-
tem directly to your vehicle’s lighting
system. Use only an approved trailer
wiring harness.
An authorized HYUNDAI dealer can
assist you in installing the wiring har-
ness.
5 117
Parking on hills However, if you ever have to park

CAUTION Generally, if you have a trailer your trailer on a hill, here's how to do
• When towing a trailer on steep attached to your vehicle, you should it:
grades (in excess of 6%) pay not park your vehicle on a hill. People 1. Pull the vehicle into the parking
close attention to the engine can be seriously or fatally injured, space. Turn the steering wheel in
coolant temperature gauge to and both your vehicle and the trailer the direction of the curb (right if
ensure the engine does not can be damaged if they unexpected- headed down hill, left if headed up
overheat. ly roll down hill. hill).
If the needle of the coolant 2. If the vehicle has an automatic
temperature gauge moves transaxle, place the car in P
across the dial towards “H” WARNING - Parking
on a hill (Park).
(HOT), pull over and stop as 3. Set the parking brake and shut off
soon as it is safe to do so, and Parking your vehicle on a hill
with a trailer attached could the vehicle.
allow the engine to idle until it
cools down. You may proceed cause serious injury or death, 4. Place chocks under the trailer
once the engine has cooled should the trailer break loose or wheels on the down hill side of the
sufficiently. the brake stops working. wheels.
• Use caution when driving on 5. Start the vehicle, hold the brakes,
an uphill grade to reduce the shift to neutral, release the parking
possibility of engine and brake and slowly release the
transaxle overheating. brakes until the trailer chocks
absorb the load.
6. Reapply the brakes, reapply the
parking brake and shift the vehicle
to P (Park) for automatic transaxle.
7. Shut off the vehicle and release
the vehicle brakes but leave the
parking brake set.
5 118
Maintenance when trailer towing

WARNING - Parking CAUTION
Your vehicle will need service more
brake often when you regularly pull a trail- • Due to higher load during
It can be dangerous to get out er. Important items to pay particular trailer usage, overheating
of your vehicle if the parking attention to include engine oil, auto- might occur in hot days or
brake is not firmly set. matic transaxle fluid, axle lubricant during uphill driving. If the
If you have left the engine run- and cooling system fluid. Brake con- coolant gauge indicates over-
ning, the vehicle can move sud- dition is another important item to heating, switch off the A/C and
denly. You or others could be frequently check. Each item is cov- stop the vehicle in a safe area
seriously or fatally injured. ered in this manual, and the Index to cool down the engine.
will help you find them quickly. If • When towing check transaxle
you’re trailering, it’s a good idea to fluid more frequently.
When you are ready to leave after review these sections before you
parking on a hill start your trip.
1. With the automatic transaxle in P Don’t forget to also maintain your
(Park), apply your brakes and hold trailer and hitch. Follow the mainte-
the brake pedal down while you: nance schedule that accompanied
• Start your engine; your trailer and check it periodically.
• Shift into gear; and Preferably, conduct the check at the
start of each day’s driving. Most
• Release the parking brake. importantly, all hitch nuts and bolts
2. Slowly remove your foot from the should be tight.
brake pedal.
3. Drive slowly until the trailer is clear
of the chocks.
4. Stop and have someone pick up
and store the chocks.
5 119
If you do decide to pull a trailer

Engine Gasoline Engine
Here are some important points if
you decide to pull a trailer:
Item 2.0L Turbo GDI 2.4L GDI
• Consider using a sway control. You
can ask a hitch dealer about sway
1653 1653
control. Without brake System
(750) (750)
• Do not do any towing with your car Maximum trailer
during its first 1,200 miles (2,000 weight
Without trailer 2000 2000
km) in order to allow the engine to With brake package (907) (907)
properly break in. Failure to heed Ibs. (kg)
System With trailer 3500 2800
this caution may result in serious
engine or transaxle damage. package (1588) (1270)
• When towing a trailer, be sure to
consult an authorized HYUNDAI Maximum permissible static vertical load
350 280
dealer for further information on on the coupling device
(159) (127)
additional requirements such as a Ibs. (kg)
towing kit, etc.
• Always drive your vehicle at a mod-
erate speed (less than 60 mph
(100 km/h)).
• On a long uphill grade, do not
exceed 45 mph (70 km/h) or the
posted towing speed limit,
whichever is lower.
• The chart contains important con-
siderations that have to do with
weight:
5 120
Weight of the trailer Weight of the trailer tongue The trailer tongue should weigh a
maximum of 10% of the total loaded
trailer weight, within the limits of the
maximum permissible trailer tongue
load. After you've loaded your trailer,
weigh the trailer and then the tongue,
separately, to see if the weights are
proper. If they aren’t, you may be able
to correct them simply by moving
some items around in the trailer.
Tongue Load Total Trailer Weight Gross Axle Weight Gross Vehicle Weight
C190E01JM C190E02JM
What is the maximum safe weight of The tongue load of any trailer is an
a trailer? It should never weigh more important weight to measure
than the maximum trailer weight with because it affects the total gross
trailer brakes. But even that can be vehicle weight (GVW) of your vehi-
too heavy. cle. This weight includes the curb
It depends on how you plan to use weight of the vehicle, any cargo you
your trailer. For example, speed, alti- may carry in it, and the people who
tude, road grades, outside tempera- will be riding in the vehicle. And if you
ture and how often your vehicle is will tow a trailer, you must add the
used to pull a trailer are all important. tongue load to the GVW because
The ideal trailer weight can also your vehicle will also be carrying that
depend on any special equipment weight.
that you have on your vehicle.
5 121
WARNING - Trailer
• Never load a trailer with more
weight in the rear than in the
front. The front should be
loaded with approximately
60% of the total trailer load;
the rear should be loaded with
approximately 40% of the total
trailer load.
• Never exceed the maximum
weight limits of the trailer or
trailer towing equipment.
Improper loading can result in
damage to your vehicle and/or
personal injury. Check weights
and loading at a commercial
scale or highway patrol office
equipped with scales.
• An improperly loaded trailer
can cause loss of vehicle con-
trol.
5 122
VEHICLE LOAD LIMIT

Tire and loading information label Vehicle capacity weight:
930 lbs. (420 kg)
Vehicle capacity weight is the maxi-
mum combined weight of occupants
and cargo. If your vehicle is equipped
with a trailer, the combined weight
includes the tongue load.
Seating capacity:
OAN057100N OAN053100
Total : 5 persons
(Front seat : 2 persons,
Rear seat : 3 persons)
Seating capacity is the maximum
number of occupants including a
driver, your vehicle may carry.
However, the seating capacity may
be reduced based upon the weight of
all of the occupants, and the weight
OAN053101 OAN053103 of the cargo being carried or towed.
The label located on the driver's Do not overload the vehicle as there
door sill gives the original tire size, is a limit to the total weight, or load
cold tire pressures recommended limit including occupants and cargo,
for your vehicle, the number of peo- the vehicle can carry.
ple that can be in your vehicle and
vehicle capacity weight.
OAN053102
5 123
Towing capacity: Steps For Determining Correct 5. Determine the combined weight of
Without trailer brakes: Load Limit luggage and cargo being loaded
1653 lbs. (750 kg) 1. Locate the statement "The com- on the vehicle. That weight may
bined weight of occupants and not safely exceed the available
With trailer brakes: cargo and luggage load capacity
cargo should never exceed XXX
2000 lbs. (907 kg) calculated in Step 4.
kg or XXX lbs.'' on your vehicle's
Towing capacity is the maximum placard. 6. If your vehicle will be towing a trail-
trailer weight including its cargo er, the load from your trailer will be
2. Determine the combined weight of
weight, your vehicle can tow. transferred to your vehicle. Consult
the driver and passengers that will
be riding in your vehicle. this manual to determine how this
Cargo capacity: reduces the available cargo and
3. Subtract the combined weight of luggage load capacity of your
The cargo capacity of your vehicle the driver and passengers from
will increase or decrease depending vehicle.
XXX kg or XXX lbs.
on the weight and the number of
4. The resulting figure equals the
occupants and the tongue load, if
available amount of cargo and lug-
your vehicle is equipped with a trailer.
gage load capacity. For example, if
the "XXX" amount equals 1400
lbs. and there will be five 150 lbs.
passengers in your vehicle, the
amount of available cargo and lug-
gage load capacity is 650 lb
(1400-750 (5 x 150) = 650 lbs.)
5 124
Example 1 Example 2 Example 3
A B C A B C A B C
C190F01JM C190F02JM C190F03JM
Item Description Total Item Description Total Item Description Total

Vehicle Capacity 1400 lbs Vehicle Capacity 1400 lbs Vehicle Capacity 1400 lbs
A A A
Weight (635 kg) Weight (635 kg) Weight (635 kg)
Subtract Occupant Subtract Occupant Subtract Occupant
300 lbs 750 lbs 860 lbs
B Weight B Weight B Weight
(136 kg) (340 kg) (390 kg)
150 lbs (68 kg) × 2 150 lbs (68 kg) × 5 172 lbs (78 kg) × 5
Available Cargo and 1100 lbs Available Cargo and 650 lbs Available Cargo and 540 lbs
C C C
Luggage weight (499 kg) Luggage weight (295 kg) Luggage weight (245 kg)
Refer to your vehicle’s tire and loading information label for specific information about your vehicle's capacity weight
and seating positions. The combined weight of the driver, passengers and cargo should never exceed your vehicle's
capacity weight.
5 125
Certification label To find out the actual loads on your

front and rear axles, you need to go to WARNING - Over loading
a weigh station and weigh your vehi- • Never exceed the GVWR for
cle. Your dealer can help you with this. your vehicle, the GAWR for
Be sure to spread out your load equal- either the front or rear axle
ly on both sides of the centerline. and vehicle capacity weight.
Exceeding these ratings can
cause an accident or vehicle
damage. You can calculate the
weight of your load by weigh-
ing the items (or people)
before putting them in the
vehicle. Be careful not to over-
OEN056020 load your vehicle.
The certification label is located on • Do not load your vehicle any
the driver's door sill at the center pillar. heavier than the GVWR, either
This label shows the maximum allow- the maximum front or rear
able weight of the fully loaded vehi- GAWR and vehicle capacity
cle. This is called the GVWR (Gross weight. If you do, parts,
Vehicle Weight Rating). The GVWR including tires on your vehicle
includes the weight of the vehicle, all can break, and it can change
occupants, fuel and cargo. the way your vehicle handles
and braking ability. This could
This label also tells you the maxi-
cause you to lose control and
mum weight that can be supported
crash. Also, overloading can
by the front and rear axles, called
shorten the life of your vehi-
Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR).
cle.
5 126
The label will help you decide how

much cargo and installed equipment CAUTION WARNING - Loose cargo
your vehicle can carry. • Overloading your vehicle may Items you carry inside your
cause damage. Repairs would vehicle can strike and injure
If you carry items inside your vehicle not be covered by your war- occupants in a sudden stop or
- like suitcases, tools, packages, or ranty. Do not overload your turn, or in a crash.
anything else - they are moving as vehicle. • Put items in the cargo area of
fast as the vehicle. If you have to stop • Using heavier suspension your vehicle. Try to spread the
or turn quickly, or if there is a crash, components to get added weight evenly.
the items will keep going and can durability might not change • Never stack items, like suit-
cause an injury if they strike the driv- your weight ratings. Ask your cases, inside the vehicle
er or a passenger. dealer to help you load your above the tops of the seats.
vehicle the right way.
• Do not leave an unsecured
WARNING child restrained in your vehi-
• Overloading your vehicle can cle.
cause heat buildup in your • When you carry something
vehicle's tires and possible inside the vehicle, secure it.
tire failure that could lead to a • Do not drive with a seat folded
crash. down unless necessary.
• Overloading your vehicle can
cause increased stopping dis-
tances that could lead to a
crash.
• A crash resulting from poor
handling vehicle damage, tire
failure, or increased stopping
distances could result in seri-
ous injury or death.
5 127
VEHICLE WEIGHT
This section will guide you in the Base curb weight GAWR
proper loading of your vehicle and/or This is the weight of the vehicle (Gross axle weight rating)
trailer, to keep your loaded vehicle including a full tank of fuel and all This is the maximum allowable
weight within its design rating capa- standard equipment. It does not weight that can be carried by a single
bility, with or without a trailer. Properly include passengers, cargo, or option- axle (front or rear). These numbers
loading your vehicle will provide max- al equipment. are shown on the compliance label.
imum return of the vehicle design
performance. Before loading your The total load on each axle must
vehicle, familiarize yourself with the Vehicle curb weight never exceed its GAWR.
following terms for determining your
vehicle's weight ratings, with or with- This is the weight of your new vehicle
out a trailer, from the vehicle's speci- when you picked it up from your deal- GVW (Gross vehicle weight)
fications and the compliance label: er plus any aftermarket equipment. This is the Base Curb Weight plus
actual Cargo Weight plus passen-
Cargo weight gers.
This figure includes all weight added
to the Base Curb Weight, including GVWR
cargo and optional equipment. (Gross vehicle weight rating)
This is the maximum allowable
weight of the fully loaded vehicle
GAW (Gross axle weight) (including all options, equipment,
This is the total weight placed on passengers and cargo). The GVWR
each axle (front and rear) - including is shown on the certification label.
vehicle curb weight and all payload.
5 128
What to do in an emergency
Road warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2 If you have a flat tire (with spare tire). . . . . . . . . 6-15
• Hazard warning flasher . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2 • Jack and tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-15
In case of an emergency while driving. . . . . . . . . . 6-3 • Removing and storing the spare tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-16
• If the engine stalls at a crossroad or crossing. . . . . . . 6-3 • Changing tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-18
• If you have a flat tire while driving. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3 • Important - use of temporary compact spare tire . . 6-22
• If engine stalls while driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3 • Jack label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-24
If the engine does not start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4 Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-25
• If engine doesn't turn over or turns over slowly . . . . 6-4 • Towing service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-25
• If engine turns over normally but does not start . . . . 6-4 • Removable towing hook . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-26
Emergency starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5 • Emergency towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-26
• Jump starting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5 • Emergency towing precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-28
• Push-starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-7
If the engine overheats. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-8
Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) . . . . . . 6-9
• Check tire pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-9
• Tire pressure monitoring system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-10
• Low tire pressure telltale . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-11 6
• TPMS (Tire Pressure Monitoring System)
malfunction indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-12
• Changing a tire with TPMS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-13
ROAD WARNING
Hazard warning flasher The hazard warning flasher serves When you must make such an emer-
as a warning to other drivers to exer- gency stop, always pull off the road
■ Type A
cise extreme caution when as far as possible.
approaching, overtaking, or passing • The hazard warning flasher oper-
your vehicle. ates whether your vehicle is run-
It should be used whenever emer- ning or not.
gency repairs are being made or • The turn signals do not work when
when the vehicle is stopped near the the hazard flasher is on.
edge of a roadway.
• Care must be taken when using
Depress the flasher switch with the the hazard warning flasher while
ODM042242
ignition switch in any position. The the vehicle is being towed.
■ Type B
flasher switch is located in the center
console switch panel. All turn signal • To turn the hazard warning lights
lights will flash simultaneously. off, push the switch again.
ODM042243
■ Type C
ONC047620L
6 2
IN CASE OF AN EMERGENCY WHILE DRIVING

If the engine stalls at a cross- If you have a flat tire while If engine stalls while driving
road or crossing driving 1. Reduce your speed gradually,
If the engine stalls at a crossroad or If a tire goes flat while you are driving: keeping a straight line. Move cau-
crossing, set the shift lever in the N 1. Take your foot off the accelerator tiously off the road to a safe place.
(Neutral) position and then push the pedal and let the car slow down 2. Turn on your emergency flashers.
vehicle to a safe place. while driving straight ahead. Do 3. Try to start the engine again. If
not apply the brakes immediately your vehicle will not start, contact
or attempt to pull off the road as an authorized HYUNDAI dealer or
this may cause a loss of control. seek other qualified assistance.
When the car has slowed to such
a speed that it is safe to do so,
brake carefully and pull off the ✽ NOTICE
road. Drive off the road as far as If there was a check engine light and
possible and park on firm, level loss of power or stall, it is best if safe
ground. If you are on a divided to do so to wait at least 10 seconds to
highway, do not park in the median restart a vehicle after it stalls. This
area between the two traffic lanes. may reset the car so it will no longer
2. When the vehicle is stopped, turn on run at low power (limp home) condi-
your emergency hazard flashers, tion.
set the parking brake and put the
transaxle in P.
3. Have all passengers get out of the
car. Be sure they all get out on the
side of the car that is away from
traffic.
4. When repairing a flat tire, follow
the instruction provided later in
this section.
6 3
IF THE ENGINE WILL NOT START

If engine doesn't turn over or If engine turns over normally
turns over slowly but does not start
1. If your vehicle has an automatic 1. Check fuel level.
transaxle, be sure the shift lever is 2. With the ignition switch in the LOCK
in N (Neutral) or P (Park) and the position, check all connectors at
emergency brake is set. ignition coils and spark plugs.
2. Check the battery connections to Reconnect any that may be discon-
be sure they are clean and tight. nected or loose.
3. Turn on the interior light. If the light 3. If the engine still does not start, call
dims or goes out when you oper- an authorized HYUNDAI dealer or
ate the starter, the battery is dis- seek other qualified assistance.
charged.
4. Do not push or pull the vehicle to
start it. See instructions for "Jump
starting".
WARNING
If the engine will not start, do
not push or pull the vehicle to
start it. This could result in a
collision or cause other dam-
age. In addition, push or pull
starting may cause the catalytic
converter to be overloaded and
create a fire hazard.
6 4
EMERGENCY STARTING
Jumper Cables Jump starting
Jump starting can be dangerous if
WARNING - Battery
done incorrectly. Therefore, to avoid • Keep all flames or sparks
harm to yourself or damage to your away from the battery. The
vehicle or battery, follow the jump battery produces hydrogen
starting procedures. If in doubt, we gas which may explode if
strongly recommend that you have a exposed to flame or sparks.
Booster technician or towing service jump If these instructions are not fol-
battery
start your vehicle. lowed exactly, serious personal
injury and damage to the vehi-
cle may occur! If you are not
1VQA4001 CAUTION sure how to follow this proce-
Connect cables in numerical order Use only a 12-volt jumper sys- dure, seek qualified assis-
and disconnect in reverse order. tem. You can damage a 12-volt tance. Automobile batteries
starting motor, ignition system, contain sulfuric acid. This is
and other electrical parts poisonous and highly corro-
beyond repair by use of a 24-volt sive. When jump starting, wear
power supply (either two 12-volt protective glasses and be care-
batteries in series or a 24-volt ful not to get acid on yourself,
motor generator set). your clothing or on the car.
• Do not attempt to jump start
the vehicle if the discharged
battery is frozen or if the elec-
trolyte level is low; the battery
may rupture or explode.
6 5
Jump starting procedure 4.Connect the jumper cables in the

✽ NOTICE exact sequence shown in the illus- CAUTION - Battery cables
tration. First connect one end of a Do not connect the jumper cable
If the battery is discharged, the jumper cable to the positive termi- from the negative terminal of the
engine can be started using a battery nal of the discharged battery (1), booster battery to the negative
of another vehicle and two jumper then connect the other end to the terminal of the discharged bat-
cables. Only use jumper cables with positive terminal on the booster tery. This can cause the dis-
fully insulated clamp handles. battery (2). Proceed to connect charged battery to overheat and
To prevent personal injury or dam- one end of the other jumper cable crack, releasing battery acid.
age to both vehicles, adhere strictly to the negative terminal of the
to the following procedure. booster battery (3), then the other 5.Start the engine of the vehicle with
end to a solid, stationary, metallic the booster battery and let it run at
1.Make sure the booster battery is point (for example, the engine lift-
12-volt and that its negative termi- 2,000 rpm, then start the engine of
ing bracket) away from the battery the vehicle with the discharged
nal is grounded. (4). Do not connect it to or near any
2.If the booster battery is in another battery. If the first starting attempt
part that moves when the engine is is not successful, wait a few min-
vehicle, do not allow the vehicles to cranked.
touch. utes before making another
Make sure that there is no contact attempt in order to allow the dis-
3.Turn off all unnecessary electrical between the bodywork of the two charged battery to recharge.
loads. vehicles; otherwise, there is the To charge the discharged battery
danger of short circuits. enough, it is recommended to let the
Do not allow the jumper cables to engine at idle or to drive the vehicle
contact anything except the correct for a certain period of time.
battery terminals or the correct If the cause of your battery discharg-
ground. Do not lean over the bat- ing is not apparent, you should have
tery when making connections. your vehicle checked by an author-
6 6
Push-starting
Vehicles equipped with automatic
transaxle cannot be push-started.
Follow the directions in this section
for jump-starting.
WARNING
Never tow a vehicle to start it
because the sudden surge for-
ward when the engine starts
could cause a collision with the
tow vehicle.
6 7
IF THE ENGINE OVERHEATS

If your temperature gauge indicates 4. Check to see if the water pump
overheating, you experience a loss drive belt is missing. If it is not WARNING
of power, or hear loud pinging or missing, check to see that it is Do not remove the radiator cap
knocking, the engine is probably too tight. If the drive belt seems to be when the engine is hot. This
hot. If this happens, you should: satisfactory, check for coolant may result in coolant being
leaking from the radiator, hoses or blown out of the opening and
1. Pull off the road and stop as soon under the car. (If the air condition- cause serious burns.
as it is safe to do so. ing had been in use, it is normal
for cold water to be draining from it
2. Place the shift lever in P and set when you stop.) 6. If you cannot find the cause of the
the parking brake. If the air condi- overheating, wait until the engine
tioning is on, turn it off. temperature has returned to nor-
3. If engine coolant is running out WARNING mal. Then, if coolant has been lost,
under the car or steam is coming While the engine is running, carefully add coolant to the reser-
out from the hood, stop the keep hair, hands and clothing voir to bring the fluid level in the
engine. Do not open the hood until away from moving parts such reservoir up to the halfway mark.
the coolant has stopped running as the fan and drive belts to pre- 7. Proceed with caution, keeping
or the steaming has stopped. If vent injury. alert for further signs of overheat-
there is no visible loss of engine ing. If overheating happens again,
coolant and no steam, leave the 5. If the water pump drive belt is bro- call an authorized HYUNDAI deal-
engine running and check to be ken or engine coolant is leaking er for assistance.
sure the engine cooling fan is out, stop the engine immediately
operating. If the fan is not running, and call the nearest authorized
turn the engine off. CAUTION
HYUNDAI dealer for assistance.
Serious loss of coolant indi-
cates there is a leak in the cool-
ing system and this should be
checked as soon as possible by
6 8
TIRE PRESSURE MONITORING SYSTEM (TPMS)

Check tire pressure • You can change the tire pressure
unit in the user settings mode on
the cluster.
- Refer to “User settings mode” in
chapter 4.
ODM062002
OAN067006N
• You can check the tire pressure in

the information mode on the clus-
ter.
- Refer to “User settings mode” in
chapter 4.
• Tire pressure is displayed 1~2 min-
OAN067005N utes later after driving.
(1) Low Tire Pressure Telltale/ • If tire pressure is not displayed
TPMS Malfunction Indicator when the vehicle is stopped, “Drive
(2) Low tire pressure position telltale to display” message displays. After
and tire pressure telltale driving, check the tire pressure.
(Shown on the LCD display)
6 9
Tire pressure monitoring sys- As an added safety feature, your Your vehicle has also been equipped
tem vehicle has been equipped with a tire with a TPMS malfunction indicator to
pressure monitoring system (TPMS) indicate when the system is not
that illuminates a low tire pressure operating properly. The TPMS mal-
WARNING telltale when one or more of your function indicator is combined with
Over-inflation or under-inflation tires is significantly under-inflated. the low tire pressure telltale. When
can reduce tire life, adversely Accordingly, when the low tire pres- the system detects a malfunction,
affect vehicle handling, and sure telltale illuminates, you should the telltale will flash for approximate-
lead to sudden tire failure that stop and check your tires as soon as ly one minute and then remain con-
may cause loss of vehicle con- possible, and inflate them to the tinuously illuminated. This sequence
trol resulting in an accident. proper pressure. Driving on a signifi- will continue upon subsequent vehi-
cantly under-inflated tire causes the cle start-ups as long as the malfunc-
tire to overheat and can lead to tire tion exists. When the malfunction
Each tire, including the spare (if pro-
failure. Under-inflation also reduces indicator is illuminated, the system
vided), should be checked monthly
fuel efficiency and tire tread life, and may not be able to detect or signal
when cold and inflated to the inflation
may affect the vehicle’s handling and low tire pressure as intended.
pressure recommended by the vehi-
stopping ability. TPMS malfunctions may occur for a
cle manufacturer on the vehicle plac-
ard or tire inflation pressure label. (If Please note that the TPMS is not a variety of reasons, including the
your vehicle has tires of a different substitute for proper tire mainte- installation of replacement or alter-
size than the size indicated on the nance, and it is the driver’s responsi- nate tires or wheels on the vehicle
vehicle placard or tire inflation pres- bility to maintain correct tire pres- that prevent the TPMS from function-
sure label, you should determine the sure, even if under-inflation has not ing properly. Always check the TPMS
proper tire inflation pressure for reached the level to trigger illumina- malfunction telltale after replacing
those tires.) tion of the TPMS low tire pressure one or more tires or wheels on your
telltale. vehicle to ensure that the replace-
ment or alternate tires and wheels
allow the TPMS to continue to func-
tion properly.
6 10
✽ NOTICE Low tire pressure If either telltale illuminates, immedi-

If any of the below happens, we rec- telltale ately reduce your speed, avoid hard
ommend that the system be checked cornering and anticipate increased
by an authorized HYUNDAI dealer. stopping distances. You should stop
Low tire pressure position tell- and check your tires as soon as pos-
1.The low tire pressure telltale/ tale and tire pressure telltale
TPMS malfunction indicator does sible. Inflate the tires to the proper
not illuminate for 3 seconds when pressure as indicated on the vehi-
Engine Start/Stop button is turned cle’s placard or tire inflation pressure
to the ON or engine is running. label located on the driver’s side cen-
2.The TPMS malfunction indicator ter pillar outer panel. If you cannot
remains illuminated after blinking reach a service station or if the tire
for approximately 1 minute. cannot hold the newly added air,
3.The Low tire pressure position replace the low pressure tire with a
telltale remains illuminated. spare tire.
If you drive the vehicle for about 10
minutes at speeds above 15.5 mph
OAN067005N (25 km/h) after replacing the low
pressure tire with the spare tire, the
When the tire pressure monitoring below will happen:
system warning indicators are illumi- • The TPMS malfunction indicator
nated and warning message dis- may blink for approximately 1
played on the cluster LCD display, minute and then remain continu-
one or more of your tires is signifi- ously illuminated because the
cantly under-inflated. The low tire TPMS sensor is not mounted on
pressure position telltale light will the spare wheel.
indicate which tire is significantly
under-inflated by illuminating the cor-
responding position light.
6 11
✽ NOTICE TPMS (Tire Pressure

The spare tire is not equipped with a WARNING - Low pressure Monitoring System)
tire pressure sensor. damage malfunction indicator
Significantly low tire pressure
makes the vehicle unstable and
CAUTION can contribute to loss of vehicle The TPMS malfunction indicator will
In winter or cold weather, the control and increased braking illuminate after it blinks for approxi-
low tire pressure telltale may distances. mately one minute when there is a
illuminate if the tire pressure problem with the Tire Pressure
Continued driving on low pres- Monitoring System.
was adjusted to the recom- sure tires can cause the tires to
mended tire inflation pressure overheat and fail. We recommend that the system be
in warm weather. It does not checked by an authorized HYUNDAI
mean your TPMS is malfunction- dealer.
ing because the decreased tem-
perature leads to a lowering of
tire pressure. ✽ NOTICE
When you drive your vehicle If there is a malfunction with the
from a warm area to a cold area TPMS, the low tire pressure position
or from a cold area to a warm telltale will not be displayed even
area, or the outside temperature though the vehicle has an under-
is higher or lower, you should inflated tire.
check the tire inflation pressure
and adjust the tires to the rec-
ommended tire inflation pres-
sure.
6 12
Changing a tire with TPMS If you drive the vehicle for about 10
CAUTION minutes at speeds above 15.5 mph
If you have a flat tire, the low Tire
• The TPMS malfunction indica- Pressure and Position telltales will (25 km/h) after replacing the low
tor may blink for approximate- come on. We recommend that the pressure tire with the spare tire, the
ly 1 minute and then remain system be checked by an authorized below will happen:
continuously illuminated if the HYUNDAI dealer. • The TPMS malfunction indicator
vehicle is moving around elec- may blink for approximately 1
tric power supply cables or minute and then remain continu-
radios transmitter such as at CAUTION ously illuminated because the
police stations, government NEVER use a puncture-repair- TPMS sensor is not mounted on
and public offices, broadcast- ing agent to repair and/or inflate the spare wheel.
ing stations, military installa- a low pressure tire. The tire
tions, airports, or transmitting sealant can damage the tire
towers, etc. This can interfere pressure sensor. If used, you You may not be able identify a low
with normal operation of the will have to replace the tire pres- tire by simply looking at it. Always
Tire Pressure Monitoring sure sensor. use a good quality tire pressure
System (TPMS). gauge to measure the tire's inflation
pressure. Please note that a tire that
• The TPMS malfunction indica- Each wheel is equipped with a tire is hot (from being driven) will have a
tor may blink for approximate- pressure sensor mounted inside the higher pressure measurement than a
ly 1 minute and then remain tire behind the valve stem. You must tire that is cold (from sitting station-
continuously illuminated if use TPMS specific wheels. It is rec- ary for at least 3 hours and driven
snow chains are used or some ommended that you have your tires less than 1 mile (1.6 km) during that
separate electronic devices serviced by an authorized HYUNDAI 3 hour period).
such as notebook computer, dealer.
mobile charger, remote starter Allow the tire to cool before measur-
or navigation etc., are used in ing the inflation pressure. Always be
the vehicle. sure the tire is cold before inflating to
the recommended pressure.
This can interfere with normal
operation of the Tire Pressure
Monitoring System (TPMS).
6 13
A cold tire means the vehicle has This device complies with Part
been sitting for 3 hours and driven for WARNING - Protecting 15 of the FCC rules.
less than 1 mile (1.6 km) in that 3 TPMS
Operation is subject to the following
hour period. Tampering with, modifying, or two conditions:
disabling the Tire Pressure
Monitoring System (TPMS)
WARNING - TPMS components may interfere with
ful interference, and
• The TPMS cannot alert you to the system's ability to warn the 2. This device must accept any inter-
severe and sudden tire dam- driver of low tire pressure con- ference received, including inter-
age caused by external fac- ditions and/or TPMS malfunc- ference that may cause undesired
tors such as nails or road tions. Tampering with, modify- operation.
debris. ing, or disabling the Tire
• If you feel any vehicle instabil- Pressure Monitoring System
(TPMS) components may void CAUTION
ity, immediately take your foot
off the accelerator, apply the the warranty for that portion of Changes or modifications not
brakes gradually and with the vehicle. expressly approved by the party
light force, and slowly move to responsible for compliance
a safe position off the road. could void the user’s authority
to operate the equipment.
6 14
IF YOU HAVE A FLAT TIRE (WITH SPARE TIRE)

Jack and tools Jacking instructions
The jack is provided for emergency WARNING - Changing
tire changing only. tires
To prevent the jack from “rattling” • Never attempt vehicle repairs
while the vehicle is in motion, store it in the traffic lanes of a public
properly. road or highway.
Follow jacking instructions to reduce • Always move the vehicle com-
the possibility of personal injury. pletely off the road and onto
the shoulder before trying to
change a tire. The jack should
be used on level firm ground.
If you cannot find a firm, level
OAN067007N
place off the road, call a tow-
ing service company for
The jack, jack handle, and wheel lug assistance.
nut wrench are stored in the luggage • Be sure to use the correct
compartment. Pull up the luggage front and rear jacking posi-
box cover to find these equipment. tions on the vehicle; never use
(1) Jack handle the bumpers or any other part
(2) Jack of the vehicle for jack support.
(3) Wheel lug nut wrench • The vehicle can roll off the
(4) Socket jack causing serious injury or
death. No person should
place any portion of their
body under a vehicle that is
supported only by a jack; use
vehicle support stands.
(Continued)
6 15
(Continued) Removing and storing the

spare tire
• Do not start or run the engine
while the vehicle is on the
jack.
• Do not allow anyone to remain
in the vehicle while it is on the
jack.
• Make sure any children pres-
ent are in a secure place away
from the road and from the
vehicle to be raised with the ODM062005
jack. 3. Connect the socket and wheel lug
OANNDR2005
nut wrench.
4. Loosen the bolt enough to lower
Your spare tire is stored underneath the spare tire.
your vehicle, directly below the cargo
area. Turn the wrench counterclockwise
until the spare tire reaches the
To remove the spare tire: ground.
1. Open the liftgate (tailgate).
2. Remove the cover with coin or flat-
head screwdriver.
6 16
WARNING - Storing the

spare tire
Ensure the spare tire retainer is
properly aligned with the center
of the spare tire to prevent the
spare tire from “rattling”.
Otherwise, it may cause the
spare tire to fall off the carrier
and lead to an accident.
ODM062006 ODM062007
5. After the spare tire reaches the To store the spare tire:
ground, continue to turn the 1. Lay the tire on the ground with the
wrench counterclockwise, and valve stem facing up.
draw the spare tire outside. Never
rotate the wrench excessively, oth- 2. Place the wheel under the vehicle
erwise the spare tire carrier may and install the retainer (1) through
be damaged. the wheel center.
6. Remove the retainer (1) from the 3. Turn the wrench clockwise until it
center of the spare tire clicks.
6 17
Changing tires
WARNING - Changing a
tire
• To prevent vehicle movement
while changing a tire, always
set the parking brake fully,
and always block the wheel
diagonally opposite the wheel
being changed.
• We recommend that the
wheels of the vehicle be
1VQA4023 blocked, and that no person
1VQA4022 4. Remove the wheel lug nut wrench, remain in a vehicle that is
jack, jack handle, and spare tire being jacked.
1. Park on a level surface and apply from the vehicle.
the parking brake firmly. 5. Block both the front and rear of the
2. Shift the shift lever into P (Park). wheel that is diagonally opposite
3. Activate the hazard warning flash- the jack position.
er.
6 18
ODM062008 OAN067009N ODM062010

6. Loosen the wheel lug nuts coun- 7. Place the jack at the front or rear 8. Insert the jack handle into the jack
terclockwise one turn each, but do jacking position closest to the tire and turn it clockwise, raising the
not remove any nut until the tire you are changing. Place the jack vehicle until the tire just clears the
has been raised off the ground. at the designated locations under ground. This measurement is
the frame. approximately 1.2 in (30 mm).
Before removing the wheel lug
nuts, make sure the vehicle is sta-
WARNING - Jack location ble and that there is no chance for
To reduce the possibility of movement or slippage.
injury, be sure to use only the
jack provided with the vehicle
and in the correct jack position;
never use any other part of the
vehicle for jack support.
6 19
9. Loosen the wheel nuts and 10. To reinstall the wheel, hold it on
remove them with your fingers. WARNING the studs, put the wheel nuts on
Slide the wheel off the studs and Wheels may have sharp edges. the studs and tighten them finger
lay it flat so it cannot roll away. To Handle them carefully to avoid tight. The nuts should be installed
put the wheel on the hub, pick up possible severe injury. Before with their tapered small diameter
the spare tire, line up the holes putting the wheel into place, be ends directed inward. Jiggle the
with the studs and slide the wheel sure that there is nothing on the tire to be sure it is completely
onto them. If this is difficult, tip the hub or wheel (such as mud, tar, seated, then tighten the nuts as
wheel slightly and get the top hole gravel, etc.) that prevents the much as possible with your fin-
in the wheel lined up with the top wheel from fitting solidly gers again.
stud. Then jiggle the wheel back against the hub. 11. Lower the car to the ground by
and forth until the wheel can be turning the wheel nut wrench
If there is, remove it. If there is
slid over the other studs. counterclockwise.
not good contact on the mount-
ing surface between the wheel
and hub, the wheel nuts could
come loose and cause the loss
of a wheel. Loss of a wheel may
result in loss of control of the
vehicle. This may cause serious
injury or death.
6 20
If you have a tire gauge, remove the

valve cap and check the air pressure. CAUTION
If the pressure is lower than recom- Your vehicle has metric threads
mended, drive slowly to the nearest on the wheel studs and nuts.
service station and inflate to the cor- Make certain during wheel
rect pressure. If it is too high, adjust it removal that the same nuts that
until it is correct. Always reinstall the were removed are reinstalled -
valve cap after checking or adjusting or, if replaced, that nuts with
tire pressure. If the cap is not metric threads and the same
replaced, air may leak from the tire. If chamfer configuration are used.
you lose a valve cap, buy another and Installation of a non-metric
ODM062011 install it as soon as possible. thread nut on a metric stud or
After you have changed wheels, vice-versa will not secure the
Then position the wrench as shown wheel to the hub properly and
in the drawing and tighten the wheel always secure the flat tire in its place
and return the jack and tools to their will damage the stud so that it
nuts. Be sure the socket is seated must be replaced.
completely over the nut. Do not stand proper storage locations.
on the wrench handle or use an Note that most lug nuts do not
extension pipe over the wrench han- have metric threads. Be sure to
dle. Go around the wheel tightening use extreme care in checking
every other nut until they are all tight. for thread style before installing
Then double-check each nut for aftermarket lug nuts or wheels.
tightness. After changing wheels, If in doubt, consult an author-
have an authorized HYUNDAI dealer ized HYUNDAI dealer.
tighten the wheel nuts to their proper
torque as soon as possible.
Wheel nut tightening torque:

Steel wheel & aluminum alloy wheel:
65~79 lbf·ft (9~11 kgf·m)
6 21
Important - use of temporary

WARNING - Wheel studs compact spare tire WARNING
If the studs are damaged, they If your vehicle is equipped with a com- The temporary compact spare
may lose their ability to retain pact spare tire, it will take up less tire is for emergency use only.
the wheel. This could lead to the space than a regular-size tire. This tire Do not operate your vehicle on
loss of the wheel and a collision is smaller than a conventional tire and this compact spare at speeds
resulting in serious injuries. is designed for temporary use only. over 50 mph (80 km/h). The orig-
inal tire should be repaired or
replaced as soon as is possible
To prevent the jack, jack handle, CAUTION to avoid failure of the spare
wheel lug nut wrench and spare tire • You should drive carefully possibly leading to personal
from rattling while the vehicle is in when the temporary compact injury or death.
motion, store them properly. spare is in use. The compact
spare should be replaced by
the proper conventional tire The compact spare should be inflat-
WARNING - Inadequate and rim at the first opportunity. ed to 60 psi (420 kPa).
spare tire • Do not drive a vehicle with
pressure more than one compact spare ✽ NOTICE
Check the inflation pressures tire in use at the same time.
as soon as possible after
Check the inflation pressure after
installing the spare tire. Adjust
installing the spare tire. Adjust it to
it to the specified pressure, if
the specified pressure, as necessary.
necessary. Refer to “Tires and
wheels” section 8.
6 22
When using a temporary compact • Do not use tire chains on the com-
spare tire, observe the following pre- pact spare tire. Because of the small-
cautions: er size, a tire chain will not fit proper-
• Under no circumstances should you ly. This could damage the vehicle
exceed 50 mph (80 km/h); higher and result in loss of the chain.
speeds could damage the tire. • Do not use the compact spare tire
• Ensure that you drive slowly enough on any other vehicle because this
for the road conditions to avoid all tire has been designed especially
hazards. Any road hazard, such as a for your vehicle.
pothole or debris, could seriously • The compact spare tire’s tread life is
damage the compact spare. shorter than a regular tire. Inspect
• Any continuous road use of this tire your compact spare tire regularly
could result in tire failure, loss of and replace worn compact spare
vehicle control, and possible per- tires with the same size and design,
sonal injury. mounted on the same wheel.
• Do not exceed the vehicle’s maxi- • The compact spare tire should not
mum load rating or the load-carry- be used on any other wheels, nor
ing capacity shown on the sidewall should standard tires, snow tires,
of the compact spare tire. wheel covers or trim rings be used
with the compact spare wheel. If
• Avoid driving over obstacles. The such use is attempted, damage to
compact spare tire diameter is these items or other car compo-
smaller than the diameter of a con- nents may occur.
ventional tire and reduces the
ground clearance approximately 1 • Do not use more than one compact
inch (25 mm), which could result in spare tire at a time.
damage to the vehicle. • Do not tow a trailer while the com-
• Do not take the vehicle through an pact spare tire is installed.
automatic car wash while the com-
pact spare tire is installed.
6 23
Jack label
■ Example 1. Model Name
• Type A
2. Maximum allowable load
3. When using the jack, set your
parking brake.
4. When using the jack, stop the
engine.
5. Do not get under a vehicle that is
supported by a jack.
OTQ044219
• Type B 6. The designated locations under
the frame
7. When supporting the vehicle, the
base plate of jack must be vertical
under the lifting point.
8. Shift into Reverse gear on vehicles
with manual transaxle or move the
shift lever to the P position on
OHYK064002
vehicles with automatic transaxle.
❈ The actual Jack label in the vehicle may differ from the illustration. For 9. The jack should be used on firm
more detailed specifications, refer to the label attached to the jack. level ground.
10. Jack manufacturer
11. Production date
12. Representative company and
address
6 24
TOWING
Towing service On AWD vehicles, your vehicle must
be towed with a wheel lift and dollies
A or flatbed equipment with all the
wheels off the ground.
CAUTION
The AWD vehicle should never
B be towed with the wheels on the
ground. This can cause serious OUN046030
damage to the transaxle or the
AWD system.
dolly
C
On 2WD vehicles, it is acceptable to
tow the vehicle with the rear wheels
on the ground (without dollies) and
OXM069028
the front wheels off the ground.
If any of the loaded wheels or sus-
OCM054034
If emergency towing is necessary, pension components are damaged
we recommend having it done by an or the vehicle is being towed with the
authorized HYUNDAI dealer or a front wheels on the ground, use a CAUTION
commercial tow-truck service. towing dolly under the front wheels. • Do not tow with sling-type
Proper lifting and towing procedures When being towed by a commercial equipment. Use wheel lift or
are necessary to prevent damage to tow truck and wheel dollies are not flatbed equipment.
the vehicle. The use of wheel dollies used, the front of the vehicle should
or flatbed is recommended. • Do not tow the vehicle back-
always be lifted, not the rear. wards with the front wheels on
For trailer towing guidelines informa- the ground as this may cause
tion, refer to "Trailer towing" in chap- damage to the vehicle.
ter 5.
6 25
When towing your vehicle in an Removable towing hook Emergency towing

emergency without wheel dollies : (if equipped) ■ Rear
1. Set the ignition switch in the ACC ■ Rear
position.
2. Place the shift lever in N (Neutral).
3. Release the parking brake.
CAUTION
Failure to place the transaxle
shift lever in N (Neutral) may
cause internal damage to the
transaxle. ODM066015L
ODM066013L
If towing is necessary, we recom-
1. Open the talegate, and remove mend you to have it done by an
the towing hook from the tool authorized HYUNDAI dealer or a
case. commercial tow truck service.
2. Remove the hole cover pressing
the lower part of the cover on the
bumper.
3. Install the towing hook by turning it
clockwise into the hole until it is
fully secured.
4. Remove the towing hook and
install the cover after use.
6 26
If towing service is not available in an • Before emergency towing, check

emergency, your vehicle may be that the hook is not broken or dam- WARNING
temporarily towed using a cable or aged. Use extreme caution when tow-
chain secured to the emergency tow- • Fasten the towing cable or chain ing the vehicle.
ing hook attached to the front (or securely to the hook. • Avoid sudden starts or erratic
under the rear) of the vehicle.
• Do not jerk the hook. Apply steady driving maneuvers which
Use extreme caution when towing the and even force. would place excessive stress
vehicle. A driver must be in the vehi- on the emergency towing hook
cle to steer it and operate the brakes. • To avoid damaging the hook, do not
pull from the side or at a vertical and towing cable or chain. The
Towing in this manner may be done angle. Always pull straight ahead. hook and towing cable or
only on hard-surfaced roads for a chain may break and cause
short distance and at low speeds. serious injury or damage.
Also, the wheels, axles, power train, • If the disabled vehicle cannot
steering and brakes must all be in be moved, do not forcibly con-
good condition. tinue the towing. Contact an
• Do not use the tow hooks to pull a authorized HYUNDAI dealer or
vehicle out of mud, sand or other a commercial tow truck serv-
conditions from which the vehicle ice for assistance.
cannot be driven out under its own • Tow the vehicle as straight
power. ahead as possible.
• Avoid towing a vehicle heavier than • Keep away from the vehicle
the vehicle doing the towing. during towing.
• The drivers of both vehicles should
communicate with each other fre-
quently.
6 27
Emergency towing precautions

CAUTION - Automatic
• Turn the ignition switch to ACC so transaxle
the steering wheel isn’t locked.
• If the car is being towed with all
• Place the transaxle shift lever in N four wheels on the ground, it
(Neutral). can be towed only from the
• Release the parking bake. front. Be sure that the transaxle
• Press the brake pedal with more is in neutral. Be sure the steer-
force than normal since you will ing is unlocked by placing the
have reduced brake performance. ignition switch in the ACC posi-
• More steering effort will be tion. A driver must be in the
required because the power steer- towed vehicle to operate the
ing system will be disabled. steering and brakes.
• If you are driving down a long hill, • To avoid serious damage to
the brakes may overheat and brake the automatic transaxle, limit
performance will be reduced. Stop the vehicle speed to 10 mph
often and let the brakes cool off. (15 km/h) and drive less than 1
mile (1.5 km) when towing.
• Before towing, check under
your vehicle for leaking auto-
matic transaxle fluid. If the
automatic transaxle fluid is
leaking, a flatbed equipment
or towing dolly must be used.
6 28
Maintenance
Engine compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-3 Wiper blades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-38

Maintenance services . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-4 • Blade inspection. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-38
• Owner's responsibility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-4 • Blade replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-38
• Owner maintenance precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-5 Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-41
Owner maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-6 • For best battery service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-41
• Owner maintenance schedule. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-6 • Battery recharging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-42
Scheduled maintenance service. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-8 • Reset items . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-43
Explanation of scheduled maintenance items . . . 7-23 Tires and wheels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-44
Engine oil. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-26 • Tire care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-44
• Checking the engine oil level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-26 • Recommended cold tire inflation pressures . . . . . . . 7-44
• Changing the engine oil and filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-27 • Checking tire inflation pressure. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-45
• Tire rotation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-46
Engine coolant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-28
• Wheel alignment and tire balance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-47
• Checking the coolant level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-28
• Tire replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-48
• Changing the coolant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-30
• Wheel replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-49
Brake fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-31 • Tire traction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-49
• Checking the brake fluid level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-31 • Tire maintenance. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-50
Washer fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-33 • Tire sidewall labeling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-50
• Checking the washer fluid level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-33 • Tire terminology and definitions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-54
Parking brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-33 • All season tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-57
• Checking the parking brake. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-33 • Summer tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-57 7
Air cleaner. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-34 • Snow tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-57
• Filter replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-34 • Tire chains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-57
Climate control air filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-36 • Radial-ply tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-58
• Filter inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-36 • Low aspect ratio tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-59
• Filter replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-36
Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-60
• Fuse/Relay panel description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-64
Light bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-72
• Headlamp, Front position lamp, Front turn signal
lamp, Front fog lamp bulb and Daytime running
lamp replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-73
• Side repeater lamp replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-76
• Rear combination lamp bulb replacement . . . . . . . 7-76
• High mounted stop lamp replacement . . . . . . . . . . 7-79
• License plate lamp bulb replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-80
• Interior lamp bulb replacement. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-81
Appearance care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-82
• Exterior care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-82
• Interior care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-87
Emission control system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-89
• Crankcase emission control system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-89
• Evaporative emission control system. . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-90
• Exhaust emission control system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-90
California perchlorate notice . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-93
7
Maintenance
ENGINE COMPARTMENT
■ Gasoline Engine (Theta II 2.4L) - GDI
1. Engine coolant reservoir

2. Engine oil filler cap
3. Brake fluid reservoir
4. Air cleaner
5. Fuse box
6. Negative battery terminal
7. Positive battery terminal
■ Gasoline Engine (Theta II 2.0L) - T-GDI 8. Radiator cap
9. Engine oil dipstick
10. Windshield washer fluid reservoir
❈ The actual engine room in the vehicle may differ from the illustration.
OAN077003N/OAN077004N
7 3
Maintenance
MAINTENANCE SERVICES
You should exercise the utmost care Owner’s responsibility We recommend you have your vehi-
to prevent damage to your vehicle cle maintained and repaired by an
and injury to yourself whenever per- authorized HYUNDAI dealer. An
forming any maintenance or inspec- ✽ NOTICE authorized HYUNDAI dealer meets
tion procedures. Maintenance Service and Record HYUNDAI’s high service quality
Should you have any doubts con- Retention are the owner's responsi- standards and receives technical
cerning the inspection or servicing of bility. support from HYUNDAI in order to
your vehicle, we strongly recom- provide you with a high level of serv-
mend that you have an authorized You should retain documents that ice satisfaction.
HYUNDAI dealer perform this work. show proper maintenance has been
performed on your vehicle in accor-
An authorized HYUNDAI dealer has dance with the scheduled mainte-
factory-trained technicians and gen- nance service charts shown on the
uine HYUNDAI parts to service your following pages. You need this infor-
vehicle properly. For expert advice mation to establish your compliance
and quality service, see an author- with the servicing and maintenance
ized HYUNDAI dealer. requirements of your vehicle war-
Inadequate, incomplete or insuffi- ranties.
cient servicing may result in opera- Detailed warranty information is pro-
tional problems with your vehicle that vided in your Owner’s Handbook &
could lead to vehicle damage, an Warranty Information booklet.
accident, or personal injury.
Repairs and adjustments required as
a result of improper maintenance or
a lack of required maintenance are
not covered.
7 4
Maintenance
Owner maintenance precau-

tions WARNING -
Improper or incomplete service may
Maintenance work
result in problems. This section gives • Performing maintenance work
instructions only for the maintenance on a vehicle can be danger-
items that are easy to perform. ous. You can be seriously
injured while performing some
As explained earlier in this section,
maintenance procedures. If
several procedures can be done only
you lack sufficient knowledge
by an authorized HYUNDAI dealer
and experience or the proper
with special tools.
tools and equipment to do the
work, have it done by an
✽ NOTICE authorized HYUNDAI dealer.
Improper owner maintenance dur- • Working under the hood with
ing the warranty period may affect the engine running is danger-
warranty coverage. For details, read ous. It becomes even more
the separate Owner’s Handbook & dangerous when you wear
Warranty Information booklet pro- jewelry or loose clothing.
vided with the vehicle. If you're These can become entangled
unsure about any servicing or main- in moving parts and result in
tenance procedure, have it done by injury. Therefore, if you must
an authorized HYUNDAI dealer. run the engine while working
under the hood, make certain
that you remove all jewelry
(especially rings, bracelets,
watches, and necklaces) and
all neckties, scarves, and sim-
ilar loose clothing before get-
ting near the engine or cooling
fans.
7 5
Maintenance
OWNER MAINTENANCE
The following lists are vehicle checks Owner maintenance schedule While operating your vehicle:
and inspections that should be per- • Note any changes in the sound of
formed by the owner or an author-
When you stop for fuel:
the exhaust or any smell of
ized HYUNDAI dealer at the frequen- • Check the engine oil level.
exhaust fumes in the vehicle.
cies indicated to help ensure safe, • Check coolant level in coolant
dependable operation of your vehi- • Check for vibrations in the steering
reservoir.
cle. wheel. Notice any increased steer-
• Check the windshield washer fluid ing effort or looseness in the steer-
Any adverse conditions should be level. ing wheel, or change in its straight-
brought to the attention of your deal- • Look for low or under-inflated tires. ahead position.
er as soon as possible.
• Notice if your vehicle constantly
These Owner Maintenance Checks turns slightly or “pulls” to one side
are generally not covered by war- WARNING when traveling on smooth, level
ranties and you may be charged for Be careful when checking your road.
labor, parts and lubricants used. engine coolant level when the
engine is hot. Scalding hot • When stopping, listen and check
coolant and steam may blow for unusual sounds, pulling to one
out under pressure. This could side, increased brake pedal travel
cause burns or other serious or “hard-to-push” brake pedal.
injury. • If any slipping or changes in the
operation of your transaxle occurs,
check the transaxle fluid level.
• Check automatic transaxle P
(Park) function.
• Check parking brake.
• Check for fluid leaks under your
vehicle (water dripping from the air
conditioning system during or after
use is normal).
7 6
Maintenance
At least monthly: At least twice a year At least once a year :

• Check coolant level in the engine (i.e., every Spring and Fall) : • Clean body and door drain holes.
coolant reservoir. • Check radiator, heater and air con- • Lubricate door hinges and checks,
• Check the operation of all exterior ditioning hoses for leaks or dam- and hood hinges.
lights, including the stoplights, turn age.
• Lubricate door and hood locks and
signals and hazard warning flash- • Check windshield washer spray latches.
ers. and wiper operation. Clean wiper
• Lubricate door rubber weather-
• Check the inflation pressures of all blades with clean cloth dampened
strips.
tires including the spare. with washer fluid.
• Check the air conditioning system.
• Check headlight alignment.
• Inspect and lubricate automatic
• Check muffler, exhaust pipes,
transaxle linkage and controls.
shields and clamps.
• Clean battery and terminals.
• Check the lap/shoulder belts for
wear and function. • Check the brake fluid level.
• Check for worn tires and loose
wheel lug nuts.
7 7
Maintenance
SCHEDULED MAINTENANCE SERVICE

Follow Normal Maintenance If your vehicle is operated under the
Schedule if the vehicle is usually above conditions, you should
operated where none of the following inspect, replace or refill more fre-
conditions apply. If any of the follow- quently than the following Normal
ing conditions apply, follow Maintenance Schedule. After 120
Maintenance Under Severe Usage months or 150,000 miles (240,000
Conditions. km) continue to follow the prescribed
• Repeated short distance driving. maintenance intervals.
• Driving in dusty conditions or
sandy areas.
• Extensive use of brakes.
• Driving in areas where salt or other
corrosive materials are being used.
• Driving on rough or muddy roads.
• Driving in mountainous areas.
• Extended periods of idling or low
speed operation.
• Driving for a prolonged period in
cold temperatures and/or extreme-
ly humid climates.
• More than 50% driving in heavy
city traffic during hot weather
above 90°F (32°C).
7 8
Maintenance
NORMAL MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE

The following maintenance services must be performed to ensure good emission control and performance.
Keep receipts for all vehicle emission services to protect your warranty. Where both mileage and time are shown, the
frequency of service is determined by whichever occurs first.
7,500 miles (12,000 km) or 6 months 15,000 miles (24,000 km) or 12 months
❑ Rotate tire ❑ Rotate tire
❑ Inspect battery condition ❑ Inspect battery condition
❑ Inspect air cleaner filter ❑ Inspect air cleaner filter
❑ Inspect vacuum hose ❑ Inspect vacuum hose
❑ Replace engine oil and filter (2.4 GDI) *6 ❑ Inspect air conditioning refrigerant
(7,500 miles (12,000 km) or 12 months) ❑ Inspect brake hoses and lines
❑ Add fuel additive *1 ❑ Inspect drive shafts and boots
(7,500 miles (12,000 km) or 12 months) ❑ Inspect exhaust pipe and muffler
❑ Inspect front brake disc/pads, calipers
❈ Inspect : Inspect and if necessary, adjust, correct, clean or replace. ❑ Inspect propeller shaft (AWD)
*1 : If TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline is not available, one bottle of addi- ❑ Inspect rear brake disc/pads
tive is recommended. Additives are available from your authorized ❑ Inspect steering gear box, linkage & boots/lower arm ball
HYUNDAI dealer along with information on how to use them. Do not
mix other additives. joint, upper arm ball joint
*6 : Engine oil (2.0 TGDI) At first, replace at 3,000 miles (5,000 km) or ❑ Inspect suspension mounting bolts
6 months, after that, every 5,000 miles (8,000 km) or 6 months. ❑ Replace climate control air filter
(for evaporator and blower unit)
❑ Replace engine oil and filter (2.4 GDI) *6
(15,000 miles (24,000 km) or 24 months)
❑ Add fuel additive *1
7 9
Maintenance
NORMAL MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE (CONT.)

❑ Inspect air cleaner filter ❑ Inspect vacuum hose
❑ Inspect vacuum hose ❑ Inspect air conditioning refrigerant
❑ Replace engine oil and filter (2.4 GDI) *6 ❑ Inspect brake hoses and lines
(22,500 miles (36,000 km) or 36 months) ❑ Inspect drive shafts and boots
❑ Add fuel additive *1 ❑ Inspect exhaust pipe and muffler
❑ Inspect propeller shaft (AWD)
❈ Inspect : Inspect and if necessary, adjust, correct, clean or replace.
❑ Inspect rear brake disc/pads
*1 : If TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline is not available, one bottle of addi-
❑ Inspect steering gear box, linkage & boots/lower arm ball
tive is recommended. Additives are available from your authorized joint, upper arm ball joint
HYUNDAI dealer along with information on how to use them. Do not ❑ Inspect suspension mounting bolts
mix other additives. ❑ Inspect brake fluid
*2 : Fuel filter & Fuel tank air filter are considered to be maintenance ❑ Inspect fuel filter *2
free but periodic inspection is recommended for this maintenance ❑ Inspect fuel lines, fuel hoses and connections
schedule depends on fuel quality. If there are some important safe- ❑ Inspect fuel tank air filter (if equipped) *2
ty matters like fuel flow restriction, surging, loss of power, hard ❑ Inspect parking brake
starting problem etc, replace the fuel filter immediately regardless
of maintenance schedule and consult an authorized HYUNDAI
❑ Inspect vapor hose and fuel filler cap, fuel tank
dealer for details. ❑ Replace climate control air filter
*6 : Engine oil (2.0 TGDI) At first, replace at 3,000 miles (5,000 km) or (for evaporator and blower unit)
6 months, after that, every 5,000 miles (8,000 km) or 6 months. ❑ Replace air cleaner filter
7 10
Maintenance

❑ Inspect rear axle oil (AWD) *3 ❑ Inspect air conditioning refrigerant
❑ Inspect transfer case oil (AWD) *3 ❑ Inspect brake hoses and lines
❑ Replace engine oil and filter (2.4 GDI) *6 ❑ Inspect drive shafts and boots
❑ Add fuel additive *1 ❑ Inspect front brake disc/pads, calipers
(37,500 miles (60,000 km) or 60 months) ❑ Inspect propeller shaft (AWD)
❈ Inspect : Inspect and if necessary, adjust, correct, clean or replace. ❑ Inspect steering gear box, linkage & boots/lower arm ball
*1 : If TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline is not available, one bottle of addi- joint, upper arm ball joint
tive is recommended. Additives are available from your authorized ❑ Inspect suspension mounting bolts
HYUNDAI dealer along with information on how to use them. Do not
mix other additives.
❑ Replace climate control air filter
*3 : Transfer case oil and rear axle oil should be changed anytime they (for evaporator and blower unit)
have been submerged in water. ❑ Replace spark plugs (iridium coated - 2.0 TGDI)
*6 : Engine oil (2.0 TGDI) At first, replace at 3,000 miles (5,000 km) or ❑ Replace engine oil and filter (2.4 GDI) *6
6 months, after that, every 5,000 miles (8,000 km) or 6 months. (45,000 miles (72,000 km) or 72 months)
7 11
Maintenance

❑ Replace engine oil and filter (2.4 GDI) *6 ❑ Inspect brake hoses and lines
(52,500 miles (84,000 km) or 84 months) ❑ Inspect drive shafts and boots
❑ Add fuel additive *1 ❑ Inspect exhaust pipe and muffler
(52,500 miles (84,000 km) or 84 months) ❑ Inspect front brake disc/pads, calipers
tive is recommended. Additives are available from your authorized joint, upper arm ball joint
HYUNDAI dealer along with information on how to use them. Do not ❑ Inspect suspension mounting bolts
mix other additives. ❑ Inspect brake fluid
*6 : Engine oil (2.0 TGDI) At first, replace at 3,000 miles (5,000 km) or ❑ Inspect fuel filter *2
6 months, after that, every 5,000 miles (8,000 km) or 6 months.
❑ Inspect fuel lines, fuel hoses and connections
❑ Inspect fuel tank air filter (if equipped) *2
❑ Inspect parking brake
❑ Inspect vapor hose and fuel filler cap, fuel tank
❑ Inspect valve clearance *4
❑ Inspect drive belts
(First, 60,000 miles (96,000 km) or 72 months
after that, every 15,000 miles (24,000 km) or 24 months) *5
(Continued)
7 12
Maintenance

(Continued) 67,500 miles (108,000 km) or 54 months
❑ Replace climate control air filter ❑ Rotate tire
(for evaporator and blower unit) ❑ Inspect battery condition
❑ Replace air cleaner filter ❑ Inspect air cleaner filter
❑ Replace engine oil and filter (2.4 GDI) *6 ❑ Inspect vacuum hose
(60,000 miles (96,000 km) or 96 months) ❑ Replace engine oil and filter (2.4 GDI) *6
❑ Add fuel additive *1 (67,500 miles (108,000 km) or 108 months)
(60,000 miles (96,000 km) or 96 months) ❑ Add fuel additive *1
❑ Replace coolant (67,500 miles (108,000 km) or 108 months)
after that, every 30,000 miles (48,000 km) or 24 months)
❈ Inspect : Inspect and if necessary, adjust, correct, clean or replace. *1 : If TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline is not available, one bottle of addi-
*1 : If TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline is not available, one bottle of additive is recommended. Additives are available from your authorized
tive is recommended. Additives are available from your authorized HYUNDAI dealer along with information on how to use them. Do not
HYUNDAI dealer along with information on how to use them. Do mix other additives.
not mix other additives. *6 : Engine oil (2.0 TGDI) At first, replace at 3,000 miles (5,000 km) or
*2 : Fuel filter & Fuel tank air filter are considered to be maintenance 6 months, after that, every 5,000 miles (8,000 km) or 6 months.
free but periodic inspection is recommended for this maintenance
schedule depends on fuel quality. If there are some important safe-
ty matters like fuel flow restriction, surging, loss of power, hard
dealer for details.
*4 : Inspect for excessive tappet noise and/or engine vibration and
adjust if necessary.
*5 : The drive belt should be replaced when cracks occur or tension is
reduced excessively.
*6 : Engine oil (2.0 TGDI) At first, replace at 3,000 miles (5,000 km) or
7 13
Maintenance

❑ Inspect air conditioning refrigerant ❑ Replace engine oil and filter (2.4 GDI) *6
❑ Inspect brake hoses and lines (82,500 miles (132,000 km) or 132 months)
❑ Inspect drive shafts and boots ❑ Add fuel additive *1
❑ Inspect exhaust pipe and muffler (82,500 miles (132,000 km) or 132 months)
❑ Inspect rear brake disc/pads ❈ Inspect : Inspect and if necessary, adjust, correct, clean or replace.
❑ Inspect steering gear box, linkage & boots/lower arm ball *1 : If TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline is not available, one bottle of addi-
joint, upper arm ball joint tive is recommended. Additives are available from your authorized
HYUNDAI dealer along with information on how to use them. Do
❑ Inspect suspension mounting bolts not mix other additives.
❑ Inspect rear axle oil (AWD) *3 *3 : Transfer case oil and rear axle oil should be changed anytime they
❑ Inspect transfer case oil (AWD) *3 have been submerged in water.
❑ Inspect drive belts *5 : The drive belt should be replaced when cracks occur or tension is
(First, 60,000 miles (96,000 km) or 72 months reduced excessively.
after that, every 15,000 miles (24,000 km) or 24 months) *5 *6 : Engine oil (2.0 TGDI) At first, replace at 3,000 miles (5,000 km) or
❑ Replace climate control air filter 6 months, after that, every 5,000 miles (8,000 km) or 6 months.
7 14
Maintenance

90,000 miles (144,000 km) or 72 months (Continued)
❑ Rotate tire
❑ Replace spark plugs (iridium coated - 2.0 TGDI)
❑ Inspect battery condition
❑ Replace air cleaner filter
❑ Inspect vacuum hose
❑ Inspect air conditioning refrigerant
❑ Inspect brake hoses and lines
❑ Replace coolant
❑ Inspect drive shafts and boots
❑ Inspect exhaust pipe and muffler
after that, every 30,000 miles (48,000 km) or 24 months)
❑ Inspect steering gear box, linkage & boots/lower arm ball ❈ Inspect : Inspect and if necessary, adjust, correct, clean or replace.
joint, upper arm ball joint *1 : If TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline is not available, one bottle of addi-
❑ Inspect suspension mounting bolts tive is recommended. Additives are available from your authorized
❑ Inspect brake fluid HYUNDAI dealer along with information on how to use them. Do
❑ Inspect fuel filter *2 not mix other additives.
*2 : Fuel filter & Fuel tank air filter are considered to be maintenance
❑ Inspect fuel lines, fuel hoses and connections
free but periodic inspection is recommended for this maintenance
❑ Inspect fuel tank air filter (if equipped) *2 schedule depends on fuel quality. If there are some important safe-
❑ Inspect parking brake ty matters like fuel flow restriction, surging, loss of power, hard
❑ Inspect vapor hose and fuel filler cap, fuel tank starting problem etc, replace the fuel filter immediately regardless
❑ Inspect drive belts of maintenance schedule and consult an authorized HYUNDAI
dealer for details.
(for evaporator and blower unit) 6 months, after that, every 5,000 miles (8,000 km) or 6 months.
(Continued)
7 15
Maintenance

❑ Replace engine oil and filter (2.4 GDI) *6 ❑ Inspect air conditioning refrigerant
(97,500 miles (156,000 km) or 156 months) ❑ Inspect brake hoses and lines
❑ Add fuel additive *1 ❑ Inspect drive shafts and boots
❈ Inspect : Inspect and if necessary, adjust, correct, clean or replace. ❑ Inspect propeller shaft (AWD)
*1 : If TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline is not available, one bottle of addi- ❑ Inspect rear brake disc/pads
tive is recommended. Additives are available from your authorized ❑ Inspect steering gear box, linkage & boots/lower arm ball
HYUNDAI dealer along with information on how to use them. Do joint, upper arm ball joint
not mix other additives.
❑ Inspect suspension mounting bolts
❑ Inspect drive belts
*6 : Engine oil (2.0 TGDI) At first, replace at 3,000 miles (5,000 km) or (First, 60,000 miles (96,000 km) or 72 months
6 months, after that, every 5,000 miles (8,000 km) or 6 months. after that, every 15,000 miles (24,000 km) or 24 months) *5
❑ Replace spark plugs (iridium coated) - (2.4 GDI)
7 16
Maintenance

❑ Inspect rear axle oil (AWD) *3 ❑ Inspect brake hoses and lines
❑ Inspect transfer case oil (AWD) *3 ❑ Inspect drive shafts and boots
❑ Replace engine oil and filter (2.4 GDI) *6 ❑ Inspect exhaust pipe and muffler
(112,500 miles (180,000 km) or 180 months) ❑ Inspect front brake disc/pads, calipers
❑ Add fuel additive *1 ❑ Inspect propeller shaft (AWD)
(112,500 miles (180,000 km) or 180 months) ❑ Inspect rear brake disc/pads
joint, upper arm ball joint
tive is recommended. Additives are available from your authorized ❑ Inspect brake fluid
HYUNDAI dealer along with information on how to use them. Do ❑ Inspect fuel filter *2
not mix other additives. ❑ Inspect fuel lines, fuel hoses and connections
*3 : Transfer case oil and rear axle oil should be changed anytime they ❑ Inspect fuel tank air filter (if equipped) *2
have been submerged in water. ❑ Inspect parking brake
*5 : The drive belt should be replaced when cracks occur or tension is ❑ Inspect vapor hose and fuel filler cap, fuel tank
reduced excessively. ❑ Inspect valve clearance *4
*6 : Engine oil (2.0 TGDI) At first, replace at 3,000 miles (5,000 km) or (120,000 miles (192,000 km) or 144 months)
6 months, after that, every 5,000 miles (8,000 km) or 6 months. ❑ Inspect drive belts
(Continued)
7 17
Maintenance

(Continued) 127,500 miles (204,000 km) or 102 months
❑ Replace air cleaner filter ❑ Rotate tire

❑ Replace engine oil and filter (2.4 GDI) *6 ❑ Inspect battery condition
(120,000 miles (192,000 km) or 192 months) ❑ Inspect air cleaner filter
❑ Replace coolant ❑ Inspect vacuum hose
(First, 60,000 miles (96,000 km) or 60 months ❑ Replace engine oil and filter (2.4 GDI) *6
after that, every 30,000 miles (48,000 km) or 24 months) (127,500 miles (204,000 km) or 204 months)
❑ Add fuel additive *1 ❑ Add fuel additive *1
(120,000 miles (192,000 km) or 192 months) (127,500 miles (204,000 km) or 204 months)
*1 : If TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline is not available, one bottle of addi- ❈ Inspect : Inspect and if necessary, adjust, correct, clean or replace.
tive is recommended. Additives are available from your authorized *1 : If TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline is not available, one bottle of addi-
HYUNDAI dealer along with information on how to use them. Do tive is recommended. Additives are available from your authorized
not mix other additives. HYUNDAI dealer along with information on how to use them. Do
*2 : Fuel filter & Fuel tank air filter are considered to be maintenance not mix other additives.
free but periodic inspection is recommended for this maintenance *6 : Engine oil (2.0 TGDI) At first, replace at 3,000 miles (5,000 km) or
schedule depends on fuel quality. If there are some important safe- 6 months, after that, every 5,000 miles (8,000 km) or 6 months.
dealer for details.
*4 : Inspect for excessive tappet noise and/or engine vibration and
adjust if necessary.
7 18
Maintenance

❑ Inspect air conditioning refrigerant ❑ Replace engine oil and filter (2.4 GDI) *6
❑ Inspect brake hoses and lines (142,500 miles (228,000 km) or 228 months)
❑ Inspect drive shafts and boots ❑ Add fuel additive *1
❑ Inspect exhaust pipe and muffler (142,500 miles (228,000 km) or 228 months)
❑ Inspect propeller shaft (AWD) ❈ Inspect : Inspect and if necessary, adjust, correct, clean or replace.
❑ Inspect rear brake disc/pads *1 : If TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline is not available, one bottle of addi-
❑ Inspect steering gear box, linkage & boots/lower arm ball tive is recommended. Additives are available from your authorized
HYUNDAI dealer along with information on how to use them. Do
joint, upper arm ball joint not mix other additives.
❑ Inspect drive belts reduced excessively.
(First, 60,000 miles (96,000 km) or 72 months *6 : Engine oil (2.0 TGDI) At first, replace at 3,000 miles (5,000 km) or
after that, every 15,000 miles (24,000 km) or 24 months) *5 6 months, after that, every 5,000 miles (8,000 km) or 6 months.
❑ Replace spark plugs (iridium coated - 2.0 TGDI)
7 19
Maintenance

150,000 miles (240,000 km) or 120 months (Continued)
❑ Rotate tire ❑ Replace air cleaner filter
❑ Inspect battery condition ❑ Replace engine oil and filter (2.4 GDI) *6
❑ Inspect vacuum hose (150,000 miles (240,000 km) or 240 months)
❑ Inspect air conditioning refrigerant ❑ Replace coolant
❑ Inspect brake hoses and lines (First, 60,000 miles (96,000 km) or 60 months
❑ Inspect drive shafts and boots after that, every 30,000 miles (48,000 km) or 24 months)
❑ Inspect exhaust pipe and muffler ❑ Add fuel additive *1
❑ Inspect front brake disc/pads, calipers (150,000 miles (240,000 km) or 240 months)
❑ Inspect rear brake disc/pads No check, No service required
❑ Inspect steering gear box, linkage & boots/lower arm ball ❑ Automatic transaxle fluid
joint, upper arm ball joint
❑ Inspect brake fluid tive is recommended. Additives are available from your authorized
❑ Inspect fuel filter *2 HYUNDAI dealer along with information on how to use them. Do
❑ Inspect fuel lines, fuel hoses and connections not mix other additives.
❑ Inspect fuel tank air filter (if equipped) *2 *2 : Fuel filter & Fuel tank air filter are considered to be maintenance
❑ Inspect parking brake free but periodic inspection is recommended for this maintenance
❑ Inspect vapor hose and fuel filler cap, fuel tank schedule depends on fuel quality. If there are some important safe-
❑ Inspect rear axle oil (AWD) *3 starting problem etc, replace the fuel filter immediately regardless
❑ Inspect transfer case oil (AWD) *3 of maintenance schedule and consult an authorized HYUNDAI
❑ Inspect drive belts dealer for details.
(First, 60,000 miles (96,000 km) or 72 months *3 : Transfer case oil and rear axle oil should be changed anytime they
after that, every 15,000 miles (24,000 km) or 24 months) *5 have been submerged in water.
❑ Replace climate control air filter *5 : The drive belt should be replaced when cracks occur or tension is
(Continued) 6 months, after that, every 5,000 miles (8,000 km) or 6 months.
7 20
Maintenance
MAINTENANCE UNDER SEVERE USAGE CONDITIONS

The following items must be serviced more frequently on cars normally used under severe driving conditions. Refer
to the chart below for the appropriate maintenance intervals.
R : Replace I : Inspect and, after inspection, clean, adjust, repair or replace if necessary
MAINTENANCE DRIVING CONDI-
MAINTENANCE ITEM MAINTENANCE INTERVALS
OPERATION TION
EVERY 3,750 MILES (6,000 KM)
ENGINE OIL AND FILTER (2.4 GDI) R
OR 6 MONTHS A, B, C, D, E, F, G,
EVERY 3,000 MILES (5,000 KM) H, I, K, J
ENGINE OIL AND FILTER (2.0 TGDI) R
OR 3 MONTHS
AIR CLEANER FILTER R MORE FREQUENTLY C, E
SPARK PLUGS R MORE FREQUENTLY A, B, G, H, I, K
AUTOMATIC TRANSAXLE FLUID R EVERY 60,000 MILES (96,000 KM) A, C, E, F, G, I
FRONT BRAKE DISC/PADS, CALIPERS I MORE FREQUENTLY C, D, G, H
REAR BRAKE DISC /PADS I MORE FREQUENTLY C, D, G, H
PARKING BRAKE I MORE FREQUENTLY C, D, G, H
STEERING GEAR BOX, LINKAGE &

BOOTS/LOWER ARM BALL JOINT, I MORE FREQUENTLY C, D, E, F, G, H, I
UPPER ARM BALL JOINT
7 21
Maintenance
MAINTENANCE DRIVING CONDI-

MAINTENANCE ITEM MAINTENANCE INTERVALS
OPERATION TION
EVERY 7,500 MILES (12,000 KM) OR
DRIVE SHAFTS AND BOOTS I C, D, E, F, G, H, I, J
6 MONTHS
TRANSFER CASE OIL (AWD) R EVERY 75,000 MILES (120,000 KM) C, D, E, G, H, I, J
REAR AXLE OIL (AWD) R EVERY 75,000 MILES (120,000 KM) C, D, E, G, H, I, J
CLIMATE CONTROL AIR FILTER

(FOR EVAPORATOR AND BLOWER R MORE FREQUENTLY C, E
UNIT)
EVERY 7,500 MILES (12,000 KM) OR
PROPELLER SHAFT I C, E
6 MONTHS
SEVERE DRIVING CONDITIONS

A - Repeatedly driving short distance of less than 5 miles (8 km) F - Driving in heavy traffic area over 90°F (32°C)
in normal temperature or less than 10 miles (16 km) in freez- G- Driving on uphill, downhill, or mountain road
ing temperature H- Towing a Trailer, or using a camper, or roof rack
B - Extensive engine idling or low speed driving for long dis- I - Driving as a patrol car, taxi, other commercial use or vehicle
tances towing
C- Driving on rough, dusty, muddy, unpaved, graveled or salt- J - Driving over 106 mph (170 km/h)
spread roads K - Frequently driving in stop-and-go conditions
D- Driving in areas using salt or other corrosive materials or in
very cold weather
E - Driving in sandy areas
7 22
Maintenance
EXPLANATION OF SCHEDULED MAINTENANCE ITEMS

Engine oil and filter Fuel filter Fuel lines, fuel hoses and con-
The engine oil and filter should be A clogged filter can limit the speed at nections
changed at the intervals specified in which the vehicle may be driven, Check the fuel lines, fuel hoses and
the maintenance schedule. If the car damage the emission system and connections for leakage and dam-
is being driven in severe conditions, cause multiple issues such as hard age. Have an authorized HYUNDAI
more frequent oil and filter changes starting. If an excessive amount of dealer replace any damaged or leak-
are required. foreign matter accumulates in the ing parts immediately.
fuel tank, the filter may require
replacement more frequently.
Drive belts Vapor hose and fuel filler cap
After installing a new filter, run the
Inspect all drive belts for evidence of engine for several minutes, and The vapor hose and fuel filler cap
cuts, cracks, excessive wear or oil check for leaks at the connections. should be inspected at those inter-
saturation and replace if necessary. Fuel filters should be installed by an vals specified in the maintenance
Drive belts should be checked peri- authorized HYUNDAI dealer. schedule. Make sure that a new
odically for proper tension and vapor hose or fuel filler cap is cor-
adjusted as necessary. rectly replaced.
7 23
Maintenance
Vacuum crankcase ventilation Air cleaner filter Automatic transaxle fluid

hoses (if equipped) A Genuine HYUNDAI air cleaner fil- Automatic transaxle fluid should not
Inspect the surface of hoses for evi- ter is recommended when the filter is be checked under normal usage
dence of heat and/or mechanical replaced. conditions.
damage. Hard and brittle rubber, But in severe conditions, the fluid
cracking, tears, cuts, abrasions, and should be changed at an authorized
excessive swelling indicate deterio- Spark plugs
HYUNDAI dealer in accordance to
ration. Particular attention should be Make sure to install new spark plugs the scheduled maintenance at the
paid to examine those hose surfaces of the correct heat range. beginning of this chapter.
nearest to high heat sources, such
as the exhaust manifold.
Valve clearance ✽ NOTICE
Inspect the hose routing to assure
that the hoses do not come in con- Inspect excessive valve noise and/or Automatic transaxle fluid color is
tact with any heat source, sharp engine vibration and adjust if neces- basically red.
edges or moving component which sary. An authorized HYUNDAI dealer As the vehicle is driven, the auto-
might cause heat damage or should perform the operation. matic transaxle fluid will begin to
mechanical wear. Inspect all hose look darker.
connections, such as clamps and It is normal condition and you
Cooling system should not judge the need to replace
couplings, to make sure they are
secure, and that no leaks are pres- Check the cooling system parts, the fluid based upon the changed
ent. Hoses should be replaced such as radiator, coolant reservoir, color.
immediately if there is any evidence hoses and connections for leakage
of deterioration or damage. and damage. Replace any damaged
parts.
Coolant
The coolant should be changed at
the intervals specified in the mainte-
nance schedule.
7 24
Maintenance
Parking brake Steering gear box, linkage &

CAUTION boots/lower arm ball joint
Inspect the parking brake system
The use of a non-specified fluid including the parking brake lever (or With the vehicle stopped and engine
could result in transaxle mal- pedal) and cables. off, check for excessive free-play in
function and failure. the steering wheel.
Use only specified automatic Check the linkage for bends or dam-
transaxle fluid. (Refer to Brake pads, calipers and
rotors age. Check the dust boots and ball
“Recommended lubricants and joints for deterioration, cracks, or
capacities” in section 8.) Check the pads for excessive wear, damage. Replace any damaged
discs for run out and wear, and parts.
calipers for fluid leakage.
Brake hoses and lines Drive shafts and boots
Visually check for proper installation, Suspension mounting bolts Check the drive shafts, boots and
chafing, cracks, deterioration and clamps for cracks, deterioration, or
any leakage. Replace any deteriorat- Check the suspension connections
for looseness or damage. Retighten damage. Replace any damaged
ed or damaged parts immediately. parts and, if necessary, repack the
to the specified torque.
grease.
Brake fluid
Check brake fluid level in the brake Air conditioning refrigerant/
fluid reservoir. The level should be compressor (if equipped)
between “MIN” and “MAX” marks on
Check the air conditioning lines and
the side of the reservoir. Use only
connections for leakage and dam-
hydraulic brake fluid conforming to
age.
DOT 3 or DOT 4 specification.
7 25
Maintenance
ENGINE OIL
Checking the engine oil level 3. Turn the engine off and wait for a ■ Type A
few minutes (about 5 minutes) for
■ Type A
the oil to return to the oil pan.
4. Pull the dipstick out, wipe it clean,
and re-insert it fully.
WARNING - Radiator
hose
Be very careful not to touch the
radiator hose when checking or ODM076060L
adding the engine oil as it may ■ Type B
ODM076059L
■ Type B be hot enough to burn you.
5. Pull the dipstick out again and

check the level. The level should
be between F and L.
CAUTION
• Do not overfill with engine oil.
OLF074079N
Engine damage may result.
OAN077005N • Do not spill engine oil, when If it is near or at L, add enough oil to
adding or changing engine oil. bring the level to F. Do not overfill.
1. Be sure the vehicle is on level If you drop the engine oil on
ground. the engine room, wipe it off Use a funnel to help prevent oil
2. Start the engine and allow it to immediately. from being spilled on engine com-
reach normal operating tempera- ponents.
ture.
7 26
Maintenance
Use only the specified engine oil. Changing the engine oil and
(Refer to “Recommended lubricants filter CALIFORNIA PROPO-
and capacities” in section 8.) SITION 65 WARNING
Engine oil contains chemicals
known to the State of California
to cause cancer, birth defects,
and reproductive harm.
Used engine oil may cause irri-
tation or cancer of the skin if
left in contact with the skin for
prolonged periods of time. Used
engine oil contains chemicals
that have caused cancer in lab-
oratory animals. Always protect
your skin by washing your
Have engine oil and filter changed by hands thoroughly with soap
an authorized HYUNDAI dealer and warm water as soon as pos-
according to the Maintenance sible after handling used oil.
Schedule at the beginning of this
section.
7 27
Maintenance
ENGINE COOLANT
The high-pressure cooling system
(Continued) WARNING
has a reservoir filled with year-round
antifreeze coolant. The reservoir is • Turn the engine off and wait The electric motor
filled at the factory. until it cools down. Use (cooling fan) is con-
extreme care when removing trolled by engine
Check the antifreeze protection and
the radiator cap. Wrap a thick coolant temperature,
coolant concentration level at least
towel around it, and turn it refrigerant pressure
once a year, at the beginning of the
counterclockwise slowly to and vehicle speed. It may some-
winter season, and before traveling
the first stop. Step back while times operate even when the
to a colder climate.
the pressure is released from engine is not running. Use
the cooling system. extreme caution when working
Checking the coolant level When you are sure all the near the blades of the cooling
pressure has been released, fan so that you are not injured
press down on the cap, using by a rotating fan blades. As the
WARNING a thick towel, and continue engine coolant temperature
Removing radiator turning counterclockwise to decreases, the electric motor
cap remove it. will automatically shut off. This
• Even if the engine is not oper- is a normal condition.
ating, do not remove the radi- If your vehicle is if equipped
ator cap or the drain plug with GDI, the electric motor
• Never attempt to remove the while the engine and radiator
radiator cap while the engine (cooling fan) may operate until
are hot. Hot coolant and you disconnect the negative
is operating or hot. Doing so steam may still blow out
might lead to cooling system battery cable.
under pressure, causing seri-
and engine damage and could ous injury.
result in serious personal
injury from escaping hot
coolant or steam.
(Continued)
7 28
Maintenance
Recommended engine coolant For mixture percentage, refer to the

• When adding coolant, use only following table.
deionized water for your vehicle Mixture Percentage
and never mix hard water in the Ambient (volume)
coolant filled at the factory. An Temperature
improper coolant mixture can Antifreeze Water
result in serious malfunction or 5°F (-15°C) 35 65
engine damage. -13°F (-25°C) 40 60
• The engine in your vehicle has alu-
-31°F (-35°C) 50 50
minum engine parts and must be
protected by an ethylene-glycol- -49°F (-45°C) 60 40
ODMNMC2021 based coolant to prevent corrosion
Check the condition and connections and freezing.
of all cooling system hoses and • DO NOT USE alcohol or methanol
heater hoses. Replace any swollen coolant or mix them with the spec-
or deteriorated hoses. ified coolant.
The coolant level should be filled • Do not use a solution that contains
between F (MAX) and L (MIN) marks more than 60% antifreeze or less
on the side of the coolant reservoir than 35% antifreeze, which would
when the engine is cool. reduce the effectiveness of the
If the coolant level is low, add enough solution.
deonized water. Bring the level to F
(MAX), but do not overfill. If frequent
coolant refill is required, see an
authorized HYUNDAI dealer for a
cooling system inspection.
7 29
Maintenance
Changing the coolant

Have coolant changed by an author-
ized HYUNDAI dealer according to
the Maintenance Schedule at the
beginning of this section.
CAUTION
Put a thick cloth or fabric
around the radiator cap before
refilling the coolant in order to
ODM072007 prevent the coolant from over-
flowing into engine parts such
as generator.
WARNING
Radiator cap
WARNING - Coolant
• Do not use radiator coolant or
antifreeze in the washer fluid
Do not remove the radiator cap reservoir.
when the engine and radiator
are hot. Scalding hot coolant • Radiator coolant can severely
and steam may blow out under obscure visibility when
pressure causing serious sprayed on the windshield
injury. and may cause loss of vehicle
control or damage to paint
and body trim.
7 30
Maintenance
BRAKE FLUID
Checking the brake fluid level Before removing the reservoir cap Never mix different types of fluid.
and adding brake fluid, clean the
area around the reservoir cap thor- WARNING - Loss of
oughly to prevent brake fluid contam- brake fluid
ination.
In the event the brake system
If the level is low, add fluid to the requires frequent additions of
MAX level. The level will fall with fluid, the vehicle should be
accumulated mileage. This is a nor- inspected by an authorized
mal condition associated with the HYUNDAI dealer.
wear of the brake linings. If the fluid
level is excessively low, have the
brake system checked by an author-
ODM072009
Check the fluid level in the reservoir Use only the specified brake fluid.
periodically. The fluid level should be (Refer to “Recommended lubricants
between MAX and MIN marks on the and capacities” in section 8.)
side of the reservoir.
7 31
Maintenance
WARNING - Brake fluid CAUTION

When changing and adding Do not allow brake fluid to con-
brake fluid, handle it carefully. tact the vehicle's body paint, as
Do not let it come in contact paint damage will result. Brake
with your eyes. If brake fluid fluid, which has been exposed
should come in contact with to open air for an extended time
your eyes, immediately flush should never be used as its
them with a large quantity of quality cannot be guaranteed. It
fresh tap water. Have your eyes should be disposed of properly.
examined by a doctor as soon Do not put in the wrong type of
as possible. fluid. A few drops of mineral-
based oil, such as engine oil, in
your brake system can damage
brake system parts.
7 32
Maintenance
WASHER FLUID PARKING BRAKE

Checking the washer fluid Checking the parking brake
level WARNING - Coolant
• Do not use radiator coolant or
antifreeze in the washer fluid
reservoir.
• Radiator coolant can severely
obscure visibility when
sprayed on the windshield
and may cause loss of vehicle
control or damage to paint
and body trim.
• Windshield Washer fluid
agents contain some amounts OCM050015
ODMNMC2019 of alcohol and can be flamma-
ble under certain circum- Check whether the stroke is within
The reservoir is translucent so that stances. Do not allow sparks specification when the parking brake
you can check the level with a quick or flame to contact the washer pedal is depressed with 66 lb (30 kg,
visual inspection. fluid or the washer fluid reser- 294 N) of force. Also, the parking
Check the fluid level in the washer voir. Damage to the vehicle or brake alone should securely hold the
fluid reservoir and add fluid if neces- occupants could occur. vehicle on a fairly steep grade. If the
sary. Plain water may be used if stroke is more or less than specified,
• Windshield washer fluid is have the parking brake adjusted by
washer fluid is not available. poisonous to humans and
However, use washer solvent with an authorized HYUNDAI dealer.
animals. Do not drink and
antifreeze characteristics in cold cli- avoid contacting windshield
mates to prevent freezing. Stroke : 8~9 notch
washer fluid. Serious injury or
death could occur.
7 33
Maintenance
AIR CLEANER
Filter replacement
ODM072013 OXM073099
ODM072012 1. Loosen the air cleaner cover 2. Wipe the inside of the air cleaner.
attaching clips and open the cover. 3. Lift the air cleaner cover and pull
It must be replaced when necessary,
and should not be washed. the air cleaner filter cover.
You can clean the filter when inspect- 4. Pull the air cleaner to replace.
ing the air cleaner element. 5. Lock the cover with the cover
Clean the filter by using compressed attaching clips.
air. 6. Verify that the air cleaner cover is
properly attached at all four corners
and sealing against air cleaner.
7 34
Maintenance
Replace the filter according to the

Maintenance Schedule.
If the vehicle is operated in extreme-
ly dusty or sandy areas, replace the
element more often than the usual
recommended intervals. (Refer to
“Maintenance under severe usage
conditions” in this section.)
CAUTION
• Do not drive with the air clean-
er removed; this will result in
excessive engine wear.
• When removing the air cleaner
filter, be careful that dust or
dirt does not enter the air
intake, or damage may result.
• Use a HYUNDAI genuine part.
Use of nongenuine part could
damage the air flow sensor.
7 35
Maintenance
CLIMATE CONTROL AIR FILTER

Filter inspection Filter replacement
If the vehicle is operated in the
severely air-polluted cities or on
dusty rough roads for a long period,
it should be inspected more fre-
quently and replaced earlier. When
you, the owner, replace the climate
control air filter, replace it performing
the following procedure, and be care-
ful to avoid damaging other compo-
nents.
ODM072014
Replace the filter according to the
maintenance Schedule. ODM072015 2. With the glove box open, remove
the stoppers on both sides.
1. Open the glove box and remove
the support strap (1).
7 36
Maintenance
ODM072016 OHG075041
3. Remove the climate control air fil- 4. Replace the climate control air fil-
ter case by pulling out both sides ter.
of the cover. 5. Reassemble in the reverse order
of disassembly.
✽ NOTICE
Install a new climate control air fil-
ter in the correct direction with the
arrow symbol (↓ ↓) facing down-
wards.
Otherwise, the climate control
effects may decrease, possibly with a
noise.
7 37
Maintenance
WIPER BLADES
Blade inspection Contamination of either the wind- Blade replacement
shield or the wiper blades with for- When the wipers no longer clean
eign matter can reduce the effective- adequately, the blades may be worn
ness of the windshield wipers. or cracked, and require replacement.
Common sources of contamination
are insects, tree sap, and hot wax
treatments used by some commer- CAUTION
cial car washes. If the blades are not To prevent damage to the wiper
wiping properly, clean both the win- arms or other components, do
dow and the blades with a good not attempt to move the wipers
cleaner or mild detergent, and rinse manually.
thoroughly with clean water.
1JBA5122
CAUTION CAUTION
✽ NOTICE To prevent damage to the wiper The use of a non-specified
Commercial hot waxes applied by blades, do not use gasoline, wiper blade could result in
automatic car washes have been kerosene, paint thinner, or other wiper malfunction and failure.
known to make the windshield diffi- solvents on or near them.
cult to clean.
7 38
Maintenance
Front windshield wiper blade
1JBA7037 1JBA7038
1LDA5023
2. Compress the clip and slide the 3. Lift it off the arm.
blade assembly downward. 4. Install the blade assembly in the
1. Raise the wiper arm and turn the
wiper blade assembly to expose reverse order of removal.
the plastic locking clip.
CAUTION
Do not allow the wiper arm to
fall against the windshield,
since it may chip or crack the
windshield.
7 39
Maintenance
Rear window wiper blade
OHM078063
OHM078062 2. Install the new blade assembly by

inserting the center part into the
1. Raise the wiper arm and pull out slot in the wiper arm until it clicks
the wiper blade assembly. into place.
3. Make sure the blade assembly is
installed firmly by trying to pull it
slightly.
To prevent damage to the wiper arms
or other components, have an
authorized HYUNDAI dealer replace
the wiper blade.
7 40
Maintenance
BATTERY
For best battery service (Continued)
WARNING - Battery
dangers If any electrolyte gets
into your eyes, flush
Always read the follow-
your eyes with clean
ing instructions carefully
water for at least 15 min-
when handling a battery.
utes and get immediate
Keep lighted cigarettes medical attention.
and all other flames or
If electrolyte gets on
sparks away from the
your skin, thoroughly
battery.
wash the contacted area.
Hydrogen, a highly com- If you feel a pain or a
bustible gas, is always burning sensation, get
OAN077006N present in battery cells medical attention imme-
and may explode if ignit- diately.
• Keep the battery securely mounted.
ed. Wear eye protection
Keep batteries out of the when charging or work-
• Keep the battery top clean and dry. reach of children ing near a battery.
• Keep the terminals and connec- because batteries con- Always provide ventila-
tions clean, tight, and coated with tain highly corrosive tion when working in an
petroleum jelly or terminal grease. SULFURIC ACID. Do not enclosed space.
• Rinse any spilled electrolyte from allow battery acid to
An inappropriately dis-
the battery immediately with a contact your skin, eyes,
posed battery can be
solution of water and baking soda. clothing or paint finish.
harmful to the environ-
• If the vehicle is not going to be (Continued) ment and human health.
used for an extended time, discon- Dispose the battery
nect the battery cables. according to your local
law(s) or regulation.
(Continued)
7 41
Maintenance
(Continued) Battery recharging

CALIFORNIA PROPO- Your vehicle has a maintenance-free,
• When lifting a plastic-cased SITION 65 WARNING
battery, excessive pressure calcium-based battery.
Battery posts, terminals, and • If the battery becomes discharged
on the case may cause battery
related accessories contain in a short time (because, for exam-
acid to leak, resulting in per-
lead and lead compounds, ple, the headlights or interior lights
sonal injury. Lift with a battery
chemicals known to the State of were left on while the vehicle was
carrier or with your hands on
California to cause cancer, birth not in use), recharge it by slow
opposite corners.
defects, and reproductive harm. charging (trickle) for 10 hours.
• Never attempt to recharge the Batteries also contain other
battery when the battery chemicals known to the State of • If the battery gradually discharges
cables are connected. California to cause cancer. because of high electric load while
• The electrical ignition system Wash hands after handling. the vehicle is being used, recharge
works with high voltage. it at 20-30A for two hours.
Never touch these compo-
nents with the engine running CAUTION
or the ignition switched on.
• Always charge the battery
Failure to follow the above fully to prevent battery case
warnings can result in serious damage in low temperature
bodily injury or death. area.
• If you connect unauthorized
electronic devices to the bat-
tery, the battery may dis-
charge. Never use unautho-
rized devices.
7 42
Maintenance
(Continued) Reset items

WARNING - Recharging Items should be reset after the bat-
battery • Disconnect the battery charg-
er in the following order. tery has been discharged or the bat-
When recharging the battery, tery has been disconnected.
observe the following precau- 1. Turn off the battery charger
main switch. • Auto up/down window
tions: (See section 4)
• The battery must be removed 2. Unhook the negative clamp
from the negative battery • Sunroof (See section 4)
from the vehicle and placed in
an area with good ventilation. terminal. • Trip computer (See section 4)
• Do not allow cigarettes, sparks, 3. Unhook the positive clamp • Climate control system
or flame near the battery. from the positive battery (See section 4)
terminal. • Clock (See section 4)
• Watch the battery during
charging, and stop or reduce • Before performing mainte- • Audio (See section 4)
the charging rate if the battery nance or recharging the bat-
cells begin gassing (boiling) tery, turn off all accessories
violently or if the temperature and stop the engine.
of the electrolyte of any cell • The negative battery cable
exceeds 120°F (49°C). must be removed first and
• Wear eye protection when installed last when the battery
checking the battery during is disconnected.
charging.
(Continued)
7 43
Maintenance
TIRES AND WHEELS

Tire care
CAUTION
For proper maintenance, safety, and
maximum fuel economy, you must • Underinflation also results in
always maintain recommended tire excessive wear, poor handling
inflation pressures and stay within and reduced fuel economy.
the load limits and weight distribution Wheel deformation also is
recommended for your vehicle. possible. Keep your tire pres-
sures at the proper levels. If a
tire frequently needs refilling,
Recommended cold tire have it checked by an author-
inflation pressures ized HYUNDAI dealer.
All tire pressures (including the ODMNMC2017 • Overinflation produces a
spare) should be checked when the All specifications (sizes and pres- harsh ride, excessive wear at
tires are cold. “Cold Tires” means the sures) can be found on a label the center of the tire tread, and
vehicle has not been driven for at attached to the vehicle. a greater possibility of dam-
least three hours or driven less than age from road hazards.
1 mile (1.6 km).
WARNING - Tire under-
Recommended pressures must be inflation
maintained for the best ride, top vehi-
cle handling, and minimum tire wear. Severe underinflation (10 psi
(70 kPa) or more) can lead to
For recommended inflation pressure severe heat build-up, causing
refer to “Tire and wheels” in section 8. blowouts, tread separation and
other tire failures that can result
in the loss of vehicle control
leading to severe injury or
death. This risk is much higher
on hot days and when driving
for long periods at high speeds.
7 44
Maintenance
Checking tire inflation

CAUTION CAUTION - Tire pressure pressure
• Warm tires normally exceed Always observe the following: Check your tires once a month or
recommended cold tire pres- • Check tire pressure when the more.
sures by 4 to 6 psi (28 to 41 tires are cold. (After vehicle
kPa). Do not release air from Also, check the tire pressure of the
has been parked for at least spare tire.
warm tires to adjust the pres- three hours or hasn't been
sure or the tires will be under- driven more than 1 mile (1.6
inflated. km) since startup.) How to check
• Be sure to reinstall the tire • Check the pressure of your Use a good quality gage to check tire
inflation valve caps. Without spare tire each time you check pressure. You can not tell if your tires
the valve cap, dirt or moisture the pressure of other tires. are properly inflated simply by look-
could get into the valve core ing at them. Radial tires may look
and cause air leakage. If a • Never overload your vehicle.
Be careful not to overload a properly inflated even when they're
valve cap is missing, install a underinflated.
new one as soon as possible. vehicle luggage rack if your
vehicle is equipped with one. Check the tire's inflation pressure
• Worn, old tires can cause acci- when the tires are cold. - "Cold"
dents. If your tread is badly means your vehicle has been sitting
WARNING - Tire worn, or if your tires have for at least three hours or driven no
inflation been damaged, replace them. more than 1 mile (1.6 km).
Overinflation or underinflation
can reduce tire life, adversely
affect vehicle handling, and
lead to sudden tire failure. This
could result in loss of vehicle
control and potential injury.
7 45
Maintenance
Remove the valve cap from the tire Tire rotation

valve stem. Press the tire gauge firm- WARNING To equalize tread wear, it is recom-
ly onto the valve to get a pressure • Inspect your tires frequently mended that the tires be rotated
measurement. If the cold tire inflation for proper inflation as well as every 7,500 miles (12,000 km) or
pressure matches the recommended wear and damage. Always use sooner if irregular wear develops.
pressure on the tire and loading a tire pressure gauge.
information label, no further adjust- During rotation, check the tires for
• Tires with too much or too little correct balance.
ment is necessary. If the pressure is
pressure wear unevenly caus-
low, add air until you reach the rec- When rotating tires, check for uneven
ing poor handling, loss of vehi-
ommended amount. wear and damage. Abnormal wear is
cle control, and sudden tire
If you overfill the tire, release air by usually caused by incorrect tire pres-
failure leading to accidents,
pushing on the metal stem in the cen- sure, improper wheel alignment, out-
injuries, and even death. The
ter of the tire valve. Recheck the tire of-balance wheels, severe braking or
recommended cold tire pres-
pressure with the tire gauge. Be sure severe cornering. Look for bumps or
sure for your vehicle can be
to put the valve caps back on the bulges in the tread or side of tire.
found in this manual and on
valve stems. They help prevent leaks Replace the tire if you find either of
the tire label located on the dri-
by keeping out dirt and moisture. these conditions. Replace the tire if
ver's side center pillar.
fabric or cord is visible. After rotation,
• Worn tires can cause acci- be sure to bring the front and rear tire
dents. Replace tires that are pressures to specification and check
worn, show uneven wear, or lug nut tightness.
are damaged.
Refer to “Tire and wheels” in section 8.
• Remember to check the pres-
sure of your spare tire.
HYUNDAI recommends that
you check the spare every time
you check the pressure of the
other tires on your vehicle.
7 46
Maintenance
Without a spare tire ✽ NOTICE Wheel alignment and tire

Rotate radial tires that have an balance
asymmetric tread pattern only from The wheels on your vehicle were
front to rear and not from right to aligned and balanced carefully at the
left. factory to give you the longest tire life
and best overall performance.
WARNING In most cases, you will not need to
have your wheels aligned again.
• Do not use the compact spare However, if you notice unusual tire
S2BLA790A
tire for tire rotation. wear or your vehicle pulling one way
Directional tires (if equipped) • Do not mix bias ply and radial or the other, the alignment may need
ply tires under any circum- to be reset.
stances. This may cause If you notice your vehicle vibrating
unusual handling characteris- when driving on a smooth road, your
tics that could result in death, wheels may need to be rebalanced.
severe injury, or property
damage.
CAUTION
Improper wheel weights can
damage your vehicle's alu-
CBGQ0707A
minum wheels. Use only
Disc brake pads should be inspected approved wheel weights.
for wear whenever tires are rotated.
7 47
Maintenance
Tire replacement (Continued)

WARNING - Replacing
tires • The use of any other tire size
Tread wear indicator
or type may seriously affect
• Driving on worn-out tires is
ride, handling, ground clear-
very hazardous and will
ance, stopping distance, body
reduce braking effectiveness,
to tire clearance, snow tire
steering accuracy, and trac-
clearance, and speedometer
tion.
reliability.
• Your vehicle is equipped with
• It is best to replace all four
tires designed to provide for
tires at the same time. If that
safe ride and handling capa-
is not possible, or necessary,
bility. Do not use a size and
then replace the two front or
type of tire and wheel that is
OEN076053 two rear tires as a pair.
different from the one that is
If the tire is worn evenly, a tread wear Replacing just one tire can
originally installed on your
indicator will appear as a solid band seriously affect your vehicle’s
vehicle. It can affect the safety
across the tread. This shows there is handling.
and performance of your vehi-
less than 1/16 in. (1.6 mm) of tread cle, which could lead to han- • The ABS works by comparing
left on the tire. Replace the tire when dling failure or rollover and the speed of the wheels. Tire
this happens. serious injury. When replacing size can affect wheel speed.
Do not wait for the band to appear the tires, be sure to equip all When replacing tires, all 4
across the entire tread before replac- four tires with the tire and tires must use the same size
ing the tire. wheel of the same size, type, originally supplied with the
tread, brand and load-carrying vehicle. Using tires of a differ-
capacity. ent size can cause the ABS
(Anti-lock Brake System) and
(Continued)
ESC (Electronic Stability
Control), to work irregularly.
7 48
Maintenance
Compact spare tire replacement Wheel replacement Tire traction

A compact spare tire has a shorter When replacing the metal wheels for Tire traction can be reduced if you
tread life than a regular size tire. any reason, make sure the new drive on worn tires, tires that are
Replace it when you can see the wheels are equivalent to the original improperly inflated or on slippery
tread wear indicator bars on the tire. factory units in diameter, rim width road surfaces. Tires should be
The replacement compact spare tire and offset. replaced when tread wear indicators
should be the same size and design appear. To reduce the possibility of
tire as the one provided with your losing control, slow down whenever
new vehicle and should be mounted WARNING there is rain, snow or ice on the road.
on the same compact spare tire A wheel that is not the correct
wheel. The compact spare tire is not size may adversely affect wheel
designed to be mounted on a regular and bearing life, braking and
size wheel, and the compact spare stopping abilities, handling
tire wheel is not designed for mount- characteristics, ground clear-
ing a regular size tire. ance, body-to-tire clearance,
snow chain clearance,
speedometer and odometer cal-
ibration, headlight aim and
bumper height.
7 49
Maintenance
Tire maintenance Tire sidewall labeling 1. Manufacturer or brand name

In addition to proper inflation, correct Manufacturer or Brand name is
1
wheel alignment helps to decrease shown.
tire wear. If you find a tire is worn 5,6
unevenly, have your dealer check the 7 2. Tire size designation
wheel alignment.
A tire’s sidewall is marked with a tire
When you have new tires installed, 4 size designation. You will need this
make sure they are balanced. This information when selecting replace-
will increase vehicle ride comfort and ment tires for your car. The following
tire life. Additionally, a tire should 2
3 explains what the letters and numbers
always be rebalanced if it is removed in the tire size designation mean.
from the wheel.
1 I030B04JM
This information identifies and

describes the fundamental charac-
teristics of the tire and also provides
the tire identification number (TIN)
for safety standard certification. The
TIN can be used to identify the tire in
case of a recall.
7 50
Maintenance
Example tire size designation: Wheel size designation Tire speed ratings
(These numbers are provided as an Wheels are also marked with impor- The chart below lists many of the dif-
example only; your tire size designa- tant information that you need if you ferent speed ratings currently being
tor could vary depending on your ever have to replace one. The follow- used for passenger car tires. The
vehicle.) ing explains what the letters and speed rating is part of the tire size
(P)235/65R17 102H numbers in the wheel size designa- designation on the sidewall of the
tion mean. tire. This symbol corresponds to that
tire's designed maximum safe oper-
(P) - Applicable vehicle type (tires ating speed.
marked with the prefix “P’’ are Example wheel size designation:
intended for use on passenger 7.0JX17 Speed
vehicles or light trucks; howev- Rating Maximum Speed
er, not all tires have this mark- Symbol
ing). 7.0 - Rim width in inches.
J - Rim contour designation. S 112 mph (180 km/h)
235 - Tire width in millimeters.
17 - Rim diameter in inches. T 118 mph (190 km/h)
65 - Aspect ratio. The tire’s section
H 130 mph (210 km/h)
height as a percentage of its
width. V 149 mph (240 km/h)
R - Tire construction code (Radial). Z Above 149 mph (240 km/h)
17 - Rim diameter in inches.
102 - Load Index, a numerical code
associated with the maximum
load the tire can carry.
H - Speed Rating Symbol. See the
speed rating chart in this section
for additional information.
7 51
Maintenance
3. Checking tire life 4. Tire ply composition and mate-

(TIN : Tire Identification WARNING - Tire age rial
Number) Tires degrade over time, even The number of layers or plies of rub-
Any tires that are over 6 years old, when they are not being used. ber-coated fabric in the tire. Tire
based on the manufacturing date Regardless of the remaining manufacturers also must indicate the
(including the spare tire) should be tread, it is recommended that materials in the tire, which include
replaced by new ones. You can find tires generally be replaced after steel, nylon, polyester, and others.
the manufacturing date on the tire six (6) years of normal service. The letter "R" means radial ply con-
sidewall (possibly on the inside of the Heat caused by not climates or struction; the letter "D" means diago-
wheel), displaying the DOT Code. frequent high loading conditions nal or bias ply construction; and the
The DOT Code is a series of num- can accelerate the aging letter "B" means belted-bias ply con-
bers on a tire consisting of numbers process. Failure to follow this struction.
and English letters. The manufactur- Warning can result in sudden
ing date is designated by the last four tire failure, which could lead to a
digits (characters) of the DOT code. loss of control and an accident 5. Maximum permissible inflation
involving serious injury or death. pressure
This number is the greatest amount
DOT : XXXX XXXX OOOO of air pressure that should be put in
The front part of the DOT means a the tire. Do not exceed the maximum
plant code number, tire size and permissible inflation pressure. Refer
tread pattern and the last four num- to the Tire and Loading Information
bers indicate week and year manu- label for recommended inflation
factured. pressure.
For example:
DOT XXXX XXXX 1616 represents
that the tire was produced in the 16th
week of 2016.
7 52
Maintenance
6. Maximum load rating Tread wear Traction - AA, A, B & C

This number indicates the maximum The tread wear grade is a compara- The traction grades, from highest to
load in kilograms and pounds that can tive rating based on the wear rate of lowest, are AA, A, B and C. Those
be carried by the tire. When replacing the tire when tested under controlled grades represent the tires ability to
the tires on the vehicle, always use a conditions on a specified govern- stop on wet pavement as measured
tire that has the same load rating as ment test course. For example, a tire under controlled conditions on speci-
the factory installed tire. graded 150 would wear one-and-a- fied government test surfaces of
half times (1½) as well on the gov- asphalt and concrete. A tire marked C
ernment course as a tire graded 100. may have poor traction performance.
7. Uniform tire quality grading
The relative performance of tires
Quality grades can be found where depends upon the actual conditions
applicable on the tire sidewall WARNING
of their use, however, and may
between tread shoulder and maxi- depart significantly from the norm The traction grade assigned to
mum section width. because of variations in driving this tire is based on straight-
For example: habits, service practices and differ- ahead braking traction tests,
ences in road characteristics and cli- and does not include accelera-
TREADWEAR 200
mate. tion, cornering, hydroplaning,
TRACTION AA or peak traction characteristics.
TEMPERATURE A These grades are molded on the
side-walls of passenger vehicle tires.
The tires available as standard or Temperature -A, B & C
optional equipment on your vehicle The temperature grades are A (the
may vary with respect to grade. highest), B and C representing the
tire’s resistance to the generation of
heat and its ability to dissipate heat
when tested under controlled condi-
tions on a specified indoor laboratory
test wheel.
7 53
Maintenance
Sustained high temperature can Tire terminology and

cause the material of the tire to WARNING - Tire definitions
degenerate and reduce tire life, and temperature Air Pressure: The amount of air
excessive temperature can lead to The temperature grade for this inside the tire pressing outward on
sudden tire failure. The Grade C cor- tire is established for a tire that the tire. Air pressure is expressed in
responds to a level of performance is properly inflated and not pounds per square inch (psi) or kilo-
which all passenger car tires must overloaded. Excessive speed, pascal (kPa).
meet under the Federal Motor underinflation, or excessive
Vehicle Safety Standard NO. 109. Accessory Weight: This means the
loading, either separately or in
Grades B and A represent higher combined weight of optional acces-
combination, can cause heat
levels of performance on the labora- sories. Some examples of optional
build-up and possible sudden
tory test wheel than the minimum accessories are, automatic transaxle
tire failure. This can cause loss
required by the law. power seats, and air conditioning.
of vehicle control and serious
injury or death. Aspect Ratio: The relationship of a
tire's height to its width.
Belt: A rubber coated layer of cords
that is located between the plies and
the tread. Cords may be made from
steel or other reinforcing materials.
Bead: The tire bead contains steel
wires wrapped by steel cords that
hold the tire onto the rim.
Bias Ply Tire: A pneumatic tire in
which the plies are laid at alternate
angles less than 90 degrees to the
centerline of the tread.
7 54
Maintenance
Cold Tire Pressure: The amount of Intended Outboard Sidewall: The Normal Occupant Weight: The
air pressure in a tire, measured in side of an asymmetrical tire, that number of occupants a vehicle is
pounds per square inch (psi) or kilo- must always face outward when designed to seat multiplied by 150
pascals (kPa) before a tire has built mounted on a vehicle. pounds (68 kg).
up heat from driving. Kilopascal (kPa): The metric unit for Occupant Distribution: Designated
Curb Weight: This means the weight air pressure. seating positions.
of a motor vehicle with standard and Light truck(LT) tire: A tire designat- Outward Facing Sidewall: The side
optional equipment including the ed by its manufacturer as primarily of a asymmetrical tire that has a par-
maximum capacity of fuel, oil and intended for use on lightweight trucks ticular side that faces outward when
coolant, but without passengers and or multipurpose passenger vehicles. mounted on a vehicle. The outward
cargo. facing sidewall bears white lettering
Load ratings: The maximum load
DOT Markings: A code molded into that a tire is rated to carry for a given or bears manufacturer, brand, and/or
the sidewall of a tire signifying that inflation pressure. model name molding that is higher or
the tire is in compliance with the U.S. deeper than the same moldings on
Department of Transportation motor Load Index: An assigned number the inner facing sidewall.
vehicle safety standards. The DOT ranging from 1 to 279 that corre-
sponds to the load carrying capacity Passenger (P-Metric) Tire: A tire
code includes the Tire Identification used on passenger cars and some
Number (TIN), an alphanumeric des- of a tire.
light duty trucks and multipurpose
ignator which can also identify the Maximum Inflation Pressure: The vehicles.
tire manufacturer, production plant, maximum air pressure to which a
brand and date of production. cold tire may be inflated. The maxi- Ply: A layer of rubber-coated parallel
mum air pressure is molded onto the cords
GVWR: Gross Vehicle Weight Rating
sidewall. Pneumatic tire: A mechanical device
GAWR FRT: Gross Axle Weight made of rubber, chemicals, fabric and
Rating for the Front Axle. Maximum Load Rating: The load
rating for a tire at the maximum per- steel or other materials, that, when
GAWR RR: Gross Axle Weight missible inflation pressure for that tire. mounted on an automotive wheel,
Rating for the Rear axle. provides the traction and contains the
Maximum Loaded Vehicle Weight: gas or fluid that sustains the load.
The sum of curb weight; accessory
weight; vehicle capacity weight; and
production options weight.
7 55
Maintenance
Production options weight: The Traction: The friction between the Vehicle Normal Load on the Tire:
combined weight of installed regular tire and the road surface. The Load on an individual tire that is
production options weighing over amount of grip provided. determined by distributing to each
5 lb. (2.3 kg) in excess of the stan- Tread: The portion of a tire that axle its share of the curb weight,
dard items which they replace, not comes into contact with the road. accessory weight, and normal occu-
previously considered in curb weight pant weight and dividing by 2.
or accessory weight, including heavy Treadwear Indicators: Narrow
bands, sometimes called "wear bars," Vehicle Placard: A label permanent-
duty brakes, ride levelers, roof rack, ly attached to a vehicle showing the
heavy duty battery, and special trim. that show across the tread of a tire
when only 2/32 inch of tread remains. original equipment tire size and rec-
Recommended Inflation Pressure: ommended inflation pressure.
Vehicle manufacturer's recommend- UTQGS: Uniform Tire Quality
ed tire inflation pressure and shown Grading Standards, a tire information
on the tire placard. system that provides consumers with
ratings for a tire's traction, tempera-
Radial Ply Tire: A pneumatic tire in ture and treadwear. Ratings are
which the ply cords that extend to the determined by tire manufacturers
beads are laid at 90 degrees to the using government testing proce-
centerline of the tread. dures. The ratings are molded into
Rim: A metal support for a tire and the sidewall of the tire.
upon which the tire beads are seated. Vehicle Capacity Weight: The num-
Sidewall: The portion of a tire ber of designated seating positions
between the tread and the bead. multiplied by 150 lbs. (68 kg) plus the
Speed Rating: An alphanumeric rated cargo and luggage load.
code assigned to a tire indicating the Vehicle Maximum Load on the Tire:
maximum speed at which a tire can Load on an individual tire due to curb
operate. and accessory weight plus maximum
occupant and cargo weight.
7 56
Maintenance
All season tires Snow tires Tire chains

HYUNDAI specifies all season tires If you equip your car with snow tires, Tire chains, if necessary, should be
on some models to provide good they should be the same size and installed on the drive wheels as fol-
performance for use all year round, have the same load capacity as the lows.
including snowy and icy road condi- original tires. Snow tires should be 2WD : Front wheels
tions. All season tires are identified installed on all four wheels; other-
by ALL SEASON and/or M+S (Mud wise, poor handling may result. AWD : All four wheels
and Snow) on the tire sidewall. Snow Snow tires should carry 4 psi (28 If a full set of chains is not
tires have better snow traction than kPa) more air pressure than the available for a AWD vehicle,
all season tires and may be more pressure recommended for the stan- chains may be installed on
appropriate in some areas. dard tires on the tire label on the dri- the front wheels only.
ver's side of the center pillar, or up to Be sure that the chains are installed
the maximum pressure shown on the in accordance with the manufactur-
Summer tires er's instructions.
tire sidewall, whichever is less.
HYUNDAI specifies summer tires on To minimize tire and chain wear, do
some models to provide superior Do not drive faster than 75 mph (120
km/h) when your car is equipped with not continue to use tire chains when
performance on dry roads. Summer they are no longer needed.
tire performance is substantially snow tires.
reduced in snow and ice. Summer
tires do not have the tire traction rat-
ing M+S (Mud and Snow) on the tire
side wall. if you plan to operate your
vehicle in snowy or icy conditions.
HYUNDAI recommends the use of
snow tires or all season tires on all
four wheels.
7 57
Maintenance
Radial-ply tires Longer wearing tires can be more

WARNING - Snow or ice Radial-ply tires provide improved susceptible to irregular tread wear. It
• When driving on roads cov- tread life, road hazard resistance and is very important to follow the tire
ered with snow or ice, drive at smoother high speed ride. The radi- rotation interval shown in this section
less than 20 mph (30 km/h). al-ply tires used on this vehicle are of to achieve the tread life potential of
belted construction, and are selected these tires. Cuts and punctures in
• Use the SAE "S" class or wire
to complement the ride and handling radial-ply tires are repairable only in
chains.
characteristics of your vehicle. the tread area, because of sidewall
• If you hear noise caused by flexing. Consult your tire dealer for
chains contacting the body, Radial-ply tires have the same load
carrying capacity, as bias-ply or bias radial-ply tire repairs.
retighten the chain to avoid
contact with the vehicle body. belted tires of the same size, and use
the same recommended inflation
• To prevent body damage, pressure. Mixing of radial-ply tires
retighten the chains after driv- with bias-ply or bias belted tires is
ing 0.3~0.6 miles (0.5~1.0 km). not recommended. Any combina-
• Do not use tire chains on tions of radial-ply and bias-ply or bias
vehicles equipped with alu- belted tires when used on the same
minum wheels. In unavoid- vehicle will seriously deteriorate
able circumstance, use a wire vehicle handling. The best rule to fol-
type chain. low is: Identical radial-ply tires should
• Use wire chains less than 0.59 always be used as a set of four.
inches (15mm) to prevent
damage to the chain’s con-
nection.
7 58
Maintenance
Low aspect ratio tire

(if equipped) CAUTION CAUTION
Low aspect ratio tires, whose aspect Because the sidewall of the low • It is not easy to recognize the
ratio is lower than 50, are provided aspect ratio tire is shorter than tire damage with your own
for sporty looks. the normal, the wheel and tire of eyes. But if there is the slight-
the low aspect ratio tire is easi- est hint of tire damage, even
Because the low aspect ratio tires er to be damaged. So, follow the though you cannot see the tire
are optimized for handling and brak- instructions below. damage with your own eyes,
ing, it may be more uncomfortable to have the tire checked or
ride in and there is more noise com- - When driving on a rough road
or off road, drive cautiously replaced because the tire
pare with normal tires. damage may cause air leak-
because tires and wheels may
be damaged. And after driv- age from the tire.
ing, inspect tires and wheels. • If the tire is damaged by driv-
- When passing over a pothole, ing on a rough road, off road,
speed bump, manhole, or curb pothole, manhole, or curb
stone, drive slowly so that the stone, it will not be covered by
tires and wheels are not dam- the warranty.
aged. • You can find out the tire infor-
- If the tire is subjected to a mation on the tire sidewall.
severe impact, have the tire
and wheel inspected by an
- To prevent damage to the tire,
inspect the tire condition and
pressure every 1,800miles
(3,000km).
7 59
Maintenance
FUSES
Blade type This vehicle has 2 fuse panels, one
located in the driver’s side panel bol- WARNING - Fuse
ster, the other in the engine compart- replacement
ment near the battery. • Never replace a fuse with any-
Normal Blown
If any of your vehicle’s lights, acces- thing but another fuse of the
sories, or controls do not work, check same rating.
Cartridge type
the appropriate circuit fuse. If a fuse • A higher capacity fuse could
has blown, the element inside the cause damage and possibly a
fuse will be melted. fire.
If the electrical system does not • Never install a wire or alu-
work, first check the driver’s side minum foil instead of the
Normal Blown fuse panel. proper fuse - even as a tem-
Multi fuse Always replace a blown fuse with porary repair. It may cause
one of the same rating. extensive wiring damage and
Before replacing an open fuse, dis- a possible fire.
connect the negative battery cable.
Normal Blown If the replacement fuse blows, this
indicates an electrical problem. Avoid CAUTION
using the system involved and imme- Do not use a screwdriver or any
diately consult an authorized other metal object to remove
HYUNDAI dealer. fuses because it may cause a
Three kinds of fuses are used: blade short circuit and damage the
type for lower amperage rating, car- system.
Normal Blown tridge type, and multi fuse for higher
amperage ratings.
OLM079051N ✽ NOTICE
A vehicle’s electrical system is pro- The actual fuse/relay panel label
tected from electrical overload dam- may differ from equipped items.
age by fuses.
7 60
Maintenance
Inner panel fuse replacement

CAUTION
• When replacing an open fuse
or relay with a new one, make
sure the new fuse or relay fits
tightly into the clips. The
incomplete fastening fuse or
relay may cause the vehicle
wiring and electric systems
damage and a possible fire.
• Do not remove fuses, relays
and terminals fastened with OANNMC2030
bolts or nuts. The fuses, relays 3. Pull the suspected fuse straight
ODM072017
and terminals may be fas- out. Use the removal tool provided
tened incompletely, and it may 1. Turn the ignition switch and all in the engine compartment fuse
cause a possible fire. If fuses, other switches off. panel.
relays and terminals fastened 2. Open the fuse panel cover.
with bolts or nuts are open, 4. Check the removed fuse; replace it
consult with an authorized if it is blown.
HYUNDAI dealer. 5. Push in a new fuse of the same
• Do not input any other objects rating, and make sure it fits tightly
except fuses or relays into in the clips.
fuse/relay terminals such as a If it fits loosely, consult an authorized
driver or wiring. It may cause HYUNDAI dealer.
contact failure and system If you do not have a spare, use a fuse
malfunction. of the same rating from a circuit you
may not need for operating the vehi-
cle, such as the cigar lighter fuse.
7 61
Maintenance
If the headlights or other electrical Fuse switch Engine compartment panel fuse
components do not work and the replacement
fuses are OK, check the fuse block in
the engine compartment. If a fuse is
blown, it must be replaced.
ODM072019
Always, put the mode switch at the OAN077007N
ON position. 1. Turn the ignition switch and all
If you move the switch to the OFF other switches off.
position, some items such as audio 2. Remove the fuse box cover by
and digital clock must be reset and pressing the tab and pulling up.
transmitter (or smart key) may not
work properly.
CAUTION
Always place the fuse switch in
the ON position while driving
the vehicle.
7 62
Maintenance
3. Check the removed fuse; replace it Multi fuse ✽ NOTICE

if it is blown. To remove or insert If the multi fuse is blown, consult an
the fuse, use the fuse puller in the Authorized HYUNDAI Dealer.
engine compartment fuse panel.
4. Push in a new fuse of the same
rating, and make sure it fits tightly
in the clips. If it fits loosely, consult
CAUTION
After checking the fuse box in
the engine compartment,
securely install the fuse box OANNMC2033
cover. If not, electrical failures If the multi fuse is blown, it must be
may occur from water leaking in. removed as follows:
1. Disconnect the negative battery
cable.
2. Remove the bolts shown in the
picture above.
3. Replace the fuse with a new one
of the same rating.
4. Reinstall in the reverse order of
removal.
7 63
Maintenance
Fuse/Relay panel description
ODM072017
Inside the fuse/relay box covers, you

can find the fuse/relay label describ-
ing fuse/relay name and capacity.
✽ NOTICE
Not all fuse panel descriptions in OAN077002N
this manual may be applicable to
your vehicle. It is accurate at the
time of printing. When you inspect
the fuse box on your vehicle, refer to
the fuse box label.
7 64
Maintenance
Description Fuse rating Protected Component

A/BAG IND 10A Instrument Cluster, A/C Control Module
A/BAG 15A ACU, Passenger Occupant Detection Sensor
Smart Key Control Module, BCM, Rear Seat Warmer LH/RH,
5
MODULE 7.5A
Driver/Passenger Climate Control Seat Control Module, Driver/Passenger Seat Warmer Module, AVM
Sport Mode Switch, Key Solenoid, Console Switch LH/RH, Front Console Switch,
1
MODULE 7.5A
Rear Power Window Switch LH/RH, Data Link Connector
FOG LAMP REAR 10A -
BCM, Tire Pressure Monitoring Module, Electro Chromic Mirror, Driver/Passenger Door Module,
2
MEMORY 10A
Auto Light & Photo Sensor, A/C Control Module, Instrument Cluster, FRT DRV-Seat
2
SMART KEY 7.5A Smart Key Control Module, Immobilizer Module
BCM, Instrument Cluster, Tire Pressure Monitoring Module, A/C Control Module, Audio,
Driver/Passenger Door Module, ATM Shift Lever Indicator, Rear Seat Warmer LH/RH, AWD ECM,
3
MODULE 10A Driver/Passenger Climate Control Seat Control Module, Driver/Passenger Seat Warmer Module,
MTS Module, Rear Parking Assist Sensor LH/RH, A/V & Navigation Head Unit, Rear Parking Assist
Sensor (Center) LH/RH, EPB EXTN, Console SW AT LH
4
SMART KEY 10A Start/Stop Button Switch, Immobilizer Module
Cargo Lamp, Vanity Lamp LH/RH, Overhead Console Lamp, Center Room Lamp,
INTERIOR LAMP 15A
Personal Lamp LH/RH
MULTI MEDIA 15A Audio, A/V & Navigation Head Unit, MTS Module
MDPS 7.5A MDPS Unit
HEATED STEERING 15A Steering Wheel Switch
1
MEMORY 10A RF Receiver, Ignition Key Ill. & Door Warning Switch
7 65
Maintenance

W/O IMMO. & Smart Key : ICM Relay Box (Burglar Alarm Relay)
START 7.5A With IMMO. or Smart Key : PCM, Transaxle Range Switch, Smart Key Control Module,
E/R Fuse & Relay Box (Start Relay)
Crash Pad Switch, Multipurpose Check Connector, Head Lamp Leveling Device Actuator LH/RH,
2
MODULE 10A
Auto Head Lamp Leveling Device Module, Stop Lamp Switch, SCC RADAR
CORNERING LAMP 10A -
2
SUNROOF 20A Sunroof
S/HEATER RR 15A Rear Seat Warmer LH/RH
IG1 20A E/R Fuse & Relay Box (Fuse - ABS 3, SENSOR 5, TCU)
1
A/CON 7.5A E/R Fuse & Relay Box (Blower Relay), A/C Control Module, Cluster Ionizer
WIPER RR 15A Rear Wiper Relay, Rear Wiper Motor, Multifunction Switch, BCM
1
SMART KEY 25A Smart Key Control Module
S/HEATER FRT 20A Driver/Passenger CCS Control Module, Driver/Passenger Seat Warmer Module
2
A/CON 7.5A A/C Control Module
C/LIGHTER 20A Front Power Outlet & Cigarette Lighter, Luggage Power Outlet
WIPER FRT 15A Multifunction Switch, E/R Fuse & Relay Box (Wiper HI Relay, IG2 Relay)
BLOWER RR 20A -
P/WINDOW RH 25A Passenger Door Module, Rear Power Window Switch RH
REAR HEATED 10A A/C Control Module
BRAKE SWITCH 7.5A Smart Key Control Module, Stop Lamp Switch
7 66
Maintenance

1
SUNROOF 20A Sunroof
P/WINDOW LH 25A Driver Safety Power Window Module, Driver Door Module, Rear Power Window Switch LH
FUEL LID 15A Fuel Fillar Door Switch
3
SMART KEY 7.5A Smart Key Control Module
STOP LAMP 15A Stop Signal Electronic Module
P/SEAT (PASS) 20A Passenger Seat Manual Switch
AMP 30A AMP
Audio, A/V & Navigation Head Unit, BCM, AMP, MTS Module, Power Outside Mirror Switch,
4
MODULE 10A
E/R Fuse & Relay Box (Power Outlet Relay), AVM
DR LOCK 20A Door Lock/Unlock Relay, Tail Gate Relay, ICM Relay Box (Dead Lock Relay), BCM
P/SEAT (DRV) 30A Driver IMS Module, Driver Seat Manual Switch, Driver Lumbar Support Switch
7 67
Maintenance
Engine compartment fuse panel
OAN077008N
OAN077001N
7 68
Maintenance
Relay NO. Relay Name Relay Type

E30 POWER OUTLET RELAY ISO MICRO
E31 START RELAY ISO MICRO
E32 FRONT DEICER RELAY ISO MICRO
E33 BLOWER RELAY ISO MICRO
E34 WIPER LO RELAY ISO MICRO
E36 ACC RELAY ISO MICRO
E37 IG1 RELAY ISO MICRO
E38 IG2 RELAY ISO MICRO
E39 COOLING FAN RELAY ISO MINI
E40 WIPER HI RELAY ISO MICRO
E41 REAR DEFOGGER RELAY ISO MICRO
E42 HORN RELAY ISO MICRO
E43 VACUUM PUMP RELAY ISO MICRO
7 69
Maintenance

MDPS 80A MDPS Unit
Smart Junction Box (IPS 1 (4CH), IPS 2 (1CH), IPS 5 (1CH),
2
B+ 60A
Fuse - SUNROOF 1, P/SEAT PASS, P/SEAT DRV)
BLOWER 40A Blower Relay
MULTI REAR HEATED 40A Rear Defogger Relay
FUSE ABS
1
40A ESC Module, Multipurpose Check Connector
ABS
2
40A ESC Module
COOLING FAN 60A Cooling Fan Relay
Smart Junction Box (Fuse - MODULE 1, SMART KEY 4, SUNROOF 2, SMART KEY 1,
3
B+ 60A
Leak Current Autocut Device)
Smart Junction Box (IPS 3 (4CH), IPS 6 (2CH), Fuse - F/LID, STOP LAMP, DR LOCK,
4
B+ 50A
BRAKE SWITCH, IPS 4 (2CH)
ECU 40A EMS Box
IG1 40A W/O Smart Key : Ignition Switch, With Smart Key - ACC Relay, IG1 Relay
IG2 40A Start Relay, IG2 Relay, W/O Smart Key : Ignition Switch
TRAILER 30A Trailer Power Outlet
FUSE
1
B+ 50A Smart Junction Box (Fuse - S/HEATER RR, S/HEATER FRT, P/WDW RH, P/WDW LH), AMP
HORN 15A Horn Relay
VACUUM PUMP 20A Vacuum Pump Relay
DEICER 15A Front Deicer Relay
POWER OUTLET 25A Power Outlet Relay
4WD 20A AWD ECM
AMS 10A Battery Sensor
7 70
Maintenance

AMS (WIPER) 10A BCM, PCM
WIPER (FRT) 25A Wiper LO Relay, Front Wiper Motor
B/UP LAMP 10A A/T - Rear Combination Lamp (IN) LH/RH, Electro Chromic Mirror, Audio, A/V & Navigation Head Unit
3
ABS 7.5A ESC Module
5
SENSOR 7.5A PCM
TCU 15A A/T : Transaxle Range Switch
FUEL PUMP 15A Fuel Pump Relay
ECU 1 15A PCM
ECU 2 10A -
3
SENSOR 10A E/R Fuse & Relay Box (Cooing Fan Relay)
IGN COIL 20A Ignition Coil #1/#2/#3/#4
FUSE
Purge Control Solenoid Valve, Variable Intake Solenoid Valve(G4KJ),
2
SENSOR 10A
RCV Control Solenoid Valve(G4KH), Oil Control Valve #1/#2, Canister Close Valve
1
SENSOR 15A Oxygen Sensor (Up), Oxygen Sensor(Down)
4
SENSOR 20A PCM
B/ALARM HORN 10A Burglar Alarm Horn Relay, SCC radar
3
E-CVVT 40A E-CVVT Relay
1
E-CVVT 20A PCM
2
E-CVVT 20A PCM
1
EPB 15A EPB UNIT
2
EPB 15A EPB UNIT
POWER TAILGATE 30A Power Tail Gate
7 71
Maintenance
LIGHT BULBS
✽ NOTICE
WARNING - Working on CAUTION
After heavy, driving rain or wash-
the lights If you don’t have necessary ing, headlamp and taillamp lenses
Prior to working on the light, tools, the correct bulbs and the could appear frosty. This condition
firmly apply the parking brake, expertise, consult an authorized is caused by the temperature differ-
ensure that the ignition switch HYUNDAI dealer. In many cases, ence between the lamp inside and
is turned to the “LOCK” position it is difficult to replace vehicle outside. This is similar to the con-
and turn off the lights to avoid light bulbs because other parts densation on your windows inside
sudden movement of the vehi- of the vehicle must be removed your vehicle during the rain and
cle and burning your fingers or before you can get to the bulb. doesn’t indicate a problem with
receiving an electric shock. This is especially true if you your vehicle. If the water leaks into
have to remove the headlight the lamp bulb circuitry, have the
assembly to get to the bulb(s). vehicle checked by an authorized
Use only the bulbs of the specified Removing/installing the head- HYUNDAI dealer.
wattage. light assembly can result in
damage to the vehicle.
CAUTION
Be sure to replace the burned-
out bulb with one of the same
wattage rating. Otherwise, it
may cause damage to the fuse
or electric wiring system.
7 72
Maintenance
Headlamp, Front position lamp, Headlamp bulb

(Continued)
Front turn signal lamp,
Front fog lamp bulb and • Always handle them carefully,
Daytime running lamp and avoid scratches and abra-
replacement sions. If the bulbs are lit, avoid
contact with liquids. Never
touch the glass with bare
hands. Residual oil may cause
the bulb to overheat and burst
when lit. A bulb should be
operated only when installed
in a headlamp.
• If a bulb becomes damaged or
OHD076046 cracked, replace it immediate-
ly and carefully dispose of it.
WARNING - Halogen • Wear eye protection when
bulbs changing a bulb. Allow the
OAN077029N bulb to cool down before han-
• Halogen bulbs contain pres- dling it.
(1) Headlamp (Low) surized gas that will produce
(2) Headlamp (High) flying pieces of glass if bro-
(3) Front turn signal lamp ken.
(4) Position lamp (LED) (Continued)
(5) Front side marker
(6) Front fog lamp (if equipped)
(7) Daytime running (DRL) lamp
(LED) (if equipped)
7 73
Maintenance
7. Install the socket in the assembly Turn signal lamp bulbs /

by aligning the tabs on the socket Side marker lamp bulbs
with the slots in the assembly. 1. Remove the socket from the
Push the socket into the assembly assembly by turning the socket
and turn the socket clockwise. counterclockwise until the tabs on
8. Install the headlamp bulb cover by the socket align with the slots on
turning it clockwise. the assembly.
2. Remove the bulb from the socket
Tu r n s i g n a l
Side marker
✽ NOTICE by pressing it in and rotating it
High Low counterclockwise until the tabs on
Always have the headlight aiming the bulb align with the slots in the
OAN077009N adjusted after an accident or the socket. Pull the bulb out of the
1. Open the hood.
headlight assembly is reinstalled at socket
2. Remove the headlamp bulb cover 3. Insert a new bulb by inserting it
by turning it counterclockwise. into the socket and rotating it until
3. Disconnect the headlamp bulb it locks into place.
socket-connector. 4. Install the socket in the assembly
4. Remove the socket from the by aligning the tabs on the socket
assembly by turning the socket with the slots in the assembly.
counterclockwise until the tabs on Push the socket into the assembly
the socket align with the slots on and turn the socket clockwise.
the assembly.
5. Remove the bulb by pulling it out.
6. Inset a new bulb by inserting it into
the socket.
7 74
Maintenance
Front fog lamp bulbs Headlamp (HID type), ✽ NOTICE

(if equipped) position lamp (LED) and daytime HID lamps have superior perform-
1. Remove the front bumper under running (LED) lamp replacement ance vs. halogen bulbs. HID lamps
cover. are estimated by the manufacturer to
2. Reach your hand into the back of WARNING - HID last twice as long or longer than halo-
the front bumper. gen bulbs depending on their fre-
3. Disconnect the power connector
Headlamp low beam
(if equipped) quency of use. They will probably
from the socket. require replacement at some point in
4. Remove the bulb-socket from the Do not attempt to replace or the life of the vehicle. Cycling the
housing by turning the socket inspect the low beam (XENON headlamps on and off more than typ-
counter clockwise until the tabs on bulb) due to electric shock dan- ical use will shorten HID lamps life.
the socket align with the slots on ger. If the low beam (XENON HID lamps do not fail in the same
the housing. bulb) is not working, have your manner as halogen incandescent
5. Install the new bulb-socket into the vehicle checked by an author- lamps. If a headlamp goes out after a
housing by aligning the tabs on ized HYUNDAI Dealer. period of operation but will immedi-
the socket with the slots in the ately relight when the headlamp
housing. Push the socket into the switch is cycled it is likely the HID
housing and turn the socket clock- If the lamp does not operate, have lamp needs to be replaced. HID light-
wise. the vehicle checked by an authorized ing components are more complex
6. Connect the power connector to HYUNDAI dealer. than conventional halogen bulbs thus
the socket. have higher replacement cost.
7. Reinstall the front bumper under
cover. ✽ NOTICE
A skilled technician should check or
repair the LED light. Otherwise, it
may damage related parts.
7 75
Maintenance
Side repeater lamp replace- Rear combination lamp bulb Outside lamp
ment replacement
■ Type A
Service cover
ODM076033L OAN077034N
■ Type B
ODM072031 1. Open the liftgate (tailgate).
If the lamp does not operate, have 2. Remove the service cover using a
the vehicle checked by an authorized flat-blade screwdriver.
HYUNDAI dealer.
✽ NOTICE
A skilled technician should check or
repair the side repeater lamp.
Otherwise, it may damage related ODM076033L
parts (ex. outside mirror).
(1) Stop and tail lamp
(2) Tail lamp
(3) Rear turn signal lamp
(4) Back-up lamp
(5) Rear side marker (LED)
7 76
Maintenance
■ Type A 6. Remove the bulb from the socket by

pressing it in and rotating it counter-
clockwise until the tabs on the bulb
align with the slots in the socket.
Pull the bulb out of the socket.
7. Insert a new bulb by inserting it
into the socket and rotating it until
it locks into place.
8. Install the socket in the assembly
ODM076103L
by aligning the tabs on the socket
■ Type B with the slots in the assembly.
ODM072034 Push the socket into the assembly
3. Loosen the lamp assembly retain- and turn the socket clockwise.
ing please verify. 9. Reinstall the lamp assembly to the
4. Remove the rear combination body of the vehicle.
lamp assembly from the body of
the vehicle.
ODM076104L
5. Remove the socket from the
assembly by turning the socket
counterclockwise until the tabs on
the socket align with the slots on
the assembly.
7 77
Maintenance
Inside lamp ■ Type A 4. Remove the bulb from the socket

by pressing it in and rotating it
the bulb align with the slots in the
socket. Pull the bulb out of the
socket. (Back-up lamp : Remove
the bulb from the socket by pulling
it out)
5. Insert a new bulb by inserting it
Back-up lamp into the socket and rotating it until
ODM072037
■ Type B
it locks into place.
6. Install the socket in the assembly
Stop/tail lamp
OANNMC2036
by aligning the tabs on the socket
with the slots in the assembly.
1. Open the liftgate (tailgate). Push the socket into the assembly
2. Remove the service cover using a and turn the socket clockwise.
flat-blade screwdriver. 7. Install the service cover by putting
it into the service hole.
ODMEMC2011
3. Remove the socket from the
assembly by turning the socket
the socket align with the slots on
the assembly.
7 78
Maintenance
High mounted stop lamp

replacement
B
ODMEMC2022 ODMEMC2021
ODMEMC2018 4. Loosen the retaining nuts and 5. Remove the high mounted stop
remove the spoiler. lamp assembly (A) after loosening
the nuts and washer nozzle (B).
6. Reinstall a new lamp assembly in
the reverse order of removal.
ODMEMC2019
1. Open the liftgate (tailgate).

2. Gently remove the center cover of
the rear liftgate (tailgate) trim.
3. Disconnect the electrical connector.
7 79
Maintenance
License plate lamp bulb

replacement
ODM072039
1. Loosen the lens retaining screws

with a screwdriver.
2. Remove the lens.
3. Remove the bulb.
4. Install a new bulb.
5. Reinstall the lens securely with the
lens retaining screws.
7 80
Maintenance
Interior lamp bulb replacement

■ Map lamp ■ Luggage room lamp (if equipped)
WARNING
Prior to working on the Interior
Lamps, ensure that the “OFF”
button is depressed to avoid
burning your fingers or receiv-
ing an electric shock.
1. Using a flat-blade screwdriver,

■ Sunvisor lamp
■ Room lamp gently pry the lens from the interior
■ Type A lamp housing.
2. Remove the bulb by pulling it
straight out.
3. Install a new bulb in the socket.
4. Align the lens tabs with the interior
lamp housing notches and snap
the lens into place.
■ Type B ■ Glove box lamp (if equipped) CAUTION

Use care not to dirty or damage
lens, lens tab, and plastic hous-
ings.
ODM072040/ODM072042/ODM072052 OXM079044/ODM072041/ODM072043
7 81
Maintenance
APPEARANCE CARE
Exterior care Finish maintenance
Washing CAUTION
Exterior general caution
To help protect your vehicle’s finish • Do not use strong soap, chem-
It is very important to follow the label ical detergents or hot water,
directions when using any chemical from rust and deterioration, wash it
thoroughly and frequently at least and do not wash the vehicle in
cleaner or polish. Read all warning direct sunlight or when the
and caution statements that appear once a month with lukewarm or cold
water. body of the vehicle is warm.
on the label.
If you use your vehicle for off-road • Be careful when washing the
driving, you should wash it after each side windows of your vehicle.
High-pressure washing off-road trip. Pay special attention to Especially, with high-pressure
• When using high-pressure wash- the removal of any accumulation of water, water may leak through
ers, make sure to maintain suffi- salt, dirt, mud, and other foreign mate- the windows and wet the inte-
cient distance from the vehicle. rials. Make sure the drain holes in the rior.
Insufficient clearance or excessive lower edges of the doors and rocker • To prevent damage to the
pressure can lead to component panels are kept clear and clean. plastic parts and lamps, do
damage or water penetration. Insects, tar, tree sap, bird droppings, not clean with chemical sol-
• Do not spray the camera, sensors industrial pollution and similar vents or strong detergents.
or its surrounding area directly with deposits can damage your vehicle’s
a high pressure washer. Shock finish if not removed immediately.
applied from high pressure water Even prompt washing with plain WARNING - Wet brakes
may cause the device to not oper- water may not completely remove all
ate normally. After washing the vehicle, test
these deposits. the brakes while driving slowly
• Do not bring the nozzle tip close to A mild soap, safe for use on painted to see if they have been affected
boots (rubber or plastic covers) or surfaces, may be used. by water. If braking performance
connectors as they may be dam- After washing, rinse the vehicle thor- is impaired, dry the brakes by
aged if they come into contact with oughly with lukewarm or cold water. applying them lightly while main-
high pressure water. Do not allow soap to dry on the finish. taining a slow forward speed.
7 82
Maintenance
Waxing
Wax the vehicle when water will no CAUTION
longer bead on the paint. • Wiping dust or dirt off the
Always wash and dry the vehicle body with a dry cloth will
before waxing. Use a good quality scratch the finish.
liquid or paste wax, and follow the • Do not use steel wool, abra-
manufacturer’s instructions. Wax all sive cleaners, or strong deter-
metal trim to protect it and to main- gents containing highly alka-
tain its luster. line or caustic agents on
Removing oil, tar, and similar materi- chrome-plated or anodized
als with a spot remover will usually aluminum parts. This may
OJB037800
strip the wax from the finish. Be sure result in damage to the pro-
to re-wax these areas even if the rest tective coating and cause dis-
coloration or paint deteriora-
CAUTION of the vehicle does not yet need wax-
tion.
• Water washing in the engine ing.
compartment including high
pressure water washing may
cause the failure of electrical
circuits located in the engine
compartment.
• Never allow water or other liq-
uids to come in contact with
electrical/electronic compo-
nents inside the vehicle as
this may damage them.
7 83
Maintenance
Finish damage repair Bright-metal maintenance Underbody maintenance

Deep scratches or stone chips in the • To remove road tar and insects, Corrosive materials used for ice and
painted surface must be repaired use a tar remover, not a scraper or snow removal and dust control may
promptly. Exposed metal will quickly other sharp object. collect on the underbody. If these
rust and may develop into a major • To protect the surfaces of bright- materials are not removed, acceler-
repair expense. metal parts from corrosion, apply a ated rusting can occur on underbody
coating of wax or chrome preser- parts such as the fuel lines, frame,
floor pan and exhaust system, even
✽ NOTICE vative and rub to a high luster.
though they have been treated with
If your vehicle is damaged and • During winter weather or in coastal rust protection.
requires any metal repair or areas, cover the bright metal parts
with a heavier coating of wax or Thoroughly flush the vehicle under-
replacement, be sure the body shop body and wheel openings with luke-
applies anti-corrosion materials to preservative. If necessary, coat the
parts with non-corrosive petroleum warm or cold water once a month,
the parts repaired or replaced. after off-road driving and at the end
jelly or other protective compound.
of each winter. Pay special attention
to these areas because it is difficult
to see all the mud and dirt. It will do
more harm than good to wet down
the road grime without removing it.
The lower edges of doors, rocker
panels, and frame members have
drain holes that should not be
allowed to clog with dirt; trapped
water in these areas can cause rust-
ing.
7 84
Maintenance
Aluminum wheel maintenance Corrosion protection

WARNING The aluminum wheels are coated Protecting your vehicle from corro-
After washing the vehicle, test with a clear protective finish. sion
the brakes while driving slowly • Do not use any abrasive cleaner, By using the most advanced design
to see if they have been affected polishing compound, solvent, or and construction practices to combat
by water. If braking performance wire brushes on aluminum wheels. corrosion, we produces cars of the
is impaired, dry the brakes by They may scratch or damage the highest quality. However, this is only
applying them lightly while main- finish. part of the job. To achieve the long-
taining a slow forward speed. term corrosion resistance your vehi-
• Clean the wheel when it has cooled.
cle can deliver, the owner's coopera-
• Use only a mild soap or neutral tion and assistance is also required.
detergent, and rinse thoroughly
with water. Also, be sure to clean
the wheels after driving on salted Common causes of corrosion
roads. This helps prevent corrosion. The most common causes of corro-
• Avoid washing the wheels with sion on your vehicle are:
high-speed car wash brushes. • Road salt, dirt and moisture that is
• Do not use any alkaline or acid allowed to accumulate underneath
detergent. It may damage and cor- the car.
rode the aluminum wheels coated • Removal of paint or protective
with a clear protective finish. coatings by stones, gravel, abra-
sion or minor scrapes and dents
which leave unprotected metal
exposed to corrosion.
7 85
Maintenance
High-corrosion areas Moisture breeds corrosion Keep your car clean

If you live in an area where your car Moisture creates an atmosphere that The best way to prevent corrosion is
is regularly exposed to corrosive both promotes and facilitates corro- to keep your car clean and free of
materials, corrosion protection is sion. For example, corrosion is accel- corrosive materials. Attention to the
particularly important. Some of the erated by high humidity, particularly underside of the car is particularly
common causes of accelerated cor- when temperatures are just above important.
rosion are road salts, dust control freezing. In such conditions, the cor-
chemicals, ocean air and industrial rosive material is kept in contact with
pollution. the car surfaces by moisture that is • If you live in a high-corrosion area
slow to evaporate. where road salts are used, near the
Mud is particularly corrosive ocean, areas with industrial pollu-
because it is slow to dry and holds tion, or acid rain, etc., you should
moisture in contact with the vehicle. take extra care to prevent corrosion.
Although the mud appears to be dry, In winter, spray or rinse the under-
it can still retain the moisture and side of your car at least once a
promote corrosion. month and be sure to clean the
High temperatures can also acceler- underside thoroughly when winter
ate corrosion of parts that are poorly is over.
ventilated against moisture disperal. • When cleaning underneath the car,
It is particularly important to keep give particular attention to the
your car clean and free of mud or components under the fenders and
accumulations of other materials. other areas that are hidden from
This applies not only to the visible view. Do a thorough job; just damp-
surfaces but particularly to the ening the accumulated mud rather
underside of the car. than washing it away will acceler-
ate corrosion rather than prevent
To help prevent corrosion it. Water under high pressure and
You can help prevent corrosion or steam are particularly effective in
drastically limit by observing the fol- removing accumulated mud and
lowing: corrosive materials.
7 86
Maintenance
• When cleaning lower door panels, Keep paint and trim in good con- Interior care
rocker panels and frame mem- dition
bers, be sure that drain holes are
Interior general precautions
Scratches or chips in the finish
kept open so that moisture can Prevent caustic solutions such as
should be covered with "touch-up"
escape. If these areas are not kept perfume and cosmetic oil from con-
paint as soon as possible to reduce
clear, moisture could become tacting the dashboard because they
the possibility of corrosion. If bare
trapped and accelerate corrosion. may cause damage or discoloration.
metal is showing, the attention of a
If they do contact the dashboard,
qualified body and paint shop is rec-
clean immediately. See the instruc-
Keep your garage dry ommended.
tions that follow for the proper way to
Don't park your car in a damp or clean vinyl.
poorly ventilated garage. This cre- Bird droppings : Bird droppings are
ates a favorable environment for cor- highly corrosive and may damage CAUTION
rosion. This is particularly true if you painted surfaces in just a few hours.
wash your car in the garage or drive Always remove bird droppings as Never allow water or other liq-
it into the garage when it is still wet or soon as possible. uids to come in contact with
covered with snow, ice or mud. Even electrical/electronic components
a heated garage can contribute to inside the vehicle as this may
corrosion unless it is well ventilated Don't neglect the interior damage them.
so moisture can dispersed. Moisture can collect under the floor
mats and carpeting to cause corro-
sion. Check under the mats periodi- CAUTION
cally to be sure the carpeting is dry. When cleaning leather products
Use particular care if you carry fertil- (steering wheel, seats etc.), use
izers, cleaning materials or chemi- neutral detergents or low alco-
cals in the car. hol content solutions. If you use
These should be carried only in prop- high alcohol content solutions
er containers and any spills or leaks or acid/alkaline detergents, the
should be cleaned up, flushed with color of the leather may fade or
clean water and thoroughly dried. the surface may get stripped off.
7 87
Maintenance
Cleaning the upholstery and inte- Cleaning the lap/shoulder belt

rior trim webbing
Vinyl Clean the belt webbing with any mild
Remove dust and loose dirt from soap solution recommended for
vinyl with a whisk broom or vacuum cleaning upholstery or carpet. Follow
cleaner. Clean vinyl surfaces with a the instructions provided with the
vinyl cleaner. soap. Do not bleach or re-dye the
webbing because this may weaken it.
Fabric
Cleaning the interior window
Remove dust and loose dirt from fab-
ric with a whisk broom or vacuum glass
cleaner. Clean with a mild soap solu- If the interior glass surfaces of the
tion recommended for upholstery or vehicle become fogged (that is, cov-
carpets. Remove fresh spots imme- ered with an oily, greasy or waxy
diately with a fabric spot cleaner. If film), they should be cleaned with
fresh spots do not receive immediate glass cleaner. Follow the directions
attention, the fabric can be stained on the glass cleaner container.
and its color can be affected. Also, its
fire-resistant properties can be CAUTION
reduced if the material is not proper-
ly maintained. Do not scrape or scratch the
inside of the rear window. This
may result in damage to the rear
CAUTION window defroster grid.
Using anything but recommend-
ed cleaners and procedures
may affect the fabric’s appear-
ance and fire-resistant proper-
ties.
7 88
Maintenance
EMISSION CONTROL SYSTEM

The emission control system of your Caution for the Inspection and 1. Crankcase emission control
vehicle is covered by a written limited Maintenance Test (With Electronic system
warranty. Please see the warranty Stability Control (ESC) system)
The positive crankcase ventilation
information contained in the Owner’s • To prevent the vehicle from mis- system is employed to prevent air
Handbook & Warranty Information firing during dynamometer test- pollution caused by blow-by gases
booklet in your vehicle. ing, turn the Electronic Stability being emitted from the crankcase.
Your vehicle is equipped with an Control (ESC) system off by This system supplies fresh filtered air
emission control system to meet all pressing the ESC switch. to the crankcase through the air
emission regulations. • After dynamometer testing is intake hose. Inside the crankcase,
There are three emission control completed, turn the ESC system the fresh air mixes with blow-by
systems which are as follows. back on by pressing the ESC gases, which then pass through the
switch again. PCV valve into the induction system.
(1) Crankcase emission control sys-
tem
(2) Evaporative emission control sys-
tem
(3) Exhaust emission control system
In order to assure the proper function

of the emission control systems, it is
recommended that you have your
car inspected and maintained by an
authorized HYUNDAI dealer in
accordance with the maintenance
schedule in this manual.
7 89
Maintenance
2. Evaporative emission con- Purge Control Solenoid Valve 3. Exhaust emission control
trol (including ORVR: (PCSV) system
Onboard Refueling Vapor The purge control solenoid valve is The Exhaust Emission Control
Recovery) system controlled by the Engine Control System is a highly effective system
The Evaporative Emission Control Module (ECM); when the engine which controls exhaust emissions
System is designed to prevent fuel coolant temperature is low during while maintaining good vehicle per-
vapors from escaping into the atmos- idling, the PCSV closes so that evap- formance.
phere. orated fuel is not taken into the
(The ORVR system is designed to engine. After the engine warms-up
during ordinary driving, the PCSV
Vehicle modifications
allow the vapors from the fuel tank to This vehicle should not be modified.
be loaded into a canister while refu- opens to introduce evaporated fuel to
the engine. Modification of your vehicle could
eling at the gas station, preventing affect its performance, safety or
the escape of fuel vapors into the durability and may even violate gov-
atmosphere.) ernmental safety and emissions reg-
ulations.
Canister
In addition, damage or performance
Fuel vapors generated inside the fuel problems resulting from any modifi-
tank are absorbed and stored in the cation may not be covered under
onboard canister. When the engine is warranty.
running, the fuel vapors absorbed in
the canister are drawn into the surge • If you use unauthorized electronic
tank through the purge control sole- devices, it may cause the vehicle to
noid valve. operate abnormally, wire damage,
battery discharge and fire. For your
safety, do not use unauthorized
electronic devices.
7 90
Maintenance
Engine exhaust gas precautions • Do not operate the engine in con-

(carbon monoxide) CALIFORNIA PROPO- fined or closed areas (such as
• Carbon monoxide can be present SITION 65 WARNING garages) any more than what is
with other exhaust fumes. Engine exhaust and a wide vari- necessary to move the vehicle in or
Therefore, if you smell exhaust ety of automobile components out of the area.
fumes of any kind inside your vehi- and parts, including compo- • When the vehicle is stopped in an
cle, have it inspected and repaired nents found in the interior fur- open area for more than a short
immediately. If you ever suspect nishings in a vehicle, contain or time with the engine running, adjust
exhaust fumes are coming into emit chemicals known to the the ventilation system (as needed)
your vehicle, drive it only with all State of California to cause can- to draw outside air into the vehicle.
the windows fully open. Have your cer and birth defects and repro- • Never sit in a parked or stopped
vehicle checked and repaired ductive harm. In addition, cer- vehicle for any extended time with
immediately. tain fluids contained in vehicles the engine running.
and certain products of compo-
• When the engine stalls or fails to
nent wear contain or emit chem-
WARNING - Exhaust start, excessive attempts to restart
icals known to the State of
the engine may cause damage to
Engine exhaust gases contain California to cause cancer and
the emission control system.
carbon monoxide (CO). Though birth defects or other reproduc-
colorless and odorless, it is tive harm.
dangerous and could be lethal if
inhaled. Follow the instructions
on this page to avoid CO poi-
soning.
7 91
Maintenance
Operating precautions for catalyt- Your vehicle is equipped with a cat- Failure to observe these precautions
ic converters (if equipped) alytic converter emission control could result in damage to the catalyt-
device. ic converter and to your vehicle.
Therefore, the following precautions Additionally, such actions could void
WARNING - Fire your warranties.
must be observed:
• A hot exhaust system can
ignite flammable items under • Use only UNLEADED FUEL for
your vehicle. Do not park, idle, gasoline engine.
or drive the vehicle over or • Do not operate the vehicle when
near flammable objects, such there are signs of engine malfunc-
as grass, vegetation, paper, tion, such as misfire or a noticeable
leaves, etc. loss of performance.
• The exhaust system and cat- • Do not misuse or abuse the
alytic system are very hot engine. Examples of misuse are
while the engine is running or coasting with the ignition off and
immediately after the engine descending steep grades in gear
is turned off. Keep away from with the ignition off.
the exhaust system and cat- • Do not operate the engine at high
alytic, you may get burned. idle speed for extended periods (5
Also, do not remove the heat minutes or more).
sink around the exhaust sys- • Do not modify or tamper with any
tem, do not seal the bottom of part of the engine or emission con-
the vehicle or do not coat the trol system. All inspections and
vehicle for corrosion control. adjustments must be made by an
It may present a fire risk under authorized HYUNDAI dealer.
certain conditions. • Avoid driving with an extremely low
fuel level. Running out of fuel could
cause the engine to misfire, dam-
aging the catalytic converter.
7 92
Maintenance
CALIFORNIA PERCHLORATE NOTICE

Perchlorate Material-special handling
may apply, See www.dtsc.ca.gov/haz-
ardouswaste/perchlorate.
Notice to California Vehicle

Dismantlers:
Perchlorate containing materials,
such as air bag inflators, seatbelt
pretensioners and keyless remote
entry batteries, must be disposed of
according to Title 22 California Code
of Regulations Section 67384.10 (a).
7 93
Specifications, Consumer information and Reporting safety defects
Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-2
Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-2
Bulb wattage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-3
Tires and wheels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-4
Air conditioning system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-5
Gross vehicle weight. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-5
Luggage volume . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-5
Recommended lubricants and capacities. . . . . . . . 8-6
• Recommended SAE viscosity number. . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-8
Vehicle identification number (VIN) . . . . . . . . . . . 8-9
Vehicle certification label. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-9
Tire specification and pressure label . . . . . . . . . . 8-10
Engine number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-10
Refrigerant label. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-10
Consumer information. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-11
Reporting safety defects. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-12
8
Specifications, Consumer information, Reporting safety defects
DIMENSIONS ENGINE
Item in (mm) Gasoline Gasoline
Item
Theta II 2.0 Theta II 2.4
Overall length 185.03 (4,700)
Overall width 74.01 (1,880) Displacement 121.92 143.95
cu. in (cc) (1,998) (2,359)
Overall height 66.14 (1,680)/66.53 (1,690) *1
Bore x Stroke 3.38X3.38 3.46X3.81
235/65R17 64.29 (1,633)
in. (mm) (86x86) (88x97)
235/60R18 64.09 (1,628)
Firing order 1-3-4-2 1-3-4-2
Front tread 235/55R19 64.09 (1,628)
No. of cylinders 4. In-line 4. In-line
P235/65R17 64.29 (1,633)
P235/55R19 64.09 (1,628)
235/65R17 64.72 (1,644)
235/60R18 64.52 (1,639)
Rear tread 235/55R19 64.52 (1,639)
P235/65R17 64.72 (1,644)
P235/55R19 64.52 (1,639)
Wheelbase 106.29 (2,700)
* with roof rack
1
8 2
BULB WATTAGE
Lamp Bulb Wattage Bulb type
Halogen 60 9005L+
Headlamp (Low)
HID 35 D3S
Halogen 60 9005L+
Headlamp (High)
HID 60 9005L+
Position lamp LED LED
Front Fog lamp* 35 H8 L/L
Halogen 28 2357NA
Turn singnal lamp
HID 28 2357NA
Turn singnal lamp (Outside mirror)* LED LED
Front marker lamp 5 W5W
Daytime running lamp (DRL)* LED LED
Stop/Tail lamp (Outside) 28/8 12 V 28W/8W
Tail lamp (Inside) 28/8 12 V 28W/8W
Back-up lamp 16 W16W
Rear Turn signal lamp 21 P21W
Rear marker lamp LED LED
License plate lamp 5 W5W
High mounted stop lamp LED LED
Map lamp 10 FESTOON
Room lamp 8 FESTOON
Interior Vanity mirror lamp 5 FESTOON
Glove box lamp 5 FESTOON
Luggage lamp 5 FESTOON
* If equipped
❈ HID : High Intensity Discharge
8 3
TIRES AND WHEELS

Inflation pressure [psi (kPa)]
Normal load Maximum load Wheel lug nut torque
Item Tire size Wheel size
( ) ( ) lbf·ft, N•m (kgf·m)
Front Rear Front Rear
235/65R17 7.0J×17
235/60R18 7.5J×18
34 34 34 34
Full size tire 235/55R19 7.5J×19
(235) (235) (235) (235)
P235/65R17 7.0J×17 65~79, 88~107
(9~11)
P235/55R19 7.5J×19
60 60 60 60
Compact spare tire T165/90D17 4.0T×17
(420) (420) (420) (420)
✽ NOTICE
• It is permissible to add 3psi (20 kPa) to the standard tire pressure specification if colder temperatures are expect-
ed soon. Tires typically loose 1psi (7 kPa) for every 12°F (7°C) temperature drop. If extreme temperature varia-
tions are expected, recheck your tire pressure as necessary to keep them properly inflated.
• An air pressure generally decreases, as you drive up to a high-altitude area above sea level. Thus, if you plan to
drive a high-altitude area, check the tire pressures in advance. If necessary, inflate them to a proper level
(Air inflation per altitude: +2.4 psi/1 mile (+10 kPa/1 km).
CAUTION
When replacing tires, use the same size originally supplied with the vehicle.
Using tires of a different size can damage the related parts or make it work irregularly.
8 4
AIR CONDITIONING SYSTEM

Item Weight of volume Classification
FRONT A/CON 600 ± 25g
Refrigerant R-134a
FRONT + REAR A/CON 750 ± 25g
FRONT A/CON 120 ± 10g
Compressor lubricant PAG (FD46XG)
FRONT + REAR A/CON 210 ± 10g
Contact an authorized HYUNDAI dealer for more details.
GROSS VEHICLE WEIGHT

Gasoline Theta II 2.0 T-GDI Gasoline Theta II 2.4 GDI
Item
2WD AWD 2WD AWD
5,004 lbs. 5,159 lbs. 4,872 lbs. 5,026 lbs.
Automatic transaxle
(2,270 kg) (2,340 kg) (2,210 kg) (2,280 kg)
LUGGAGE VOLUME
Item 5 Seater
1 Seat 71.5 cu f (2,025 l)
SAE
2 Seat 35.4 cu f (1,003 l)
8 5
RECOMMENDED LUBRICANTS AND CAPACITIES

To help achieve proper engine and powertrain performance and durability, use only lubricants of the proper quality.
The correct lubricants also help promote engine efficiency that results in improved fuel economy.
These lubricants and fluids are recommended for use in your vehicle.
Lubricant Volume Classification
Engine oil * *1 2
Theta II 2.0 HYUNDAI approved engine oil
(drain and refill) 5.07 US qt. (4.8 l)
T-GDI ACEA A5 (or above)
Recommends Gasoline
Engine API Service SM *3,
Theta II 2.4
5.07 US qt. (4.8 l) ILSAC GF-4 or above
GDI
ACEA A5 (or above)
Theta II 2.0 8.24 US qt. (7.8 l) MICHANG ATF SP-IV,

Gasoline SK ATF SP-IV,
Automatic transaxle fluid
Engine NOCA ATF SP-IV,
Theta II 2.4 7.50 US qt. (7.1 l) HYUNDAI genuine ATF SP-IV
Theta II 2.0 10.24 US qt. (9.7 l) Mixture of antifreeze and distilled water
Gasoline
Coolant (Ethylene glycol base coolant for aluminum
Engine 7.50 ~ 7.51 US qt.
Theta II 2.4 radiator)
(7.1 ~7.4 l)
0.74~0.85 US qt.
Brake fluid FMVSS116 DOT-3 or DOT-4
(0.7~0.8 l)
8 6
Lubricant Volume Classification

HYPOID GEAR OIL API GL-5, SAE 75W/90
Rear differential oil (AWD) 0.56 US qt. (0.53 l)
(SHELL SPIRAX X or equivalent)
Theta II HYPOID GEAR OIL API GL-5, SAE 75W/90

Transfer case oil (AWD) 0.63US qt. (0.6 l)
2.0 / 2.4 (SHELL SPIRAX X or equivalent)
Fuel 17.43 US gal. (66 l) Refer to “Fuel requirements” in section 1
*1 Refer to the recommended SAE viscosity numbers on the next page.

*2 Engine oils labeled Energy Conserving Oil are now available. Along with other additional benefits, they contribute to fuel econo-
my by reducing the amount of fuel necessary to overcome engine friction. Often, these improvements are difficult to measure in
everyday driving, but in a year’s time, they can offer significant cost and energy savings.
*3 If the API service SM engine oil is not available in your state, you are able to use API service SL.
8 7
Recommended SAE viscosity Engine oil viscosity (thickness) has an When choosing an oil, consider the
number effect on fuel economy and cold range of temperature your vehicle will
weather operating (engine start and be operated in before the next oil
CAUTION engine oil flowability). Lower viscosity change. Proceed to select the recom-
engine oils can provide better fuel mended oil viscosity from the chart.
Always be sure to clean the area economy and cold weather perform-
around any filler plug, drain ance, however, higher viscosity engine
plug, or dipstick before check- oils are required for satisfactory lubri-
ing or draining any lubricant. cation in hot weather. Using oils of any
This is especially important in viscosity other than those recommend-
dusty or sandy areas and when ed could result in engine damage.
the vehicle is used on unpaved
roads. Cleaning the plug and
dipstick areas will prevent dirt Temperature Range for SAE Viscosity Numbers
and grit from entering the °C -30 -20 -10 0 10 20 30 40 50
Temperature
engine and other mechanisms (°F) -10 0 20 40 60 80 100 120
that could be damaged. 20W-50
Theta ll 2.0 15W-40
Gasoline T-GDI 10W-30
Engine
5W-30, 5W-40
Oil *1
Theta ll 2.4 10W-30
GDI 5W-20, 5W-30
*1 : For better fuel economy, it is recommended to use the engine oil

of a viscosity grade SAE 5W-30 (API SM / ILSAC GF-4). However,
if the engine oil is not available in your state, select the proper
engine oil using the engine oil viscosity chart.
8 8
VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER (VIN) VEHICLE CERTIFICATION

Frame number VIN label LABEL
ODMEVS2002 OEN086004N
The vehicle identification number The VIN is also on a plate attached OCM056002
(VIN) is the number used in register- to the top of the dashboard. The
ing your vehicle and in all legal mat- number on the plate can easily be The vehicle certification label
ters pertaining to its ownership, etc. seen through the windshield from attached on the driver’s side center
outside. pillar gives the vehicle identification
The number is punched on the number (VIN).
engine compartment bulkhead.
8 9
TIRE SPECIFICATION AND ENGINE NUMBER REFRIGERANT LABEL

PRESSURE LABEL ■ Gasoline engine (2.4L GDI)
OLF084004L
■ Gasoline engine (2.0L Turbo GDI)
ODMNMC2016
ODMNMC2017 The refrigerant label is located at the

front of the engine room.
The tires supplied on your new vehi-
cle are chosen to provide the best The label contains the following infor-
performance for normal driving. mation:
The tire label located on the driver's • Type of refrigerant
side center pillar gives the tire pres- • Amount of refrigerant
sures recommended for your vehicle.
OLF084009N
The engine number is stamped on the
engine block as shown in the drawing.
8 10
CONSUMER INFORMATION
This consumer information has been Eastern Region: Connecticut, Central Region: Illinois, Indiana,
prepared in accordance with regula- Delaware, Maine, Massachusetts, lowa, Kentucky, Michigan, Minnesota,
tions issued by the National Highway New Hampshire, New Jersey, New Nebraska, North Dakota, South
Traffic Safety Administration of the York, Pennsylvania, Rhode Island, Dakota, Ohio, Wisconsin, Kansas,
U.S. Department of Transportation. Vermont. Missouri.
Your Hyundai dealer will help answer
any questions you may have as you Eastern Region Central Region
read this information. 1122 Cranbury South River Road 1705 Sequoia Drive
Hyundai motor vehicles are Jamesburg, NJ 08831 Aurora, Illinois 60506
designed and manufactured to meet (800) 633-5151 (800) 633-5151
or exceed all applicable safety stan-
dards. Southern Region: Florida, Georgia, Western Region: Alaska, Hawaii,
North Carolina, South Carolina, Arizona, California, Colorado, ldaho,
For your safety, however, we strongly Virginia, and West Virginia. Montana, Nevada, Oregon, Utah,
urge you to read and follow all direc- Washington, Wyoming.
tions in this Owner's Manual, particu- Southern Region
larly the information under the head- 3025 Chastain Meadows Parkway Western Region
ings "NOTICE", "CAUTION" and suite 100 Marietta, GA 30066 10550 Talbert Avenue
"WARNING". (800) 633-5151 P.O.Box 20850
If, after reading this manual, you Fountain Valley,
have any questions regarding the South Central Region: Alabama, California 92728-0850
operation of your vehicle, please Arkansas, Louisiana, Mississippi, (800) 633-5151
contact your nearest Hyundai Motor New Mexico, Oklahoma, Tennessee,
America Regional Office as listed in Texas.
the following:
South Central Region
1421 South Beltline Road,
Suite 400 Coppell, TX 75019
(800) 633-5151
8 11
REPORTING SAFETY
DEFECTS
If you believe that your vehicle has a
defect which could cause a crash or
could cause injury or death, you
should immediately inform the
National Highway Traffic Safety
Administration (NHTSA) in addition
to notifying HYUNDAI MOTOR
AMERICA. If NHTSA receives similar
complaints, it may open an investiga-
tion, and if it finds that a safety defect
exists in a group of vehicles, it may
order a recall and remedy campaign.
However, NHTSA cannot become
involved in individual problems
between you, your dealer, or
HYUNDAI MOTOR AMERICA.
To contact NHTSA, you may call the
Vehicle Safety Hotline toll-free at 1-
888-327-4236 (TTY: 1-800-424-
9153); go to http://www.safercar.gov;
or write to: Administrator, NHTSA,
1200 New Jersey Avenue, SE., West
Buliding Washington, DC 20590 You
can also obtain other information
about motor vehicle safety from
http://www.safercar.gov.
8 12
Index
I
Index
A Appearance care..............................................................7-82
Exterior care ................................................................7-82
A/V Mode ......................................................................4-86 Interior care ................................................................7-87
Active ECO system ......................................................5-100 Armrest (Rear seat) ........................................................3-20
Adaptive Front Lighting System (AFLS) ....................4-136 Audio system ................................................................4-182
Additional safety precautions ........................................3-74 Antenna......................................................................4-182
Advanced smart cruise control system ..........................5-72 Steering wheel audio control ....................................4-182
Air bag ............................................................................3-47 AUTO light position ....................................................4-129
Air bag collision sensors ............................................3-68 Automatic climate control system ................................4-157
Air bag inflation conditions ........................................3-69 Automatic heating and air conditioning....................4-158
Air bag non-inflation conditions ................................3-71 Manual heating and air conditioning ........................4-159
Air bag Hazards ............................................................3-2 Auto hold ........................................................................5-40
Air bag warning label..................................................3-75 Automatic emergency braking (AEB) ............................5-56
Air bag warning light ..................................................3-50 Automatic transaxle ........................................................5-14
Curtain air bag ............................................................3-66 Manual shift mode ......................................................5-17
Driver's and passenger's front air bag ........................3-60 Shift-lock override ......................................................5-18
Occupant classification system ..................................3-54 Automatic turn off function ..........................................4-141
Side air bag..................................................................3-65
Aux, USB and iPod® port ............................................4-176
SRS Care ....................................................................3-73
SRS components and functions ..................................3-51
Air cleaner ......................................................................7-34
Air Conditioning refrigerant label ................................4-156
Air conditioning system....................................................8-5
All wheel drive (AWD) ..................................................5-21
Antenna ........................................................................4-182
Anti-lock brake system (ABS) ......................................5-43
I 2
Index
B C
Battery ............................................................................7-41 California perchlorate notice ..........................................7-93
Battery saver function ..................................................4-127 Camera (Rear view) ......................................................4-124
Before driving ..................................................................5-3 Capacities (Lubricants) ....................................................8-6
Blind spot detection system (BSD) ................................5-88 Care
Blind spot mirror ............................................................4-78 Exterior care ................................................................7-82
Bottle holder, see cup holder ........................................4-172 Interior care ................................................................7-87
Brake fluid ......................................................................7-31 Tire care ......................................................................7-44
Brake system ..................................................................5-30 Care of seat belts ............................................................3-37
Anti-lock brake system (ABS) ....................................5-43 Cargo security screen....................................................4-177
Auto hold ....................................................................5-40 Center console storage ..................................................4-169
Downhill brake control (DBC)....................................5-51 Central door lock switch ................................................4-23
Electronic parking brake (EPB) ..................................5-34 Certification label ............................................................8-9
Electronic stability control (ESC) ..............................5-46 Chain, See Tire chains ..................................................5-110
Emergency braking......................................................5-39 Checking the tire inflation pressure................................7-45
Hill-start assist control (HAC) ..................................5-53 Child restraint system ....................................................3-38
Parking brake ..............................................................5-32 Lower anchor ..............................................................3-45
Power brakes ..............................................................5-30 Tether Anchor ..............................................................3-43
Vehicle stability management (VSM) ........................5-50 Child-protector rear door lock ........................................4-25
Bulb replacement ............................................................7-73 Climate control air filter......................................4-155, 7-36
Bulb wattage ....................................................................8-3 Clothes hanger ..............................................................4-175
Button start/stop, see Engine start/stop button ................5-9 Combined instrument, see Instrument cluster ................4-79
Compact spare tire ..........................................................6-15
Consumer information ....................................................8-11
Coolant, see Engine coolant ..........................................7-28
Crankcase emission control system ................................7-89
I 3
Index
Cruise control system ....................................................5-67 Driver's and passenger's front air bag ............................3-60
Cup holder ....................................................................4-172 Driving at night ............................................................5-105
Curtain air bag ................................................................3-66 Driving in flooded areas ..............................................5-107
Driving in the rain ........................................................5-106
D Driving off-road ............................................................5-107
Dashboard illumination, see Instrument cluster E

illumination..................................................................4-79
Dashboard, see Instrument cluster..................................4-79 Economical operation ..................................................5-101
Day/night rearview mirror ..............................................4-60 Electric Chromic Mirror (ECM) ....................................4-61
Daytime running light ..................................................4-128 Electric Chromic Mirror (ECM) with compass..............4-61
Defogging (Windshield) ..............................................4-165 Electric power steering (EPS) ........................................4-56
Defroster (Rear window) ..............................................4-145 Electronic parking brake (EPB)......................................5-34
Defrosting (Windshield) ..............................................4-165 Electronic stability control (ESC) ..................................5-46
Dimensions ......................................................................8-2 Emergency braking ........................................................5-39
Display illumination, see Instrument cluster Emergency liftgate (tailgate) safety release....................4-38
illumination..................................................................4-79 Emergency starting ..........................................................6-5
Door locks ......................................................................4-21 Jump starting ................................................................6-5
Central door lock switch ............................................4-23 Emergency towing ..........................................................6-26
Child-protector rear door lock ....................................4-25 Emergency towing precautions ......................................6-28
Downhill brake control (DBC) ......................................5-51 Emission control system ................................................7-89
Drink holder, see Cup holder........................................4-172 Crankcase emission control system ............................7-89
Drive assist system ......................................................4-120 Evaporative emission control system..........................7-90
Drive mode integrated control system............................5-28 Exhaust emission control system ................................7-90
Driver Distraction ............................................................3-2 Engine ..............................................................................8-2
Driver position memory system (for power seat) ..........3-15 Engine compartment ........................................................2-7
Engine coolant ................................................................7-28
I 4
Index
Engine number................................................................8-10 Front wiper deicer ........................................................4-146

Engine oil........................................................................7-26 Fuel Economy ..............................................................4-103
Engine overheat ................................................................6-8 Fuel filler door ................................................................4-46
Engine start/stop button ....................................................5-9 Fuel filler door manual release....................................4-49
Engine will no start ..........................................................6-4 Fuel gauge ......................................................................4-82
Explanation of scheduled maintenance items ................7-23 Fuel requirements ............................................................1-2
Interior care ....................................................................7-87 Fuses switch....................................................................7-62
Exterior features............................................................4-180 Fuses ..............................................................................7-60
Exterior overview (front) ..................................................2-2 Engine compartment panel fuse ..................................7-62
Exterior overview (rear) ..................................................2-3 Fuse/relay panel description........................................7-64
Fuses switch ................................................................7-62
F Instrument panel fuse ..................................................7-61
Multi fuse ....................................................................7-63
Flat tire (with spare tire) ................................................6-15
Changing tires..............................................................6-18 G
Compact spare tire ......................................................6-22
Jack and tools ..............................................................6-15 Gauges ............................................................................4-80
Jack label ....................................................................6-24 Glove box......................................................................4-169
Floor mat anchor(s) ......................................................4-175 Good braking practices ..................................................5-54
Fluid Good driving practices....................................................5-19
Brake fluid ..................................................................7-31 Gross vehicle weight ........................................................8-5
Washer fluid ................................................................7-33
Folding key ......................................................................4-4
Folding the rear seat ......................................................3-22
Front fog light ..............................................................4-132
Front seat adjustment - Manual ........................................3-7
Front seat adjustment - Power ..........................................3-8
I 5
Index
H I
Hazard warning flasher ........................................4-126, 6-2 Immobilizer system ..........................................................4-8
Hazardous driving conditions ......................................5-103 Indicator Lights ............................................................4-115
Headlamp welcome ......................................................4-144 Inside rearview mirror ....................................................4-60
Headlight (Headlamp) escort function, Instrument cluster ..........................................................4-79
see Headlamp delay ..................................................4-127 Gauges ........................................................................4-80
Headlight bulb replacement ............................................7-73 Instrument cluster illumination ..................................4-79
Headlight position ........................................................4-130 LCD Display Control ..................................................4-84
Headrest (Front) ..............................................................3/10 Transaxle Shift Indicator ............................................4-83
Headrest (Rear) ..............................................................3/18 Instrument panel fuse......................................................7-61
Heated steering wheel ....................................................4-58 Instrument panel overview ..............................................2-6
High beam operation ....................................................4-130 Interior care ................................................................7-87
Highway driving ..........................................................5-107 Interior features ............................................................4-172
Hill-start assist control (HAC)........................................5-53 Aux, USB and iPod® port ........................................4-176
Hood................................................................................4-44 Cargo security screen ..............................................4-177
Horn ................................................................................4-58 Clothes hanger ..........................................................4-175
How to use this manual ....................................................1-2 Cup holder ................................................................4-172
Floor mat anchor(s) ..................................................4-175
Luggage net (holder) ................................................4-176
Power outlet ..............................................................4-173
Side curtain................................................................4-179
Sunvisor ....................................................................4-173
I 6
Index
Interior light ..................................................................4-141 L

Automatic turn off function ......................................4-141
Luggage room lamp ..................................................4-143 Label
Map lamp ..................................................................4-141 Air bag warning label..................................................3-75
Room lamp ................................................................4-142 Air Conditioning refrigerant label ............................4-156
Vanity mirror lamp ....................................................4-143 Refrigerant label ..........................................................8-10
Interior light welcome ..................................................4-144 Tire sidewall labeling ..................................................7-50
Interior overview ..............................................................2-4 Tire specification and pressure label ..........................8-10
Vehicle certification label..............................................8-9
Lane departure warning system (LDWS) ......................5-96
J LCD display....................................................................4-84
Jack and tools..................................................................6-15 A/V Mode....................................................................4-86
Jump starting ....................................................................6-5 LCD Display Control ..................................................4-84
LCD Modes ................................................................4-84
SCC/LDWS Mode ......................................................4-85
K Service Mode ..............................................................4-86
Keys Trip Computer Mode ..................................................4-85
Folding key. ..................................................................4-4 Turn By Turn (TBT) Mode ........................................4-85
Immobilizer system..............................................4-8, 4-14 User Settings Mode ....................................................4-87
Smart key ....................................................................4-10 Warning Messages ......................................................4-93
Liftgate (tailgate) ............................................................4-26
Light bulbs ......................................................................7-72
I 7
Index
Lighting ........................................................................4-127 M
AUTO light position..................................................4-129
Adaptive Front Lighting System (AFLS) ................4-136 Maintenance......................................................................7-4
Battery saver function ..............................................4-127 Explanation of scheduled maintenance items ............7-23
Daytime running light ..............................................4-128 Maintenance services ....................................................7-4
Front fog light............................................................4-132 Owner maintenance ......................................................7-6
Headlight (Headlamp) escort function ......................4-127 Scheduled maintenance service ....................................7-8
Headlight position ....................................................4-130 Tire maintenance ........................................................7-50
High beam operation ................................................4-130 Maintenance schedule ......................................................7-8
Parking light position ................................................4-129 Maintenance services ........................................................7-4
Smart high beam........................................................4-133 Manual climate control system ....................................4-147
Turn signals ..............................................................4-131 Air conditioning ........................................................4-153
Low aspect ratio tire ......................................................7-59 Climate control air filter............................................4-155
Lower anchor system ......................................................3-45 Heating and air conditioning ....................................4-148
Lubricants and capacities..................................................8-6 Map lamp ......................................................................4-141
Luggage net (holder) ....................................................4-176 Mirrors ............................................................................4-60
Luggage room lamp ......................................................4-143 Blind spot mirror ........................................................4-78
Luggage tray ................................................................4-171 Blue Link® center ........................................................4-60
Luggage volume ..............................................................8-5 Day/night rearview mirror ..........................................4-60
Electric Chromic Mirror (ECM) ................................4-61
Electric Chromic Mirror (ECM) with compass ..........4-61
Inside rearview mirror ................................................4-60
Programming HomeLink® ..........................................4-65
Side view mirror..........................................................4-76
Moonroof, see Panoramic sunroof..................................4-50
Multi box ......................................................................4-170
Multi-view Camera System ..........................................4-125
Multi fuse........................................................................7-63
I 8
Index
O R
Occupant classification system ......................................3-54 RCTA (Rear Cross Traffic Alert)....................................5-92
Odometer ........................................................................4-82 Rear parking assist system............................................4-120
Oil (Engine) ....................................................................7-26 Rear seat adjustment ......................................................3-17
Outside temperature gauge ............................................4-83 Rear view camera ........................................................4-124
Overheat............................................................................6-8 Rear window wiper and washer switch ........................4-140
Owner maintenance ..........................................................7-6 Recommended cold tire inflation pressures ..................7-44
Recommended lubricants and capacities ..........................8-6
P Recommended SAE viscosity number..........................8-8
Reducing the risk of a rollover ....................................5-103
Panoramic sunroof ..........................................................4-50 Refrigerant label ............................................................8-10
Parking brake ........................................................5-32, 7-33 Replacement light bulb ..................................................7-73
Parking light position....................................................4-129 Reporting safety defects ................................................8-12
Passenger's front air bag ................................................3-60 Road warning....................................................................6-2
Power brakes ..................................................................5-30 Rocking the vehicle ......................................................5-104
Power liftgate (Power tailgate) ......................................4-28 Roof rack ......................................................................4-180
Power outlet ..................................................................4-173 Room lamp....................................................................4-142
Power steering ................................................................4-56 Rotation (Tire) ................................................................7-46
Power windows ..............................................................4-40
Pre-tensioner seat belt ....................................................3-31 S
Programming HomeLink® ..............................................4-65
Puddle lamp and pocket lamp ......................................4-144 Scheduled maintenance service ........................................7-8
Push-starting ....................................................................6-7 Seat belt precautions ......................................................3-34
Seat belt warning ............................................................3-27
I 9
Index
Seat belts ........................................................................3-26 Smart High Beam ........................................................4-133

Care of seat belts ........................................................3-37 Smart key ........................................................................4-10
Height adjustment (Front) ..........................................3-29 Smart Liftgate (Smart Tailgate) ......................................4-34
Pre-tensioner seat belt ................................................3-31 Smooth cornering..........................................................5-105
Seat belt precautions....................................................3-34 Snow tires ....................................................................5-109
Seat belt warning ........................................................3-27 Spare tire
Seat warmer (Front) ........................................................3-12 Changing tires..............................................................6-18
Seat warmer (Rear) ........................................................3-20 Removing and storing the spare tire ..........................6-16
Seatback pocket ..............................................................3-14 Special driving conditions ............................................5-103
Seats ..................................................................................3-4 Driving at night ........................................................5-105
Air ventilation seat ......................................................3-13 Driving in flooded areas............................................5-107
Armrest (Rear seat) ....................................................3-20 Driving in the rain ....................................................5-106
Driver position memory system (for power seat) ......3-15 Driving off-road ........................................................5-107
Folding the rear seat ....................................................3-22 Hazardous driving conditions....................................5-103
Front seat adjustment - Manual ....................................3-7 Highway driving........................................................5-107
Front seat adjustment - Power ......................................3-8 Reducing the risk of a rollover..................................5-103
Headrest (Front) ..........................................................3-10 Rocking the vehicle ..................................................5-104
Headrest (Rear)............................................................3-18 Smooth cornering ......................................................5-105
Rear seat adjustment....................................................3-17 Speedometer....................................................................4-80
Seat warmer (Front) ....................................................3-12 Digital Speedometer ..................................................4-105
Seat warmer (Rear)......................................................3-20 SRS components and functions ......................................3-51
Seatback pocket ..........................................................3-14 Starting difficulties, see engine will not start ..................6-4
Service Mode ..................................................................4-86 Steering wheel ................................................................4-56
Shift-lock override ..........................................................5-18 Electric power steering (EPS) ....................................4-56
Side air bag ....................................................................3-65 Heated steering wheel ................................................4-58
Side curtain ..................................................................4-179 Horn ............................................................................4-58
Side view mirrors............................................................4-76 Tilt steering..................................................................4-57
Steering wheel audio control ........................................4-182
I 10
Index
Storage compartments ..................................................4-169 Tires and wheels ......................................................7-44, 8-4

Center console storage ..............................................4-169 All season tires ............................................................7-57
Glove box ..................................................................4-169 Checking tire inflation pressure ..................................7-45
Luggage tray..............................................................4-171 Low aspect ratio tire....................................................7-59
Multi box ..................................................................4-170 Radial-ply tires ............................................................7-58
Sunglass holder..........................................................4-170 Recommended cold tire inflation pressures ................7-44
Sunglass holder ............................................................4-170 Snow tires ....................................................................7-57
Sunroof, see Panoramic sunroof ....................................4-50 Summer tires................................................................7-57
Sunvisor ........................................................................4-173 Tire care ......................................................................7-44
Tire chains ..................................................................7-57
T Tire maintenance ........................................................7-50
Tire replacement ..........................................................7-48
Tachometer......................................................................4-81 Tire rotation ................................................................7-46
Tether anchor system ......................................................3-43 Tire sidewall labeling ..................................................7-50
Theft-alarm stage ............................................................4-19 Tire terminology and definitions ................................7-54
Theft-alarm system ........................................................4-17 Tire traction ................................................................7-49
Tilt steering ....................................................................4-57 Wheel alignment and tire balance ..............................7-47
Tire chains ....................................................................5-110 Wheel replacement ......................................................7-49
Tire maintenance ............................................................7-50 Towing ............................................................................6-25
Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) ......................6-9 Trailer Towing ..............................................................5-114
Tire replacement ............................................................7-48 Transaxle Shift Indicator ................................................4-83
Tire rotation ....................................................................7-46 Trip A/B ........................................................................4-104
Tire sidewall labeling......................................................7-50 Trip computer................................................................4-102
Tire specification and pressure label ..............................8-10 Fuel Economy............................................................4-103
Tire traction ....................................................................7-49 Trip A/B ....................................................................4-104
Turn By Turn (TBT) Mode ............................................4-85
Turn signals ..................................................................4-131
I 11
Index
Wheel alignment and tire balance ..................................7-47
U Wheel replacement ........................................................7-49
User Settings Mode ........................................................4-87 Windows ........................................................................4-39
Power window lock button..........................................4-42
V Windshield defrosting and defogging ..........................4-165
Windshield washers (Front)..........................................4-139
Vanity mirror lamp........................................................4-143 Windshield wipers (Front) ............................................4-137
Vehicle break-in process ..................................................1-6 Winter driving ..............................................................5-109
Vehicle certification label ................................................8-9 Snow tires ..................................................................5-109
Vehicle curb weight ......................................................5-128 Tire chains ..................................................................7-57
Vehicle data collection and event data recorders..............1-7 Wiper blades ..................................................................7-38
Vehicle handling instructions............................................1-6 Wipers and washers ......................................................4-137
Vehicle identification number (VIN) ................................8-9 Rear window wiper and washer switch ....................4-140
Vehicle load limit ..........................................................5-123 Windshield washers (Front) ......................................4-139
Vehicle stability management (VSM) ............................5-50 Windshield wipers (Front) ........................................4-137
Vehicle weight ..............................................................5-128
W
Warning lights ..............................................................4-107
Warning Messages ..........................................................4-93
Washer fluid ....................................................................7-33
Welcome system ..........................................................4-144
Headlamp welcome ..................................................4-144
Interior light ..............................................................4-144
Puddle lamp and pocket lamp ..................................4-144
I 12

2017 Hyundai SantaFe Sport OM

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

2017 Hyundai SantaFe Sport OM

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

OWNER'S MANUAL

All information in this Owner's Manual is current at the time of pub-

This manual applies to all of this vehicle and includes descriptions

TWO-WAY RADIO OR CELLULAR CAUTION

Hyundai Motor America/Phoenix

HYUNDAI MOTOR AMERICA

A100A01L A100A02L A100A04L

Your vehicle at a glance 2

Safety features of your vehicle 3

Features of your vehicle

Specifications, Consumer information and Reporting safety defects 8

How to use this manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2 1

HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL FUEL REQUIREMENTS

Gasoline containing alcohol or ✽ NOTICE Other fuels

Gasoline containing MMT Do not use methanol Fuel Additives

Operation in foreign countries

VEHICLE BREAK-IN PROCESS VEHICLE HANDLING

VEHICLE DATA COLLECTION AND EVENT DATA RECORDERS

Exterior overview .I. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2

❈ The actual shape may differ from the illustration.

❈ The actual shape may differ from the illustration.

INTERIOR OVERVIEW (I)

1. Inside door handle...............................4-23

❈ The actual shape may differ from the illustration.

INTERIOR OVERVIEW (II)

❈ The actual shape may differ from the illustration.

INSTRUMENT PANEL OVERVIEW

1. Lighting control lever ........................4-127

❈ The actual shape may differ from the illustration.

■ Gasoline 2.4L GDI

1. Engine coolant reservoir....................7-29

❈ The actual shape may differ from the illustration.

■ Gasoline 2.0L TURBO GDI

1. Engine coolant reservoir....................7-29

❈ The actual shape may differ from the illustration.

IMPORTANT SAFETY PRECAUTIONS

WARNING - Loose WARNING - Driver WARNING - Driver’s seat

WARNING - Rear (Continued) WARNING

Front seat adjustment - Manual Seatback angle Seat cushion height

Lumbar support (for driver’s seat) Front seat adjustment - Power

OANNSA2011 OANNSA2012 OANNSA2013

Lumbar support Headrest

OANNSA2015 OANNSA2016 OYFH034205

Seat warmer (if equipped) With the ignition switch in the ON

1. Raise it as far as it can go then

The seat warmer is provided to warm

Air ventilation seat (if equipped)

Driver position memory system

A driver position memory system is

Storing positions into memory Recalling positions from memory

Easy access function Rear seat adjustment Seatback angle

Headrest (for rear seat)

OFF → HIGH( ) → LOW( )

WARNING WARNING CAUTION

Folding the rear seat

Rear seat folding from the liftgate

To fold down the rear center seat-

When you return the seatback to its

WARNING - Uprighting WARNING - Cargo WARNING - Cargo loading

CAUTION - Rear seat

Seat belt warning (for driver’s seat)

Height adjustment (Front) To raise the height adjuster, pull it up

Pre-tensioner seat belt (1) Retractor Pretensioner